B.A. Part I, II and III 49663-2021

ORDINANCES
AND
OUTLINES OF TESTS,
SYLLABI AND COURSES OF READING
FOR
BACHELOR OF ARTS PART-I
(B.A.-I)
(2021-22)
UNDER CREDIT BASED SEMESTER SYSTEM
General Shivdev Singh Diwan Gurbachan Singh
KHALSA COLLEGE PATIALA

An Autonomous College
NAAC Accredited 'A' Grade
College with Potential for Excellence Status by UGC
E-mail: [email protected]
Website: www.khalsacollegepatiala.org
I
Preamble:
General Shivdev Singh Diwan Gurbachan Singh Khalsa College Patiala, accredited 'A' grade by
NAAC (2015), recognized as "College with Potential for Excellence" status by UGC, New Delhi (2016)
and an Autonomous College (2016), is a premier institute of higher education in the state of Punjab
since 1960. Being concordant with the need to the creation of a self-sustaining, global knowledge
society, the college has undertaken several measures initiated by UGC to bring equity, efficiency and
excellence in the Higher Education System of the country.
The important measures taken to enhance academic standards and quality in higher
education include innovation and improvements in curriculum, teaching-learning process,
examination and evaluation system, besides governance and other matters.
The UGC has formulated various regulations and guidelines from time to time to improve
the higher education system and maintain minimum standards and quality across the Higher
Educational Institutions in India. The academic reforms recommended by the UGC in the recent
past have led to overall improvement in the higher education system. However, due to lot of diversity
in the system of higher education, there are multiple approaches followed by Higher Educational
Institutions towards examination, evaluation and grading system. While the Higher Educational
Institutions must have the flexibility and freedom in designing the examination and evaluation
methods that best fits the curriculum, syllabi and teaching–learning methods, there is a need to
devise a sensible system for awarding the grades based on the performance of students. Presently,
the performance of the students is reported using the conventional system of marks secured in the
examinations or grades or both. Then there is conversion from marks to letter grades as the letter
grades are used widely across the Higher Educational Institutions in the country. This creates
difficulty for the academia and the employers to understand and infer the performance of the
students graduating from different universities and colleges based on grades.
The grading system is considered to be better than the conventional marks system and hence,
it has been followed in the top institutions in India and abroad. So, it is desirable to introduce uniform
grading system. This will facilitate student mobility across institutions within and across countries and
will also enable potential employers to assess the performance of students. To bring in the desired
uniformity in grading system and method for computing the cumulative grade point average
(CGPA) based on the performance of students in the examinations, the UGC has formulated CBSS
guidelines.
DEFINITIONS
a. Academic Year: Two consecutive (one odd + one even) semesters constitute one academic year.
b. Course: Usually referred to, as ‘papers’ is a component of a programme. All courses need not carry
the same weight. The courses should define learning objectives and learning outcomes. A course may
be designed to comprise lectures/tutorials/laboratory work/field work/outreach activities/ project
work/vocational training/viva/seminars/term papers /assignments/ presentations/self study etc. or
a combination of some of these.
c. Credit Based Semester System (CBSS): Under the CBSS, the requirement for awarding a degree or
diploma or certificate is prescribed in terms of number of credits to be completed by the students.
d. Credit Point (CP): The numerical value obtained by multiplying the grade point (GP) by
the no. of credit(C) of the respective course i.e. CP= GP X C.
II
e. Credit(C): A unit by which the course work is measured. It determines the number of hours of
instructions required per week. One credit is equivalent to one hour of teaching (lecture or tutorial)
or two hours of practical work/field work per week, i.e. a course with assigned L-T-P: 3-0-2 or 3-1-0
will be equivalent to 4 credits weight-age course.
f. Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA): It is a measure of overall cumulative performance of a
student over all semesters. The CGPA is the ratio of total credit points secured by a student in various
courses in all semesters and the sum of the total credits of all courses in all the semesters. It is
expressed up to two decimal places.
g. Grade Point (GP): It is a numerical weight allotted to each letter grade on a 10 point scale.
h. Letter Grade: It is an index of the performance of students in a said course. Grades are denoted by
letters O, A+, A, B+, B, C, P and F.
i. Programme: An educational programme leading to award of a degree, diploma or certificate.
j. Semester Grade point Average (SGPA): It is a measure of performance of work done in a semester.
It is ratio of total credit points (CPs) secured by a student in various courses registered in a
semester and the total course credits taken during that semester. It shall be expressed upto two
decimal places.
k. Semester: Each semester will consist of 15-18 weeks of academic work equivalent to 90 actual
teaching days. The odd semester may be scheduled from July to December and even semester from
January to June.
l. Transcript or Grade Card (GC) or Certificate: Based on the grades earned, a grade certificate shall
be issued to all the registered students after every semester. The grade certificate will display the
course details (code, title, no. of credits, grades secured) along with SGPA of that semester and CGPA
earned till date semester.
m. Semester Examinations: The comprehensive examinations conducted for summative evaluation of
course. The duration of these examinations shall be 3 and 4 hours for theory and practical courses
respectively; and the weight shall be as per the ordinance of relevant programme.
n. L-T-P: The prescribed hours/week during a semester for Lecture-Tutorial-Practical to a particular
course, in accordance with curriculum prescriptions based on respective nature.
III
ORDINANCES FOR BACHELOR OF ARTS

Applicability of Ordinances for the time being in force.
Notwithstanding the integrated nature of a course spread over more than one academic year, the
Ordinances in force at the time a student joins a course shall hold good only for the examination held
during or at the end of the academic year. Nothing in these Ordinances shall be deemed to debar the
College from amending the ordinances subsequently and the amended ordinances, if any, shall apply
to all the students whether old or new.
1. B.A. is an integrated course comprising o f three parts spread over three years. Each part will
consist of two semesters. The course of study of B.A. shall be divided in six semesters and the final
examination will be held at the end of every semester in the months of November/December (for
semester I,III &V) and April/May (for semester II, IV & VI) or as fixed by the College.
2. The examination in B.A. Part-I shall be open to a student who produces the following certificates
to the Principal of the college.
(i) has passed 10+2 examination of the Punjab School Education Board, C.B.S.E. or any other
Board Examination recognized as equivalent thereto.
Note: Candidate placed under reappear in one or more subjects in 10+2 examination or any other
examination, recognized as equivalent thereto shall not be eligible for admission to B.A Part-I Course.
(ii) of having remained on the rolls of a School/college admitted to the privileges of the College
for the academic year preceding the examinations.
(iii) of having good character.
(iv) Subject to the restrictions contained in the Ordinances, a candidate for B.A. +3 Scheme shall
be required to take up the following subjects from B.A. I (Semester- 1) consistently in B.A. II
and B.A. III.
Besides English (Communication Skills) and Punjabi Compulsory/Elementary Punjabi (Mudhla Gian),
a student can take up the combination of required three elective subjects, taking up one subject from
a group, out of following groups of elective subjects:
a. Defence & Strategic Studies/ Economics /Fine Arts/Folk Art and Culture/Functional
English/Religious Studies/Sociology.
b. Punjabi Literature/Hindi Literature/English Literature
c. History/Math/Psychology/Theater Studies
d. Political Science/Home Science/Physical Education/Music (Instrumental)/Public
Administration.
e. Computer Applications /Geography/Music (Vocal) /Information Technology/Gurmat Sangeet.
Note:
a. Candidate has to pass papers of Drug Abuse in B.A. Part I (2nd Semester) as qualifying paper
and paper of Environment and road safety awareness in B.A.Part II ( 3 rd Semester) as
compulsory paper.
b. English Literature is not compulsory for those candidates who take the subject of Functional
English.
c. Candidate can take maximum two elective subjects having practicals.
d. The students of B.A. Sem-I class is allowed to change subjects within a period of 3 weeks from
the date of their admission.
IV
e. No candidate for B.A. Sem- I examination shall take up the subject of Mathematics if he has
not taken up the subjects in +2 examination.
(v) A student will produce proof for opting Elementary Punjabi. This can be opted only under the
following conditions:
(a)Those students who have passed their Matric Examination outside the State of Punjab and have
not opted for Punjabi Subject.
(b) Wards of Defense Personnel/Para-Military Personnel can opt for Elementary Punjabi.
(c)Children of NRI, NRE and Foreign Students.
2.1 To qualify for admission to 3rd semester of the course, the candidate must have passed 50% of
total papers of the two semesters of the 1st year. In case, the result of 2nd semester is not declared
at the time of admission to 3rd semester, the student may be admitted provisionally and will be
allowed to take examination of 3 rd semester if he/she has passed in 50% of the total papers of
first year (i.e. 1st and 2nd semester). Similarly, to qualify for admission to 5 th semester of the
course, the student may be admitted provisionally if the result of the previous semester has not
been declared and will be allowed to take examination of 5 th semester, if he/she has passed 50%
of the total papers of previous semesters.
2.2 A student who joins B.A. Part II course after having passed B.A. Part I or any other Equivalent
examination from any other statutory University shall be required to qualify all the deficient
papers as decided by the institution for B.A. Part I examination along with Part II examination.
A student who joins B.A. Part III course after having passed B.A. Part II or any other equivalent
examination from any other statutory University shall be required to qualify all the deficient
paper as decided by the institution for B.A. Part I and Part II examination along with Part III
examination. However, Mid Semester migration will not be allowed.
3 A candidate must complete and pass the whole course of three years within a maximum of six
years from the date of admission in B.A. First semester. If the candidate does not clear the lower
examination within stipulated period, the higher result of the candidate will stand automatically
cancelled.
4 Semester examination will be open to regular candidates who have been on the rolls of the
college and meet the attendance and other requirements as prescribed in the ordinances of the
course.
5 Examination Rules
5.1 Paper Setting/Evaluation will be done by an External Examiner or as decided by the Examination
Cell.
5.2 Viva Voce/ Practical examination shall be conducted by a Committee consisting of the following:
(i) One external examiner
(ii) One internal examiner
5.3 The supplementary examination will be held along with the routine End Semester Tests. The
supplementary paper would be from the syllabi prescribed for that session in which the
candidate is appearing. The student can appear in the theory/practical paper on the payment of
the required fee. The candidate will have consecutive two attempts to clear the Supplementary
Examination, marks of practical and internal assessment will be carried forward as original.
5.4 Re-evaluation of answer sheet in two subjects is allowed after paying the requisite fee. The
application for Re-evaluation should be submitted within 15 days of the declaration of the
V
results. In case there is a difference of more than 10% between the marking of the first evaluator
and the second evaluator, then the paper would be sent to a t hird e valuator. The mean
of the marks of the second and third evaluators is then considered as the final marks. The re-
evaluated marks will be considered final irrespective of the increase or decrease in marks.
5.5 A Candidate placed under reappear in any paper, will be allowed two chances to clear the
reappear, which should be availed within consecutive two year/chances i.e. to pass in a paper
the candidate will have a total of three chances, one as regular student and two as reappear
candidate.
5.6 The examination of reappear papers of odd semester will be held with regular examination of
the odd semester and reappear examination in even semester with the even semester. But if a
candidate is placed under reappear in the last semester of the course, he/she will be provided
chance to pass the reappear with the examination of the next semester, provided his/her
reappear of lower semester does not go beyond next semester.
5.7 The students who have reappear in the Vth semester only of t hree y ear d egree c ourse at
undergraduate level, will be allowed to appear in their Reappear examination along with the
Final Semester Examinations of their respective courses.
5.8 The Principal can provide Golden Chance (with special chance fee) to students who have
been unable to clear their exams even after two attempts.
5.9 IMPROVEMENT EXAMINATIONS:
I. A student who has been declared ‘pass’ in the Undergraduate course he/she was
admitted to, may apply for improvement within a year from the declaration of the result of
the final semester and he/she can take maximum of 50% of the total papers for that course for
improvement.
II. A student shall have to appear in End semester examination of the paper chosen for
improvement along with the regular students. No special exam shall be held for him/her.
III. If a student fails to improve upon the original marks obtained in the paper chosen for
improvement, his/her original marks shall be retained and he/she shall not get a second chance
for improvement.
IV. Improvement examination in practical/MST paper shall not be allowed.
V. A student taking improvement examination shall have to pay a fee decided by the college.
VI
5.10 Grading System:

The grades and their description, along with equivalent numerical grade points are listed
in the Grading Assignment Table below:
Grade Assignment Table
Range of Marks Description Grade Grade Point

91-100 Outstanding O 10
81-90 Excellent A+ 9
71-80 Very Good A 8
61-70 Good B+ 7
51-60 Above Average B 6
41-50 Average C 5
35-40 Pass/Fair P 4
0-34 Fail F 0
Otherwise Absent/Detained Ab/D 0
a. A student obtaining Grade F shall be considered failed and will be required to reappear in the
examination.
b. For non credit courses ‘Satisfactory’ or ‘Unsatisfactory’ shall be indicated instead of the
letter grade and this will not be counted for the computation of SGPA/CGPA.
5.11 Computation of SGPA and CGPA

The UGC recommends the following procedure to compute the Semester Grade Point Average
(SGPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA):
a. The SGPA is the ratio of sum of the product of the number of credits with the grade points
scored by a student in all the courses taken by a student and the sum of the number of credits
of all the courses undergone by a student, i.e.
SGPA (Si) = ∑(Earned Credits Ci x Grade Point Gi)/∑Earned Credits Ci;
Where Ci is the number of credits of the ith course and Gi is the Grade Point Scored by the
student in the ith course.
b. The CGPA is also calculated in the same manner taking into account all the courses
undergone by a student over all the semesters of a programme, i.e.
CGPA (Ci) = ∑(Earned Credits Ci x SGPA Si)/∑Ci);
Where Si is the SGPA of the ith semesters and Ci is the total number of credits in that
semester.
c. The SGPA and CGPA shall be rounded off to 2 decimal points and reported in the transcripts.
Illustration of the computation of SGPA and CGPA and Format for Transcripts
VII
i. Computation of SGPA and CGPA

Illustration for SGPA
Course Credits Grade Grade Credit Point

Letter Point (Credit x Grade)
Course 1 3 A 8 3 X 8 = 24
Course 2 4 B+ 7 4 X 7 = 28
Course 3 3 B 6 3 X 6 = 18
Course 4 3 O 10 3 X 10 = 30
Course 5 3 C 5 3 X 5 = 15
Course 6 4 B 6 4 X 6 = 24
20 139
Thus, SGPA = 139/20 = 6.95
Illustration for CGPA
Semester 1 Semester 2 Semester 3 Semester 4
Credit : 20 Credit : 22 Credit : 25 Credit : 26
SGPA : 6.9 SGPA : 7.8 SGPA : 5.6 SGPA : 60
Semester 5 Semester 6
Credit : 26 Credit : 25
SGPA : 6.3 SGPA : 8.0
Thus, CGPA = 20 x 6.9 + 22 x 7.8 + 25 x5.6 +26 X 6.0 + 26 x 6.3 +25 x 8.0 = 6 . 7 3
144
ii. Transcripts (Format):
Based on the above recommendations on Letter grades, grade points, SGPA and CGPA, the
College may issue the transcript for each semester and a consolidated transcript indicating the
performance in all semesters.
5.12 Division and Position:
Division shall be awarded in the following manner, to the candidates on the basis of their
respective CGPA:
CGPA 7.5 or more 1st Division with Distinction
CGPA 6.0 or more but 1st Division
less than
CGPA 5.0 7.5
or more but 2nd Division
less
CGPA than
3.5 6.0
or more but 3rd Division
less than 5.0
Otherwise Fail
However, First, Second or Third position shall be awarded to the candidates, provided they meet
the following conditions:
a) Rank shall be solely decided on the final CGPA, on completion of degree credit requirement.
b) The candidate has completed all the prescribed requirements, in the prescribed programme
duration.
c) The candidate has passed / secured valid grades in all the prescribed courses, in the first
attempt.
d) No disciplinary action is pending or has ever been lodged against him/her.
e) In case of an exceptional tie, both candidates shall be awarded the same rank.
VIII
5.13 Grade Card:

At the end of each semester, a student will be given a ‘Grade Card’ which will contain Course Code,
Title, Credits, Grades Awarded, Earned Credits and Earned Point secured by him/her in each
course, together with his/her SGPA in that semester. On the completion of the programme, a Final
Grade Card will be issued to the student, giving full semester-wise details about the absolute
marks and grades obtained by him/her in each course together with his/her SGPA and also the
CGPA and Division awarded to him/her.
5.14 Equivalence:
Percentage (P) equivalent to CGPA earned by a candidate may be calculated using the
following formula:
P= CGPA X 10
5.15 MALPRACTICES/UNFAIR MEANS
5.15.1 The following shall be deemed to be unfair means:
I. Leaving the Examination Hall without submitting the answer book to the invigilator or
taking away, tearing off or otherwise disposing off the same or any part thereof.
II. Using abusive language in the examination hall or writing the same in the answer sheet.
III. Making an appeal to the evaluator through answer sheet.
IV. Possession by examinee or having access to books, notes, papers, mobile or any other
electronic material which can prove to be helpful in the exam.
V. Any action on the part of candidate at an examination trying to get undue advantage in
the performance at examinations or trying to help another, or derive the same.
VI. Case of Impersonation in the examination.
VII. Intimidating, threatening, manhandling, using violence, show of force in any form against any
invigilator or any person on duty, creating disturbance to the smooth conduct of the
examination.
VIII. Any other action which the Controller Examination / Chief Controller deem fit to be a case
of UMC.
5.15.2 In case the student is found to have used any of the above Unfair means:
I. His/her answer book shall be seized and He/She will be given a new answer sheet.
II. Invigilator shall submit a detailed report along with the answer book of the student and the
related material, if any, to the Centre Superintendent who will subsequently hand it over to
Controller Examination.
III. Written statement to this effect shall be obtained from the student by the Centre
Superintendent. In case the student refuses to do the same, the fact of refusal must be
recorded.
IV. The student reported to have used unfair means shall be allowed to appear in the
subsequent papers. However, no marks would be awarded for the paper in which unfair
means were used.
V. The Principal shall refer the cases of malpractices in Mid Semester tests, House Tests and End
Semester Examinations, to an Unfair Means Committee, constituted by him/her for the
purpose. Such committee shall follow the approved scales of punishment. The Principal shall
take necessary action, against the erring students based on the recommendations of the
committee.
IX
5.15.3 The involvement of the Staff, who are in charge of conducting examinations, evaluating
examination papers and preparing/keeping records of documents relating to the
examinations if involved in such acts (inclusive of providing incorrect or misleading
information) that infringe upon the course of natural justice to one and all concerned at the
examination shall be viewed seriously and recommended for award of appropriate
punishment after enquiry.
6. Honours
6.1. In addition to B.A. (Pass) examination, a student may opt for Honours in anyone of the subjects
in which syllabus exists, provided he/she has offered that subject in the Pass course.
Provided further that a student can opt for Honours only in a subject, if he/she has obtained
at least 50% marks in that subject in the pass course of B.A. Part- I examination.
6.2. The scheme of study for B.A. (Honours) course shall be as under:
Part - II
In addition to general pass course, there shall be two papers of one credit each in the subject
in which the candidate seeks to get Honours.
Part - III
In addition to general pass course, there shall be two papers of one Credit each in the Honours
subject. One credit paper shall have 100 marks.
6.3. An Additional fee as prescribed shall be paid by a student for appearing in B.A. (Honours) Part-
II and Part-III examination of each Semester.
6.4. The minimum pass marks for the Honours examination shall be 50% in the pass papers of the
subject concerned and 45% in the Honours papers (theory and practical separately) in the
combined results of B.A. Part-II and Part- III examinations taken together and the marks
obtained by the students in B.A. Part- II examination shall be communicated to the Principal
of the College. An Honours list will be prepared in each subject and the same shall be
determined on the combined results of the Pass and Honours papers in that subject.
6.5. A person who has already passed the B.A. examination under these Ordinances may be
permitted to appear in the Honours papers at a single examination or separately with B.A.
Part-II and Part-III examination held in two consecutive years, provided he has attended the
required number of lectures and practicals as provided in Ordinances.
6.6. A candidate opting for Honours in B.A. examination shall submit his admission form as per
schedule of dates in Ordinance 11.
X
7. Attendance Regulations & Condonation:
7.1 A student shall be eligible to appear for end semester examinations, if he/she acquires
a minimum of 75% of attendance in each subject.
7.2 Request to the Principal for Condonation of shortage of attendance after the
recommendation of the HOD will be forwarded to Lecture Shortage Condonation
Committee. The committee can finally condone the shortage in aggregate up to 15% on
medical grounds in each semester.
7.3 Any student representing the Institute/ University/ State/ Nation in any Academic/ Sports/
Cultural/Extra Co curricular/ NSS/NCC or any other event shall be considered on duty. His/
Her shortage of lectures shall be condoned, provided that the student is permitted in writing
by the Principal/HOD concerned and a certificate to this effect signed by the competent
authority where the student attended the event is taken.
7.4 A Student will not be promoted to the next semester unless he/she satisfies the attendance
requirement of the present semester as applicable.
7.5 Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to
take their end semester examination of that particular semester and their registration for
examination shall stand cancelled and no fee shall be refunded.
8. Late college students: A candidate, who has completed the prescribed course of instructions
for a semester but has not appeared in the examination or having appeared, has failed in the
examination, may appear as a late college student within the prescribed period.
9. Applications for admission to the examination shall be made on the prescribed form attested
by the competent authority as per the college rules.
10. Amount of examination fee to be paid by a candidate for each semester shall be as fixed by
the College from time to time.
11. The last date by which examination forms and fees must reach the College Office shall be as
follows.
With late With late With late With late
Without
Semester fee of Rs. fee of fee of Fee of Rs.
late fee
800/- Rs.1200/- Rs.5000/- 10,000
Nov./Dec. (Odd) Sept. 30 Oct.15 Oct. 21 Oct. 31 Nov. 10*
April/May(Even) Feb. 28 March 15 March 21 March 31 April 15*

*Note: No Examination Form will be accepted after the prescribed date.
12. College medal will be awarded to a candidate who secures first position in the College on the
basis of the marks of all the six semesters taken together. The general rules and conditions of
the College/University for the Award of medal/prizes etc. will be applicable in the award of
College medal to the topper of this examination.
13. All the question papers except Punjabi Language Paper and English Language Paper will be set
both in English and Punjabi and candidates can answer the questions either in English or
Punjabi or Hindi.
14. The minimum number of marks required to pass each semester examination will be 35% in
each paper of the semester examination. Provided, that in papers with practicals, the
percentage shall be required separately in written and practical/lab work.
XI
15. Assessment:
15.1 B.A. Course will be run on Credit Based Semester System (CBSS) as described in the
Introduction.
15.2 The Assessment in each semester of B.A. Course will be 30% internal and 70% external for
each Theory paper. The result of the Internal Assessment shall be conveyed to the
examination branch by the Head of the Department according to prescribed schedule.
15.3 There shall be Two Mid Semester tests in each Semester.
15.4 Internal Assessment of 30% will be based on Continuous Comprehensive Assessment (CCA)
pattern and the breakup of 30% will be as under:
(i) Average of Two mid Semester Tests : 40%
(ii) Assignment/Seminar/Class Test/Tutorial/Quiz etc. : 40%
(iii) Attendance : 20%
Papers having practical/viva, the marks of theory and practical/viva will be reduced equally percentage
wise to make room for 30% internal assessment.
Note: If a case comes to notice of Controller of Examinations where the marks awarded by the
Teacher are on a very Higher/Lower side, the award will be got moderated by the following
committee.
I. Paper Evaluator
II. Head of the Department
III. Controller of Examination
15.5 A candidate is required to secure at least 35% marks both in external examination (Theory
and Practical/ Project work) and in internal assessment separately in each paper in order to
qualify in an examination.
15.6 In case the student is dissatisfied with the marks awarded to him/her in internal assessment;
he/she can approach the concerned teacher. If the student is still not satisfied, he/she may
approach the head of department and the Principal subsequently.
16. End-Semester Examination:
End-semester examination(s) of each theory course shall be of three hours duration and will
be conducted as per norms and schedule notified by the Controller of Examination. The end
semester examinations of laboratory/practical courses and other courses such as seminar,
colloquium, field work, project, dissertation etc. shall be conducted as notified by the HOD.
17. Degree Requirement:
17.1 The result of all the examinations will be declared through the College website.
17.2 The grace marks shall be allowed according to the general ordinances relating to ‘Award of
Grace Marks’. These ordinances will apply to all examinations.
(i) Grace marks to be given shall be calculated on the basis of 1% of total aggregate marks of
all the written and practical papers of the examination concerned. Marks for viva-
voice/internal assessment/sessional work/skill in teaching/any additional /optional
/deficient subject shall not be taken into account for this purpose. If a fraction works out to
half or more, it shall count as one mark and fractional less than half shall be ignored
(ii) To pass in one or more written papers or subjects, and/or to make up the aggregate to pass
the examination but not in sessional work, internal assessment, viva-voice and skill in
teaching.
XII
17.3 The College may from time to time revise, amend and change the regulations or the curriculum,
if found necessary.
17.4 The students will be given the facilities of transfer of Credits earned in different
recognized/approved Institutions of Higher Education in India and Abroad.
17.5 A student who earns total specified credits according to the curriculum and fulfills such other
conditions as may be mentioned in the curriculum of the programme, shall be issued the DMC
and Degree by Punjabi University Patiala. He/she must also pay all College dues as per rules.
Moreover, there should be no case of indiscipline pending against him/her.
18. If any student gets admission after concealing any fact or his/her certificates are found fake
after verification or he/she misleads the institution as any front or because of any other
reason, his/her admission will stand cancelled/ his/her result cancelled though he/she may
have been declared pass.
19. In case the ordinance is silent about any issue, it will be decided by the College Principal in
consultation with the Academic Advisory Committee of the college in the anticipation of
approval of the same by Academic Counsel of the College.
INDEX
SR. NO. SUBJECT PAGE NO.
1. PUNJABI COMPULSORY 1-4
2. PUNJABI COMPULSORY (MUDLA GYAN/ELEMENTARY PUNJABI) 5-8
3. ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS 9-12
4. FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH 13-15
5. PUNJABI ELECTIVE/LITERATURE 16-18
6. ENGLISH ELECTIVE/LITERATURE 19-22
7. HINDI 23-26
8. DEFENCE AND STRATEGIC STUDIES 27-33
9. ECONOMICS 34-35
10. FINE ARTS 36-42
11. FOLK ART AND CULTURE 43-46
12. SOCIOLOGY 47-48
13. RELIGIOUS STUDIES 49-50
14. HISTORY 51-54
15. MATHEMATICS 55-58
16. RETAIL MANAGEMENT 59-61
17. PSYCHOLOGY 62-65
18. HOME SCIENCE 66-71
19. PHYSICAL EDUCATION 72-76
20. MUSIC (INSTRUMENTAL) 77-84
21. MUSIC (VOCAL) 85-89
22. TABLA 90-93
23. CULTURAL STUDIES 94-95
24. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 96-99
25. POLITICAL SCIENCE 100-101
26. COMPUTER SCIENCE 102-107
27. GEOGRAPHY 108-112
28. THEATRE STUDIES 113-115
29. GURMAT SANGEET 116-120
30. FASHION DESIGNING 121-125
31. DRUG ABUSE: PROBLEM, MANAGEMENT AND PREVENTION 126-127

Bwg pihlw (smYstr-pihlw) 1
pypr - pµjwbI lwzmI (Punjabi Compulsory)
kRYift: 4 AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRqI h&qw : 05
ku~l Aµk : 100 Aµk ivSy iv~coN pws Aµk : 35%
il^qI pRIiKAw : 70 Aµk AµdrUnI mulWkx : 30 Aµk
not : ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW ivcoN Al`g-Al`g 35%AMk lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome :
1. ividAwrQI ies rwhIN jIvn- jwc, nYiqk kdrW kImqW, AwDuink Xu`g ivc bzurgW dw siqkwr Aqy
irSiqAW dI tùt-B`j nUM smJx Aqy hW p`KI rvèIey nUM Apnwaux dy Xog ho jWdw hY[
2. ividAwrQI AwDuink kQw khwxIAW rwhIN smkwlI, smwijk, AwriQk, rwjnIiqk, Dwrimk
pRsiQqIAW nUM smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdw hY[
3. ividAwrQIAW nUM pMjwbI BwSw Aqy sMswr dIAW hor BwSwvW nUM Su`D rUp ivc bolx, is`Kx Aqy ilKx
dw igAwn pRwpq ho jWdw hY[
4. ividAwrQI v`Ko–v`Kry iK`qy iv`c bolIAW jwx vwlIAW pMjwbI dIAW aup-BwSwvW rwhIN v`Ko-v`Kry
ikìqAW nwl sMbMiDq SbdwvlI nUM jwxn Aqy smJx dy kwibl ho jWdy hn[
islybs Aqy pwT pusqk

Bwg-a kQw-vwrqw (khwxI sµgRih) mu`K sµpwdk - fw. lKvIr isµG, pblIkySn ibaUro, pµjwbI
X¨nIvristI, pitAwlw[
Bwg A-1 ivAwkrn
I pµjwbI DunIAW: KµfI DunIAW dI pirBwSw, svrW Aqy ivAµjnW dI pirBwSw Aqy aucwrn
AµgW, aucwrn sQwn Aqy aucwrn ivDI Anuswr vrgIkrx[AKµfI DunIAW ( bl, sur qy
vwk-sur, nwiskqw) [
II Sbd bxqr Aqy Sbd rcnw : pirBwSw, mu~Fly sµklp, m¨l r¨p, Agyqr, pCyqr,
ivaNuqpq r¨p Aqy r¨pWqrI r¨p [
A-2 pYrHw rcnw (smwijk, Dwrimk, sìBAwcwrk,vwqwvrx)
Bwg- e sQwnk kwlj dy pµjwbI ivBwg v~loN iqAwr kIqI geI qknIkI SbdwvlI dy AwpxI
AwpxI PYkltI nwl sbµDq Bwg dy pihly 100 SbdW dw AµgryzI qoN pµjwbI ivc Anuvwd[
Bwg-s Bwg a qy ivAwkrn dy A-1 vwly BwgW iv~coN sµKyp au~qrW vwly pRSn[
Aµk vµf Aqy pypr sYtr leI hdwieqW
1. Bwg a iv~coN iksy khwxI dw ivSw vsq¨/ swr/khwxI klw Aqy pµjwbI swihq iv~c lyKk dw sQwn
sbµDI pRSn[ (iqµn iv~coN iek) 12 AMk
2. khwxIAW ivcly pwqrW dw pwqr- icqrn (cwr iv~coN koeI do) 4+4=8 AMk
3. ivAwkrn vwly Bwg A-1 nwl sbµDq vrxwqmk pRSn [ (do iv~coN iek) 12 Aµk
4. Bwg A-2 ivcly iviSAW ’qy pYrw rcnw sMbMDI pRSn[ (iqMn iv~coN iek) 08 AMk
5. v~KrI-v~KrI PYkltI nwl sbµDq qknIkI SbdwvlI dy pihly Bwg dy 100 qknIkI SbdW dw
AµgryzI qoN pµjwbI ivc Anuvwd[ (p~cI iv~coN koeI vIh) 10 AMk
6. Bwg s ivc sMKyp au~qrW vwly 10 pRSn, Bwg a Aqy A-1 dIAW pusqkW ivcoN brwbr pu`Cy jwxgy[
ividAwrQI ny swry pRSnW dy sMKyp ivc au~qr dyxy hoxgy Aqy hr pRSn dy do AMk hoxgy[ 10x2=20
AMk
(not:pypr ivc Bwg A dy A.2 Aqy e ivcoN sµKyp a~uqrW vwly pRSn nhIN pu~Cy jwxgy)[
AMdrUnI mulWkx 30 AMk
klws hwzrI, GrylU iemiqhwn, AMdrUnI pRXogI AiBAws
not: pRXogI AiBAws leI AiDAwpk v~loN krvwey gey kwrjW qy AwDwirq ividAwrQIAW duAwrw ie~k
Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgy Aqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw ih`sw hovygI[ ies leI
do pIirAf pRiq h&qw lgwey jwxgy Aqy ividAwrQI hyT ilKy kwrj krngy[
- Su`D pMjwbI aucwrx/ilKx dw AiBAws
- A^bwrW qy rswilAW ivc Cpy swihq sbMDI irport iqAwr krnw
- pwTkRm nwl sbMiDq AsweImYNt iqAwr krnw
- kwlj dy iksy smwgm/ividAk tUr dI irport iqAwr krnw
shwiek pwT- sm~grI
1. joigµdr isµG puAwr Aqy hor, pµjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrn, Bwg pihlw, pµjwbI BwSw AkwdmI, jlµDr, 2
2009 .
2. hrkIrq isµG, BwSw ivigAwn Aqy pµjwbI BwSw, bwhrI pblIkySn ,id~lI, 1971.
3. sivµdr isµG au~pl,pµjwbI khwxIkwr,nYSnl bu~k Swp,id~lI,1954.
4. b¨tw isµG brwV, pµjwbI ivAwkrn: isDWq qy ivhwr,cyqnw pRkwSn, luiDAwxw,2008.
5. pRym pRkwS isµG, isDWqk BwSw ivigAwn, mdwn pbilsrz, pitAwlw,2002.
6. hrkIrq isMG, kwlj pMjwbI ivAwkrx, pMjwb styt XUnIvristI tYkst bu`k borf, cMfIgVH, 1986.
Note: - Those students who have not studied Punjabi up to matriculation can opt for Elementary
Punjabi (Mudla Punjabi Gyan). Other students will study compulsory Punjabi.
Bwg pihlw (smYstr-dUjw) 3
Course Outcome :
1. ividAwrQI ies rwhIN jIvn- jwc, nYiqk kdrW kImqW, AwDuink Xu`g ivc bzurgW dw siqkwr
Aqy irSiqAW dI tùt-B`j nUM smJx Aqy hW p`KI rvèIey nUM Apnwaux dy Xog ho jWdw hY[
2. ividAwrQI AwDuink kQw khwxIAW rwhIN smkwlI, smwijk, AwriQk, rwjnIiqk, Dwrimk
pRsiQqIAW nUM smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdw hY[
3. ividAwrQIAW nUM pMjwbI BwSw Aqy sMswr dIAW hor BwSwvW nUM Su`D rUp ivc bolx, is`Kx Aqy ilKx
dw igAwn pRwpq ho jWdw hY[
4. ividAwrQI v`Ko–v`Kry iK`qy iv`c bolIAW jwx vwlIAW pMjwbI dIAW aup-BwSwvW rwhIN v`Ko-v`Kry
ikìqAW nwl sMbMiDq SbdwvlI nUM jwxn Aqy smJx dy kwibl ho jWdy hn[
Bwg a coxvyN pMjwbI inbMD – sMpw. joigMdr isMG puAwr,prmjIq isMG is`DU, pblIkySn ibaUro pMjwbI
XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
Bwg A-1 ivAwkrn
I BwSw vMngIAW, BwSw dw tkswlI rUp, BwSw Aqy aup–BwSw dw AMqr Aqy AMqr sbMD, pMjwbI aup-
BwSwvW dy pCwx icMnH[
II Sbd SryxIAW : pRIBwSw, kwrj Aqy bxqr dy AwDwr ‘qy[
A-2 ic`TI p`qr (smwijk srokwr, in`jI Aqy d&qrI ic`TI-p`qr)
Bwg-e sQwnk kwlj dy pMjwbI ivBwg v`loN pRkwiSq kIqy gey qknIkI SbdwvlI koS ivcoN sbMDq
PYkltI
vwly Bwg dy 101 qoN 200 q`k SbdW dw AMgryzI qo pMjwbI ivc Anuvwd[
Bwg-s Bwg a qy ivAwkrn dy A-1 vwly BwgW iv~coN sµKyp au~qrW vwly pRSn[
AMk vMf Aqy pypr sYtr leI hdwieqW
1. Bwg a iv`coN iksy iek inbMD dw ivSw vsqU/ inbMD klw jW lyKk dw Xogdwn[(iqMn iv`coN iek)12 AMk
2. Bwg a ivcoN inbMDW ivcly ivcwrW sbMDI pRSn[ (cwr iv`coN do) 4+4=08 AMk
3. ivAwkrn vwly Bwg A-1 nwl sbµDq vrxwqmk pRSn [ (do iv~coN iek) 12 Aµk
4. Bwg A-2 ivcly iviSAW ’qy ic`TI p`qr ilKx sMbMDI pRSn[ (do iv`coN iek) 08 AMk
5. v~KrI-v~KrI PYkltI nwl sbµDq qknIkI SbdwvlI dy 101 qoN 200 q`k qknIkI SbdW dw AµgryzI qoN
pµjwbI ivc Anuvwd[ (p~cI iv~coN koeI vIh) 10 AMk
6. Bwg s ivc sMKyp au~qrW vwly 10 pRSn, Bwg a Aqy A-1 dIAW pusqkW ivcoN brwbr pu`Cy jwxgy[
ividAwrQI ny swry pRSnW dy sMKyp ivc au~qr dyxy hoxgy Aqy hr pRSn dy do AMk hoxgy[10x2= 20 AMk
(not:pypr ivc Bwg A dy A.2 Aqy e ivcoN sMKyp au~qrW vwly pRSn nhIN pu`Cy jwxgy[)
Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgy Aqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw ih`sw hovygI[ ies leI
do pIirAf pRiq h&qw lgwey jwxgy Aqy ividAwrQI hyT ilKy kwrj krngy[
shwiek pwT- sm`grI
1. hrkIrq isMG, BwSw ivigAwn Aqy pMjwbI BwSw, bwhrI pblIkySn , id`lI, 1971.
2. bldyv isMG cImw, pMjwbI BwSw ivigAwn Aqy ivAwkrn (qknIkI SbdwvlI dw ivsw koS), pMjwbI
XUnIvristI, pitAwlw, 2000.
3. bUtw isMG brwV, pMjwbI ivAwkrn: isDWq qy ivhwr, cyqnw pRkwSn, luiDAwxw, 2008.
4. pRym pRkwS isMG, isDWqk BwSw ivigAwn, mdwn pbilsrz, pitAwlw, 2002. 4
5. pRym pRkwS isMG, pMjwbI BwSw dw sRoq qy bxqr, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw, 1996.
6. Koj piqRkw (inbMD AMk), pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
7. joigMdr isMG puAwr Aqy hor, pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrn, Bwg pihlw, pMjwbI BwSw AkwdmI, jlMDr,
2009.
8. suKivMdr isMG sMGw, pMjwbI BwSw ivigAwn, pMjwbI BwSw AkwdmI, jlMDr, 1999.
9. hrkIrq isMG, kwlj pMjwbI ivAwkrx, pMjwb styt XUnIvristI tYkst bu`k borf, cMfIgVH,1986. Note:-
Those students who have not studied Punjabi up to matriculation can opt for Elementary Punjabi
(Mudla Punjabi Gyan). Other students will study compulsory Punjabi.
Bwg pihlw (smYstr-pihlw) 5
pypr-pMjwbI lwzmI (mu`Flw pMjwbI igAwn/Elementary Punjabi)
kRYift :4
ku`l Aµk : 100 ivSy iv~coN pws Aµk : 35%
ilKqI pRIiKAw : 70 Aµk AµdrUnI mulWkx : 30 Aµk
ilKqI pRIiKAwdw smW : 3 GMty AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRqI h&qw : 05
not : ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW ivcoN Al`g Al`g 35%AMk lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. ividAwrQI ies rwhIN pMjwbI BwSw nUM vrqx vwlI ilpI (vrxnmwlw) qoN jwxU hox dy smr`Q huMdy hn[
2. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI pMjwbI BwSw nUM bolx, ilKx Aqy pVHn dy smr`Q huMdy hn[
3. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI rojwnw pMjwbI jIvn iv`c vrqI jwx vwlI SbdwvlI bwry igAwn hwisl krn dy
Xog huMdy hn[

pwT pusqk: mu`Flw pMjwbI igAwn (Bwg pihlw, smYstr pihlw), fw. puSipMdr kOr, ^wlsw kwlj,
pitAwlw, 2018.
Bwg -a
a.1gurmuKI vrxmwlw:
(1) gurmuKIvrxmwlw Aqy ilKx dy inXm
(2) A`Kr isìKAw: qrqIbvwr qy BulwvyN A`Kr
a.2 mwqrw rihq Sbd joV:
(1) do A`KrI SbdW dy joV
(2) iqMn A`KrI SbdW dy joV
(3) bhu- A`KrI SbdW dy joV 10+10=20 AMk
Bwg –A
A.1pMjwbI DunI pRbMD:
(1) svr:pirBwSw,pCwx Aqy vrqoN
(2)ivAMjnW dI pirBwSw,pCwx AqyvrqoN
A.1 lgw^r Aqy pYr ivc pYx vwly vrx:
(4) lgw^rW dI pirBwSw, pCwx Aqy vrqoN 10+10=20 AMk
(5) pYr ivc pYx vwly vrxW dI pCwx Aqy vrqoN
Bwg -e
pMjwbI SbdwvlI nwl jwx pCwx:
(1) igxqI (1 qoN 50 q`k) SbdW ivc
(2) h&qy dy idnW dy nW
(3) AMgryzI mhIinAW dy nW
(4) dysI mhIinAW dy nW
(5) rMgW dy nW
(6) &lW-sbzIAW dy nW 5+5=10 AMk
Bwg-s 6
swry islybs ’qy ADwirq 10 AbjYkitv tweIp pRSn[ 10×2= 20 AMk
1. ividAwrQI pihlI vwr gurmuKI isK rhy hn[ho skdw hY ividAwrQI pMjwbI BwSw qoN Axjwx hox[so
pRSnW dw p`Dr ividAwrQIAW dI BwSw is`Kx dI sImw nUM iDAwn ivc r`K ky inSicq kIqw jwvy[
2. srl Aqy sp`St pRSn pu`Cy jwx[
3. vrxwqmk pRSn nw pu`Cy jwx[
4. ividAwrQIAW nUM ilpI dw boD krvwaux leI DunIAW, ilpI icMnHW dI pCwx Aqy vrqoN sbMDI sMKyp
pRSn pu`Cy jwx[
5. loV Anuswr ividAwrQIAW nUM Cot jW cox dyxI lwzmI hY[

Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgyAqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw ih`sw hovygw[ ies leI
do pIirAf pRqIh&qw lgwey jwxgy Aqy ividAwrQI hyT ilKy kwrj krngy[
not:pRSn p`qr ivBwg v`loN pRkwiSq kIqI geI pwT pusqk au~qy hI ADwirq hovy[pypr sY`t krn leI
pusqk dy ip`Cy id`qy gey nmUnw pRSn p`qr dy stwiel nUM ADwr bxwieAw jwvy[
shwiek pusqk sUcI

1. siqnwm isMG sMDU, AwE pMjwbI isKIey, (ihMdI qoN pMjwbI is`Kx leI), pMjwbI XUnIvristI,
pitAwlw, 2009.
2. siqnwm isMG sMDU, gurmuKI is`Ko,(AMgryzI qoN pMjwbI is`Kx leI), pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw,
2011.
3. sIqw rwm bwhrI, pMjwbI isKIey, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw, 2002. ( ihMdI)[
4. rwijMdr isMG, pMjwbI igAwn sI.fI. (kMipaUtr AYplIkySn tU-lrn AYNf tIc pMjwbI), pMjwbI
XUnIvristI, pitAwlw, 2011.
5. Hardev Bahri, Teach Yourself Punjabi, Punjabi University, Patiala, 2011.
6. Henry A.Gleason and Harjeet Singh Gill, A Start in Punjabi, Punjabi University, Patiala, 1997.
7. Ujjal Singh Bahri and Paramjit Singh Wallia, Introductory Punjabi, Punjabi University,
Patiala,2011.
not: Only those students who have not studied Punjabi up to matriculation can opt for
Elementary Punjabi (Mudla Punjabi Gyan). Other students will study Compulsory Punjabi.
Bwg pihlw (smYstr-dUjw) 7
pypr-pMjwbI lwzmI (mu`Flw pMjwbI igAwn/Elementary Punjabi)
kRYift :4
ku`l Aµk : 100 ivSy iv~coN pws Aµk : 35%
ilKqI pRIiKAwdw smW : 3 GMty AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRqI h&qw : 05
Course Outcome:
1. ividAwrQI ies rwhIN pMjwbI BwSw nUM vrqx vwlI ilpI (vrxnmwlw) qoN jwxU hox dy smr`Q huMdy hn[
2. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI pMjwbI BwSw nUM bolx, ilKx Aqy pVHn dy smr`Q huMdy hn[
3. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI rojwnw pMjwbI jIvn iv`c vrqI jwx vwlI SbdwvlI bwry igAwn hwisl krn dy
Xog huMdy hn[
pwT pusqk: mu`Flw pMjwbI igAwn (Bwg pihlw, smYstr dUjw), fw. puSipMdr kOr, ^wlsw kwlj,
pitAwlw,2018.
Bwg-a
Sbd joV : (mwqrw sihq)
(1) do A`KrI SbdW dy joV
(2) iqMn A`KrI SbdW dy joV
(3) bhu- A`KrI SbdW dy joV 10 AMk
Bwg-A
A.1 Sbd SryxIAW: pCwxqy vrqoN :
nWv, pVnWv, ivSySx, ikirAw, ikirAw ivSySx, sbMDk Aqy Xojk
ivAwkrnk vrg: ilMg, vcn, purK, kwl
A.2 Sbd SryxIAW dI vwkW ivc vrqoN:
Sbd SryxIAW nUM vwkW ivc vrqxw isKwauxw
^wlI sQwn Br ky vwk pUry krnw isKwauxw 10+10=20 AMk
Bwg-e
pMjwbI Sbd bxqrW dw isDWq, pCwx qy vrqoN:
Agyqr, ipCyqr, smws, duhrukqI 10 AMk
Bwg-s
pMjwbI SbdwvlI nwl jwx-pCwx :
1. igxqI (51-100)
2. pSU-pMCIAW dy nW
3. nwnky Aqy dwdky Gr dy irSiqAW dy nW
4. AwvwjweI dy swDnW dy nW
5. GrylU vsqW dI SbdwvlI 10 AMk
Bwg-h
swry islybs ’qy ADwirq ds AbjYkitv tweIp pRSn[ 10×2= 20 AMk
1. ividAwrQI pihlI vwr gurmuKI is`K rhy hn[ho skdw hY ividAwrQI pMjwbI BwSw qoN Axjwx hox[ so
pRSnW dw p`Dr ividAwrQIAW dI sImw nUM iDAwn ivc r`K ky inSicq kIqw jwvy[
2. swry BwgW iv`coN pRSn pu`Cy jwx[
3. srl Aqy sp`St Sbd pu`Cy jwx[
4. vrxwqmk pRSn nw pu`Cy jwx[
5. ividAwrQIAW nUM ivAwkrn dI mu`FlI jwxkwrI sbMDI sMKyp pRSn pu`Cy jwx[ loV Anuswr
ividAwrQIAW nUM Cot jW cox dyxI lwzmI hY[
6. ividAwrQI nMU ivAwkrn ivc svwl vwkW ivc vrqoN dy p`Dr qy vI pùCy ley jwx[
not:pRSn p`qr ivBwg v`loN pRkwiSq kIqI geI pwT pusqk au~qy hI ADwirq hovy[pypr sY`t krn
leI pusqk dy ip`Cy id`qy gey nmUnw pRSn p`qr dy stwiel nUM ADwr bxwieAw jwvy[
not: pRXogI AiBAws leI AiDAwpk v~loN krvwey gey kwrjW qy AwDwirq ividAwrQIAW duAwrw ie~k 8
Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgyAqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw ih`sw hovygw[ ies leI
do pIirAf pRqI h&qw lgwey jwxgy Aqy ividAwrQI hyT ilKy kwrj krngy[
-
shwiekpusqk-sUcI
1. siqnwm isMG sMDU, AwE pMjwbI isKIey, (ihMdI qoN pMjwbI is`Kx leI)pMjwbI
XunIvristI,pitAwlw,2009.
2. siqnwm isMG sMDU, gurmuKI is`Ko, (AMgryzI qoN pMjwbI is`Kx leI), pMjwbI XUnIvristI,
pitAwlw,2011.
3. sIqw rwm bwhrI, pMjwbI isKIey, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw,2002,(ihMdI)[
4. rwijMdr isMG, pMjwbI igAwn sI.fI.(kMipaUtr AYplIkySn tU-lrn AYNf tIc pMjwbI), pMjwbI
XUnIvristI, pitAwlw,2011.
5. Hardev Bahri, Teach Yourself Punjabi, Punjabi University, Patiala, 2011.
6. Ujjal Singh Bahri and Paramjit Singh Wallia, Introductory Punjabi, Punjabi University, Patiala,
2011.
not: Only those students who have not studied Punjabi up to matriculation can opt for Elementary
Punjabi. Other students will study Compulsory Punjabi.
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS 9
SEMESTER I
4 Credits
Time: 3 hours Max Marks: 100
Periods per week: 5 Theory: 70 marks
Pass Marks: 35% Internal Assessment:30 marks
Course Outcome: After the successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:
Develop language proficiency and flair for English literature 
Develop accuracy in the use of English language 
Build vocabulary to use in common situations in life 

Section –A
Prescribed Text: Prose Parables, Orient BlackSwan, 2013
The following stories are to be studied:
1.Kabuliwallah: Rabindranath Tagore
2. The Eyes are Not Here: Ruskin Bond
3.Grief: Anton Chekhov
4.Uncle Podger Hangs a Picture: Jerome K. Jerome
5.The Doctor's Word: R.K. Narayan
6.Green Parrots in a Cage: Gopi Gauba
7.Dusk: Saki
8.The Face on the Wall : E. V. Lucas
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PAPER SETTER
Q1. (a) One essay type question with an internal alternative on summary, character or central
idea in about 250 words. 12 marks
(b) Five short answer questions to be attempted out of the given eight from the prescribed
text in about 30-40 words each. 3x5= 15marks
Section –B
Q2. Writing Skills:
1. Letter Writing: Personal / Letter to Editor
Testing: The student will be asked to attempt any one letter out of the given two. 07 marks
2.Translation
Testing: The student will be asked to translate a passage of 10 sentences from Punjabi/Hindi
into English.
In lieu of Translation
(For students who do not know Punjabi/Hindi)
Paraphrase of a stanza from a poem about 8 to 10 lines.) 10 marks
Q.3Grammar and Vocabulary
(a) Grammar:
Prescribed Text: Oxford Practice Grammar by John Eastwood, Oxford University Press,2006
1. Exercises 1-20 10 marks
Testing: Attempt 10 sentences out of the given 12
(b) Vocabulary:
Prescribed Text: The Students' Companion by Wilfred D. Best, Harper Collins Publishers,2010
1. Antonyms: pages 128 -130
Testing: Attempt all 6 antonyms 0.5x6=3 marks
2. Synonyms: pages 132-1340.5x6=3 marks
Testing: Attempt all 6 synonyms
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 30 Marks 10
Internal Assessment will be given on the basis of attendance, MSTs and over-all performance in
the class. There will also be an internal viva based on the following topics of practical relevance.
The teacher should focus on enhancing the skills of the students in writing, speaking and reading.
One period per week will be allotted for covering these topics:-
1. Newspaper Reading
2. Dialogue speaking on the given situations
3. Introducing self and others
4. Translating any 5 lines from Punjabi/Hindi into English
Note: A Scrap Book to be made by the student on the given topics.
SEMESTER II
4 Credits
Pass Marks: 35% Internal Assessment:30 marks
Course Outcome: After the successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:
Familiarise with the genre of poetry
Develop strong writing and communication skills
Build vocabulary to use in their daily lives
Familiarise with the inspirational thoughts of well-known personalities of the world
Section –A
Prescribed Text: The Poetic Palette , Orient BlackSwan, 2013
1. Pippa's Song: Robert Browning
2. The Tyger: William Blake
3. Magic of Love: Helen Farries
4. The Charge of the Light Brigade: Alfred Tennyson
5. The Man He Killed: Thomas Hardy
6. Where the Mind is Without Fear: Rabindranath Tagore
7. The Soul's Prayer: Sarojini Naidu
8. The Work of Artifice: Marge Piercy
9. Whose English is it Anyway?: John Agard
10. Poetry: Pablo Neruda
Q1. (a) One essay type question with an internal alternative on summary or central idea
in about 250 words.12 marks
text in about 30-40 words each. 3x5=15 marks
Section-B
Q.2 Writing Skills:
(a) Paragraph Writing
Testing: One Paragraph to be composed out of the given two in about 200 words. 10 marks
(b) Advertisement- Classified/Matrimonial/Pamphlet
Testing: One advertisement to be composed on the given topic. There will be no choice.
07 marks
Q.3Grammar and Vocabulary
(a) Grammar:
Prescribed Text: Oxford Practice Grammar by John Eastwood , Oxford University Press,2006
1. Ex: 76-96 10 marks
2. Ex: 97-117 10 marks
(b)Vocabulary:
Prescribed Text: The Students' Companion by Wilfred D. Best, Harper Collins Publishers, 2010
1. Antonyms: pages 131 -132
Testing: Attempt all 6 antonyms 0.5x6=3 marks
2. Synonyms: pages 135-136
Testing: Attempt all 6 synonyms 0.5x6=3 marks
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 30 Marks 12
The teacher should focus on enhancing the skills of the students in writing, speaking and reading.
1. Enacting and Creating Advertisement
2. Facing the interview
3. Mock Conversation
4. Extempore on the given topics
Book Recommended:
The Written Word by Vandana R. Singh , Oxford University Press, 2006
(SEMESTER I) 13
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH
5 Credits: 5 (L)
Time allowed: 3 hours Max Marks: 100
Periods per week: 5 External: 70 marks
Pass Marks: 35% Internal Assessment: 30 marks
Course Outcome: After the successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
 Demonstrate skills, competencies and procedural knowledge
 Understand the mechanics of writing in English language
 Select correct interpretations and solutions to conceptual problems
UNIT-I
Writing Skills and Functional Grammar
Topics to be covered:
1. Letter-Writing with an internal alternative between Official and Business letters. 07 marks
2. Dialogue-Writing (Transcoding the given prose passage into dialogue form). 07 marks
3. Developing one short story on the basis of the hints provided. 06 marks
This unit of the paper shall deal with Writing Skills and shall carry weightage of 20 marks. This
part shall consist of three questions carrying 07+07+06=20 marks.
Note: The theoretical concepts like definition, purpose etc. regarding all three topics are to be
undertaken in the class for Unit-III short questions.
UNIT-II
Prescribed Text: Collins Cobuild Student's Grammar Practice Material by Dave Willis, Classroom
Edition, (Harper Collins Publishers, India)
This Unit of the paper shall deal with Functional Grammar. There shall be three questions carrying
08+07+05=20 marks.
1. 8 sentences shall be set from Ex: 59 to 80 from the prescribed book. 08 marks
2. 7 sentences shall be set from Ex: 81 to 100 from the prescribed book. 07 marks
3. Translation of a passage of five sentences from Punjabi/Hindi into English. 05 marks
UNIT-III
Unit-III shall cover the entire syllabus and shall carry weightage of 30 marks. This shall have two
questions carrying 14+16=30 marks. There shall be no choice in this section.
1. Seven short questions shall be set from Unit-I Writing Skills. 7X2=14 marks
2. 8 sentences shall be set from Unit-II Functional Grammar Ex: 59 to 100 of Collins Cobuild
Student's Grammar. 8X2=16 marks
BOOKS PRESCRIBED:
1. The Written Word by Vandana R. Singh, Oxford University Press, 2006.
2. Collins Cobuild Student's Grammar, by Dave Willis, University of Birmingham, 2002.
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on M.S.Ts, Attendance, Class Performance, Assignments etc.
(SEMESTER II)
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH
4 Credits: 3H (L) + 2H(P) 14
Course Outcome: After the successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
 Demonstrate knowledge of the three phase production processes by creating script, formats,
storyboards etc.
 Demonstrate ability to use and operate the studio and field cameras
 Apply effective and collaborative team communication and management skills required for video
production
PHONETICS OF ENGLISH
UNIT-I
Topics to be covered
1. Phonetics and Phonology.
2. The Organs of Speech and Speech Mechanism.
3. The description and classification of Speech Sounds (English Vowels and Consonants only).
This unit of the paper shall carry a weightage of 20 marks. This part shall consist of two questions
carrying 10+10=20 marks.
Testing:
Question No. I with an internal alternative shall be set from topic 1 and 2 from Unit I 10 marks
Question No. II with an internal alternative shall be based on topic 3 from Unit I. 10 marks
UNIT-II
Topics to be covered
1. The Syllable.
2. Consonant Clusters in English.
3. Word Stress.
4. Accent and Rhythm in connected speech or the sentence stress.
5. Assimilation and Elision: phonotactic possibilities.
This Unit of the paper shall carry weightage of 24 marks. This part shall consist of two questions
carrying 10+14=24 marks.
Testing:
Question No. III with an internal alternative shall be set from Unit-II. 10 marks
1. Phonetic Symbols (Knowledge of IPA symbols as used in English Pronouncing Dictionary by Daniel
Jones (18th Edition), (C.U.P.) Knowledge of variant pronunciations not required.
2. Phonetic transcription of R.P. variety of English
Testing: Question No. IV shall be based on phonemic/ phonetic transcription of words in IPA
symbols. The examiner shall set 16 words out of which Students shall attempt any 14.
1x14= 14 marks
UNIT-III
This section shall cover the entire syllabus, i.e. all the chapters from the prescribed book, phonemic/
phonetic transcription of words (R.P. variety only) using IPA symbols and marking of primary stress on
words. There shall be three questions, without any internal alternative, carrying 08+10+8=26 marks
Testing:
Question No. V shall have two parts:
1. Two short answer type questions of 2 marks each will be based on Unit-I and are to be answered by
the students in about 30-40 words each. 2X2=4 marks
2.Two short answer type questions of 2 marks each will be based on Unit-II and are to be answered by
the students in about 30-40 words each. 2X2=4 marks
Question No. VI shall pertain to Unit-II. The students shall transcribe 10 words in IPA
symbols. 1X10=10marks
Question No. VII shall pertain to Unit-II. The students shall mark only the primary stress on 8 words.
1X8= 8marks
BOOKS PRESCRIBED: 15
A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V. Dhamija, Twenty ninth printing, 2015.
Chapter 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 11, 12, and 13 only are to be studied.
English Pronouncing Dictionary by Daniel Jones. Revised by Roach and Hartman (C.U.P.) 2006.
SUGGESTED READING:
An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English by A.C. Gimson, Hodder Arnold, 1989
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 30 marks
Internal Assessment will be given on the basis of attendance, MSTs and over-all performance in the class.
There will also be an internal viva based on the following topics of practical relevance. The teacher should
focus on enhancing the skills of the students in writing, speaking and reading. Two periods per week will be
allotted for covering these topics: -
1. Intensive drilling in Phonetic Skills.
2. Intensive drilling in Accent, Intonation and Transcription.
Practical training and testing of the students is to be conducted in the Language Lab.

smYstr-pihlw
pypr: pMjwbI swihq (coxvW ivSw)
16
kRYift : 5
ku~l Aµk: 100 pws Aµk: 35 %
ilKqI pRIiKAW dw smW: 3 Gµty il^qI pRIiKAw: 70 Aµk
AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRiq h&qw: 05 AµdrUnI mulWkx: 30 Aµk
Course Outcome:
1. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI swihq dIAW do ivDwvW kivqw Aqy nwvl bwry jwxkwrI hwisl krn dy Xog ho jWdy
hn[
2. ividAwrQI swihq dy mwiDAm rwhIN smwijk vrqwirAW nUM vDyry cMgI qrHW smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
3. ividAwrQI nwvl Aqy kivqw rwhIN BwSw Aqy srMcnw nUM smJ ky AwpxIAW rucIAW dw igAwn hwisl krn
dy Xog ho jWdy hn[
4. swihiqk igAwn duAwrw ividAwrQI p`qrkwrI Aqy hor sMcwr dy KyqrW ivc ruzgwr hwsl krn dy smr`Q ho
jWdy hn
not: ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI pRIiKAw dy AMkW ivcoN Al`g-Al`g 35% lYxy zrUrI hn[
Bwg-a -1. suKn dy sUrj (AwDuink pMjwbI kwiv sMgRih 1901-1995) sMpwdk : fw. bljIq kOr
Aqy tI.fI. joSI, gurU nwnk dyv XUnIvristI, AMimRqsr [
a-2. pIly pìqAW dI dwsqwn (nwvl): dlIp kOr itvwxw, AwrsI pbilSrz, id`lI (1980)[
Bwg-A : swihq dy rUp : nzm, gIq, Zzl, rubweI, Ku`lHI kivqw, nwvl - pirBwSw, pRikrqI qy q`q
Bwg-e auprokq islybs ’qy ADwrq sMKyp au~qrW vwly pRSn
AMk- vMf Aqy pypr sYtr leI hdwieqW
1. Bwg a-1 suKn dy sUrj
(i) pusqk iv`coN kivqw dw ivSw vsqU/ swr/ kvI bwry jwxkwrI Aqy ausdw Xogdwn (iqMn iv`coN iek) 10 AMk
(ii) pRsMg sihq ivAwiKAw (cwr iv`coN do) 6+6=12
AMk
2. Bwg a-2 pIly pìqAW dI dwsqwn
(i) nwvl dw ivSw-vsqU / swr / klw p`K qy lyKk dw Xogdwn (iqMn iv`coN iek) 10
AMk
(ii) pwqr icqrx (iqMn iv`coN iek) 08 AMk
3. Bwg A iv`coN iksy ie`k swihq rUp dI pirBwSw, pRikrqI Aqy q`q[ (iqMn iv`coN ie`k) 10
AMk
4. Bwg-e Bwg-a ivc inrDwrq pusqkW dy AwDwr qy sMKyp au`qrW vwly 10 pRSn pu`Cy jwxgy[
ividAwrQI ny swry pRSnW dy sMKyp au`qr dyxy hoxgy[ hryk pRSn dy 2 AMk hoxgy[ 10x2=20
AMk
ieMtrnl AsYsmYNt 30
AMk
klws hwzrI, GrylU iemiqhwn, AsweInmYNt qy smu`cw ivvhwr
shwiek pwT- sm`grI
1. fw.rqn isMG j`gI, swihq dy rUp, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
2. ikrpwl isMG ksyl,primMdr isMG, swihq dw ieiqhws, lwhOr bu`k Swp, luiDAwxw[
3. fw. jsivMdr isMG, nvIN pMjwbI kivqw: pCwx icMn, cyqnw pRkwSn, cMfIgVH [
4. fw. rwijMdr pwl isMG,AwDuink pMjbI kivqw punr icMqn, lokgIq pRkwSn, cMfIgVH[
5. fw. gurpwl isMG sMDU, pMjwbI nwvl dw ieiqhws, pMjwbI AkwdmI, id`lI[
6. Koj piqRkw (glp ivSyS AMk) pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
7. Koj piqRkw (AwDuink kwiv ivSyS AMk), pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
smYstr-dUjw
pypr: pMjwbI swihq (coxvW ivSw)
17
kRYift : 5
ku~l Aµk: 100 pws Aµk: 35 %
ilKqI pRIiKAW dw smW : 3 Gµty il^qI pRIiKAw: 70 Aµk
AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRiq h&qw : 05 AµdrUnI mulWkx: 30 Aµk
Course Outcome:
1. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI swihq dIAW do ivDwvW kivqw Aqy nwvl bwry jwxkwrI hwisl krn dy Xog ho jWdy
hn[
2. ividAwrQI swihq dy mwiDAm rwhIN smwijk vrqwirAW nUM vDyry cMgI qrHW smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
3. ividAwrQI nwvl Aqy kivqw rwhIN BwSw Aqy srMcnw nUM smJ ky AwpxIAW rucIAW dw igAwn hwisl krn
dy Xog ho jWdy hn[
4. swihiqk igAwn duAwrw ividAwrQI p`qrkwrI Aqy hor sMcwr dy KyqrW ivc ruzgwr hwsl krn dy smr`Q ho
jWdy hn[
not: ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI pRIiKAw dy AMkW ivcoN Al`g-Al`g 35% lYxy zrUrI hn[
Bwg-a-1. AwDuink pMjwbI swihq dw ieiqhws (AwDuink kwl-1901-1995): fw.jsivMdr isMG, fw. mwn
isMG FINfsw, pblIkySn ibaUro, pµjwbI X¨nIvristI, pitAwlw[
2. iekWgI Xwqrw (iekWgI sMgRih): sMpwdk fw. rGbIr isMG, fw. sqIS kumwr vrmw, pMjwbI
Bwg-A-1 swihq dy rUp : khwxI, nwtk , iekWgI- pirBwSw, pRikrqI qy q`q
2. BwrqI kwiv Swsqr nwl sbMDq mUl sMklp: DunI (AiBDw, lkSxw qy ivAMjnw) , AlMkwr
(rUpk, aupmw), AOicqX, vkRokqI, rs (iSMgwr rs, sWq rs, bIr rs,hws rs) [
Bwg-e auprokq islybs 'qy ADwrq sMKyp au`qrW vwly pRSn
1. Bwg a-1 AwDuink pMjwbI swihq dw ieiqhws iv`coN pRivrqI / swihq rUp dy ivkws sbMDI pRSn
(iksy ie`kly swihqkwr sbMDI pRSn nw puìCAw jwvy)[ (iqMn iv`coN iek)
10 AMk
2. Bwg a-2 iekWgI Xwqrw
pusqk iv`coN ivSw vsqU / iekWgI klw / swr / lyKk bwry jwxkwrI Aqy ausdw Xogdwn
(iqMn iv`coN iek) 10
AMk
pwqr icqrx (iqMn iv`coN iek) 08
AMk
3. Bwg A-1 iv`coN iksy ie`k swihq rUp dI pirBwSw, pRikrqI Aqy q`q[(do iv`coN iek) 10
AMk
4. Bwg A-2 BwrqI kwiv Swsqr nwl sbMDq mUl sMklp (cwr iv`coN do) 6+6=12
AMk
5. auprokq swry islybs dy AwDwr 'qy sMKyp au`qrW vwly 10 pRSn pu`Cy jwxgy[ ividAwrQI ny swry pRSnW dy
sMKyp au`qr dyxy hoxgy[ hryk pRSn dy 2 AMk hoxgy[ 10x2=20 AMk
ieMtrnl AsYsmYNt
klws hwzrI, GrylU iemiqhwn, AsweInmYNt qy smu`cw ivvhwr 30 AMk
shwiek pwT sm`grI
1. fw. jsivMdr isMG qy fw. mwn isMG FINfsw, pMjwbI swihq dw ieiqhws (AwDuink kwl 1901-1995), pMjwbI
18
2. fw. rqn isMG j`gI, swihq koS, pblIkySn ibauro, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
3. fw. guridAwl isMG Pu`l, pMjwbI nwtk: isDWq ieiqhws qy pRivrqIAW, pMjwbI XUnIvristI,pitAwlw[
4. fw. sqIS kumwr vrmw, pMjwbI nwtk dw ieiqhws, pMjwbI AkwdmI, id`lI[
5. Koj piqRkw, (nwtk ivSyS AMk), pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
6. pRym pRkwS isMG DwlIvwl, BwrqI kwiv SwSqr
(SEMESTER I)
ENGLISH LITERATURE 19
5 Credits: 5 (L)
Periods per week: 5 Theory : 70
Pass Marks: 35% Internal Assessment: 30
Course Outcome (CO1) English Literature
After the successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
• Learn about literary terms related to prose and poetry
• Understand two prominent genres of literature: poetry and prose
• Explore the relationship of literature with society
• Teach the importance of literature in the present time
An Introduction to the Study of Poetry and Prose
Unit-I
1. Theoretical Concepts related to Literature
a. What is Literature?
b. Various Genres of Literature
2. Literary terms
Simile, Metaphor, Paradox, Sonnet, Haiku, Lyric, Ballad, Metre, Rhyme and Rhythm, Pastoral, Ode,
Alliteration, Assonance and Consonance, Elegy, Prose, Types of Prose ,Burlesque, Parody, Sarcasm, Motif
and Theme, Myth, Utopia and Dystopia, Purple Patch, Pathos, Satire, Allegory, Parable and Fable,
Travelogue, Essay, Biography and Autobiography, Irony
Prescribed Text: A Glossary of Literary Terms 11th Edition by M.H. Abrams and Geoffrey Galt
Harpham, Cengage Learning, 2015
Unit-II
3. Prescribed Text: Flames of Inspiration ed. by Department of English, Khalsa College
Patiala,2018
The following poems are to be studied:
• A Poison Tree : William Blake
• Ode to the West Wind : P.B. Shelley
• A Thing of Beauty : John Keats
• The Last Ride Together : Robert Browning
• Say Not the Struggle Naught Availeth : Arthur Hugh Clough
• No Second Troy : W.B. Yeats
• The Road not Taken : Robert Frost
• To Waris Shah : Amrita Pritam
• Still I Rise : Maya Angelou
• Rock Walls : A.P.J. Abdul Kalam
4. Prescribed Text: A Selection of English Prose, compiled and ed. by Dept. of English, University
of Kashmir, Orient Blackswan Limited
The following essays are to be studied:
• On Habits: A.G. Gardiner
• Shooting an Elephant: George Orwell
• With the Photographer: Stephen Leacock
• The Happy Man: Bertrand Russell
• On Going a Journey: William Hazlitt
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER SETTER
UNIT-I
Q.1 An essay type question with internal choice related to the Theoretical Concepts related to Literature in20
about 300 words. 10 marks
Q.2 This question will pertain to important Literary Terms. Students will attempt any five out of the given
seven terms in about 30-50 words each. 2x5=10 marks
UNIT-II
Q.3 A critical question with internal choice relating to summary, main ideas, over-all understanding to be set
from Flames of Inspiration which are to be attempted in about 200 words.
10 Marks
Q.4 A critical question with internal choice relating to summary, main ideas, over-all understanding to be set
from A Selection of English Prose which are to be attempted in about
200 words. 10 Marks
UNIT-III
This question will cover the entire syllabus. There will be 15 questions in all, each carrying 2 marks. The
students will have to attempt all the fifteen questions. 03 questions should be set from Literary Terms
(only very brief definitions should be asked); 12 from the prescribed text Flames Of Inspiration and A
Selection of English Prose. The nature of the questions pertaining to these texts should be such that the
Students should be able to answer each question in about 25 to 30 words. There shall be no choice in
this section.
15X2=30 marks
Suggested Readings:
Auger , Peter .The Anthem Glossary of Literary Terms and Theory . Anthem Press, 2010. Kennedy, X.J. Dana
Gioia, Mark Bauerlein. Handbook of Literary terms. Pearson Press, 2007.
(SEMESTER II)
5 Credits: 5 (L)
Periods per week: 5 Theory : 70
Course Outcome (CO2) English Literature
• Learn about literary terms related to fiction
• Study the stories written by prominent story writers
• Understand history of English literature
Introduction to the Study of Fiction
UNIT-I
1.Theoretical concepts related to Literature
a) Literature and Society
b) Literature in Today’s World
2. Literary Terms
Novel and Novella, Short Story, Plot and Character, Conflict, Point of View, Novel of Ideas, Protagonist/Hero,
Narrator ,The Novel of Character ,The Psychological Novel ,Bildungsroman ,Gothic Novel, Metafiction, Adventure
Novel, Historical Novel, The Regional Novel, Picaresque Novel, Epistolary Novel, Science Fiction
Prescribed Text: A Glossary of Literary Terms 11th Edition by M.H. Abrams and Geoffrey Galt
Harpham, Cengage Learning, 2015
3. (a) Prescribed Text: All Time Stories ed. by Department of English , Khalsa College Patiala,2018
The following stories are to be studied:
1. The Interview : Khushwant Singh
2. The Last Leaf: O’ Henry
3. The Lottery Ticket: Anton Chekov
4. A Friend in Need : W. Somerset Maugham
5. The Night the Bed Fell: James Thurber
6. The Lion’s Daughter: Kahlil Gibran
7. War: Luigi Pirandello
8. Sharing: Gurdial Singh
Unit -II
4. (a) The Great Gatsby by F. Scott Fitzgerald
Suggested Readings:
• Hudson, W.H. An Outline History of English Literature. B.I. Publications Pvt. Ltd,2008.
• Forster, E.M. Aspects of Novel. Pelican Books, 1962
22
UNIT-I
Q.1 An essay type question with internal choice related to the Theoretical Concepts related to
Literature in about 300 words. 10 marks
Q-2. This question will pertain to important literary terms. Students will attempt any five out of the
given seven terms in about 30 -50 words each. 2x5=10
Marks
Q-3. A critical question with internal choice relating to theme, character, episode, title, main ideas from
All Time
Stories to be attempted in about 300 words. 10 Marks
UNIT-II
Q. 4. A critical question with internal choice relating to theme, character, episode, title, main ideas from
The Great
Gatsby to be attempted in about 300 words. 10 Marks
UNIT-III
Q. 5. This question will cover the entire syllabus. There will be 15 questions in all, each carrying
2 marks. The student will have to attempt all the fifteen questions. 3 questions are to be set from
literary terms (only very brief definitions should be asked); 9 questions shall be set from the text All Time
Stories and 3 from The Great Gatsby. The nature of questions in this section should be such that the
student should be able to answer each question in about 25 to 30 words. There shall be no choice in
this section.
15x2=30 Marks
23
ch-,- Hkkx çFke - fgUnh lkfgR;
leSLVj & 1
5 ØsfMV ¼4 ySDpj $ 1 V~;wVksfj;y½
dqy vad % 100 ikl çfr'kr % 35
vkarfjd ewY;kadu % 30 vkarfjd ewY;kadu esa ikl gksus ds dqy vad% 11
fyf[kr ijh{kk % 70 fyf[kr ijh{kk esa ikl vad% 25
le;% rhu ?kaVs
uksV% lIrkg eas N% ihfj;M esa ls nks ihfj;M dEiksft+'ku dks fn, tk,¡xs] ftuesa fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh la[;k 15&20
rd jgsxhA
dkslZ vkÅVde ¼ikB~;Øe miyfC/k½

1- çLrqr ikB~;Øe ls fo|kFkhZ fgUnh lkfgR; ds bfrgkl dk vk/kkjHkwr Kku çkIr djus esa l{ke gksaxsA
2- vk/kqfud dfork dh foLr`r tkudkjh çkIr djds fo|kFkhZ dfork ys[ku dh vksj vkd`"V gksaxs
3- lelkef;d fo"k;ksa ij fucU/k jpuk ls] ys[ku dyk esa i;kZIr lq/kkj gksxk rFkk muds fopkjksa esa ifjiDork
vk;sxhA
ikB~;Øe
¼[k.M&d½
bl [k.M ds fuEukuqlkj nks Hkkx gkasxs&
1- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼dsoy vkfndky½A vkfndky dk ukedj.k] ifjfLFkfr;k¡] ço`fÙk;k¡]
pUncjnkbZ vksj muds i`Fohjkt jklksa dh çkekf.kdrk@vçekf.kdrkA
2- fucU/k ys[ku ¼lkekf;d leL;kvksa ls lEcfU/kr½
¼[k.M&[k½
1- nhfidk ¼vk/kqfud fgUnh dkO;½ % laiknd MkW- gsejkt fueZe] iatkch fo'ofo|ky;] ifV;kyk çdk'ku
mijksDr iqLrd esa ls fuEufyf[kr N% dfo;ksa dh fu/kkZfjr dfork,¡
1- t;'kadj çlkn% vk¡lw] çse&ifFkd
2- lw;Zdkar f=ikBh ^fujkyk* % fHk{kqd] fo/kok
3- lqfe=kuanu iar% rkt] Hkkjr ekrk
4- vKs;% esjk psgjk mnkl] losjs mBk rks
5- losZ'oj n;ky lDlsuk% foxr I;kj] iksLVj vkSj vkneh
2- ^Fkds ik¡o* ¼miU;kl½% Hkxorhpj.k oekZ] jktiky ,aM lUt+] fnYyhA
¼[k.M&x½
mijksDr leps ikB~;Øe esa ls laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys 15 ç'u iwNs tk;saxsA
fo|kfFkZ;ksa vkSj ijh{kdksa ds fy, vko';d funsZ'k

1- ikB~;Øe ds lHkh [k.Mksa esa ls ç'u iwNs tk,axsA
2- ç'ui= dks rhu [k.Mksa d] [k] x esa foHkDr fd;k tk,xkA
3- [k.M&d
1- fgUnh lkfgR; dk vkfndky ¼rhu esa ls ,d ç'u½ vad 8
24
2- fucU/k ys[ku ¼lkef;d leL;kvksa ls lEcaf/kr½ vad 8
4- [k.M&[k
1- nhfidk% vkykspukRed ç'u
¼dfo ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís'; vkfn½ rhu esa ls ,d ç'u
vad 8
lçlax O;k[;k ¼rhu esa ls ,d O;k[;k½ vad 4
2- ^Fkds ik¡o* ls rhu vkykspukRed ç'u
¼ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís';@pfj=&fp=.k vkfn½ rhu esa ls ,d ç'u
vad 8
4- [k.M&x
bl [k.M ds vUrxZr lewps ikB~;Øe ls lEcaf/kr 15 laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys ç'u fcuk fodYi
ds iwNs tk,¡xsA lHkh dk mÙkj nsuk vfuok;Z gksxkA 15x2=30
vkarfjd ewY;kadu ds dqy 30 vadksa dk foHkktu fuEu çdkj ls gS&

vkarfjd ewY;kadu% dqy vad 30
mifLFkfr % 06
,lkbueSaV@çkstSDV % 12
nks ,e-,l-Vh- % 12
25
ch-,- Hkkx çFke - fgUnh lkfgR;
leSLVj & 2
5 ØsfMV ¼4 ySDpj $ 1 V~;wVksfj;y½
fyf[kr ijh{kk % 70 fyf[kr ijh{kk esa ik vad% 25
le;% rhu ?kaVs
rd jgsxhA
ikB~;Øe
¼[k.M&d½
1- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼dsoy HkfDrdky½A HkfDrdky dh ifjfLFkfr;k¡] ço`fÙk;k¡] pkjksa 'kk[kkvksa
ds çfrfuf?k dfo & dchj] tk;lh] lwjnkl rFkk rqylhnkl ds dkO; dh fo'ks"krk,¡] HkfDrdky & Lo.kZ;qxA
2- eqgkojs o yksdksfDr;k¡ ¼vFkZ crkrs gq, okD; esa ç;ksx½ rFkk foijhrkFkZd 'kCn
¼[k.M&[k½
1- ^lkr dgkfu;k¡*] laiknd% bZ'oj nkl tkSgj] iatkch fo'ofo|ky; ifV;kyk çdk'kuA
2- ^dcZyk* ¼ukVd½ çsepan] laiknd% lq/kk ftrsUæ] f'ko cqDl baVjuS'kuy ifCyds'kUt+] fnYyh
¼[k.M&x½
mijksDr lewps ikB~;Øe esa ls ¼O;kdkj.k dks NksM+ dj½ laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys 15 ç'u iwNs tk;saxsA
3- [k.M&d
3- fgUnh lkfgR; dk HkfDrdky ¼rhu esa ls ,d ç'u½ vad 8
O;kdj.k fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe ¼pkj vadksa ds eqgkojs vkSj yksdksfDr;k¡ vad 8
rFkk pkj vadksa ds foijhrkFkZd 'kCn iwNs tk;saxs½
4- [k.M&[k
3- ^lkr dgkfu;k¡*] vkykspukRed ç'u
vad 8
4- ^dcZyk* esa ls rhu vkykspukRed ç'u
vad 8
4- [k.M&x
bl [k.M ds vUrxZr lewps ikB~;Øe esa ls ¼O;kdj.k dks NksM+ dj½ 15 laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys
ç'u fcuk fodYi ds iwNs tk,¡xsA lHkh dk mÙkj nsuk vfuok;Z gksxkA 15x2=30
26
mifLFkfr % 06
nks ,e-,l-Vh- % 12
27
Programme Learning Outcomes
Defence and Strategic Studies
1. Upon completion of the Course in Defence and Strategic Studies, a student should have
acquired basic competency in strategic affairs covering a wide spectrum of interstate
security to global security issues including non-kinetic dimensions.
2. Shall develop capability in understanding the implications of use and threat of use of force
in International relations.
3. Shall seek, identify and apply the acquired knowledge in defence and strategic studies on
contemporary issues of strategic relevance.
4. Ability to move from LOTS (Lower Order of Thinking Skills) to HOTS (Higher Order of
Thinking Skills) in Defence and Strategic Studies.
5. The learning of strategic studies shall arm the candidates to independently choose further
course of action in his/her life whether pursuing higher education by taking specialized
course in honours or identifying a career for himself or herself.

28
(Semester- I)
DEFENCE AND STRATEGIC STUDIES
WAR & ITS VARIOUS ASPECTS
Duration: 3 hrs. Theory: 56 Marks Max.
Marks: 100 Internal Assessment: 24 Marks Pass
Marks: 35% Practical Examination: 20 Marks
Credits: 4 Lectures of Theory +2 Lectures of Practical = 5 Credits
INSTRUCTION FOR PAPER SETTER/EXAMINER/STUDENTS
The question paper covering the entire syllabus of the concern semester shall be divided
into three Sections I.e. Section A, B & C. Section A & B will consist of 08 questions i.e. 04 questions
from each Section of the syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt at least 2 questions from
each section A & B. Each question will carry 09 marks. Section C will consist of 10 short answer
type questions covering the entire syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt all the
questions. Each question will carry 2 marks.
PAPER-I: WAR & ITS VARIOUS ASPECTS
Learning Outcomes - After undergoing this course a student will be in a position to –
 Clearly understand the definition, meaning and distinguish basic concepts of war;
 Various types of war and its various typologies, techniques and characteristics; and
 Grasp the concept and theories of nuclear war in detail.
CONTENTS
Section A
1. WAR: Definition, Nature and brief history of warfare.
a) Types of Warfare- Conventional and Non-Conventional (in brief)
b) Features of Modern Warfare
c) Principles of war
2. ART OF WAR
a) Strategy: Meaning, Definition and Types
b) Tactics: Meaning, Definition and Types
c) War as an Instrument of State Policy
Section B
1. PSYCHOLOGICAL WARFARE: Definition, Concept and Instruments, Functions and
Limitations.
2. GUERILLA WARFARE: Origin and Concept, Principles and Techniques
a) Characteristics of Guerilla Warfare.
b) Counter Guerilla Warfare Measures.
3. NUCLEAR WARFARE
a) Beginning of Nuclear Era.
b) Effects of Nuclear Explosion.
c) Nuclear Strategies- Deterrence and Massive Retaliation.
4. MISSILES: Types and Their Classification.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
1. Singh, Bhupinder - Defence Studies
2. Birnie, Arther - Art of War
3. Boring, E.G.: Psychology in the Armed Forces
4. Burne, A - Art of War on Land
5. Copeland, N: Psychology of a Soldier.
6. Das, S.T.,(1970) An Introduction to the Art of War,
29
7. Dupuy, R.Earnest(1970), The Encyclopaedia of Military History, Macdonold, London.
8. Hasnain, Qamar, Darshan Singh (Translated): Fauji Prati Manovigyan (Punjabi)
9. Kalkat, O.S. & Sidhu S.S.: Jung: Sankalap ate Vividh Pakh (Punjabi)
10. Osanka, F.M.: Modern Guerrilla Warfare.
11. Palit, D.K. - Essential of Military Knowledge
12. Shyam Lal & Mukherjee - Art of War on Land
13. Sidhu, K.S.: War and Its Principles.
14. Tripathi, K.S.: Evolution of Nuclear Strategies.
15. Worley - New Development in Weapon, Tactics and organization
16. Wright, Quincy - A Study of war
17. Andreski S., (1968) Military Organization and Society, Univ. California Press, Berkeley.
30
(Semester- I)
PRACTICAL
Duration: 03 hrs. Max. Marks: 20
Written Test: 01 hrs. Written Test: 10 Marks
Viva-Voce: 02 hrs. Viva-Voce: 05 Marks
Record Book: 05 Marks
Note: The Practical exam will be conducted by both one External and One Internal Examiner.
CONTENTS
A. MAP:
i. Definition and Features
ii. Classification and Marginal Information of a Topo-Sheet and its utility for Military.
iii. Enlargement and Reduction of Maps
B. CONVENTIONAL SIGNS AND SYMBOLS:
i. Military Conventional Signs
ii. Geographical Conventional Signs
C. GRID SYSTEM:
i. Four Figure Grid System System
ii. Six Figure Grid System System
D. SCALE:
i. Definition
ii. Methods of representing scale:
a. inter-conversion of Statement into Representative Fraction.
b. Construction of simple Scale line and the comparative scale lines
E. RECORD
F. VIVA VOCE
31
(Semester- II)
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS- DEFENCE ASPECTS
Duration: 3 hrs. Theory: 56 Marks Max.
Marks: 100 Internal Assessment: 24 Marks Pass
Marks: 35% Practical Examination: 20 Marks
from each Section of the syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt at least 2 questions from
each section A & B. Each question will carry 09 marks. Section C will consist of 10 short answer
type questions covering the entire syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt all the
PAPER-II: INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS- DEFENCE ASPECTS

 The basic concepts of international relations and how nation-state system works;
 Acquire competency in military and state - centric aspects of international relations; and
 Its repercussions on interstate affairs and their security dilemma and some economic
aspects of war.
CONTENTS
Section A
I. INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS: CONCEPT, NATURE, SCOPE AND ITS HISTORICAL
EVOLUTION.
II. NATIONAL INTEREST
a) Concept, Definition and Components
b) Instruments for the promotion of National Interest.
III. BALANCE OF POWER
a) Meaning and concept
b) Historical development and Methods
c) Merit and Demerits, Relevance in Contemporary Times
IV. COLD WAR

a) Definition, Causes, History (in brief)
b) Diplomatic, Psychological, Economic effects and Perspective.
V. COLLECTIVE SECURITY
a) Meaning and Concept
b) Role of the UN in Collective Security Management
SECTION-B
VI. DISARMAMENT AND ARMS CONTROL
a) Meaning and Concept
b) History, Arms Control Treaties
c) Hindrances in the way of Disarmament
32
VII. DIPLOMACY
a) Definition and Nature
b) Objectives, Techniques and Functions
VIII. MEANS TO SETTLE INTERNATIONAL DISPUTES
a) Pacific Means
b) Coercive Means
X. BRETON WOODS TO WTO, IMF, WORLD BANK
a) Structure and Role
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Flemming, D.F., The Cold War and its Origin, Doubleday, University of Michigan, United States,
1961.
2. Gaddis Lewis John, The Cold War, Penguin, UK, 2011.
3. Goldblat Jozef, Arms Control: The New Guide to Negotiations and Agreements with New CD-
ROM Supplement, SAGE, London, 2002.
4. Griffiths Martin, International Relations: The Key Concepts, Psychology Press, 2002.
5. Joseph , Frankel , The Making of Foreign Policy, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1963.
6. Knapp, W., A History of War and Peace, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1967.
7. Kumar, Mahendra, Theoretical Aspects of International Politics, University of Notre Dame
Press, Notre Dame, Ind., 1959
8. Lawrence Robert M., Arms Control and Disarmament, Burgers, 1973.
9. Lucas, A History of Cold War, Bloomsbury Publishing London, 2008.
10. Morgenthau, H., Politics Among Nations, McGraw-Hill New York, 1993.
11. Morton, Halperin , Limited War in the Nuclear Age, Greenwood Press, Michigan, 1978.
12. Orakhelashvili Alexander, Collective Security, Oxford University Press, UK, 2011.
13. Sarooshi Dan, The United Nations and the Development of Collective Security: The Delegation
by the UN Security Council of Its Chapter VII Powers, Oxford University Press, UK, 1999.
14. Sheehan Michael J., The Balance of Power: History and Theory, Taylor & Francis, 1996.
15. Qamar, Hasanan, Psychology for the Fighting Man, Penguin Books, U.K, 1943
33
(Semester- II)
PRACTICAL
CONTENTS
A. DIRECTIONS:
i. Methods of expressing Directions
ii. Types of North
iii. Finding out True North Direction by equal Altitude Method, Watch Method, Compass
Method etc.
B. Bearing and Inter-conversions of Bearings in detail.
C. Liquid Prismatic Compass: functions of its various parts, and the following exercises on the
Prismatic Compass:
i. Compass Handling
ii. To determine magnetic North by Compass.
iii. Setting the MAP by Compass.
iv. To find out the bearing of a point from other point situated on the ground.
D. To determine own’s and enemy’s position on the MAP by Re-section and Inter- section
methods with the help of compass.
E. SERVICE PROTRACTOR:
i. Types and uses.
F. RECORD
G. VIVA VOCE
34
SEMESTER I
ECONOMICS
PAPER- MICRO ECONOMICS AND INDIAN ECONOMY-I
CREDITS: 5
Total Marks: 100 Pass Marks: 35%
External Assessment: 70 Time Allowed: 3 hours
Internal Assessment: 30 Credits: 5(4L+1T)
Course Outcome : The students will be able to apply micro economic principles and models to define and
address market failures and to describe issues such as wage inequalities, understanding of producer choice
and consumer behaviour.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER-SETTER

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections. A and B will have
fourquestions each. Each question shall carry 10 marks. Section C will consist of 10 short
answertype questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 30 marks in all.
Eachshort answer type question will carry 3 marks. The candidates are required to give answer
ofeach short type question in about 100 words.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CANDIDATE
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and theentire
Section C. The use of simple calculator is allowed. The candidates are required to giveanswer of
each short type questions in about 100 words.
SECTION –A
Meaning and Scope of Economics; Definition of Economics (Adam Smith, Marshall andRobbins).
Theory of Demand and Consumer Behaviour: Utility Analysis and Indifference CurveAnalysis;
Elasticity of Demand and its measurement. Production Function: Law of Returns toScale and Law
of Variable Proportions. Cost Concepts and Cost Curves in the Short and the LongPeriods.
SECTION –B
Nature and Characteristics of Indian Economy on the eve of independence. New Agricultural
Strategy and Green Revolution. Industrial Policy of India since 1991 with special emphasis onrecent
trends of liberalisation. Role and Problems of Small and Large Scale Industries. Role ofpublic and
private sector in industrial development of India.
RECOMMENDED READINGS
1. A.W. Stonier and D.C.Hauge: A Text Book of Economic Theory (Fourth edition) Part-I.
2.P.N. Chopra (1998): Micro Economic Theory and Welfare Economics, KalyaniPublishers, New
Delhi.
3. H.L. Ahuja (2017): Advanced Economic Theory, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
4.Koutsoyiannis, A.(2014). Modern Micro-economics,MacmillPress, London.
5. A.N. Aggarwal: Indian Economy, Wiley Eastern Ltd.,
6. Rudder Datt& K.P.M. Sandram: Indian Economy, S. Chand & Co.
7. Misra and Puri: Indian Economy, Himalyan Publishing House.
8. B.B. Tandon and Kulwinder Kaur, Indian Economy, Tata McGraw.
SUPPLEMENTARY READINGS
1. R.G. Lipsey: An Introduction to Positive Economics (4th Edition), English Language Book
Society.
2. Hal. R. Varian: Intermediate Microeconomics (Eighth edition)
3. N.C.Ray, Micro-Economic Theory
4. Government of India: Five Year Plan (latest)
5. Government of India: Economic Survey (latest)
6..K.S. Gill: Evaluation of Indian Economy, NCERT.
35
SEMESTER II
ECONOMICS
PAPER- MICRO ECONOMICS AND INDIAN ECONOMY-II
CREDITS: 5
Internal Assessment: 30
Course Outcome : The students will be able to apply micro economic principles and models to define and
address market failures and to describe issues such as wage inequalities, understanding of producer choice
and consumer behaviour.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four
questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will
consist of 10 short-answer type questions of three marks each, which will cover the entire syllabus
uniformly and will carry30 marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and theentire
Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type questions inabout 100
words.
SECTION –A
Market forms; Average Revenue and Marginal Revenue under Perfect and Imperfect Competition,
Relationship between Average Revenue, Marginal Revenue and Elasticity of Demand. Price and
Output Determination under Perfect Competition, Monopoly and Monopolistic competitionin the
Short and Long run.Marginal Productivity Theory of Distribution, Ricardian theory of Rent.
SECTION - B
Features of Indian Tax Structure, Foreign Trade: Direction and Composition of Exports and
Imports and changes therein since Independence, Balance of Payments: Concept, Trends,causes,
measure of its disequilibrium. Capital Formation: Meaning, importance, reasons of lowcapital
formation in India. Role of NITI AYOG in India. Major Indian Economic Problems:Population
Growth, Poverty, Unemployment and Inflation.
1. A.W. Stonier and D.C.Hauge: A Text Book of Economic Theory (Fourth edition) Part-I.
2.P.N. Chopra (1998): Micro Economic Theory and Welfare Economics, KalyaniPublishers, New
Delhi.
3. H.L. Ahuja (2017): Advanced Economic Theory, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
4.Koutsoyiannis, A.(2014). Modern Micro-economics,MacmillPress, London.
Society.
2. Hal. R. Varian: Intermediate Microeconomics (Eighth edition)
3. N.C.Ray, Micro-Economic Theory
6..K.S. Gill: Evaluation of Indian Economy, NCERT.
36
Semester-I
FINE ARTS
Credit: 5(2L+6P)
Name of No. of Time of Marks Internal Total Credits per

Paper Paper Hrs. Assessment week
History of 1 3 42 18 60 2
Indian Art
Practical 2 4-4 20-20 - 40 3
(Theory and Practical)Total Marks 100 5
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments/Project Works/
Practical works etc,(40%) and two mid semester test/Internal examinations(40%).
*Average of both mid semester tests/Internal examinations.
Semester-II
Credit: 5(2L+6P)
Name of No. of Time of Marks Internal Total Credits per
Paper Paper Hrs. Assessment week
History of 1 3 42 18 60 2
Indian Art
Practical 2 4-4 20-20 - 40 3
(Theory and Practical)Total Marks 100 5
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments/Project Works/
Practical works etc,(40%) and two mid semester test/Internal examinations(40%).
37
Semester-I
OBJECTIVES:
The objective of the course emphasizes on unfolding of the student’s mind and inculcating in him
involvement in the art processes by exploration in basic studies, training in observation and in
articulation with emphasis on subjective and analytical study of material and objects.
The range of experience covers two and three dimensional forms both the point of view of specially
defined structural problems and their social and historic significance.
In additional to the production of an artifact a student is required to do the mounting, framing and
presentation of the artifacts in the form of exhibition and display.
The course serves to extend the student’s awareness of the visual arts and mechanism of Creativity,
precision, tools and materials.
Paper No. Nomenclature of the paper Max. Marks Time Allowed
Paper- A (Theory) History of Indian Art 42 pass marks: 35% (15mks) 3 hours
Paper-B (Practical)
Section-A Still Life 20 pass marks: 35%( 14mks) 4 hours
Section-B Calligraphy/ Design 20 4 hours
(Int. Assmnt) 18 pass marks: 35% (6 mks)
Total 82+18 = 100
(Candidate must pass in Theory and Practical Separately)
Course Outcome : Students will able to
 Recognize and understand the basic methods of mediums, theories and they will be able to
understand the quality of work of art.
Instructions: 42 marks for the theory paper and 18marks for internal assessment. 40 marks for the
practical papers for each section.
a) The question paper will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
b) The paper setter should set the question paper in three sections: Section A,B,C
c) The division of marks for the question paper shall be as under:
SECTION-A
The examiner will set 4 questions from Unit I of the syllabus uniformly. The candidate will attempt 2
SECTION-B
The examiner will set 4 questions from Unit II of the syllabus uniformly. The candidate will attempt 2
SECTION-C
9 very short answer type questions from the entire syllabus. Each question will carry 2 marks.
38
Paper - A Theory
History of Indian Art
Max. Marks: 42 Time: 3 hours
UNIT-I
Art Appreciation:
1.ELEMENTS OF ART - Line, Form, Colour, Tone, Texture, Space, Perspective, Composition.
2.PRINCIPLES OF ART - Unity, Rhythm, Balance, Emphasis, Variety, Proportion, Movement.
3.Definition of Art , Craft. Comparison between Art and Craft .
UNIT-II
History of Indian Paintings:
1.PRE HISTORIC CAVE PAINTINGS - Introduction, Subject Matter, Material and Technique.
2.AJANTA - Introduction, subject matter, technique and aesthetic appreciation of Avlokiteshvara, Dying
Princess, Mother and Child before Buddha and Visvantra Jataka.
3.BAGH CAVES –Brief History, special characteristics with reference to 'A Group of Dancers'.
4.BADAMI CAVES - . Brief History, special characteristics with reference to Shiv Parvati
Suggested Readings
Sant singh and Agyakaur : Bharti Murti Kala da Itihaas (Punjabi)
Read, Herbet : Meaning of Art
Aggarwal, V.S. : Bhartiya Kala(Hindi)
D. Barrett, and Gray B : Painting of India
Ray, N.R. : An approach of Indian Art
Dr. Saroj Rani : An Approach of Indian Art Bharti Murti Kala ate Chiterkala
Saraswati ,S.K. : A Survey of Indian Sculpture
Gardner, Helen : Art through the ages
Gombrich, E.H. : The Story of Art
Rowland, B. : The Art and Architecture of India
Aggarwal, V.S. : Heritage of Indian Art
Aggarwal, V.S. : Indian Art (English)
Dr. Saroj Chaman : Bharti Chiterkala ate Murti Kala da Itihaas ate Kala Tatava
Dr. Saroj Chaman :Soundariya Shastra
39
PAPER-B (PRACTICAL)
(For practical paper)
1. The syllabus is self explanatory in the paper.
2. Choice of medium should be left the candidates.
3. While evaluation the examiner should see the competency, its technical artistic,composition,
tone, texture and quality.
Section- A: Still Life Study
Time: 4 hrs max.marks-20
(a)Objects to Study proportion, Volume,Texture, Study of Light and Shade and Rhythmic relationship
of masses.
Number of objects: Three objects excluding drapery
Medium: Oil,Water or Pastel Colour
Size: 1/2 imperial
Section- B: Calligraphy/ Design

Time: 4 hrs max.marks-20
(a)Study of different styles of alphabets. Creative writing of different styles.
Language: Any
Medium: Poster Colors/ Indian ink
Size: 1/2 imperial.
(b)Design: Border, all over and corner design, simple, geometric and floral design, Preparation of
color chart.
Medium: Poster Colour.
Size: ¼ imperial.
40
Semester-II
OBJECTIVES:
involvement in the art processes by exploration in basic studies, training in observation and in
articulation with emphasis on subjective and analytical study of material and objects.
The range of experience covers two and three dimensional forms both the point of view of specially
defined structural problems and their social and historic significance.
Paper- A (Theory) History of Indian Art 42 pass marks: 35% (15mks) 3 hours
Paper-B (Practical)
Section-A Poster 20 pass marks: 35%(14mks) 4 hours
Section-B Head Study 20 4 hours
(Int. Assmnt) 18 pass marks: 35% (6 mks)
Total 82+18 = 100
Course Outome : Students will able to
 Recognize and understand the basic methods of mediums, theories and they will be able to
understand the quality of work of art.
Instructions: 42 marks for the theory paper and 18 marks for internal assessment. 40 marks for the
practical papers for each section.
SECTION-A
The examiner will set 4 questions from Unit I of the syllabus uniformly. The candidate will attempt 2
SECTION-B
The examiner will set 4 questions from Unit II of the syllabus uniformly. The candidate will attempt 2
SECTION-C
41
Paper - A Theory
History of Indian Art
UNIT-I
History of Indian Sculpture:
Introduction of the Materials, Style and Subject Matter used in all the Civilizations and Periods.
1.INDUS VALLEY CIVILIZATION - Brief history with special reference to
a)Bust of Priest.
b)Bronze Dancing Girl
c)seals.
2.MAURYA PERIOD - Brief history with special reference to
a)Lion Capital of Sarnath
b)Bull Capital of Rampurva
c)Yakshi of Didarganj
3.BHARHUT STUPA - Brief history with special reference to
a)ChalukokaDevta,
b)Medallions of Dream of Queen Maya.
4. SANCHI STUPA - Introduction with special reference to Eastern and Western Torans.
UNIT-II
1. MUDRA- Abhaya, Bhumisparsh, Dharamchakra, Dhyana Mudra.
2. MATHURA PERIOD - Brief introduction to history characteristics of
a) Katra Buddha
b) Statue of Kaniskha
c)Yakshi figures.
3. GANDHARA PERIOD - Brief history with characteristic study of
a) Fasting Buddha
b)Mahaparinirvana relief.
4. SARNATH- Introduction and special characteristics
a) Budha from Sarnath with Dharamchakrapariwartan Mudra
b) Vishnu Anatsayan From Deogarh
Suggested Readings
Sant singh and Agyakaur: Bharti Murti Kala da Itihaas (Punjabi)
Read, Herbet: Meaning of Art
Rowland, b. : The Art and Architecture of India
Dr. Saroj Chaman :Soundariya Shastra
42
PAPER-B (PRACTICAL)
1.The syllabus is self explanatory in the paper.
2.Choice of medium should be left the candidates.
3.While evaluation the examiner should see the competency, its technical artistic, composition, tone,
texture and quality.
Section- A: Poster
Time: 4hrs max. marks-20
(a) Use of maximum of four colours. Emphasis be laid conveying the theme, layout and lettering
should be employ indorse to the sub-matter.
Medium: Poster colour
Size: ½ imperial
Section- B:Head Study

Time: 4hrs max.marks-20
(a) Study of human head (life/cast) for proportions, balance and study of angles, rhythmic rendering
of structure through light and shade.
Medium: color pencil, pastels,oils
Size: ½ Imperial
Four selected works will be submitted out of work done in the session.
43
B.A. PART – I SEMESTER – IST
FOLK ART & CULTURE
5 CREDITS : 4H(L) + 2H(P)
Maximum Marks: 100 Time allowed: 3 hours
Theory: 50 marks Pass Marks: 35%
Practical: 30 marks
Internal Assessment: 20 marks
Course Outcome : The student will learn to:
 Interpret the interrelationship between culture and society

 Acquaint with culture of Punjab specially its rituals, rites, tradition, fairs and festivals.
 Explore the handicrafts of Punjab.

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Section A & B will have 4 questions from
the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 8 marks each. Section C will consist of 9 short
answer type question of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CANDIDATES
Candidate are required to attempt two questions each from section A & B of the question paper
and the entire section C.
Section - A
1H ;fGnkukoe ;wkil ;zebg, bZSD ns/ ftP/PskJhnK.
2H ;fGnkukolnoE, gfoGkPk, sZs, r[D ns/ spdhbh.
3H b'e (Folk), ;zebg ns/ gq;zr, ;w{fje u/sBk ns/ b'e^f;oiDktK.
4H lokDwrw (Folklore): pirBwSw, srUp Aqy AMS
5H gzikphb'eXkoklgzikphnK dh ihtB^P?bh ns/ gqw[Zy ;fGnkukoes"o^sohe/
Section - B
1H b'eêbklgfoGkPk, ftfGzBo{g ns/ ftP/PskJhnK
2H gzikp dhnK b'eêbktKlj;sebk ns/ Bku
3H gzikp dk ;fGnkukoe fJfsjk;l g[oksB ns/ wZXekbhBgzikp
4H f;zX xkNh ;fGnskl y[dkJh ns/ nfGP/e, b'eK dk ofjD^;fjD ns/ ;fGnkuko
5H BwrqIAwrIAnsmwj: ieiqhws Aqy siBAwcwr
Practical
1H gzikph g/Av{ ;wki ns/ ;fGnkukopko/ ikDekoh (w"fyenkvhT[^fti[nb)
(i) d/;h wjhB/, fsZE ns/ fsT[jko
(ii) jkVh ns/ ;kT{Dh dhnK |;bK
(iii) Bro y/Vk ns/ j'oXkofwen;EkB
(iv) ;ZE, N'pk, v/ok, EkJh (XowPkbk) ns/ wVQhnK
(v) g/Av{ gfotko ns/ Pohek
(vi) xo, n"osK ns/ wodK d/ ezwêki
(vii) otkfJshfeZs/
(viii) y/s, fgV ns/ vzro^gP{
(ix) g/Av{ ihtBBkbi[VhnKuhIK
(x) pdbd/ gfog/\
2H f;zX{ xkNh ns/ gzikph ;fGnkukoeihtB ;pzXhikDekoh B{z gqrNkT[AdhnKs;thoK ns/ fJBQK dh
ftnkfynk ;pzXh g{o/ ;w?;No ftuftfdnkoEhtZb'Afsnkoehshgq?eNhebB'N^p[Ze.
3H j;s ebk d/ w'Nh|, dohnK, gZyhnK, |[beohnK ns/ j'oj;sebkdhnKt;s{nK d/ fuZsofJeZm/
eoe/ gq?eNhebB'N^p[Ze ftudoieo'.
44
Books Suggested
1H gzikp dh b'eXkok ^ tDikok p/dh

2H b'eXow ^ i;ftzdof;zx
3H b'eXkok ns/ b'eXkok ^ gzikphftek; ftGkr, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh,
ftfrnkB gfNnkbk, ftP/P nze ‘b'eXkok’
4H w/b/ ns/ fsT[jko ^ BtosB eg{o
5H Folk Religion ^ G.V. Pleknov
6H gzikp d/ gqf;ZX w/b/ ^ ;ot/n g[;se, GkPkftGkr
7H Prime Time Culture ^ Tylor, Edward Burnett.
8H Theories of Religion ^ Bhupinder Singh
9H Rites of the Passage ^ Gennep
10H Politics, Law and Ritual ^ Glukman. Max.
in Tribal Society
11H fJwkfJnbd[oo\kfJw ^ ;wkiftfrnkBgZXoftP/P nze
gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh, gfNnkbk
12H Profit over People ^ Noam Chomsky
13H Orientalism ^ Eduward Said
14H Jh. Golden Bough ^ Frazer, James
45
B.A. PART – I (Semester – II)
FOLK ART & CULTURE
Practical: 30 marks
 Interpret the interrelationship between culture and society

 Acquaint with culture of Punjab specially its rituals, rites, tradition, fairs and festivals.
 Explore the handicrafts of Punjab.

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Section A & B will have 4 questions from
the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 8 marks each. Section C will consist of 9 short
answer type question of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
Section - A
1H gzikp d/ b'e^Bkulb'e^Bku dh gfoGkPk, wzst ns/ ;fGnkukoewjZssk. gzikp d/ b'e^BkuKdh
;wkfie ns/ ;fGnkukoewjZssk.
2H gzikp d/ b'e^Bkudk ;fGnkukoefgS'eV ns/ o{glfrZXk, GzrVk, M{wo, ;zwh, b[Zvh ns/ Xwkb.
3H gzikphb'e^BkuK d/ pdbd/ gqk\/glpdboj/ ;fGnkukoes"o^sohe/, N?eBkbih ns/ seBhe.
4H b'e^;kIlb'e^;kIK dk fBek; ns/ ftek; ftfGzBsk d/ nkXko ns/ o{g.
5H gzikp d/ b'e^;kIlYzv, Y'b, Y'beh, s{zph, opkp, ;kozrh, tzMbh, p[xd{, ekN', ;Zg, fuwNk ns/
j'o.
Section - B
1H b'e^y/vKl ;zebg, T[d/P,;wkfie ns/ ;fGnkukoewjZssk, b'e^y/vK ns/ y/vKftunzso.
2H gzikpdhnKb'e^y/vKlT[wo ns/ fbzrnXkfosftfGzBsk, ;ohoe s/ ;wkfie ;o'eko.
3H gzikphdhnKb'e^y/vK d/ o{gloZ;hNZgDk, e'Nbk^Sgkdh, nZvh^SVZgk, ;Nkg{, epZvh, e[Psh,
r[Zvh^vzvk, fyd'^y[zvh, fgZm{, pzN/, rhN/ (o'V/) nkfd
4H b'e^;kfjslgfoGkPk, o{g ns/ ftP/PskJhnK, b'e^f;nkDgK, p[MkosK, ejkDhnK, rkEk, feZ;/,
rhsnkfd.
5H b'e^rhslrhs, ;[jkr, x'VhnK, p'bhnK, f;ZmDhnK, d'j/, NZg/. fJBQK dh ;fGnkukoewjZssk
Practical
1H gzikph d/ b'e^BkuKpko/ ikDekoh (w"fye) ns/ nkvhT[^fti[nb.
2H ;[jkr, x'VhnK, p'bhnK, f;ZmDhnK, d'j/ ns/ NZg/ pko/ ikDekohlf;nkDgK, p[MkosK,
b'eêEktKpko/ ikDekoh.
3H b'e^y/vK, oZ;hNZgDk, e'Nbk^Sgkeh, nZvh^SVZgk, epZvh, ;Nkg{ nkfdpko/ ikDekoh.
4H gzikp d/ gqw[Zyb'e^;kIkpko/ ikDekoh.
5H T[go'esikDekoh B{z gqdofPseodhnKs;thoK ns/ ftnkfynktKpko/ gq?eNheb |kfJb.
46
Books Suggested

2H b'eXow ^ i;ftzdof;zx
3H b'eXkok ns/ b'eXkok ^ gzikphftek; ftGkr, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh,
6H gzikp d/ gqf;ZX w/b/ ^ ;ot/n g[;se, GkPkftGkr
in Tribal Society
11H fJwkfJnbd[oo\kfJw ^ ;wkiftfrnkBgZXoftP/P nze
47
SEMESTER- I
SOCIOLOGY: PAPER -I: FUNDAMENTALS OF SOCIOLOGY – I
5 CREDITS: 4H(L)+1H(T)
MAXIMUM MARKS: 100 TIME ALLOWED: 3HRS
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT: 30 PASS MARKS :35%
EXTERNAL ASSESSMENT: 70
Course Outcome : Upon successful completion students will be able to:
 Understand the nature of sociology.
 Get depth knowledge about basic concepts of society i.e. Social Structure, Society, Social
Organization, Community, Association, Norms, Values, Status and Role.
 Understand how the process of socialization happens in society and get the knowledge about
cultural aspects.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four questions
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist of 10 short-
answer type questions, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 30 marks in all. Each
short-answer type question will carry three marks each. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of internal
assessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B.Section C is compulsory.
SECTION-A
i) Sociology: Definition, nature and scope; Relationship with other Social Sciences:Psychology,
Anthropology, History, Economics, Political Science.
ii) Basic Concepts: Social Structure, Society, Social Organization, Community,Association, Norms, Values,
Status and Role.
SECTION-B
i) Socialization: Meaning, processes and agencies. Theories of self (Freud, Cooley andMead)
ii) Culture: Meaning, characteristics; material and non-material culture; cultural lag; culture and
civilization.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Bottomore, T. B. 1972. Sociology: A Guide to Problems and Literature, Bombay:George Allen and Unwin
2. Giddens, A 2000. Sociology: An Introduction, Cambridge: Polity Press.
3. GISBERT, PSJ, 1993. Fundamentals of Sociology, Bombay: Orient Longman.
4. Haralambos, M.and Holborn,M. 2013. Sociology: Themes and Perspectives.UK: Harper Collins
5. Herskovits, Mel J, 1969. Cultural Anthropology, New Delhi: Oxford and IBH Publishers.
6. Kaur, Savinderjit 1987. Samaj Vigyan De Mool Sankalp, Patiala: PunjabiUniversity.
7. Kaur, Savinderjit . 1995(2015) smwj ivigAwn nwl jwx pCwx Bwg-1. jlMDr: inaU Akwdimk pbilisMg
kMpnI
8. Koening, Samuel 1968. Sociology: An Introduction to the Science of Society, NewYork: Barnes and Noble
(Punjabi Translation also available. Translated byBaldev Singh and published by Punjabi University.)
9. Mann, Michael(ed) 1994. Macmillan Student Encyclopedia of Sociology,London: Macmillan Press.
10. Marshall, Gordon(ed) 2000. Dictionary of Sociology, Delhi: Oxford UniversityPress.
11. Mehta, Jagdish Chander 2007. Fundamentals of Sociology. Jallandher: Raj Publisher
12. Nagla B.K. 2019. Introducing Sociology.Jaipur: Rawat Publication
13. Rao, Shanker C. N. 2019. Sociology:Principles of sociology with an introduction to social thought.New
Delhi: S Chand Publication.
14. Shepard, Jon M. 1981. Sociology, New York: West Publishing Co
48
SEMESTER- II
SOCIOLOGY: PAPER-II: FUNDAMENTALS OF SOCIOLOGY –II
Course Outcome : Upon successful completion students will be able to:
 Understand how the social processes work in social life.
 Get the detailed knowledge about social groups, in which they participate whole life.
 Get the broader look how the great institution like marriage , family, kinship and religion influence
and mould individuals.
 4 Explain how social control and social deviance happens in society.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A and Bwill have four questions
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10marks each. Section C will consist of 10 short-
answer type questions, which will coverthe entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 30 marks in all. Each
short-answer typequestion will carry three marks each. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of
internalassessment.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B.Section C is compulsory.
SECTION A
i) Social Processes: Concept, Types: Integrative (Cooperation, Accommodation,Assimilation) and
disintegrative (Competition and Conflict).
ii) Social Groups: Definition, characteristics, types (primary and secondary; in-group
and out-group; Reference group).
SECTION B
i) Social Institutions: Concept; Marriage (definition and types); Family (definition,types and functions);
Kinship (meaning and functions).
ii) Religion: Meaning and Functions
iii) Social Control: Meaning, Significance and agencies.
iv) Social Deviance: Meaning, characteristics, forms and factors.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Bottomore, T. B. 1972. Sociology: A Guide to Problems and Literature, Bombay:George Allen and Unwin.
2. Giddens, A 2000. Sociology: An introduction, Cambridge: Polity Press.
3. Gisbert, PSJ, 1993. Fundamentals of Sociology, Bombay: Orient Longman.
4. Haralambos, M.andHolborn ,M. 2013. Sociology: Themes and Perspectives.UK: Harper Collins.
5. Kaur, Savinderjit 1987. Samaj Vigyan De Mool Sankalp, Patiala: PunjabiUniversity.
6. Kaur, Savinderjit . 1995(2015) smwj ivigAwn nwl jwx pCwx Bwg-1 . jlMDr : inaU Akwdimk
pbilisMg
kMpnI
7. Koening, Samuel 1968. Sociology: An Introduction to the Science of Society,New York: Barnes and Noble
(Punjabi Translation also available. Translated byBaldev Singh and published by Punjabi University.)
8. Majumdar, and T.N. Madan 1997. An Introduction to Social Anthropology,NOIDA: Mayur Paperbacks
9. Mann, Michael(ed) 1994. Macmillan Student Encyclopedia of Sociology,London: Macmillan Press.
10. Marshall, Gordon (ed) 2000. Dictionary of Sociology, Delhi: Oxford University Press.
11. Mehta, Jagdish Chander 2007. Fundamentals of Sociology. Jallandher : Raj Publisher
12. Nagla B.K. 2019. Intoducing Sociology.Jaipur : Rawat Publication
13. Rao, Shanker C. N. 2019. Sociology:Principles of sociology with an introduction tosocial thought . New
Delhi:
S Chand Publication.
14. Shepard Jon M. 1981. Sociology, New York: West Publishing Co.
49
smYstr pihlw
Drm AiDAYn: BwrqI Drm
kul AMk: 100 smwN: 3 GMty
iQaurI: 70 pws pRqISq: 35
Internal Assesment: 30 Credit: 5 (4L+1T)
Course Outcome : This course inculcates the knowledge of beliefs, practices, scriptures and rituals of
Indian religions. Students will also get the knowledge of primary Sikh sources, Institutions and concepts of
Sikhism.
pypr sYtr leI hdwieqW
pRSn p`qr dy iqMn Bwg hoxgy: a, A Aqy e[ a Aqy A sYkSn ivcoN cwr-cwr pRSn puCy jwxgy[ ividAwrQI ny
hryk sYkSn ivcoN 2-2 pRSn krny hoxgy Aqy hr iek pRSn dy 10 AMk hoxgy[Bwg a ivc idqy gey hryk Drm
(vYidk, bu`D Aqy jYn) ivcoN iek 10 AMk dw pRSn puCxw lwjmI hovygw [ Bwg e ivcoN sMKyp auqrW vwly 10 pRSn
swry islybs ivcoN hoxgy Aqy aunHW dy 30 AMk hoxgy[ hryk pRSn 3-3 AMkW dw hovygw[
pRIiKAwrQI leI hdwieqW
Bwg a Aqy A ivcoN 2-2 pRSn krny hn Aqy Bwg e dy swry pRSn jrUrI hn[
Bwg a (BwrqI Drm: sMKyp jwx-pCwx)
1. vYidk Drm dI muFlI jwxkwrI: vyd, blI Aqy X`g
2. vYidk dyvqy: vrux, AgnI Aqy ieMdr
3. Bgvwn mhWvIr dw jIvn
4. pMj mhW vrq, q`q mImWsw (nON q`q)
5. mhwqmw bu`D dw jIvn
6. cwr AwrIAw s`q, AStWg mwrg
Bwg A (Drm sMskwr Aqy sMklp)
not: vYidk, jYn Aqy bu`D Drm dy ivSyS sMdrB ivc
1. jnm sMskwr
2. Drm pRvyS sMskwr
3. imRqk sMskwr
4. krm
5. punr-jnm
6. mukqI
Bwg e
sMKyp auqr vwly pRSn
shwiek pusqk sUcI
1. ArivMd irqUrwj, bu`D Drm dI rup ryKw, grysIAs bu`ks, pitAwlw.
2. AYm.ihirAwnw, BwrqI drSn dI rUp ryKw, pRBkIrqn isM G (Anu.), XUnIstwr pblIkySn, cMfIgV.
3. srbijMdr isMG, ivSv Drm bwnI, gMRQ, sMprdwie Aqy icMqk, pMjwbI XunIvristI, pitAwlw
4. hrpwl isMG pMnU, Bwrq dy purwqn Drm: iek sMKyp jwxkwrI, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
5. hrbMs isMG, AYl AYm joSI, sMswr dy Drm(Bwg pihlw), pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
6. krmjoq isMG srwa, pRwcIn BwrqI Drm: audBv, suBwA Aqy pqn, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
7. jY cMdr ividAwlMkwr, BwrqI siBAwcwr dI rUp ryKw, iqRlocn isMG (Anu.), pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
8. prmvIr isMG Aqy pRdumn Swh isMG, Bwrq dy pRmuK Drm, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
9. pRdXumn Swh isMG, jYn Drm: ieiqhws, swihq, drSn Aqy sMsikRqI, grysIAs bùks, pitAwlw.
10. rqn isMG j`gI, pMjwbI swihq dw sroq-mUlk ieiqhws (Bwg-pihlw),pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
English
1. S. Das Gupta, A History of Indian Philosophy (Vol.1), Cambridge University Press, New York.
2. Gurbachan Singh Talib, ed., Jainism, Punjabi University, Patiala.
3. Harbans Singh & L. M Joshi, An Introduction to Indian Religions, Punjabi University, Patiala.
4. L.M. Joshi, G.C Pande, et. al., Buddhism, Punjabi University, Patiala.
5. T.M.P Mahadevan, K.R Sundarajan, et. al., Hinduism, Punjabi University, Patiala.
50
smYstr dUjw
Drm AiDAYn: is`K Drm
kul AMk : 100 smwN: 3 GMty
iQaurI : 70 pws pRqISq: 35
Internal Assesment :30 Credit: 5
(4L+1T)
Course Outcome : This course inculcates the knowledge of beliefs, practices, scriptures and rituals of
Indian religions. Students will also get the knowledge of primary Sikh sources, Institutions and concepts of
Sikhism.
pRSn p`qr dy iqMn Bwg hoxgy: a, A Aqy e[a Aqy A sYkSn ivcoN cwr-cwr pRSn puCy jwxgy[ividAwrQI ny hryk
sYkSn ivcoN 2-2 pRSn krny hoxgy Aqy hr iek pRSn dy 10 AMk hoxgy[Bwg e ivcoN sMKyp auqrW vwly 10 pRSn swry
islybs ivcoN hoxgy Aqy aunHW dy 30 AMk hoxgy[ hryk pRSn 3-3 AMkW dw hovygw[
Bwg a (ieiqhwisk p`K Aqy is`K Drm dy muFly sRoq)
1. is`K Drm: auqpqI Aqy smkwlI pRsiQqIAW
2. gurUu nwnk dyv jI: jIvn Aqy isìKAwvW
3. guirAweI prMprw
4. sRI gurU gRMQ swihb: muFlI jwxkwrI
5. vwrW BweI gurdws: pihlI vwr dw ivSw-vsqU
6. sRI dsm gRMQ : muFlI jwxkwrI
Bwg A (Shwdq prMprw Aqy sMsQwvW)
1. gurU Arjn dyv jI dI Shwdq
2. gurU qyg bhwdr jI dI Shwdq
3. bwbw bMdw isMG bhwdr jI dI Shwdq
4. gurduAwrw, sMgq-pMgq
5. mIrI-pIrI
6. Kwlsw
Bwg e (sMKyp auqrW vwly ds pRSn)
shwiek pusqk sUcI
1. suKidAwl isMG, bMdw isMG bhwdr: ieiqhwisk AiDAYn, XunIstwr buks, pitAwlw.
2. hrcrn isMG, gurU nwnk ivSyS AMk, Koj piqRkw, pMjwbI XunIvristI, pitAwlw.
3. ig. hrbMs isMG, sRI dsm gRMQ drpx, gurbwxI syvw pRkwSn, pitAwlw.
4. gMfw isMG Aqy qyjw isMG, is`K ieiqhws (Bwg-1), pMjwbI XunIvristI, pitAwlw.
5. qwrn isMG (sMpw.), guru qyg bhwdr ShIdI AMk: nwnk pRkwS piqRkw, pMjwbI XunIvristI, pitAwlw.
6. drSn isMG, BweI gurdws: is`KI dy pihly ivAwiKAwkwr, pMjwbI XunIvristI, pitAwlw.
7. nirMdr kOr BwtIAw Aqy jsivMdr kOr iFloN,pRmu`K is`K sMsQwvW, gurU nwnk dyv XunIvristI, AMimRqsr.
8. ipAwrw isMG pdm, sRI gurU gRMQ pRkwS, isMG bRdrz, AimRqsr.
English
1. Ganda Singh, Life of Banda Singh Bahadur, Punjabi University, Patiala.
2. Gurbachan Singh Talib, An Introduction to Sri Guru Granth Sahib, Punjabi University, Patiala.
3. Gurnam Kaur (ed.), Khalsa: A Thematic Perspective, Punjabi University, Patiala.
4. Harbans Singh (ed.), Encyclopedia of Sikhism (4 Vol.), Punjabi University, Patiala.
5. Puran Singh, The Book of Ten Masters, Punjabi University, Patiala.
6. Teja Singh, Sikhism: Its Ideals and Institutions, Orient Longmans, California.
51
SEMESTER-I
HISTORY: HISTORY OF INDIA UPTO 1000 A.D.
Total Marks: 100 [5 Credits (4L+1T)] Time Allowed: 3 hours

Theory:70 Pass Marks: 35%
Internal Assessment:30
Course Outcome: It introduced to the students so that they can understand the elements of change and
continuity in Indian history as a whole starting from the ancient period.
short-answer type question will carry two marks each. The second part of Section C will contain a question
on map, internal choice will be offered in Map question. The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map
question will carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory
note. Thus the total marks for the compulsory section C will be 30 out of which 20 marks for short answer
type questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of internal assessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A, and B of the question paper
and the entire Section C which is compulsory will consist of two parts: First part of Section C will consist of
10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry two marks each. The
candidates are required to give answer of each short answer type question in 20-25 words i.e. in 3-4 lines.
The second part of Section C will contain a question on map, internal choice will be offered in Map question.
The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map question will carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for
filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory note. Thus the total marks for the compulsory section C will be
30 out of which 20 marks for short answer type questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30)
marks will comprise of internal assessment.
ONLY FOR BLIND CANDIDATES: In lieu of Map question the blind candidates will attempt the short answer
type questions. The short answer type questions will be set from the entire syllabus. Thesequestions
will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and historical sources within the purview of the syllabus.
Out of four, the blind candidates will attempt any two short answer type questions. Internal choice will be
given. The answer to each of these questions will be 50-60 words and will carry 5 (five) marks each. Thus
the total marks of these question will be10.
SECTION - A
1. Geographical features of India and their impact on ancient Indian history; Major Sources.
2. The Harappan Civilization: Origin, Periodization, Extent, Main features and the causes of its decline.
3. Rig Vedic Civilization: Theories of Original home of the Aryans; their social, political, economic and
religious life of Rig Vedic and Later Vedic civilization.
4. Socio-Religious Reform Movements: Life of Mahavira and Mahatma Buddha, Main teachings and their
impact.
SECTION-B
5. The Age of the Mauryas: Establishment and expansion of the Empire under Chandragupta Maurya and
Ashoka, Polity and Administration, Ashoka's Dhamma, Ashokas achievements and his place in history,
Decline of the Mauryan Empire.
6. The Gupta Age: Establishment of the Gupta Empire, its expansion under Samundragupta and
Chandragupta -II, Decline of Gupta Empire
7. The Age of Vardhanas: Establishment of the Vardhana Kingdom, Harsha's campaigns and political
relations, Literature and education
8. Dynasties in the South: Rashrakutas, Chalukyas and Cholas.
9. The Rajputs: Theories of origin of the Rajputs and their Administration.
SECTION-C : (MAPS)
a) Important sites connected with Buddha and Mahavira
b) The Mauryan Empire under Ashoka (about 250 B.C.)
c) The Gupta Empire
d) The Empire of Harsha (647A.D.)
52
Essential Books
1 R.S. Tripathi :Prachin Bharat Ka Itihas (Punjabi, Hindi & English)
2. V.C. Pandey :Political and Cultural History of India
3. R.N. Mookerji: Ancient India
4. N.N.Ghose: Early India
5. A.L. Basham :The Wonder that was India.
6. A.L. Basham :Civilization of India.
7. A.C. Arora :Bharati Itihas Da PrachinKal
8. Davies C.C: An Historical Atlas of Indian Peninsula
9. A.C. Arora &R.S.Arora : Historical Atlas of Ancient India
10. R.C. Majumdar & Others: An Advanced History of India
11. Sukhninder Kaur Dhillon :Religious History of Early Medieval Punjab
12. R.S.Sharma: India’s Ancient Past.
13. Upinder Singh: A History of Ancient and Early Medieval India
Reference Books
1 D.N. Jha : Early India : A concise History
2 RomilaThapar : History of Early India From the Origin to AD 1300
3 vhHvhHe';zGh L gqkuhBGkos dh ;z;feqsh ns/ ;ZfGnsk
(oxphof;zx, nB[tkde )
4 o'fwbkEkgo L n;a'e ns/ w'"ohnk dk gsB
(;[ikBf;zxgzB{, nB[tkde )
5 fdti/Ado BokfJDMkn L T[sZow'ohnk s/ r[gskekbftuwkbhgqpzX
53
SEMESTER-II
HISTORY: HISTORY OF INDIA, 1000 A.D. TO 1707 A.D.
Total Marks: 100 [5 Credits (4L+1T)] Time Allowed: 3 hours
Theory: 70 Pass Marks: 35%
Course Outcome: The course introduced to the students so that they can understand the elements of
change and continuity over time and space, particularly from the period of Sultanate to Mughals.

short-answer type question will carry two marks each. The second part of Section C will contain a question
on map, internal choice will be offered in Map question. The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map
question will carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory
note. Thus the total marks for the compulsory section C will be 30 out of which 20 marks for short answer
type questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of internal assessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A, and B of the question paper
and the entire Section C which is compulsory will consist of two parts: First part of Section C will consist of
10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry two marks each. The
candidates are required to give answer of each short answer type question in 20-25 words i.e. in 3-4 lines.
The second part of Section C will contain a question on map, internal choice will be offered in Map question.
The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map question will carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for
filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory note. Thus the total marks for the compulsory section C will be
30 out of which 20 marks for short answer type questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30)
marks will comprise of internal assessment.
ONLY FOR BLIND CANDIDATES: In lieu of Map question the blind candidates will attempt the short answer
type questions. The short answer type questions will be set from the entire syllabus. These
questions will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and historical sources within the purview of the
syllabus. Out of four, the blind candidates will attempt any two short answer type questions. Internal choice
will be given. The answer to each of these questions will be 50-60 words and will carry 5 (five) marks each.
Thus the total marks of these question will be10.
SECTION - A
1. Invasions of MahmudGhaznavi and Their effects; Conquest of North- West India by
Mohammad Ghori; Causes of the success of the Turks.
2. Consolidation of the Delhi Sultanate under IItutmish and Balban.
3. Ala-ud-Din Khalji : Conquests, Administrative and Economic reforms
4. The Tughlaqs: Muhammad-bin-Tughlaq's Administrative Experiments; Firoz Tughlaq's reforms.
5. The Vijaynagar Kingdom: Establishment and Expansion, Causes of Decline.
SECTION-B
6. Establishment of the Mughal Empire: Babur Conquest and Personality.
7. Administration of Sher Shah Suri and his reforms
8. Rajput and Religious policies of Akbar, Jahangir and Aurangzeb.
9. Shivaji: His conquests and administration
10. Mughal Administration: Central and Provincial administration; Land Revenue and
Mansabdari System
SECTION-C: (MAPS)
a) Ala-ud-din Khaliji's Empire (1316 A.D.)
b) The Mughal Empire under Akbar (1605 A.D.)
c) The Mughal Empire under Aurangzeb (1707 A.D.)
d) Four Important places of Mughal Architecture
54
Essential Books
1. A.L.Srivastava : The Delhi Sultanate
2. -: The Mughal Empire
3. R.C. Majumdar &Others :An Advanced History of India Part-II
4. S.R. Sharma. :Mughal Empire in India
5. R.P. Tripathi :Some Aspects of Muslim Administration in India
6. - Rise and fall of the Mughal Empire
7. K.L. Lal :History of the Khaljis
7. K.S. Narang and Gurcharan Singh :History of Mughals (English, Punjabi & Hindi)
8. A.C. Arora :Madhkalin Bharat Da Itihas (Punjabi & Hindi)
9. - :Historical Atlas of Medieval India (English, Punjabi & Hindi)
10. Satish Chandra:Medieval India : From Sultanate to Mughals 1526-1748Mughal Empire Part-II,
11. Irfan Habib: Medieval India: The Study of Civilization
12. Satish Chandra: A History of Medieval India
13. Audrey Truschke: Aurangzeb: Man and Myth
Reference Books
1 P. Saran :Medieval India
2 A.B. Pandey :Early Medieval India
3 -do- Later Medieval India
4 Vipul Singh :Interpreting Medieval India
5 ;[fozdof;zx L wZXekbhBGkos dk fJfsjk; 1000^1526
6 n?;Hn?BH;/B LwokfmnK dh okigqpzXehgqDkbh
(r[opuBf;zx ;/mh, nB[tkde)
7 ;oikd{ BkE ;oeko L f;tk ih ns/ T[;dk ;wK
(nwotzsf;zx, nB[tkde )
8 vpb:{n?uHw'ob?vLnepo s'A n'ozri/p sZe
(Grs f;zx, nB[tkde )
9He/HekB{zr'L;a/o ;akj ns/ T[;dk ;wK
(fog[dwBe"o ;/m nB[tkde)
55
SEMESTER I
MATHEMATICS
(Paper I) : ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY
Credit: 3:3H (L)
Duration: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks: 50

External Examination: 35
Course Objectives: The Primary objective of this course is
 To recognize consistent and inconsistent systems of linear equations by the row echelon form
of the augmented matrix.
 To find Eigen values and corresponding eigenvectors for a square matrix.
 To understand the importance of roots of real and complex polynomials
 To learnt various methods of obtaining roots.
 To understand the application of De Moivre’s Theorem to solve numerical problems.
Instructions for Paper Setter/Examiner
The question paper covering the entire course shall be divided into three parts: A, B & C. Each of
sections A and B will have 4 questions from the respective sections of the syllabus of 5 marks each
and section C will consist of 1 compulsory question of short answer type having 5 parts of 1 mark
each and 5 parts of 2 marks each covering the entire syllabus uniformly.
Instructions for Candidates
Candidates are required to attempt five questions in all, selecting two questions from each section
A and B and the compulsory question of section C.
Section A
Hermitian, Skew-Hermitian, Orthogonal and Unitary Matrices, Elementary Operations on Matrices,
Linear Independence of row and column vectors.
Eigen Values, Eigen Vectors and the characteristic equation of a matrix, Properties of eigen values
for special type of matrices, Diagonalization.
Section B
Relations between roots and coefficients of a general polynomial, Tranformation of equation,
Descarte’s rule of signs, Solution of cubic equations (Cardon’s method) and Biquadratic equations
(Descarte’s and Ferrari’s method).
De Moivre's theorem and its application, Direct and inverse circular functions, hyperbolic and
logarithmic functions.
Books Recommended
1. T. Andreescu and D. Andrica, Complex Numbers from A to Z, Birkhauser, 2006.
2. E. G. Goodaire and M. M. Parmenter, Discrete Mathematics with Graph Theory, 3rd
Edition, Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., Indian Reprint, 2005.
3. David C. Lay, Linear Algebra and its Applications, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education
Asia, Indian Reprint, 2007.
4. S. L. Loney, Plane Trigonometry Part-II, New Age International Publisher, 2016.
56
SEMESTER I
MATHEMATICS
(Paper II) : DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS
Credit: 2:2H (L)


 To understand the concept of functions of one and two variables.
 To understand the concept of the nth order derivative using Leibnitz theorem.
 To familiarize with concavity convexity and Asymptotes.
 To understand the concept of two or more variables for differential calculus.

Section A
Functions of one variable: Successive differentiation,Leibnitz rule and its problems, Cauchy’s
Mean Value theorem, Taylor’s Theorem with Lagrange’s and Cauchy’s form of remainder,
Maclaurian series.
Concavity, Convexity and Points of Inflexion, Asymptotes, Multiple Points, Curvature.
Section B
Functions of two variables: Limit and Continuity, Partial Derivatives,Schwarz’s and Young’s
theorems, Differentiability, Homogenous functions, Euler’s theorem,Taylor’s Theorem, Jacobians,
Maxima and Minima.
Books Recommended
1. G. B. Thomas, D. M. Weir and J. Hass, Thomas’s Calculus, 13th Edition, Pearson Education,
Delhi, Indian Reprint, 2017.
2. M. J. Strauss, G. L. Bradley and K. J. Smith, Calculus, 3rd Edition, Dorling Kindersley
(India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson Education), Delhi, Indian Reprint, 2011.
3. H. Anton, I. Bivens and S. Davis, Calculus, 6th Edition, John Wiley and Sons (Asia)
Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, Indian Reprint, 2016.
4. G. Prasad, Differential Calculus, 19th Edition, Pothishala Pvt. Ltd., Allahabad, 2016.
57
SEMESTER II
MATHEMATICS
Paper III : SEQUENCE AND SERIES
Credit: 2:2H (L)

 To assimilate the notions of limit of a sequence and convergence of a sequence of real
numbers.
 To recognize bounded, convergent, divergent, Cauchy and monotonic sequences and to
calculate their limit superior, limit inferior, and the limit of a bounded sequence.
 To test convergence and divergence of infinite series of real numbers.
 To give knowledge of different kinds of convergence criterion for series
 To give knowledge of different kinds of tests for convergence/ divergence.
Section A
Sequences, Bounded and unbounded sequences, Limit of a sequence, Algebra of convergent
sequences, Monotone Sequences, Monotone Convergence Theorem, Cauchy’s first and second
theorem on limits.
Subsequences, peak point of sequence, Divergence Criteria, Monotone Subsequence Theorem,
Bolzano Weierstrass Theorem for Sequences, Sub - sequential limits of a sequence, Cauchy
sequence, Cauchy’s Convergence Criterion.
Section B
Infinite series, convergence and divergence of infinite series, Alternating series, Leibnitz test,
Absolute and Conditional convergence, Cauchy’s Criterion, Series with positive terms Standard
tests of convergence(without proof) : Comparison test, Root Test and Ratio Test, Cauchy’s
Condensation test, Kummer’s Test, Raabe’s Test, Logarithmic Test, Gauss Test and Integral test,
Abel’s and Drichlet’s Test.
Books Recommended
1. R.G. Bartle and D. R. Sherbert, Introduction to Real Analysis, 3rd Edition, John Wiley (Asia)
Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2002.
2. G. Bilodeau, P. Thie, G. E. Keough, An Introduction to Analysis, 2nd Edition, Jones & Bartlett,
2010.
3. B. S. Thomson, J. B. Bruckner and A. M. Bruckner, Elementary Real Analysis, 2nd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2001.
4. S. K. Berberian, A First Course in Real Analysis, Springer Verlag, New York, 1994.
5. S.C. Malik and S. Arora, Mathematical Analysis, New Academic Science Publisher,2017
58
SEMESTER II
MATHEMATICS
Paper IV: PLANE AND SOLID GEOMETRY
Credit: 3:3H (L)
 To understand the properties of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola.
 To be well-versed with sphere, cone and cylinder
 To enable the students to aware the applications of plane and solid geometry.
Section A
Transformation of axes, shifting of origin, reduction of the second degree equation into standard
forms by transformation of co-ordinates. The invariants t, and . Identification of curves
represented by second degree equation.
Parabola, Ellipse, Hyperbola: pole and polar, pair of tangents from a point, chord of contact, equation
of the chord in terms of mid-point and diameter of conic.
Conjugate diameters, Conjugate hyperbola, Asymptotes of a hyperbola, rectangular hyperbola and
Special properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola.
Section B
Sphere: General equation of a sphere, Plane section of a sphere, Intersection of two spheres, Sphere
through a given circle, Intersection of a straight line and a sphere, Equation of a tangent plane to
sphere, Condition of tangency, Plane of contact.
Cone: Equation of a cone whose vertex is at origin, Equation of a cone with a given vertex and a
given conic as base, Condition that general equation of second degree represent a cone, Equation of
a tangent plane, Reciprocal cone, Right circular cone.
Cylinder: Enveloping cylinder, Cylinder as Limiting form of cone, Tangent plane.
Books Recommended
1. S. L. Loney, The Elements of Coordinate Geometry, Macmillan and Company, London, 1895.
2. G. Prasad and H.C. Gupta, Text Book on Coordinate Geometry, Pothishala Pvt. Ltd., Allahabad,
2000.
3. P. K. Jain and Khalil Ahmad, A Text Book of Analytical Geometry of two Dimensions, Wiley
Eastern Ltd., 1994.
4. N. Saran and R. S. Gupta, Analytical Geometry of Three Dimensions, Pothishala Pvt. Ltd.,
Allahabad.
5. R. J. T. Bell, Elementary Treatise on Coordinate Geometry of Three Dimensions, Macmillan
India Ltd., 1994.
59
B.A. Retail Management (Elective)
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEO)
1. To provide high quality professional education to management students.

2. To focus on the holistic development of the student with conceptual clarity, analytical ability,
critical thinking and communication skills.
3. To prepare young minds with a positive attitude for excellent performance and committed
service.
4. To facilitate the entrepreneurial journey of students by providing them with the breadth and
depth of knowledge required to start a retail business.
5. To develop management professionals who are able to leverage theoretical knowledge to
design sustainable solutions to real world problems.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (PO) UG

1. This programme is designed to inculcate professional and managerial expertise in students.
2. The programme will help the students to demonstrate an understanding and appreciation of
ethical principles at both the professional and community level.
3. Graduates with acquired skills and enhanced knowledge will be employable/ become
entrepreneurs or will pursue higher education.
4. The course will help students to acquire skills keeping in synchronization according to the
changing trends in education and in the market.
5. Graduates will be able to develop practical skills and personalities through skill
enhancement inducing courses.
Program Specific Objectives (PSO-I)
1. The students will be able to enhance their knowledge in important fundamental subjects of
retail management.
2. The students will study the various social and environmental importance issues pertaining to
the business world.
3. The students will acquire knowledge about practical and statistical techniques applied for
decision-making.
60
(SEMESTER I)
RETAIL MANAGEMENT: PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MANAGEMENT
5 CREDITS: 4H(L) + 1H(T)
Maximum Marks: 100 Time: 3 Hours
Course Objective
The objective of the course is to familiarize students with the principles, functions and techniques
used to effectively manage business enterprises. It will also help students to know about the
contribution made by management thinkers towards the basic principles and functions of
management.
Course Learning Outcomes
After completing the course, the students shall be able to:
CO1: Demonstrate basic knowledge of management and organization.
CO2: Understand the basic roles skills and functions of management.
CO3: Understand how successful managers effectively and efficiently use these functions and their
business resources to achieve organizational objectives.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER SETTER/EXAMINER
The question paper will consist of Three Sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four
questions from the respective portion of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will
consist of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30
marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry three marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the Sections A and B of the question
paper and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type
question in 70 words i.e. in 7-10 lines.
UNIT I
Management: Meaning, Scope and Importance, Scientific Management (F.W. Taylor),
Administrative Theory (Henry Fayol), Human Relations Approach (Elton Mayo). An Overview of
Functions of Management.
Planning: Meaning, Nature and Importance, Steps in Planning, Significance and Types. Decision
making: Concept and Process, MBO and MBE. Organising: Concept, Nature, Significance and
Process of Organising, Authority and Responsibility: Delegation and Decentralisation of
Authority.
UNIT II
Staffing: Meaning and Process. Motivation: Concept, Theories : Maslow, Herzberg, McGregor.
Leadership: Concept and leadership styles, Leadership theories.
Communication: Nature, Process, Types and Barriers, Effective Communication. Controlling:
Nature, Importance, Areas of Control and Control Process. Management of Change: Concept,
Nature and Process of Planned Change.
Recommended Books:
1. S. Soundaian – Principles of management- MJP Publishers
2. Anil Bhatt – Management principles, Processess and practices- Oxford University Press
3. Robin, Coutler, Vohra- Management- Person Prentice Hall
4. LM Prasad- Principles and Practices of management- Sulatan Chand and Sons
5. VSP Rao and V. Hari Krishna- Management- Excel Books
6. CB Gupta- Modern Business Organisation and management- Sultan Chand and Sons.
61
(SEMESTER II)
RETAIL MANAGEMENT: FUNDAMENTALS OF RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Objective
The objective of this course is to provide an in-depth understanding of retail marketing, building
sustainable relationship, buyer behaviour, SCM and store maintenance.
CO1: Evaluate current retailing trends based on consumer, and competitive environments.
CO2: Identify various retail opportunities and evaluate the strategies associated with each type of
opportunity.
CO3: Distinguish and characterize the factors and management tools that retailers consider and use
when developing their merchandise mix.
The question paper will consist of Three Sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four
questions from the respective portion of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the Sections A and B of the question
paper and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type
UNIT I
Retailing: Definition, Importance and Scope of Retailing, Categories of Retailers, Emerging Trends
in Retailing. Retail Business and Consumer: Concept, Its Process and Factors Affecting Consumer
Behaviour.
Retail Location: Meaning, Types and Determinants of Store Location, Process of Choosing Store
Location. Store Layout and Design: Concept, Factors Affecting Store Interior, Elements of Store
Design and Types of Store Layout.
UNIT II
Retail Communication: Process, Functions and Steps in Making Communication Effective.
Promotional Strategy. Retail Organization Structures: Independent Store Organizational
Structure, Department Store Organizational Structure, Chain Store Organizational Structure.
Retail Planning: Concept, Process and Importance. Retail Pricing: Meaning and Concept, Retail
Pricing Strategies and Approaches, Problems in Retail Price Fixing.
Recommended Books:
1. Levy IM. And Weitz B.A: Retailing Management,Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Berman B. Evans J. R.: Retail Management, Pearson Education.
3. Bajaj C; Tuli R., Srivanstava N.V.: Retail Management, Oxford University Press, Delhi.
4. Dunne P.M, Lusch R.F. and David A.: Retailing, South-Western, Thomson Learning Inc.
5. Piyush Kumar Sinha and Dwarika Prasad Uniyal: Managing Retail, Oxford University Press.
62
(SEMESTER I)
PSYCHOLOGY: GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY –I
Max Marks: 100 Marks Time allowed: 3 hours
Theory: 56 Marks Internal Assessment: 24 Marks
Pass Marks: 35% Marks 5 CREDITS: 4H(L)+2H(P)
Course Outcome: To introduce students to the basic concepts of the field of psychology with an
emphasis on applications of psychology in everyday life. Appreciation of the scope and the field of
psychology. Developing familiarity with basic concepts related to some foundational themes of
study in psychology such as learning, memory, perception, and thinking.

consist of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will
carry 20 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry 2 marks. The candidates are
required to answer each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 5-7 lines.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and the entire
section C. The candidates are required to answer each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 5-7
lines. Each short answer type question will carry 2 marks.
SECTION A
Introduction to Psychology: Psychology as a Science, Perspectives, Origin and Development of
Psychology, Psychology in India (Background and Philosophical origins), Methods of Psychology
(Experimental, Survey and Case Study).
Personality:Nature , Types and Theories (Freud, Allport and Cattell)
Personality Testing:Need and Assessment
SECTION B
Learning: Nature and its Determinants, Trial & Error and Gestalt Approach.
Statistics: Measures of Central Tendency (Arithmetic Mean, Median, Mode) and Variability
(Range, Average Deviation, Quartile Deviation, Standard Deviation). Graphical Representation of
Data: Histogram, Frequency Polygon and Ogive.
Introduction to Excel Sheet: Data Entry
Note: Use of Non-Programmable Calculators and Statistical Tables allowed.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:
1. Baron, R.A., Mishra, G. (2016). Psychology, Indian Subcontinent Edition. Pearson Education.
2. Baron. R.A. (1996). Psychology. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.
3. Ciccarelli. S.K., & Meyer. G.E., (2006). Psychology. Pearson Education.
4. Passer, M., Smith, R.,Holt, N., Bremner, Sutherland, E., Vleik. M.L.W. (2009). Psychology:
The Science of Mind and Behaviour. Mc Graw. Hill Education, UK.
5. Weiten, W. (2001). Psychology Themes and Variation. Thomson Learning, Inc, USA.
6. Garrett, H. (1996). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Bombay: Vakils, Feffer and Simons.
1. Kothari, C. R. (2004). Research Methodology, Methods and techniques. New Age International
Publishers, New Delhi.
2 . Hall, C.S., Lindzey, G., & Campbell, J.B. (1998). Theories of Personality. New York: John
Wiley & Sons.
63
(SEMESTER I)
PSYCHOLOGY: PRACTICALS
Max.Marks: 20 Marks Time allowed: 3 hours
Pass Marks: 35% Marks
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PRACTICAL EXAMINATION
Practical examination will be of 20 marks and of three hours duration. Students will perform five
practicals out of six. External examiner will conduct the practical examination. The examiner will
evaluate the practical on the basis of write-up, practical file, performance and viva voice relating
to the practical given for performance. No reappear will be allowed in the practical examination.
Fail in the practical will be considered fail overall in the subject. For practical examination, one
group of students will not comprise of more than 20 students at a time.
Break up of Marks:-
Performance: 5 Marks
Viva voice: 10 Marks
Practical file: 5 Marks
Following Practical’s have to be performed (any 5 out of 6)
Semester I:
1. 16 PF / EPQ
2. Public Opinion Survey
3. Sentence Completion Test
4. Transfer of learning
5. Maze Learning
6. NEO-PI R
64
(SEMESTER II)
PSYCHOLOGY: GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY –I

Course Outcome : To introduce students to the basic concepts of the field of psychology with an
emphasis on applications of psychology in everyday life. Appreciation of the scope and the field of
psychology. Developing familiarity with basic concepts related to some foundational themes of
study in psychology such as learning, memory, perception, and thinking.

consist of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will
carry 20 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry 2 marks. The candidates are
required to answer each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 5-7 lines.

section C. The candidates are required to answer each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 5-7
lines. Each short answer type question will carry 2 marks.
SECTION A
Biological Foundations of Behaviour: Nervous System: Central Nervous System and Peripheral
Nervous System, Structure and Functions of Brain, Endocrine System and its Functions.
Intelligence: Nature and characteristics of Intelligence, Theories (Spearman, Thurstone and
Guilford, Sternberg's),Types of Intelligence Tests (Verbal, Non-Verbal and Performance).
SECTION B
Motivation: Concept, Types of Motives, Theories (Maslow and McClelland). Ekman's
Classifications of Emotions.
Emotions: Concept, Theories (James-Lange, Cannon-Bard, Schachter-Singer), Physiological
Correlates (Physiological changes during Emotional States).
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
2. Passer, M., Smith, R.,Holt, N., Bremner, Sutherland, E., Vleik. M.L.W.(2009). Psychology:
The Science of Mind and Behaviour. Mc Graw. Hill Education, UK.
4. Chaplin., J.R., &Kraweic, T.S. (1986). System and Theories of Psychology. New York: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston, Inc.
5. Weiten, W. (2001). Psychology Themes and Variation. Thomson Learning, Inc, USA
6. Morgan, C.T., King, R.A., Weisz. J.R., &Schopler. J. (1986). Introduction of Psychology. New
York: McGraw Hill Book Co.
1. Carlson, N.R. (2005). Foundation of Physiological Psychology. Pearson Education.
2. Pinel, J. P. J., & Barnes, S.J.( 2014). Introduction to Psychology. Pearson Education Limited,
England.
65
(SEMESTER II)
Practical examination will be of 20 marks and of three hours duration. Students will perform five
practicals out of six. External examiner will conduct the practical examination. The examiner will
evaluate the practical on the basis of write-up, practical file, performance and viva voice relating
to the practical given for performance. No reappear will be allowed in the practical examination.
Fail in the practical will be considered fail overall in the subject. For practical examination, one
group of students will not comprise of more than 20 students at a time.
Break up of Marks:-
Following Practical’s have to be performed (any 5 out of 6)
Semester II
1. Non-Verbal Test of Intelligence (Ravren’s Progressive Matrix)
2. Performance Test of Intelligence (Bhatia’s Battery of Performance Test)
3. Facial Expressions in Emotions
4. Level of Aspiration
5. Measurement of Motivation
6. Reaction Time
66
P.G. DEPARTMENT OF FASHION DESIGN AND TECHNOLOGY
B.A. HOME SCIENCE
Programe Outcome
PO1. Developed professional skills in food, nutrition, textiles, housing and human development.
PO2. Acquire professional and entrepreneurial skill for economic empowerment of self in particular and
community.
PO3. Understand the science and technology that enhance the quality of life of people.
PO4. Bringing science from laboratory to the people.
PO5. Appreciate use of sustainable practices for improved physical, emotional ,social ,psychological
environment.
Programme Specific Outcomes (PSO)-1

PSO1. Use of practices for physical emotional social and psychological environment at micro and macro
level.
PSO2. Environment and sustainability
PSO3. Critically evaluate the impact of household and industrial practices on environment.
67
SEMESTER I
HOME SCIENCE
5 CREDITS: 3H(L) + 4H(P)
Paper Theory Practical
Home Management & 3 periods/week 4 periods/week
Hygiene
SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS
Name of Examinatio Marks Internal Total credits Teaching
Paper n Hours Assessment Hours per
Marks week
Theory Home 3 42 18 60 3 3
Manage
ment &
Hygiene
Practical Home 3 40 - 40 2 4
Manage
ment
Total 100 5 7
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments / Project-
work etc.,(40%) and two mid semester tests/internal examinations* (40%).
*Average of both mid semester tests/internal examinations.
SEMESTER II

Resource Management & 3 periods/week 4 periods/week
Human Physiology
Name of Examinati Marks Internal Total credits Teaching
Paper on Hours Assessment Hours per
Marks week
Theory Resource 3 42 18 60 3 3
Managem
ent &
Human
Physiology
Practical Resource 3 40 - 40 2 4
Managem
ent
Total 100 5 7
68
SEMESTER I
HOME SCIENCE: HOME MANAGEMENT AND HYGIENE (THEORY)
MAX MARKS: 60 TIMES ALLOWED: -3
HRS
THEORY: 42
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT: 18
PASS MARKS:35% OF THEORY
COURSE OUTCOME :
CO1. Understand and take action to enhance human growth and development.
CO2. Take control of their health and develop health promoting behaviour.
CO3. Holistic development of students as well as environment
CO4. Evaluate impact of household and industrial practices on environment.

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Sections A & B will have 4 questions
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 6 marks each. Section C will consist of 9 short
answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Sections A & B of the question
paper and the entire section C.
SECTION-A
1. Home: Meaning and importance of Home Science.
a. Functions of Home
b. Principles of planning a house, orientation aspect, prospect, privacy, roominess,
grouping, flexibility, circulation, sanitation, furniture requirement and practical
considerations
c. Selection of site, soil, locality for a house.
2. Furniture: Basic consideration while selection of furniture.
3. Elements of design and its application in relation to: Line, form, shape, texture, size and colour
4. Principles of design and application in relation to interiors: Harmony, balance, rhythm,
proportion and emphasis.
5. Colour:
a. Characteristics/ dimensions/ proportion/ qualities/ classification of colour
b. Colour Wheel: primary, secondary and tertiary colours
c. Colour schemes
d. Use of colour in interiors for various rooms.
SECTION-B
6. Hygiene:
a. Definition of hygiene.
b. Definition of infection, sources, carrier and control
c. Definition and types of immunity.
7. Causes and spread of following diseases:
a. Caused by insects-malaria, dengu, swine flu, chicken pox.
b. Conveyed by ingestion-enteric fever, cholera, dysentery and diarrhea.
c. Spread by droplet infection, chicken pox, measles, mumps, tuberculosis and Covid19.
d. Sexually transmitted diseases – AIDS.
8. Food Hygiene:
a. Definition
b. Hygiene during preparation, service and storage of food.
c. Food poisoning, causes and prevention.
9. Purification and storage of water for home.
69
SEMESTER I
HOME SCIENCE: PRACTICAL (HOME MANAGEMENT)
MAXIMUM MARKS: 40 TIME ALLOTTED: 3
HOURS
PASS MARKS: 35% OF THE TOTAL
CONTENT
1. Cleaning and polishing of brass and copper.

2. Cleaning and Polishing of silver.
3. Cleaning and polishing of wooden furniture.
4. Cleaning of window panes and plastic
5. Floor decoration – making of alpana and rangoli for different occasions.
6. Making of colour wheel(a)Showing primary,secondary and tertiary colours
(b)Showing different colour schemes.
7. Making a scrap book comprising of pictures depicting different colour schemes
70
SEMESTER – II
HOME SCIENCE: RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY
5 CREDITS: 3H(L)+4H(P)
MAX MARKS: 60 TIMES ALLOWED: -3
HRS
THEORY: 42
COURSE OUTCOME :
CO1. To develop knowledge, attitudes, skills to perform various tasks required by their jobs.
CO2. To ensure that students understand how the body works.
CO3. To develop skills for entrepreneurship
CO4. Learning by doing

SECTION-A
1. Resources: Classification of resources human and non-human, factors affecting the use of
resources.
2. Money management: Types of income, budgeting its advantages and limitations.
a. Planning of budget.
b. Means of supplementing family income.
3. Time management: Steps in making time plans, tools in the time management – peak loads, work
curves, rest periods.
4. Energy Management:
a. Fatigue – types, cause and effects of fatigue
b. Principles of work simplification
5. Flower Arrangement: Types, essential equipments used in flower arrangement, selection of
materials, and application of elements and principles of design in flower arrangement.
SECTION-B
6. Circulatory System:
a. Blood and its composition.
b. Coagulation of blood.
c. Structure and functions of heart.
7. Digestive System: Structure and function of the alimentary canal.
8. Structure and function of: lungs, kidney and skin.
71
SEMESTER II
HOME SCIENCE: PRACTICAL – RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
MAXIMUM MARKS: 40 TIME ALLOTTED: 3
HOURS
PASS MARKS: 35% OF THE TOTAL
CONTENT
1. Making of flower arrangement for different rooms.
2. Table setting for different meals, table manners and napkin folding.
3. Care and cleaning of household equipments (refrigerators, food processors, micro-ovens,
cooking tops, cooking ranges, oven toaster grillers, Juicer mixer grinders, toasters etc.)
4. Product development (Glass art, paper meshi art, recycled work, pot decoration, candle
holder making, candle decoration etc.)
REFERENCES
List of references, recommended for Home Management (Semester I and II)
1. Gross. L. H. and Crandal.E.W.,1967. Management for Modern Families. Appleton Centurion
Crafts, New York.
2. Gupta.S.., Garg.N. and Aggarwal.A 2004. A Text Book of Family Resources Management ,
Hygiene and Physiology, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi,
3. Kaur.H.., and Macnell., 1994. Theory and Practice of Home Management. Surjeet Publishers.
New Delhi.
4. Mann.K.2004, Home Management for Indian Homes. Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi.
5. Nickell.P. and Dorsey. M.J. 2002 Management in Family Living 4th Edition. CBS Publishers
6. Rao. M. P. 2012 Interior Design - Principles and Practice, Standard Publisher Distributor, Delhi.
7. Randhawa R. 2012. Text Book of Family Resource Management and Health Science, New light
Publishers, Jalandhar.
8. Seetharaman P; Batra S. and Mehra P 2005. An Introduction to Family Resource Management.
CBS Publishers and distributors, New Delhi
9. Seetharaman P. and Pannu P. 2012. Interior Design and Decoration. CBS Publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi
10. The Educational Planning group Delhi. Home Management 1987. Arya Publishing House, New
Delhi
11. Varghese A.M; Ogale N.N and Srinivasan K. 2006. Home Management. New Age International
Pvt. Ltd Publishers, New Delhi.
12. Veena G. and et. all Introduction to Interior Design & Decoration, Dominant Publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi.
References: (Recommended for Hygiene and Physiology for Semester I and II)
1. Pearce Evelyn C., Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses, Oxford University.
2. Best, Charles, H. and Tylor N.B., The Living Body-A Text in Human Physiology, Asia Publishing
House, Hygiene and Public Health.
3. Bedi, Y.P. Hygiene and Public Health.
4. Sexena, R.R. (1990), Social and Prevention Medicine, CBS Publishers and Distributions, Delhi.
5. Selman, A.C. (1992), Health and Longevity; Oriental Watchmen Publishing House, Park, Poona
India.
6. Bhatia B.C. and Sri P.N. (1968), Elementary Hygiene, Orient Longman.
7. Randhawa, Rajwinder, K., Textbook of Family Resource Management and Health Science,
Pradeep Publications, Jalandhar.
8. Gupta, Sushma, Garg, Neeru, Aggarwal, Anita and Jaspreet K., Text book of Family Resource
Management Hygiene and Physiology, Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana.
72
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
SEMESTER – I
THEORY
PART – A Theory 60 MARKS 5 Hrs per week
Teaching hrs: 5 Periods per week of one unit (one unit contains 70-80 students)
Time allowed: 3 Hours Max Marks: 60
(External Theory: 42, Internal Assessment: 18)
(MST= 06 Assignment = 06 Attendance = 06 marks) Total Credits: 05
1 Credit: 1 HOUR
Course Outcome : Student will be able to:
 Learn about Objectives, Scope and importance of Physical Education.
 Learn about organization, administration of ancient and modern Olympic Games.
 Learn about the physiological changes in adolescence.
 Learn about health education, personal hygiene and forming healthy habits.
 Learn about structure, parts and functions of the cell.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER-SETTER FOR THEORY:
The question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Eight long type question willbe
set from the section A and B,( four from each section ) , carrying six marks each . Nineshort
questions will be set from section C, covering the entire syllabus, of two marks each.
Candidates are required to attempt four long questions from section A and B, selectingtwo
questions each from section A and B, (4 x 6 =24 Marks) each. Section C is compulsoryconsisting
nine short type questions two marks each. (2x9 =18 marks) marks.
UNIT- I
1. Physical Education: Introduction, Objectives, Scope, and Importance of Physical Education in
the Modern Society.
2. Health Education: Introduction, Aim & Objectives, Principles and its Importance.
3. Olympic Games: Introduction, Organization, Administration and Ceremonies of Ancient and
Modern Olympic Games.
Asian Games: Introduction, Ceremonies, Venues.
Commonwealth Games: Introduction, Ceremonies, Venues.
4. Growth and Development: Introduction, Difference, Developmental Characteristics at
Different Stages of Development and Factors affecting Growth & Development.
5. Heredity and Environment: Introduction, Effect of Heredity & Environment on Growth &
Development, Chronological Age, Anatomical Age and Physiological Age.
6. Personal Hygiene: Introduction, Personal Cleanliness, Rest, Relaxation and Sleep.
UNIT- II
1. Terminologies of Physical Education: Kinesiology, Anatomy, Physiology, ExercisePhysiology,
Bio- Mechanics, Anthropometry and Sports Medicine.
2. Cell: Structure, Parts and its Function.
3. Digestive system: Introduction, Structure, Organs & Functions of Digestive System.
4. Athletics: Introduction,Classification of Events, General Rules of Track Events and Types of
Start and Finish
5. Football: History, Layout, Law of the Game, Officials, Major tournaments and Arjuna
Awardees.
6. Volleyball: History,Layout, General Rules and Regulation, Officials, Major Tournaments and
Arjuna Awardees.
References:
 Aggarwal, J.C. (2006) “Health and Physical Education” Shipra Publications, Shakarpur, Delhi.
 Ahluwalia, P. S., Deol, N.S. and Kaushal, S. (2009) “ A Textbook of Physical Education”
73
Imperium Publishers, Khanna, Ludhiana.
 Dutta, A.K. (2004) “Games and Sports for Children” 1st edition - Janvani Prakashan,
Shahdra, Delhi.
 Jain, Deepak (2002) “Physical Education and Recreational Activities” Khel Sahitya Kendra,
New Delhi.
 Kang G.S. and Deol N.S. (2008) “An Introduction to Health and Physical Education” Twenty
First Century, Patiala.
 Kapri, B.C. et. al. (2014) “Physical and Health Education” N.B. Publications, Meerut, India.
 Kaur, Manjeet and Sharma, R.C. (1990) “Health and Physical Education” Tandon
Publications, Ludhiana.
 Park, J.E. and Park, K. (1985) “Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine” BnasidarBhanot
Publisher, Jabalpur.
 Park, J.E. and Park,K, (1982) “Text Book of Community Health for Nurses”, Asrani Publisher,
Jabalpur.
 Singh, Ajmer et.al. (2016) “Essential of Physical Education and Olympic movement” Kalyani
Publishers, Ludhina.
 Thour, Mandeep (2006) “Camping Management in Physical Education” Friends Publication,
Delhi.
 International Association of Athletics Federations Competition Rules (2017-18), Centenary
Edition, Monaco. http://www.iaaf.org
74
SEMESTER-I
PHYSICAL EDUCATION:PRACTICAL
PART – B Skill and Prowess 40 MARKS (External) 6 Hrs per week for Per
Unit
Teaching hrs: 6 Periods per week (2 Period X 3 day) of one unit (one unit contains 30-40 students)
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit: 2 HOURS
FOOTBALL (10 Marks)
Evaluation will be based on skill test, performance &viva voce.
Contents to be covered during the practical sessions:
1 Measurement of the field and preparation of the field.
2 Equipments and Materials of the game/ Event.
3 Fundamental skill and lead up game.
4 Techniques.
5 Rules and Regulations of the game/ Event.
6 Officiating:
 Duties of officials.
 Knowledge of score sheet.
 Signals of officiating.
 Technical equipment for officiating.
VOLLEYBALL (10 Marks)
10 Techniques.
12 Officiating:
A) Athletics ( Field Events ) (20 Marks)
 Evaluation will be based on skill test, performance & viva voce.
 Contents to be covered during the practical sessions:
 Basic Knowledge of Track and Field Event .
 Types of Starts for Short Race , Other Race and Their Stans
References
1 DeolN.S.,GillManmeet , Gill G.S :-. Health and Physical Education 2017.A.P.Publishers.
2 Blair,jones,and Simpson; Educationalphycology,The Macmillan Co.,New York,1962
3 Lindgren.H.E.Educational Phycology in the class Room, NewDelhi, johnwiley& sons,1962
4 Whiting HTA;Reading in sports Phycology,Henry KimptonPublisher London 1972.
5 Dhaliwal,A.S.Vidyak Manovidyan,Patiala. Punjabi University.
6 Puni,A.T.Sports Psychology:An abridged translation by G.S.Sandhu,NIS Patiala,1980.
7 Suin,R.M.:Psychology in Sports,Methods and applications,surjit publications ,New Delhi
1982.
8 Ajmer Singh and Jagtar Singh Gill;Essential of Physical education and Olympic movement
Kalyani Publishers,Ludhiana,2004.
9 Rule Book of World Athletics
75
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
SEMESTER – II
PAPER: THEORY

1 Credit: 1 HOUR
 Learn about Objectives, Scope and importance of Physical Education.
 Learn about organization, administration of ancient and modern Olympic Games.
 Learn about the physiological changes in adolescence.
 Learn about health education, personal hygiene and forming healthy habits.
 Learn about structure, parts and functions of the cell.
The question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Eight long typequestions will be
set from the section A and B (four from each section) carrying six marks each. Nine short questions
will be set from section C, covering the entire syllabus, of two marks each.

Candidates are required to attempt four long questions from section A and B selecting two
questions each from section A and B (4 x 6 =24 Marks) each. Section C is compulsory consisting
nine short type questions two marks each. (2x9 =18 marks) marks.
UNIT- I
1. Children and Sports: Introduction, Stages of Motor Development in Children, Benefits of
Exercises for Children, Weight Training and their Advantages or Disadvantages for Children.
2. Body types: Introduction, Sheldon and Kretschmer’s Classification.
3. Communicable Diseases: Introduction, Classification, Causes, Symptoms, Prevention, and
Control of Communicable Diseases (Cholera, Typhoid, Tuberculosis, AIDS, Hepatitis A&B,
Rabies and Malaria)
4. Sports Terminologies: Isometric, Isotonic, Isokinetic, Reflex Action, Over Load, Recovery and
Motor Ability.
5. Skeleton System: Introduction, Types,Functions and various Bones of Body.
6. Joints: Introduction, Classification of various Joints of Human Body and Kinds of Joint
Movements.
UNIT- II
1. Description of the following
a) N.S.N.I.S ( Netaji Subhash National Institute of Sports)
b) S.A.I (Sports Authority of India)
c) I.O.A ( Indian Olympic Association)
d) W.A. (World Athletics)
2. Drugs: Introduction, Causes, Symptoms, Harmful Effects and its Prevention.
Doping: Introduction, Types, Prohibited Substances & Methods and its Effects.
3. Warming up and Cooling Down: Introduction, Methods & Types of Warm Up, Significance
and Guidelines.
4 Long Jump: Introduction, Rules, Layout, Techniques and Arjuna Awardees.
5. Hockey & Basketball: History, Layout, General Rules and Regulations, Officials, Major
Tournaments and Arjuna Awardees.
6. Sports Awards:
76
a) Maharaja Ranjit Singh
b) Arjuna Award
c) Dronacharya award
d) MAKA Trophy
e) Rajiv Gandhi Khel Ratan Award
References:
Imperium Publishers, Khanna, Ludhiana.Dutta, A.K. (2004) “Games and Sports for Children”
1st edition - Janvani Prakashan, Shahdra, Delhi.
 International Association of Athletics Federations Competition Rules (2017-18),
Centenary Edition, Monaco. http://www.iaaf.org
New Delhi.
Jabalpur.
Delhi.
77
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
SEMESTER – II
PRACTICAL
PART – B Skill and Prowess 40 MARKS (External) 6 Hrs per week for Per Unit
Total Credits : 03
1 Credit : 2 HOUR
BASKETBALL (10 Marks)
4 Techniques..
6 Officiating:
HOCKEY (10 Marks)
10 Techniques.
12 Officiating:
Athletics ( Field Events ) (20 Marks)
I. Measurement of the field and preparation of the field.
II. Equipment and Materials of the event.
III. Techniques.
IV. Rules and regulation of the event
V. Officiating:
 Signals of officiating
78
(Semester I)
Music Instrumental
PAPER-A (BASICS OF INSTRUMENTAL MUSIC)
Max. Marks : 50 Lectures to be delivered : 30
(36 marks external paper + 14 marks assessment)
Internal Assessment : 14 Marks
(MST : 06 marks, Assignment = 05 Attendance = 03 marks)
Pass Marks : 35% Time Allowed : 3 hours
Total Credits : 03
1 Credit = 1 Hour
Course Outcome :
A.Knowledge and Understanding
1) To study Relation of Sitar Percussion & Non Percussion Instruments.
2) To understsand Role of Tabla in Indian Classical Music.
3) To study about 10 Prans ofTaals. Except of all other aspects Students learns about western music through
study of Harmonium and sympethiser.
B. Intellectual( Cognitive/ Analytical) Skills:
1. To analyze the present form of all Indian Classical, Folk & Western Instruments in music.
2. Comparative study of Raagas and Taals Practical skills.
3. Analyze the study of performance, life and of outstanding performers of variousgharanas in Music.
C. Practical Skills
1) Ability to play different alankars on Sitar and Harmonium with different Bols of Mizrabso that student
may learn basics of different laykaries also.
2) Knowledge of Raagas and Other Percussion & Non Percussion Instruments of Classical folk and western
music.
Note: (i) Along with Music (Instrumental), the candidate can also take Music (Vocal) or Tabla as
an elective subject.
(ii) The candidate can opt any of the following instruments: Sitar, Sarangi, Violin, Dilruba,
Flute, Santoor, Sarod, Veena, Guitar.
(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A,B,& C. Section A & B will have four
questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each. Section
C will consist of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly
and will carry 16 marks in all.
(ii) While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter for theory paper the syllabus prescribed for
Practical Paper should also be sent.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B and the entire
Section C is compulsory.
SECTION-A
(i) Definition and explanation of the following musical terms:
Sangeet, Naad, Swara, Saptak, Various Bols of Mizrab
(ii) Knowledge of the following Musical Instruments:
Sitar, Tabla
(iii) Brief life sketches and contributions towards Indian Music of:
(a) Pt. Ravi Shankar (b) UstadVilayat Khan (Sitarist)
(iv) Brief knowledge of Folk Instruments of Punjab
SECTION-B
(v) Correct holding and maintainence of your instrument.
(vi) Importance of Taal and Laya in Music.
(vii) Description and Notation of the prescribed Raags(Gats) and Taals:
Raags: Bilawal andKalyan.
Taals: Teentaal, Kehrva, Dadra
79
(Semester I)
Music Instrumental
PAPER –B: (STAGE PERFORMANCE)

Pass Marks : 35% Time Allowed : 20
minutes
Total Credits : 02
1 Credit = 2 Hours
Course Outcome :
C. Practical Skills
music.
(i) Stage Performance - 26 Marks

(ii) Harmonium - 05 Marks
(iii) Tabla - 05 Marks
(iv)
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE EXAMINER
(i) The Examination will be conducted by a Board of Examiners consisting of Head of the
Department/Nominee, Internal Teacher and External Expert.
(ii) There should not be more than 8 students in a batch for practical examination.
(1) One Drut Gat in each of the following Raags with Toras:
Bilawal, Kalyan.
(2) Ability to demonstrate the following Taals by hand in Ekgun and Dugunlayakaries:
Teentaal, Kehrva, Dadra.
(3) Ability to play Ten Alankars on your Instrument with different Bols of Mizrab.
(4) Singing of Five Alankars while playing Harmonium.
(5) Ability to play Dadra Taal on Tabla.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR THEORY & PRACTICAL PAPERS
1. Shri Harish Chander Srivastava: RaagParichaya, Part I, II & III.

2. Shanti Govardhan: Sangeet Shastra Darpan part 1.
3. Vasant: SangeetVisharad: SangeetKaryalaya, Hathras.
4. S. Bandhopadhay: Sitar Marg Part I & II
5. SangeetKaryalya, Hathras: HamareSangeetRatan.
80
6. Prof. Tara Singh: Vadan Kala, Punjabi University, Patiala.
7. SharatchandraPranjpe: Sangeet Bodh
8. Punjab KeeSangeetParampra: GeetaPental.
9. SangeetRoop Part I: Dr. Devinder Kaur
10. Dr. Jagmohan Sharma TablaVadan Part- I : Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
11. SwarVadan Part-I : Pt. Satish Chandar Published by SangeetshriParkashan, Kanpur.
12. Dr. Anil Nirola : Folk Instruments of Punjab, (Published by Punjabi University,Patiala)
81
(Semester II)
Music Instrumental
PAPER-A (BASICS OF INSTRUMENTAL MUSIC)
Total Credits : 03
1 Credit = 1 Hour
Course Outcome :
C. Practical Skills
music.
Note: (i) Along with Music (Instrumental), the candidate can also take Music (Vocal) or Tabla as
an elective subject.
(ii) The candidate can opt any of the following instruments: Sitar, Sarangi, Violin, Dilruba,
Flute, Santoor, Sarod, Veena, Guitar.

(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A,B,& C. Section A & B will have four
SECTION-A
(i) Development of Indian music in the Post-independence Era.
(ii) Definition and explanation of the following musical terms:
Krintan, Jod, Thaat, Gat, Raga
(iii) Principles of formation of Taals
(iv) Brief life sketches and contributions towards Indian Music of :
(a) Pt. Niladri Kumar (b) Ustad Shahid Parvez
82
SECTION-B
(v) Knowledge of the following Musical Instruments:
Synthesizer, Flute
(vi) Role of Music in Human Life.
(vii) Jaties of Raags.
(viii) Description and Notationof the prescribed Raags(Gats) and Taals:
Raags: Bhairav and Kafi
Taals: EkTaal and Chau Taal
83
(Semester II)
Music Instrumental
PAPER –B: (STAGE PERFORMANCE)

Pass Marks : 35% Time Allowed : 20
minutes
Total Credits : 02
1 Credit = 2 Hours
Course Outcome :
C. Practical Skills
music.


1. One Slow Gat with simple Alap and Toras in any prescribed Raga.
2. One Drut Gat in each of the following Raags with Toras:
Bhairav and Kafi,
3. Ability to demonstrate the following Taals by hand in Ekgunand Dugunlayakaries:
EkTaal and Chau Taal
4. Ability to play Dhun in any Raga.
5. Ability to play Teen Taal on Tabla.
6. Singing National Anthem while playing Harmonium.
1. Shri Harish Chander Srivastava: Raag Parichaya, Part I, II & III.

2. Shanti Govardhan: Sangeet Shastra Darpan Part I1.
3. Vasant: SangeetVisharad: Sangeet Karyalaya, Hathras.
4. S. Bandhopadhay: Sitar Marg Part I & II
84
5. Sangeet Karyalya, Hathras: Hamare Sangeet Ratan.
6. Prof. Tara Singh: Vadan Kala, Punjabi University, Patiala.
7. SharatchandraPranjpe: Sangeet Bodh
8. Sangeet Roop Part I: Dr. Devinder Kaur
9. Dr. Jagmohan Sharma TablaVadan Part- I : Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
10. SwarVadan Part-I : Pt. Satish Chandar Published by SangeetshriParkashan, Kanpur.
85
Programme Outcome-
Music Vocal is considered as evergreen subject due to its high utility

and huge demand in the job area and as well as in attaining the
popularity and fame. Graduation in Music Vocal paves way to develop
critical enquiry into the value and potential and to prepare students
for entry into work of Personality Development, Social Music
Therapies, Cultural Policy, Sound Archives, Sound Recorder, Music
Arranger, Stage Performer etc.
86
MUSIC VOCAL
(Semester I)
PAPER-A: (BASICS OF INDIAN MUSIC)
Max Marks : 50 Lectures to be delivered: 38
(36 marks external paper +14 marks assessment)
Internal Assessment: 14 Marks
(MST = 06 marks, Assignment=05 Attendance = 03 marks)
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome :
In this course the students who opt music vocal as an optional subject are taught the basics of Indian
music. In the Indian music where the students are taught the origin and development of Music in the
ancient period, explanation of various musical terms, role of music in human life, knowledge of the
instruments like tabla and harmonium and brief introduction of Shri Guru Granth Sahib in the
context of Music.
Note: Along with Music (Vocal), the candidate can also take Tabla or Music (Instrumental) as an
elective subject.
(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four questions
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each. Section C will consist of
08 objective/short type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16
marks in all.
(ii) While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter for theory paper the syllabus prescribed for Practical
Paper should also be sent.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B and the entire Section C is
compulsory.
SECTION- A
(i) Historical development of Music in Post Independence Era.

(ii) Definition and explanation of the following musical terms:
Naad , Swara , Saptak , Aroh, Avroh,Pakad, Sam, Taali, Khali
(iii) Role of Music in human life.
(iv) Biographical sketches of (a) Bhai Mardana (b) Swami Haridas and their contribution to Indian
Music.
SECTION- B
(v) Knowledge of the following instruments:
Tabla and Harmonium
(vi) Brief introduction of Shri Guru Granth Sahib in the context of Indian Music.
(vii) Detailed description and notation of prescribed Raags (Khayal) and Taals given below:
Raag : Bilawal, Bhupali
Taals : Kehrva , Teentaal
(viii) Elementary Knowledge of the Raag Deshkar.
87
SEMESTER- I
PAPER- B: (STAGE PERFORMANCE)
Max Marks : 50 Lectures to be delivered : 50

Pass Marks: 35% Time allowed: 20 minutes
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : The students will develop the moral values while performing, listening music
to culcate their regards and love to music which is very vast. They also develop the ability to sing
alankars in the Raags with harmonium, ability to sing drut khayal, geet and lok geet, ability to
demonstrate taals on hand with layakaries through which these causes to perform well.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE EXAMINERS
Department/nominee, internal teacher and external expert.
(ii) There should not be more than 8 students in a batch for examination.
(iii) Harmonium may also be allowed as an accompaniment.
(1) Ability to sing 10 Alankars in the prescribed Raags.

(2) Ability to play 10 basic Alankars on Harmonium.
(3) One Drut Khayal in Bilawal and Bhupali Raag with simple Alaaps and Taans.
(4) Ability to sing Geet / Lok Geet.
(5) Ability to demonstrate the following Taals on hand in Ekgun and Dugun layakaries: Kehrva,
Teentaal.
(6) Aaroh, Avroh and Pakar of Raag Deshkar.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR PAPERS
1. Harish Chander Srivastava : Raag Parichaya , Part I, II & III.

2. V.N. Patwardhan : Raag Vigyan , Part I & II.
3. V.S. Nigam : Sangeet Kaumudi , Part II & III ( Punjabi ) published by Punjabi
University, Patiala.
4. Sangeet Shastra Darpan , Part II (Punjabi).
5. Sangeet Karyalya, Hathras : Sangeet Vishard.
6. Veena Mankaran : Sangeet Sar , Part I.
7. Shanti Govardhan : Sangeet Shastra Darpan.
8. Dr. Jagmohan Sharma : Tabla Vadan, Part- I published by Punjabi University,
Patiala.
9. Hamare Sangeet Ratan Published by Sangeet Karyala, Hathras.
10. Dr. Gurnam Singh : Punjabi Sangeetkar, Publication by Punjabi University,Patiala.
11. Dr. Devinder Kaur : Sangeet Roop Part I
12. Sharatchandra Pranjpe : Sangeet Bodh
13. Prof. Tara Singh : Vadan Kala, Punjabi University, Patiala.
88
MUSIC VOCAL
(SEMESTER II)
PAPER-A: (BASICS OF INDIAN MUSIC)

Pass Marks: 35% Time Allowed : 3 hours
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome: In this course the students are taught again the basics of Indian music. In the
Indian music where the students are taught the historical development of Music in the Hindu period,
they are also taught classification of Indian Musical Instruments, description of various elements
like Laya, Thaat, Raag, Alaap, Taan, Jatti, Gamak and they also understand the contribution of
Rababi and Kirtaniye to Gurmat Sangeet. Students will be able to cultivate their voice quality in a
right manner with the knowledge of voice culture.
Note: The candidate can opt Music Instrumental or Tabla as an elective subject along with Music
Vocal.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four
consist of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry
16 marks in all.
While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter for this paper the syllabus prescribed for Paper B
should also be sent.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B and the
entire Section C is compulsory.
SECTION- A
(i) Historical development of Music in British Period.

(ii) Detailed study of Bhatkhande's Thaat Padhti.
(iii) Definition and explanation of the following musical terms:
Raag, Alaap, Jaati, Taan,Vibhag, Avartan
(iv) Biographical sketches of the following musicians and scholars and their contribution to
indian music:
(a) Pandit Vishnu Digambar Paluskar (b) Pandit Vishnu Narayan Bhatkhande
SECTION- B
(v) Elementary knowledge of Tanpura.

(vi) Definition of the following in the context of Gurmat Sangeet :
Mahla , Rahao, Salok, Paudi
(vii) Importance of Laya and Taal in Indian Music.
(viii) Detailed description and notation of prescribed Raags (Khayal) and Taals given below:
Raag: Yaman, Kafi
Taals : Teentaal, Dadra
(ix) Elementary Knowledge of the following Raags:
Bhimplasi
89
SEMESTER - II
PAPER- B: (STAGE PERFORMANCE)
Pass Marks: 35% Time allowed : 20 minutes
Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : The students will develop the ability to sing alankars in the prescribed Raags
with harmonium, ability to sing shabad or bhajan or ghazal, ability to demonstrate the Taals on hand
with layakaries through which these causes to Perform well.
(ii) There should not be more than 10 students in a batch for Stage Performance examination.
(iii) Harmonium may also be allowed as accompaniment.
(1) Ability to sing Alankars in the prescribed Raags.

(2) Ability to play these Alankars on Harmonium.
(3) One Drut Khayal in each of the following Raags with simple Alaaps and Tanas:
Yaman, Kafi
(4) Ability to sing Shabad/Bhajan.
(5) Ability to demonstrate the following Taals on hand in Ekgun and Dugun layakaries :
Teentaal, Dadra.
(6) Aaroh, Avroh and Pakar of Raag Bhimplasi.
1. Harish Chander Srivastava : Raag Parichaya , Part I, II & III.

2. V.N. Patwardhan : Raag Vigyan , Part I & II.
3. V.S. Nigam : Sangeet Kaumudi , Part II & III ( Punjabi ) published by Punjabi University,
Patiala.
4. Sangeet Shastra Darpan , Part II (Punjabi).
5. Sangeet Visharad published by Sangeet Karyalaya, Hathras.
6. Veena Mankaran : Sangeet Sar , Part I.
7. Shanti Govardhan : Sangeet Shastra Darpan.
8. Dr. Jagmohan Sharma : Tabla Vadan, Part- I published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
9. Hamare Sangeet Ratan Published by Sangeet Karyala, Hathras.
10. Dr. Gurnam Singh : Punjabi Sangeetkar, Publication by Punjabi University, Patiala.
11. Dr. Devinder Kaur : Sangeet Roop- I.
12. Dr. Devinder Kaur : Bharti Sangeet Swarlipi Paddhati- Itihasak Sarvekhan
90
TABLA
(Semester I)
PAPER-A: BASICS OF TABLA
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : In this course, the students are taught about the basics of Taal. Students are
taught the origin and development of music in the ancient period. They are taught various musical
terms and are given knowledge of Layakries like Dugun, Chaugun, dholak and Harmonium.
Note: The candidate can opt Music Vocal or Music Instrumental as an elective subject along with
Tabla.
(iii) The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four
(iv) While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter for theory paper the syllabus prescribed for Stage
Performance Paper should also be sent.
Section – A
1. Definition and explanation of the following:-

Dayan, Bayan, Laya, Theka, Aavartan, Vibhag, Sam, Tali and Khali.
2. Importance of Taal in Music.
3. Life Sketch of the Pt. Kishan Maharaj and Ustad Allah Rakha Khan.
4. Brief History of Tabla.
Section – B
5. Verns of Tabla.
6. Comparative Study of the following Taals.
(a) Dadra (b) Keharva (c) Teen taal
7. Writing notation of the following in Teen Taal:
Peshkara, Two Kayadas with four Paltas.
8. Notation of above mentioned Taals with their Dugan & Chaugun Layakaries.
91
TABLA
SEMESTER- I
PAPER- B: STAGE PERFORMANCE
Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : The students will develop the moral values while performing and listening
music. They also develop the ability to play; Tabla with Kayda, Paltas and Verns, Nagma with
harmonium, Dholak, ability to demonstrate taals on hand with layakaries.
(iv) The Examination will be conducted by a Board of Examiners consisting of Head of the
(v) There should not be more than 8 students in a batch for stage performance
examination.
(vi) Harmonium, Sarangi, Dilruba etc. may also be allowed as an
accompaniment (Nagma).
Taals prescribed: Teentaal, Dadra and Keharva.
(a) Ability to play Verns of Tabla.

(b) Teentaal : Two Kayadas with four Paltas.
(c) Laggies in Dadra
(d) Ability to play Dholak in Kehrwa Taal.
(e) Ability to play Nagma on Harmonium in Teen Taal.
14. Dr. Jagmohan Sharma : Tabla Vadan Part I, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala
15. Girish Chanra Shrivastava: Taal Prabhakar Prashnotri
16. Bikramaditya.Singh Nigam : Tabla Tarang
17. Bhagwat Sharan Sharma: Tal Prakash
18. Girish Chanra Shrivastava : Taal Prichey
19. Lakshmi Narayan Garg: Hamare Sangeet Ratan
20. Dr. Gurnam Singh: Punjabi Sangeetkar
21. Lakshmi Narayan Garg: Bharat Ke Sangeetkar
92
TABLA
(SEMESTER II)
PAPER A: BASICS OF TABLA
Max Marks: 50 Lectures to be delivered: 30

Pass Marks: 35% Time Allowed: 3 hours
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : The students will be able to understand the basics of Tabla. Students are taught
various Jaties of Taal, instruments like Pakhawaj etc., description of various elements like Tihai,
Mukhra, Kayda, Palta, Rela, Paran and they also understand to compose small Tehaies of Taals.
Note: The candidate can opt Music Vocal or Music Instrumental as an elective subject along with
Tabla.
(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four
(ii) While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter for theory paper the syllabus prescribed for Stage
Section – A
1. Definition and explanation of the following:-

Tihai, Mukhra, Kayada, Palta, Rela, Paran
2. Study of different Jaaties of Carnatka Taal System.
3. Study of Dholak and Pakhawaj.
4. Life Sketch of Ustad Bahadur Singh and Ustad Zakir Hussain.
Section – B
5. Comparative Study of the following Taals:

(a) Ektaal (b) Chautaal
6. Writing notation of Teen Taal: two Kayadas, four Paltas, Tihai and two Tukras.
7. Description of Chautaal and its Ekgun and Dugun Layakaries.
8. Ability to compose two small Tehaies in above mentioned Taals.
93
TABLA
SEMESTER – II
PAPER- B: STAGE PERFORMANCE

Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome: The students will develop the ability to play Tabla with Kayda,Paltas,Tihai and
tukras, to play Nagma with harmonium, ability to play Laggis in selective Taals, ability to
demonstrate taals on hand with layakaries through which these causes to perform well.

(iv) The Examination will be conducted by a Board of Examiners consisting of Head of the
(v) There should not be more than 8 students in a batch for examination.
(vi) Harmonium, Sarangi, Dilruba etc. may also be allowed as an accompaniment (Nagma).
Taals prescribed: Teentaal, Chautaal, Dadra and Keharva

(a) Teentaal – (i) Two Kayadas, four Paltas, Tihai, Uthaan and two Tukras
(b) Chautaal: Theka in Ekgun and Dugun Layakaries.
(c) Laggis in Kehrva and Dadra Taal.
(d) Ability to play Nagma on Harmonium in Teentaal.
(e) Tuning of Tabla.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Dr. Jagmohan Sharma : Tabla Vadan Part I (Published by Punjabi University, Patiala)
2. Girish Chanra Shrivastava: Taal Prabhakar Prashnotri
3. Bikramaditya.Singh Nigam : Tabla Tarang
4. Sangit Karyala, Hathras : Tal Prakash
5. Girish Chander Shrivastava: Taal Prichey – Part I and II.
6. Lakshmi Narayan Garg: Hamare Sangeet Ratan
7. Dr. Gurnam Singh: Punjabi Sangeetkar
8. Lakshmi Narayan Garg: Bharat Ke Sangeetkar
94
CULTURAL STUDIES
(SEMESTER I)
5 Credits
Time: 3Hours Max Marks: 100 Marks
Periods Per week: 5 Theory: 70 Marks
Pass Marks: 35% Internal Assessment: 30 Marks
Course Outcome (CO1) Cultural Studies
• Explore ‘culture’ as an academic field of study
• Understand the different aspects of culture and evolution of Cultural Studies
• Investigate how culture creates and transforms individual experiences, everyday life, social
condition and power

UNIT-I shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These
questions shall carry 10+10=20marks.
UNIT-II shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These
questions shall carry 10+10=20marks.
UNIT-III shall cover the entire syllabus and shall be of 30 marks. This unit shall comprise ten short
answer questions of about 100-120 words each. Each question shall carry 3marks.
Unit- I
Culture
 What is Culture: Definition and Nature, Basic Characteristics, and Essential Components
 Forms of Culture: Material and Non-Material, Popular, Global, Local, High and Low, Folk
and sub culture
 Cultural Production: Representation, Consumption and Regulation
Unit-II
Elements of Culture
 Social Organization, Customs and Traditions, Language Norms and Mores, and Social
Ethics
 National, Ethnic, Religious, Gender and Cultural Identity
 Cultural Assimilation and Adaptability
Unit-III
This unit shall comprise ten short answer questions of about 100-120 words covering the entire
syllabus
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 During, Simon(ed.). The Cultural Studies Reader. London and New York: Routledge,
 Fedorak, Shirley.Pop Culture-The Culture of Everyday Life. University of Toronto,2009
 Highmore, Ben. Culture. New York: Routeledge,2016.
 Jeff, Levis. Cultural Studies-The Basics. London: Sage Publications, 200
 Longhurst, Brian. Introducing Cultural Studies. New York: Pearson, 2008.
 Nayar, Pramod K..An Introduction to Cultural Studies. New Delhi: Vinod Vasishtha,
2017
 Rutherford, Jonathan(ed.). Identity Community, Culture, Difference. London: Lawrence &
Wishart, 1990.
 Storey, John. What is Cultural Studies? London: Arnold, 1996.
 Strinati, Dominic. An Introduction to Theories of Popular Culture. New York:
Routledge, 2004.
 Williams, Raymond. Culture. The University of Michigan: Fontana,1981.
 Whorf, B. Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1956
95
CULTURAL STUDIES
(SEMESTER II)
5 Credits
Time: 3Hours Max Marks: 100 Marks
Periods Per week: 5 Theory: 70 Marks
(CO2) Cultural Studies
• Build knowledge of the way language, text and objects work in everyday culture
• Understand the impact of society, politics, and economic conditions on culture
• Understand the essence of global culture
UNIT-I shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These
questions shall carry 10+10=20 marks.
UNIT-II shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These
questions shall carry 10+10=20 marks.
UNIT-III shall cover the entire syllabus and shall be of 30 marks. This unit shall comprise ten short
answer questions of about100-120 words each. Each question shall carry 3marks.
Unit- I
Culture and Society
 Relationship between Culture and Society
 Commodity, Production and Consumption
 Consumerism: Capitalism, Advertisement, the Mall, Conventional Market and Online
Shopping
Unit-II
Impact of Media and Technology on Culture
 Media and Culture: Encoding and Decoding
 Technological Advancements: Impact of IT on Society, Social Networking and Addiction
 Globalization of Culture: Homogeneity and Heterogeneity
Unit-III
This unit shall comprise ten short answer questions of about 100-120 words covering the entire
syllabus
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 A. Fedorak, Shirley. Pop Culture-The Culture of Everyday Life. Ontario: University of
Bloomsbury,1999.
 Lule, Jack. Understanding Media and Culture- An Introduction to Mass
 Miles, Steve. Consumerism- As a Way of Life. London: Sage Publications, 2006.
 Nayar, Pramod K..An Introduction to Cultural Studies. New Delhi: Vinod Vasishtha, 2017
 Storey, John . Cultural Theory and Popular Culture. New York: Routledge, 2015.
 Storey, John. Cultural Consumption and Everyday Life: Cultural Studies in Practice. Hodder
Education, 1999.
 Tomlinson, John. Globalization and Culture. University of Chicago Press,1999
96
(SEMESTER-I)
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION: ADMINISTRATIVE THEORY
CREDITS: 5
Max. Marks: 100 Time: 3 Hours
Theory paper: 70 Pass Marks: 35%
Course Outcome :
 Awareness about the evolution and growth of the discipline of Public Administration.
 Learning of basic principles and approaches of Public Administration.
 Theoretical clarity of basic concepts and dynamics (both ecological and others) relating to Public
organizations.
 Demonstrate critical thinking and communication skills as applied to the public and private sectors.
The question paper will consist of three Sections I, II and III. Sections I & II each will consist of four
questions carrying 10 marks. Section III will consist of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the
entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry 3 marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Section I and II of the question paper and
the entire Section III. Candidates are required to answer the short questions in 4-5 lines.
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Awareness about the evolution and growth of the discipline of Public Administration.
 Learning of basic principles and approaches of Public Administration.
 Theoretical clarity of basic concepts and dynamics (both ecological and others) relating to Public organizations.
TEACHING – LEARNING METHODS
 Pedagogical methods such as class room lectures and students-teacher interactions, group discussion, quiz,
seminar and assignment etc will be used.
ASSESSMENT METHODS
 Summative assessment method comprising of assignment, internal/term examination, regularity in classes and
end semester final examination.
SECTION-I
1. Meaning, Nature, Scope and Significance of Public Administration.
2. Public Administration and Private Administration.
3. Relationship of Public Administration with Political Science, Economics, Sociology and History.
4. New Public Administration, New Public Management and Good Governance: meaning and features.
5. Organization: Meaning, Bases and Types.
SECTION-II
1. Chief Executive, Line, Staff and Auxiliary Agencies.
2. Principles of organization: Hierarchy, Unity of Command, Span of Control.
3. Principles of organization: Centralization and Decentralization, Leadership, Coordination, Communication.
4. Legislative, Judicial and Citizen's Control over Administration.
5. Delegated Legislation: Meaning, Reasons for its growth, Merits, Demerits and Safeguards.
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Awasthi and S.R. Maheshwari: Public Administration, Agra, Lakshmi Narain Aggarwal Educational
Publishers, 2004.
2. A.R. Tyagi: Public Administration: Principles and Practice, Delhi, Atma Ram and Sons, 2001.
3. Bidyut Chakarborty and Prakash Chand: Public Administration in a Globalizing World-Theory and Practices,
New Delhi, Sage Publications India Pvt Ltd, 2015.
4. B.L. Fadia and Kuldeep Fadia: Public Administration: Theory and Practice, Agra, Sahitya Bhawan
Publications, 2015.
5. Inderjit Singh Sethi: Public Administration: Theory and Practice (Panjabi), Jaipur, College Book Depot, 1999.
97
6. K. K. Puri: Elements of Public Administration (Pbi.), Jalandhar, Bharat Parkashan, 2004.
7. Mohit Bhattacharaya: Pubic Administration, Kolkata, The World Press Private Limited, 2012.
8. M. Laximkant: Pubic Administration, New Delhi, Tata MacGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 2011.
9. Rumki Basu: Introduction to Public Administration, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers, 1990.
10. Sahib Singh & Sawinder Singh: Public Administration: Theory and Practice, Jalandhar, New Academic
Publishing Co., 2010.
98
(SEMESTER-II)
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION: INDIAN ADMINISTRATION
CREDITS: 5
Course Outcome:
 Knowledge about the evolution and growth of Indian Administration.
 Familiarity with the constitutional framework on which Indian Administration is based.
 Grasping the role of Union Executive.
 Understanding the in-built control mechanisms over constitutional bodies in particular and
administration in general.
 Delineating the constitutional provisions and dynamics of union -state relationships.
 Awareness about the institutions and mechanism in force for citizen-state interface.
questions carrying 10 marks. Section III will consist of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the
entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry 3 marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Section I and II of the question paper and the entire
Section III. Candidates are required to answer the short questions in 4-5 lines.
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Knowledge about the evolution and growth of Indian Administration.
 Familiarity with the constitutional framework on which Indian Administration is based.
 Grasping the role of Union Executive.
 Understanding the in-built control mechanisms over constitutional bodies in particular and administration in
general.
 Delineating the constitutional provisions and dynamics of union -state relationships.
 Awareness about the institutions and mechanism in force for citizen-state interface.
ASSESSMENT METHODS
 Summative assessment method comprising of assignment, internal/term examination, regularity in classes and
end semester final examination.
SECTION-I
1. Features of Indian Administration, Federalism, Legislative and Administrative Relations between the Union
and the States.
2. Union Executive: The President, The Prime Minister and the Council of Ministers.
3. Cabinet Secretariat, Central Secretariat,
4. Parliamentary Democracy: Lok Shaba & Rajya Sabha.
5. Supreme Court: Organization and Functions, National Human Rights Commission: Composition and
Functions.
SECTION-II
1. State Executive: The Governor, The Chief Minister, State Council of Ministers.
2. The Chief Secretary, State Secretariat.
3. State Legislature: Composition and Functions.
4. High Court: Organization and Functions.
5. Right to Information Act, 2005 & Punjab Right to Service Act, 2011: Main Features.
99
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Avasthi and Avasthi: Indian Administration, Lakshmi Narain Aggarwal, Agra, New Delhi, 2002.
2. B.L. Fadia & Kuldeep Fadia: Indian Administration, Agra, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, 2016.
3. K.K.Puri: Indian Administration, (Pbi.), Jalandhar, Bharat Publishers, 2005.
4. S.R. Maheshwari: Indian Administration, New Delhi, Orient Blackswan, 2009.
5. S.S.Khera: District Administration in India, New Delhi, National Publishing House, 1979.
6. Siuli Sarkar: Public Administration in India, New Delhi, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
7. Surendra Kataria: Indian Public Administration (Hindi), New Delhi, National Publishing House, 2009.
8. S. S. Nanda: Indian Political System, (Pbi.), Jalandhar, Modern Publications, 2013.
9. Right to Information Act, 2005 & Punjab Right to Service Act 2011: Bare Act.
100
(SEMESTER I)
POLITICAL SCIENCE: FUNDAMENTALS OF POLITICAL SCIENCE I
Maximum Marks : 100 (5 Credits) Time : 3 Hours
Theory 70 Pass Marks : 35%
Internal Assessment 30
Course Outcome :
This course will develop capability of students to formulate and construct logical arguments about political
phenomena. This course will make the students able to understand the fundamental concepts of political
science.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Section A & B will have four questions
from the respective portion of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist of 10 short-
answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short answer
type question will carry three marks.
Instructions for the Candidates
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the Section A & B of the question paper
and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type question in 70-80
words i.e. in 7-8 lines.
SECTION-A
1. Political Science: Meaning, Nature and Scope.
2. Relationship of Political Science with Economics, History and Sociology
3. State: Meaning, Definition and Elements
4. Distinction of State from Government, Society and Association.
5. Theories of the Origin of state: Social contract and Evolutionary.
SECTION-B
6. State: Liberal and Marxian view.
7. Functions of State: Liberal Perspective.
8. Functions of State: Socialist Perspective
9. Sovereignty: Meaning, Definition, Attributes and Types.
10. Sovereignty: Monistic and Pluralistic Theory of Sovereignty
Recommended Books
1. J.C. Johri: Principles of Political Science, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi.
2. S.P. Verma: Political Theory, Geetanjali Publishing House, New Delhi.
3. A.C. Kapoor: Principles of Political Science, S.Chand& Company, New Delhi
4. E.Ashirvatham: Political Theory, S.Chand& Company, New Delhi.
5. M.P. Jain: Political Theory, Authors Guild Publication, Delhi(Punjabi & Hindi)
6. David Easton: The Political System, Scientific Book Agency, Calcutta.
7. D.C. Bhattacharya: Political Theory, Vijay Publishing House, Calcutta.
8. O.P. Gauba: An Introduction to Political Theory, Macmillan India Ltd. New Delhi.
9. Satish Kumar Sharma: AdhunikRajnitikVishleshan, Publication Bureau, Punjabi University, Patiala.
10. S.S. Nanda: Political Theory (Punjabi & English) Modern Publications, jalandhar.
11. Andrew Heywood, Political Theory, Macmillan Pvt. Ltd.
12. J.S Badyal: Political Theory, Raj Publishers, Jalandhar.
101
(SEMESTER II)
POLITICAL SCIENCE: FUNDAMENTALS OF POLITICAL SCIENCE II
Maximum Marks : 100 (5 Credits) Time : 3 Hours

Theory 70 Pass Marks : 35%
Course Outcome:
This course develops a better understanding of questions concerning power, justice, rights, and laws and
other issues pertaining to governance. It examines the role of political system and helping students to
understand the strategic creativity of political actors. It enables the students to comprehend political concepts
and ideologies.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Section A & B will have four questions
from the respective portion of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist of 10 short-
answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short answer
type question will carry three marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the Section A & B of the question paper
and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type question in 70-80
SECTION -A
1. Political System: Meaning, Definition and Characteristics.
2. Functions of Political System: views of Almond and David Easton
3 Political Culture: Meaning, Characteristics and types.
4. Political Socialisation: Meaning, Characteristics and Agencies.
5 Rights and Duties: Meaning, Definition, Types and Relationship between the Rights and
Duties
SECTION-B
6. Liberty: Meaning, Definition, Types and its safeguards.
7. Equality: Meaning, Definition, Types and Relationship between Liberty and Equality.
8. Justice: Meaning and its various Dimensions.
9. Democracy: Meaning, Characteristics and Types.
10. Theories of Democracy: Liberal and Marxian.
Recommended Books
1. J.C. Johri: Principles of Political Science, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi.
2. S.P. Verma: Political Theory, Geetanjali Publishing House, New Delhi.
3. A.C. Kapoor: Principles of Political Science, S.Chand& Company, New Delhi
4. E.Ashirvatham: Political Theory, S.Chand& Company, New Delhi.
5. M.P. Jain: Political Theory, Authors Guild Publication, Delhi(Punjabi & Hindi)
6. David Easton: The Political System, Scientific Book Agency, Calcutta.
7. D.C. Bhattacharya: Political Theory, Vijay Publishing House, Calcutta.
8. O.P. Gauba: An Introduction to Political Theory, Macmillan India Ltd. New Delhi.
9. Satish Kumar Sharma: AdhunikRajnitikVishleshan, Publication Bureau, Punjabi University, Patiala.
10. S.S. Nanda: Political Theory (Punjabi & English) ModenPublications,Jalandhar.
11. Andrew Heywood, Political Theory, Macmillan Pvt. Ltd.
102
(SEMESTER I)
COMPUTER SCIENCE: FUNDAMENTALS OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
Time: 3 hours Maximum Marks: 100

Pass Marks: 35% Internal Assessment: 20marks
Theory: 50 marks Practical Examination: 30
Course Objective
The objective of the course is to understand the basics of Computer, its terminology and different office tools.
Course Learning Outcomes:
After completion of this course students will able to:
CO1: To understand the basic concepts, terminology of IT and familiar with the use of IT tools.
CO2: To Learn and explore new IT techniques in various applications and to identify the issues related to security.
CO3: To learn working knowledge of hardware and software of computer.
CO4: To learn the various features of MS-Office.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Section A and B will have four questions each
from respective unit of the syllabus carrying 8 marks for each question. Section C will have 6-9 short answer
type questions carrying total 18 marks, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
The candidates are required to attempt two questions each from section A, B and the entire section C
UNIT–I
Computer Fundamentals: Block diagram of Computer, Characteristics and Types of Computers. Number
System: Non-positional and positional number systems, Base conversion, Concept of Bit and Byte, binary,
decimal, hexadecimal, and octal systems, conversion from one system to the other.
Input/output Devices: Keyboard & Mouse, Trackball, Joystick, Scanner (OCR, OMR, MICR) Displays-CRT, LCD,
LED, Plotter, Printer-Impact & Non-Impact Printers, Speakers Memories: Types, Units of Memory, Primary
Storage-RAM, ROM, Cache, Virtual Memory. Secondary Storage -Drives – CD, DVD(R/W), Hard Disk, Pen Drive.
Languages: Machine, Assembly, High-Level, Translators (Assembler, Compiler & Interpreter), Algorithm &
Flow Charts, Hardware, Software, Application Software & System Software.
UNIT-II
Windows: Introduction and features of Windows, Installing Windows, Basic elements of Windows, Starting
and Quitting Windows, Windows Explorer, Files, Folders, Flash Drives, Finding Lost or Misplaced Files, Folders,
and Programs, Control Panel, Customizing Windows.
MS-WORD: Introduction Basic Editing, Formatting, Templates, Working With Graphics and Pictures, Tables,
Desktop Publishing, Mail Merge, Proofing, Printing, and Publishing, Comparing, Merging, and Protecting
Documents.
MS-POWERPOINT: Introduction, Using Themes and Layouts, Inserting Text and Using WordArt, Inserting
Graphics (Tables, Charts, Shapes, Clip-Art), Working with Videos, Movie-Clips, Animations, and Transitions,
Sounds, Editing, Saving, Printing and Publishing Tools, Help.
MS-EXCEL: Introduction, Worksheets and Workbooks, Entering Information into MS Excel, formatting a
Worksheet, Adding Elements to a Workbook, Charts, Formulas and Calculations, Statistical functions and
financial functions.
103
Suggested Readings:
1. P.K. Sinha and P. Sinha," Computer Fundamentals", BPB Publications.
2. A. Goel," Computer Fundamentals", Pearson Education.
3. V. Rajaraman," Computer fundamentals", PHI.
4. Ed Bott and Woody Leonhard, "Special Edition Using Microsoft Office 2007".
(SEMESTER I)
COMPUTER SCIENCE: SOFTWARE LAB-I 104
(BASED ON FUNDAMENTALS OF INFORMATION AND TECHNOLOGY)
2 CREDITS: 4H(P)
Maximum Marks: 30 Minimum Pass Marks: 35%
 The breakup of marks for the practical will be as under: -
 Viva Voce (External Evaluation) 15 Marks
 Lab Record, Program Development and Execution (External Evaluation) 15 Marks
Course Objective
The objective of the course is to understand the basics of ICT and to make aware of Office automation
using MS- Office.
After completion of this course students will able to
CO1: Understand the basic concepts, terminology of IT and the use of IT Tools.
CO2: Explore the Word Processing techniques in various applications.
CO3: Explore the presentation commands to be used practically and professionally.
CO4: To practically understand the concepts of spreadsheets and various other tools of MS-Office.
Students are required to develop the following activities I MS-Word

Activity 1:
i. Create, open, save and close a document.
ii. Typing, copying, moving and deleting data in word document.
iii. Perform Save and Save as, Cut and Copy, Paste and Paste Special.
Activity 2:
Formatting of data in word Document: -
i. Text formatting (font size, font style, font color, subscript, superscript, upper/lower case
etc.)
ii. Text Alignment and character spacing.
iii. Indention and line spacing.
iv. Border and shading.
v. Bullets and Numbering
Activity 3:
i. Find and replace and data sorting in a document.
ii. Protect your document.
iii. Add chart in word document. Create different types of Charts in word.
iv. Set a size, margin, orientation of page, Hyphenation, Columns and Line Numbers in MS-
Word.
Activity 4:
i. Set Page Color, Page Border, Themes, and Watermarks in MS-Word.
ii. Adding Tables, header/footers, pictures, page numbers and special symbols, Text Box in
your word document.
iii. Showing Ruler, Gridlines, Document Map, Thumbnails, Inserting Word Art, Drop Cap,
Hyperlink, Equation etc. in word document
Activity 5:
i. Arranging, splitting windows in MS-word?
ii. Perform Mail-merge in MS-word.
iii. Create and run Macros in MS-Word.
iv. Set the print properties of a word document.
II. PowerPoint Activity 1:
i. Create, open, save and close a Presentation.
ii. Typing, copying, moving and deleting data in presentation.
iii. New Slide, understanding Slide Layout, adding and deleting slides.
Activity 2: 105
Formatting of data in slides: -
i. Text formatting (font size, font style, font color, subscript, superscript, upper/lower case
etc.)
ii. Text Alignment and character spacing.
iii. Indention and line spacing.
iv. Border and shading.
v. Bullets and Numbering
Activity 3:
i. Set a size, margin, orientation of slides in PowerPoint.
ii. Adding Tables, header/footers, pictures, page numbers and special symbols, Text Box etc.
in
your presentation.
Activity 4:
i. Adding Animation and Transition Effects in Slides, Understanding Slide Show
ii. Presentation Views, Understanding Formatting commands in PowerPoint
Activity 5:
i. Create and run Macros in PowerPoint.
ii. Arranging, splitting windows in MS-PowerPoint.
III. MS-Excel
Activity 1
i. Create, open, save and close work book.
ii. Create a new worksheet, renaming and moving sheet.
iii. Entering, copying, moving and deleting data in cells and worksheets.
iv. Insert and delete cells, columns and rows in MS-Excel.
Activity 2:
Formatting of data in cells:-
i. Text formatting (font size, font style, font color, Cell border etc.)
ii. Text Alignment.
iii. Text Orientation, Text Direction, Text Control.
Activity 3:
i. Find and replace data in a sheet.
ii. Perform data sorting and data filtering in MS-Excel.
iii. Protect your Worksheet and Workbook?
iv. Enter and perform some basic formulas in ms-excel.
Activity 4:
i. Perform some basic Functions in MS-Excel.
ii. Create a chart in MS-Excel.
iii. Create different types of Charts in excel.
iv. Set a size, margin, orientation of page in Ms-Excel.
v. The print properties of a worksheet in MS-Excel.
Activity 5:
i. Hide and unhide row and column in MS-Excel.
ii. Set column width and row height in MS-Excel.
iii. Adding text Box, header/footers, pictures and special symbols in your worksheet.
iv. Arranging, splitting and hiding windows in MS-Excel. And also freezing panes
v. Create and run Macros in MS-Excel.
(SEMESTER II)
106
COMPUTER SCIENCE: DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Theory: 50 marks Practical Examination 30
Course Objective:The objective of the course is to understand the basics of Database Management System
and to make students capable of creating database and working with it.
Course Learning Outcomes: After completion of this course students will able to:
CO1: Gain a good understanding of the architecture and functioning of database management systems,
Principles of data modelling and normalization techniques.
CO2: Explore the components of relational database management system.
CO3: Understand the use of structured query language and its syntax, transactions, database recovery and
techniques for query optimization.
CO4: Acquire the practical knowledge of MySQL.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, and C. Section A and B will have four questions each
from respective unit of the syllabus carrying 8 marks for each question. Section C will have 6-9 short answer
type questions carrying total 18 marks, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
The candidates are required to attempt two questions each from section A, B and the entire section C.
UNIT - I
Database Management Systems: Introduction, Definition, Characteristics, Classification of DBMS, Database
Approaches and its characteristics. Database Administrators, Database Designers, End Users, Application
Developers, Advantages of DBMS, Codd Rules.
Architecture: Data Models, Categories of Data Models- Conceptual Data Models, Physical data Models,
Representational Data Models: Object Based Models, Record Based Models, Database Schema and Instance,
Three Schema Architecture, Data Independence – Physical and Logical data Independence.
Database Conceptual Modelling by E-R model: Concepts, Entities and Entity Sets, Attributes, Mapping
Constraints, E-R Diagram, Weak Entity Sets, Strong Entity Sets. Enhanced E-R Modelling: Aggregation,
Generalization, Converting ER Diagrams to Tables. Relational Data Model: Concepts and
Terminology, Characteristics of Relations. Constraints: Integrity Constraints- Entity and Referential Integrity
constraints, Keys- Super Keys, Candidate Keys, Primary Keys, Secondary Keys and Foreign Keys.
UNIT - II
Relational Algebra: Basic Set Operations: Union, Intersection, Cartesian Product, Division. Additional
Operations: Selection, Projection and Join, Examples and Queries.
Normalization: Definition, Need of Normalization, Properties, Functional Dependency, Full Functional
Dependency, Transitive Dependency, Normal Forms – 1NF, 2NF, 3NF, Boyce- Codd NF.
Database Design: Guidelines for Designing the Relation Schemas, Problems of Bad Database Design.
MySQL: Getting started with MySQL, MySQL data types, managing MySQL databases and tables, filtering data,
joining tables, grouping data, sub queries, set operators, modifying data in MySQL.
Suggested Readings:
1. Elmisry Navathe, “Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson Education India.
2. Henry F. Korth, Abraham, "Database System Concepts", Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Naveen Prakash," Introduction to Database Management”, TMH.
4. C.J. Date, "An Introduction to Data Base Systems", Pearson Education India.
(SEMESTER II)
COMPUTER SCIENCE: SOFTWARE LAB –II 107
(BASED ON DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM)
CREDITS: 4H (P)
Maximum Marks: 30
Maximum Time: 3 hours Minimum Pass Marks: 35%
Course Objective
The objective of the course is to understand the basics of Database Management System and to make
students capable of creating database and working with it.
CO1: To explore, organize, maintain and retrieve the database effectively and efficiently using MySQL.
CO2: To apply the knowledge of computing and mathematics for designing the various applications.
CO3: Design, implement and evaluate computer programs to meet the desired need of databases.
CO4: Use and apply the current techniques, concepts and practices in the core information technologies for
the design of need based software.
The breakup of marks for the practical will be as under:-

 Lab Record, Program Development and Execution (External Evaluation) 15 Marks
Students are required to practices following:
1. Create and drop database.

2. Create and drop tables in MySQL
3. Creating queries in MySQL for selection, insertion, update, and deletion of data in tables.
4. Creating query to clone tables, temporary tables and altering tables.
5. Creating queries to handle duplicates in MySQL.
6. Importing and exporting data from MySQL.
7. Creating queries in MySQL for different types of joins.
(SEMESTER-I)
GEOGRAPHY: PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY: (GEOMORPHOLOGY) 108
5 CREDITS:4H (L) + 2H (P)
Maximum Marks: 100 Theory: 50 Marks
Pass Marks: 35% Practical: 30 Marks
Course Outcome: Student will be able to
 Learn about the landform features, mountains, rivers, valleys etc.
 Learn about the chemistry, structure and origin of earth.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Section A and B will have fourquestions each
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 8 marks each. SectionC will consist of 6 short-
answer type questions covering the entire syllabus uniformly and willcarry 18 marks in all. Each short-
answer type question carries 3 marks.
1) Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B of thequestion
paper and the entire section C is compulsory.
2) Candidates are allowed to use their own outline stencil maps of the world/continents/countries.
They are also allowed to use simple calculators.
3) Credit will be given for suitable maps and diagrams.
OBJECTIVES:
I. To introduce students to the basic concepts of Physical Geography.
II. To make the students aware of the need of protection and conservation of different
landforms.
III. To prepare the students for competitive exams.
SECTION -A
1. Introduction to Geography: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Importance of Geography.
2. Theories about the Origin of Earth: Laplace theory and Big Bang theory.
3. The Constitution of Earth’s Interior: Crust, Mantle and Core
4. The Continental Drift Theory of Wegner and Plate Tectonics.
5. Folds and Faults
SECTION-B
1. Rocks: Origin, Classification and Characteristics: Sedimentary, Igneous and MetamorphicRocks.
2. Major land forms: Mountains, Plateaus and Plains.
3. Geomorphic processes: Weathering and Erosion
4. Geomorphological landscapes: Fluvial, Glacial, Aeolian,
5. Earthquakes and Volcanoes: causes, types and distribution.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Chawla, I.N. :BhautikBhoogol(in Punjabi), Bharat Prakashan Jalandhar,2015.
2. Singh, Malkit :BhautikBhoogol(in Punjabi) Rasmeet Prakashan Jalandhar,2015.
3. Dyal, P. :A Text Book of Geomorphology,Shukla Book Depot, Patna,1995.
4. Kaur, Dhian :The Earth, Edited by R.C. Chandna, Kalyani Publishers,Ludhiana, Delhi, 2000.
5. Khan, Nizamuddin :An Introduction to Physical Geography, Concept, New Delhi,2001.
6. Mamoria, C.P. :BhauticBhoogolKeTatw(In Hindi), Agra 1976.Niati, J.L.
7. Monkhouse, F.J. :Principles of Physical Geography, Longman, New Delhi, LatestEdition.
8. R.N. Tikha :Physical Geography, New Academic Publishing Co., Jalandhar.
9. Singh, Savindera :Physical Geography, Gynodya Prakashan, Gorakhpur, 1994.
10. Sparks, B.W. :Geomorphology, Longman, London, 1986.
11. Thornbury, W.D. :Principles of Geomorphology, Second Edition, Wiley EasternLtd., New Delhi,
1993.
(SEMESTER-I) 109
GEOGRAPHY: PRACTICAL GEOGRAPHY:( CARTOGRAPHY)
Max. Marks: 30 Min. Pass Marks: 35%

Session-I Morning-Written Paper Marks:15
Session-II Evening-Practical and Viva Voce Marks :15
Four questions should be given out of the two sections. Candidates are required to attempt
three questions in all, at least one question from each section. Each question will carry 5 marks.
The paper will be set by the examiner at the center on the spot.
OBJECTIVES:
I. To help the students to understand the Directions and methods of finding North and their
importance.
II. To help students to understand the importance of Weather Maps.
III. To acquaint the students with local Weather and Climate.
IV. To know the various instruments use for geographical labs.
Note: Use of stencil and calculator is allowed.
SECTION-A
Maps and Scales:
History of cartography: Definition and brief history of cartography and types of maps.
Scales: Construction of Plain scale. Diagonal scale, Comparative scales and Time scale.
SECTION- B
Weather Maps:
Weather maps: General introduction to the study of weather maps.
The scheme of weather symbols employed in Indian daily weather maps; Weather in India:Summer
season and Winter season.
Forecasting of weather through the study of weather maps and recent advances in weatherforecasting.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Mishra, R.P. and Ramesh, A. :Fundamentals of Cartography, ConceptPublishing Co., New Delhi,
1989.
2. Monkhouse, F.J. and :Maps and Diagrams, Methuen and Co.,Wilkinson,H.R London Third Edition,
1976.
3. Robinson, A.H. and :Elements of Cartography, John Wiley Randall, D.Sale Sons, New York (Sixth
Edition, 1995)
4. Raisz, E. :Principles of Cartography, McGraw Hill, NewYork, 1962
5. Singh, Gopal :Map work and Practical Geography, VikasPublishing House, 2008.
6. Singh, L.R. andSingh Raghunandan :Map work and Practical Geography, CentralBook Depot,
Allahabad, 1993.
7. MalkitSingh : Cartography (BePkebk) RashmitParkashan,Jalandhar, 2015.
(SEMESTER-II)
GEOGRAPHY: CLIMATOLOGY 110
5 CREDITS: 4H (L) + 2H (P)
Pass Marks: 35% Practical: 30 Marks
 Learn about the climate of different places
 Learn about the formation of clouds, rainfall , fog and there effects
 Learn about the recent concept of climate change

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Section A and B will have four questions
each from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 8 marks each. Section C will consist of 6
short-answer type questions covering the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 18 marks in all. Each
short-answer type question carries 3 marks.
(i) Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B of the question
paper and the entire section C is compulsory.
(ii) Candidates are allowed to use their own outline stencil maps of the world/continents/countries. They
are also allowed to use simple calculators.
(iii) Credit will be given for suitable maps and diagrams.
Objectives
1. Understand the structure, composition of Atmosphere.
2. Understand weather phenomena winds, humidity, and precipitation.
3. To understand climatic changes
4. To prepare the students for competitive exams.
SECTION-A
(i) Nature and scope of climatology, Composition and structure of the atmosphere
(ii) Controls of Climate and Weather.
(iii) Insolation & Temperature: Factors controlling and its Horizontal distribution.
(iv) Atmosphere Pressure: Horizontal distribution of pressure;
(v) Classification of winds- planetary winds, Periodic & local winds.
SECTION-B
(vi) Atmospheric Moisture: Humidity & its types, Evaporation, Trans-evaporation
(vii) Precipitation: - Forms of condensation; cloud, dew, snow, fog, and frost
(viii) Atmospheric disturbances: Cyclones and Anticyclones.
(ix) Atmospheric Pollution: Air pollutants, causes, consequences and controls.
(x) Global Warming: Meaning, causes, consequences and controls.
1. Barry, R.G. and Chorley, RJ. (2010): Atmosphere, Weather and Climate, Routedge,London and
NewYork.
2. Trewartha, G.T. and Horn, L.A. (1987): Introduction to Climate, International Series,McGraw Hill,
NewYork.
3. Critchfield, J.H. (1999): General Climatology, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
4. Das, P.K. (2002): Monsoons, National Book Trust, New Delhi.
5. Miller, A. Austin (1979): Climatology, Methuen & Co., London.
6. Stringer, E.T. (1972) Foundations of Climatology, W.H. Freeman & Co., SanFrancisco.
7. Griffiths, J.E and Driscoll, D.M. (1982): Survey of Climatology, Charles E. MerrilePub. Co.,
Toronto & London.
8. Burroughs, William James (2001): Climate Change- A Multidisciplinary Approach,Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge. 111
9. Oliver, John. E. and Hidore, John. J., (2003): Climatology: An Atmospheric Science,Pearson
Education Inc., Delhi
10. Lutgens, F.K. and Tarbuck, E.J. (2010): The Atmosphere: An Introduction toMeteorology, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi.
11. Hess, Darrel (2012): McKnight's Physical Geography: A Landscape Appreciation,Prentice Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
1. Mather, J.R. (1974): Climatology: Fundamentals and Applications, McGraw HillBook Co., New
York.
2. Robinson, P.J. and Menderson, S. (1999): Contemporary Climatology, Henlow.
3. Lockwood, J.G. (1979): World Climatology: An Environmental Approach, ArnoldHenniemann,
London.
(SEMESTER-II)
PRACTICAL GEOGRAPHY:CARTOGRAPHY 112
Max. Marks: 30 Min. Pass Marks: 35%
Session-I Morning-Written Paper Time 1½ Hours Marks: 15
Session-II Evening-Practical Paper- Viva Voce Marks: 15
Four questions should be given out of the two sections, and candidates are required toattempt three.
But at least the candidate should attempt one question from each section.Each question will carry 5
marks.The paper will be set by the examiner at the center on the spot.
SECTION-A
Enlargement and Reduction of Maps
Enlargement and reduction: Graphic methods--square and triangle; Instrumental methods--
Pantographs and Photographic.
Chain and Tape survey: Open traverse, closed traverse and triangulation.
SECTION-B
Representation of Relief
Methods of showing relief: Contours, Hachure, Hill-shading and Layers tints.
Directions: Plotting of course, True north, Magnetic north, finding true north with the help of
pole star, a watch and a rod.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Mishra, R.P. and Ramesh, A. :Fundamentals of Cartography, ConceptPublishing Co.,New Delhi,
1989.
2. Robinson, A.H. :Elements of Cartography, John Wi1eyRandall, D.Sale Sons, New York (Sixth
Edition, 1995)
4. Raisz, E. :Principles of Cartography, McGraw Hill, New York,1962
5. Singh, Gopal :Map work and Practical Geography, VikasPublishing House, New Delhi, 1995
6. Singh, L.R. and :Map work and Practical Geography,Singh Raghunandan : Central Book Depot,
Allahabad, 1993.
7. MalkitSingh : Cartography (BePkebk) RashmeetParkashan,Jalandhar, 2015.
(SEMESTER-I)
THEATRE STUDIES 113
Lectures to be delivered: 55 Practical: 40 Marks
 Definition and the Forms of Theatre and Tradition of Sanskrit Theatre.
 Definition and the Forms of Indian folk Theatre.
 Many different plays of famous play writes like Rani koklan, Enna di awaaz, Shakuntala
,poorn,sat begane.
Instructions for Paper Setter for Theory

The Question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Eight questions will be set from the section
A & B, four from each section, carrying six marks each. Nine short questions will be set from section C,
covering the entire syllabus, of two marks each.
Candidates are required to attempt four questions from section A and B, two questions from each sections,
carrying six marks each. Section C is compulsory consisting Nine questions, two marks each. Section C is
of 18 marks.
{THEORY}
SECTION - A
1H BkNe L gfoGkPk s/ BkNô{g
2H ozrwzu L gfoGkPk s/ ;o{g
3H ;z;feqs BkN^gozgok dh gSkD
SECTION - B
1. PeM[sbk ^ ekbhdk;
(nB[tkd L o'PB bkb nkj{ik)
2. g{oB ^ fpqi bkb Pk;soh
3. ;Zs prkB/ ^ niw/o f;zx n"by
PRACTICALS
1. Enactment of a character from the play's prescribed for study.
2. Mimicry of any character observed in life.
3. Attendance will stand for 10 Marks according to the following percentage of attendance. There
will not be any mark below 75%.
75% = 2 Marks
76% to 80% = 4 Marks
81% to 85% = 6 Marks
86% to 90% = 8 Marks
91% to 100% = 10 Marks
Suggested Readings
 Marjorie Boulton, The Anatomy of Drama, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi-Ludhiana,1985
 O.G.Brocket : The Essential Theatre,Holt Rinehart & Winston Inc,New York.
 Surjit Singh Sethi, Natak Kala, Lokgeet Parkashan, Chandigarh, 2005.
 ;shP e[wko towk (;zgkH) ozrwzu dh f;oiD^gqfefonk, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh, gfNnkbk, 2017
 BtfBzdok pfjb, BkNeh ;kfjs, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh, gfNnkbk, 2016
 ewb/P T[Zgb, BkNe ebk L ;o{g s/ f;XKs, ro/Phn; p[e;, gfNnkbk, 2016
 pbtzs rkorh, ozrwzu, Bt:[r gpfbPoI, fdZbh, 1999
 feogkb eIke, ozrwzu fuzsB, ro/Phn; p[e;, gfNnkbk, 2015
 d/ftzdo e[wko, gzikph ozrwzu L fgS'eV s/ gfog/y, fPbkb/y, fdZbh, 2016
 d/ftzdo e[wko, gzikph BkNe L fto;k s/ toswkB, fPbkb/y, fdZbh, 2016
(SEMESTER-II)
THEATRE STUDIES 114
 Definition and the Forms of Theatre and Tradition of Sanskrit Theatre.
 Definition and the Forms of Indian folk Theatre.
 Many different plays of famous play writes like Rani koklan, Enna di awaaz, Shakuntala
,poorn,sat begane.
Instructions for Paper Setter for Theory

The Question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Eight questions will be set from the section
A & B, four from each section, carrying six marks each. Nine short questions will be set from section C,
covering the entire syllabus, of two marks each.
Candidates are required to attempt four questions from section A and B, two questions from each sections,
carrying six marks each. Section C is compulsory consisting Nine questions, two marks each. Section C is
of 18 marks.
{THEORY}
SECTION - A
1. b'e ozrwzu L gfoGkPk s/ ;o{g
2. b'e ozrwzu dh gSkD
3. gzikp d/ b'e BkNô{g
SECTION - B
1. fJzBk dh nktkI ^ n;ro tIkjs
(gzikph nB[tkd L nwoihs uzdB)
2. okDh e'ebK ^ eg{o f;zx x[zwD
3H b'e BkNeh BkNô{g ^ ;zgkde L ot/b f;zx
PRACTICALS
1. Improvisations can be given to students to explore their acting capabilities.
2. Enactment of a character from the play proscribed for study.
3. Attendance will stand for 10 Marks according to the following percentage of
attendance. There will not be any mark below 75%.
75% = 2 Marks
76% to 80% = 4 Marks
81% to 85% = 6 Marks
86% to 90% = 8 Marks
91% to 100% = 10 Marks
Suggested Readings
 Charlotte Lee & David Grote, Theatre : Preparation and Performance, Scott Foresman and Company,
Glenview, Ilinois, 1982.
 Kewal Dhaliwal, Rangkarmi Di Teesrai Akh,Ravi Sahit Parkashan, Amritsar, 2006.
 O.G. Brockett : The Essential Theatre,Holt Rinehart & Winston Inc, New York.
 Surjit Singh Sethi (Dr.), Sirjnatmic Natik Nirdeshan (Punjabi), Publication Bureau, Punjabi University,
Patiala, 1985.
 Satish Kumar Verma, Punjabi Rangmanch Di Bhumika, Punjabi Academy, Delhi, 2005.
 jouoB f;zx, gzikp dh b'e BkN^gozgok, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh, gfNnkbk, fwshjhD
 ot/b f;zx, gzikp dh b'e BkN^gozgok s/ gzikph BkNe, fPbkb/y, fdZbh, 2010
 nkswihs s/ ;shP e[wko towk (;zgkH), gzikp dk b'e BkN L ftuko, gqeko s/ ;zuko, wzuD nkoN; n?Av
oh;ou ;?ANo, w'jkbh, 1991
 pbtzs rkorh, b'e BkNe, Bt:[r gpfbPoI, fdZbh, 1999
 feogkb eIke, b'e Xowh ozrwzu, u/sBk gqekPB, b[fXnkDk, 2016 115
 ;shP e[wko towk, b'e ebktK dh f;oiD^gqfefonk, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh, gfNnkbk, 2017
 okfizdo e"o, wjhfgzdo e"o (;zgkH), b'e ebktK ns/ whvhnk L pdbd/ ;zdoG, fPbkb/y, fdZbh, 2016
 okfizdo e"o, wjhfgzdo e"o (;zgkH), gzikp dhnK b'e ebktK L ;o{g s/ ;zuko, fPbkb/y, fdZbh, 2016
 pbihs e"o ihs, gzikph ozrwzu L gozgok s/ ;wekb (b'e ebktK d/ ;zdoG ftu), u/sBk gqekPB, b[fXnkDk,
2013
Programme Outcome(PO):- 116
The Gurmat Sangeet's aim is to spark interest in young Sikhs and to boost their
knowledge of Sikh heritage and history. One of the important subjects of Gurmat
Studies is Gurmat Sangeet which basically directs an individual to sing the Gurbani in
the ragas mentioned in Shri Guru Granth Sahib Ji. The programme provides knowledge
about the Raags and Upragas present in Shri Guru Granth Sahib Ji. Students are
provided with the knowledge of Sikh music and also the technical terms used in the
holy granth .Students learn about the Sikh instruments especially Tanti Saaj (String
Instruments) mentioned by Gurus. It also helps students to understand the rich Kirtan
traditions of Sikhism.
Program Specific Outcome(PSO)

After doing Graduation degree of Gurmat Sangeet students can make their future in
various fields. They can be appointed as teachers or preachers. They can establish
their own Kirtan group known as Kirtan Jathas. With the help of Instrumental (tanti
saaz)knowledge they can also be solo performer and/or can play a role in studio
recordings. In addition to this if a students want to go for further studies like Masters
and doctorate, he or she can pursue his/her further studies in Gurmat Studies from the
Department of Gurmat Studies, Punjabi University, Patiala.
Semester - I
Gurmat Sangeet 117
PAPER A - BASICS OF GURMAT SANGEET

Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Note: The candidate can opt Music Vocal or Tabla as an elective subject along with Gurmat Sangeet.
CO2(A) Paper-A(Basics ofGurmat Sangeet)
In this paper the students are taught the historical development of Gurbani Kirtan i.e Kirtan Chownki,
its elements and origin they are also taught classification of various Sikh Musical Instruments,
description of various elements like Laya Thaat, Raag, Alaap, Taan, Jatti, Gamak and they also
understand the contribution of Rababi and Kirtaniye to Gurmat Sangeet. Students will be able to
cultivate their voice quality in a right manner with the knowledge of voice culture.

The questions paper will consist of five sections: A, B, C, Sections A and B will have four questions each
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 5 marks each Section C will consist of 8 short
answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16 marks in all.
While sending the syllabus to paper setter, the syllabus prescribed for Stage Performance Paper should also
be sent.

Candidates are required to attempt two question each from the sections A and B and the entire Section C is
compulsory.
Section - A
1. Technical Terminology - Naad, Sur, Thaat, Raag, Sandhi Prakaash Raag, Varjit Sur, Vaadi-
Samvaadi, Rahaao, Ank, Jati, Ghar, Dhuni, Shaan, Manglacharan, Hast Vidhi, Thekaa, Aavartan, Sam,
Taali, Khaali.
2. Origin & Development of Gurmat Sangeet tradition with special reference to Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
3. Importance of Shabad Keertan in Sikhism.
Section - B
4. Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji - A Musical Study.
5. Description of following Raags & Taals - Bilawal, Aasa, Raamkali, Bhairo, Prabhaati - Daadra,
Kehrwa, Teentaal, Iktaal, Paurhi.
6. Introduction of the following in English :Self-Introduction, Sikhism.
Recommended Books
1. Dr. Gurnam Singh, Sri Guru Granth Sahib Raag Ratnakar, Shiromani Gurdwara, Prabandhak
Committee, Sri Amritsar
2. Dr. Gurnam Singh, Gurmat Sangeet: Prabandh te Pasaar, Punjabi University, Patiala.
3. Dr. Varinder Kaur, Gurmat Sangeet da Sangeet Vigyan, Amarjit Sahit Parkashan, Patiala
4. Dr. Kanwaljit Singh, Raag Naad Sabd Sohne, Singh Brothers, Amritsar
5. Dr. Gurnam Singh, Sikh Musicology, Punjabi University, Patiala
6. Dr. Gurnam Singh (Editor-in-Chief), Gurmat Sangeet Terminology, Punjabi University, Patiala.
Semester - I
Gurmat Sangeet 118
PAPER-B: STAGE PERFORMANCE

Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO2 (B) (Paper-Practical)
The students will develop the ability to sing alankars in the few prescribed Raags o f S r i G u r u
G r a n t h S a h i b j i with harmonium, ability to sing shabad, ability to demonstrate the Taals
on hand with layakaries through which these causes to Perform well.

Harmonium is allowed as an accompaniment. Preference will be given to be students reciting Shabad
Keertan along with string instruments of Gurmat Sangeet.

Harmonium may also be allowed as an accompaniment. Weightage will be given to the students reciting
Shabad Keertan along with string instruments of Gurmat Sangeet.
1. Singing presentation of Shabad composition in each of the following Raags with brief introduction
i. Bilawal (One Shabad Composition)
ii. Aasa (One Shabad Composition)
iii. Raamkali (One Shabad Composition)
iv. Bhairo (One Shabad Composition)
v. Prabhaati (One Shabad Composition)
2. Keertan of 1st to 4th Chhants of Aasa Di Vaar.
3. Keertan of Anand Sahib in Raag Raamkali.
4. Performance of Thekaa of following taals on Tabla and by Hast Vidhi with Ikgun, Dugun Laiakaries
-
Daadra, Kehrwa, Teentaal, Iktaal, Paurhi.
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
1. Dr. Gurnam Singh, Sri Guru Granth Sahib Raag Ratnaakar, Shiromani Gurdwara Prabandhak
Committee, Sri Amritsar.
3. Dr. Varinder Kaur, Gurmat Sangeet da Sangeet Vigyan, Amarjit Sahit Parkashan, Patiala.
4. Dr. Kanwaljit Singh, Raag Naad Sabd Sohne, Singh Brothers, Amritsar.
5. Dr. Gurnam Singh, Sikh Musicology, Punjabi University, Patiala.
6. Dr. Gurnam Singh, (Editor-in-Chief), Gurmat Sangeet Terminology, Punjabi University, Patiala.
Semester - II
Gurmat Sangeet 119
PAPER A - BASICS OF GURMAT SANGEET

Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO3 (A) (Paper-A Historical and Theoretical Study of Gurmat Sangeet)
The students understand the contribution of Guru Ramdas Ji and Guru Arjan Dev ji to Gurmat Sangeet
the concept & importance of Purav Raga, Utar Raga, Ashreya Raga. They will be able to understand
the the importance of Sodar Di Chownki and Sikh way of life.
The questions paper will consist of five sections: A, B, C, Sections A and B will have four questions each
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 5 marks each Section C will consist of 8 short
answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16 marks in all.
While sending the syllabus to paper setter, the syllabus prescribed for Stage Performance Paper should also
be sent.
Candidates are required to attempt two question each from the sections A and B and the entire Section C is
compulsory.
Section-A
1. Technical Terminology: Alaap, Taan, Saptak, Alankaar, Sathaai, Antraa, Jaati, Lakshan Geet,
Shabad Keertan, Gurmat Sangeet, Gayan Shaili, Taksaal, Taal, Laia.
2. Contribution of Guru Angad Dev Ji and Guru Amardas Ji in the development of Gurmat Sangeet
Tradition.
Section-B
3. Origin of Keertan Chauki tradition of Gurmat Sangeet tradition.
4. Introduction & Elements of Keertan Chauki in Gurmat Sangeet.
5. Description of following Raags & Taals
 Gaurhi (Bhairav Ang), Kalyaan, Dhanaasari, Tukhaari, Sorath
 Jhaptaal, Chaartaal, Rupak.
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
Semester - II
Gurmat Sangeet 120
PAPER B - STAGE PERFORMANCE

Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO3 (B) ( Paper- Stage cum Viva)
The students will develop the ability to sing Chant, Alhunian in Raga Vadhans, Shukrana di Kirtan
Chownki .They will also learn to sing Anand Karaj Kirtan in Ragas.



(i) Harmonium may also be allowed as an accompaniment. Weightage will be given to the students
reciting Shabad Keertan along with string instruments of Gurmat Sangeet.
(ii) It is mandatory to have knowledge of Ragas of previous semester.
1. Singing presentation of Shabad composition in each of the following Raags with brief
introduction.
a. Gaurhi (Bhairav Ang) (One Shabad Composition)
b. Kalyaan (One Shabad Composition)
c. Dhanaasari (One Shabad Composition)
d. Tukhaari (One Shabad Composition)
e. Sorath (One Shabad Composition).
2. Keertan of 5th to 8th Chhants of Aasa Di Vaar.
3. Sodar di Keertan Chauki (Raag Aasa).
4. Performance of Thekaa of following taals on Tabla and by Hast Vidhi with Ikgun, Dugun
Laiakaries – Jhaptaal, Chaartaal, Rupak. 5 Marks.
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
B.A. I FASHION DESIGNING
SEMESTER I 121

Fashion Designing 3 periods/week 4 periods/week
Name of Examination Marks Internal Total credits Teaching
Paper Hours Assessment Hours
Marks per week
Theory Fashion 3 42 18 60 3 3
Designing
Practical Fashion 3 40 - 40 2 4
Designing
Total 5 7
100
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments / Project-work
etc.,(40%) and two mid semester tests/internal examinations* (40%).
SEMESTER II

Fashion Designing 3 periods/week 4periods/week
Scheme of Examinations
Paper Hours Assessment Hours per
Marks week
Theory Fashion 3 42 18 60 3 3
Designing
Designing
Total 5 7
100
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments/ Project-work
etc., (40%) and two mid semester tests/internal examinations* (40%).
B.A. I – FASHION DESIGNING
SEMESTER I 122
PAPER: FASHION DESIGNING (THEORY)
MAX MARKS: 60
TIME ALLOWED:-3 HRS
THEORY: 42
PASS MARKS: 35% OF THEORY

from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 6 marks each. Section C will consist of 9
short answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.

Section-A
1. A study of tools and equipments -
Measuring tools
Marking tools
Cutting tools
Sewing tools including parts, function, maintenance & defects of sewing machine
Finishing tools
2. Basic Terminology -
Draping, braiding, selvedge, notch pucker, style reading, style lines, empire line, princess line,
darts, tucks, pleats, bias, trueing, Haute couture, prêt-e-porter, fashion fad, classic, taste, hi-style,
silhouettes, accessories, notions, draping, design, motif, braid, bias, yokes, grain, selvedge fray,
notch, pucker, style reading, frills, flounces ruffles, stay line, princess line, empire line,
trimmings.
3. Traditional Embroideries of India- (motifs, colours, fabric, threads, stitches used in :)
Kantha, Phulkari, Chikankari, Chamba, Kasuti.
Section-B
4. A study of anthropometric/body measurements;
List of measurements
Locating landmarks
Taking body measurements
5. Drafting and its importance
6. Flat Pattern Making and its Importance
References
 Sherie Doongaji and Raushni Deshpande: Basic Process and Clothing Construction, Raj
Prakashan, New Delhi.
 Grewal, Neelam: Text Book of Home Science (Clothing and Textiles), A.P. Publishers, Books
Market, Chowk Adda Tanda, Jalandhar.
 Randhawa, Rajwinder K. Clothing and Textiles and their care: Pradeep Publications, Jalandhar.
 Gupta Sushma, Garg Neeru, Saini Renu, Kaur, Jaspreet, Clothing, Textile and Laundry, Kalyani
Publishers, Ludhiana.
B.A. I – FASHION DESIGNING 123
PRACTICAL
SEMESTER - I
Maximum Marks: 40
Time Allotted : 3 Hrs. Pass Marks: 35% of the Total
PRACTICAL
1.Samples of basic embroidery stitches: running, stem, back, chain, blanket, lazy- daisy, long n
short, satin, French knots, herring bone.
2.Samples of Traditional Embroideries of India-
Kantha, Phulkari, Chikankari, Chamba, Kasuti.
3.Designing and Drafting of :
 Child’s bodice block and sleeve block
 Sleeves: plain, puffed and flare.
 Diaper covers, bloomer, Jhabla.
 A line frock with collars and sleeves.
REFERENCES BOOKS
 Grewal, Neelam: Text Book of Home Science (Clothing and Textiles), A.P. Publishers, Books
 Randhawa, Rajwinder K. Clothing and Textiles and their care: Pradeep Publications, Jalandhar.
 Gupta Sushma, Garg Neeru, Saini Renu, Kaur, Jaspreet, Clothing, Textile and Laundry, Kalyani
Publishers, Ludhiana.
SEMESTER II 124
PAPER: FASHION DESIGNING (THEORY)
MAX MARKS: 60
TIME ALLOWED:-3 HRS
THEORY: 42

from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 6 marks each. Section C will consist of 9
short answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.

SECTION-A
1. Application of Elements of Art in clothing - Line, Shape, Texture, Colour, Space, Pattern.
2. Application of Principles of Design in clothing - Harmony, Balance, Rhythm, Proportion,
Emphasis.
3. Application of Principles and Elements of Design to the Basic Figure Type-
Short and thin, short and Stout, Tall and thin, Tall and stout, Average
SECTION-B
4. Classification of Textile Fibers.

5. Fibre to Fabric Processing:
Natural fibres: Cotton, Silk, Wool
Synthetic fibres: Polyester, Nylon
6. A Study of basic construction techniques:
Seams and seam finishes, Facings and Bindings, Plackets & Fasteners, Hemming & Bastings,
Fullness treatment.
REFERENCES BOOKS
 Grewal, Neelam: Text Book of Home Science (Clothing and Textiles), A.P. Publishers,
Books Market, Chowk Adda Tanda, Jalandhar.
 Randhawa, Rajwinder K. Clothing and Textiles and their care: Pradeep Publications,
Jalandhar.
 Gupta Sushma, Garg Neeru, Saini Renu, Kaur, Jaspreet, Clothing, Textile and Laundry,
Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana.
PRACTICAL 125
SEMESTER - II
Maximum Marks: 40
Time Allotted : 3 Hrs. Pass Marks: 35% of the Total
PRACTICAL
1. Stitching samples-straight, circular, square, spiral curvilinear & chevours

2. Seams and seam finishes - plain, lap, run and fell, counter seam, binding, pinking, over locking
& turned & stitched.
3. Bastings - Straight (running and tacking) Diagonal, tailor's tack
4. Hemming- Invisible, Visible, Blind stitching.
5. Facings & Bindings - round, square, 'V' shape and shaped necklines.
6. Plackets and Fasteners - Two piece (Kurta placket and Blouse placket) one piece, extended
bodice, Zipper placket.
7. Fullness treatment: gathers into a band, tucks, darts, pleats.
8. Construction of Children garment:
Diaper covers, bloomer, Jhabla.
A line frock with collars and sleeves.
References
 Grewal, Neelam: Text Book of Home Science (Clothing and Textiles), A.P. Publishers,
 Randhawa, Rajwinder K. Clothing and Textiles and their care: Pradeep Publications,
Jalandhar.
 Gupta Sushma, Garg Neeru, Saini Renu, Kaur, Jaspreet, Clothing, Textile and Laundry,
GN-201: DRUG ABUSE: PROBLEM, MANAGEMENT AND PREVENTION 126
Note: This is a compulsory qualifying paper, which the students have to study and qualify during three
years of their degree course.
Time: 3hours Max Marks: 100

Pass Marks 35% Theory: 70
Lectures per week: 4 Internal Assessment: 30
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER SETTERS
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Each of sections A and B will have four
questions from the respective sections of the syllabus. Each question shall carry 7 marks. Section C will
consist of 14 short answer type of 2 marks each.
Candidates are required to attempt any three questions from section A and any three questions from
section B. Section C is compulsory.
UNIT I
 Problem of Drug Abuse: Concept and Overview; Types of Drug Often Abused
a) Concept and Overview: What are drugs and what constitutes Drug Abuse? ; Prevalence of
menace of Drug Abuse; Difference between drug abuse Drug Dependence and Drug Addiction? ;
Physical and psychological dependence- concepts of drug tolerance.
b) Introduction to drugs of abuse: Stimulants, Depressants, Narcotics, Hallucinogens and Steroids.
 Nature of the Problem

Vulnerable Age Groups; Signs and symptoms of Drug Abuse: (a) Physical indicators, (b)- Academic
indicators,(c)- Behavioral and Psychological indicators.
UNIT II
 Causes and Consequences of Drug Abuse

a) Causes: Physiological, Psychological, Sociological
b) Consequences of Drug Abuse: For individuals, for families, For society & Nation.
 Management & Prevention of Drug Abuse
Management of Drug Abuse
Prevention of Drug Abuse
Role of Family, School, Media, Legislation & De-addiction Centers
Suggested readings
1. Ahuja, Ram,(2003),Social Problems in India, Rawat Publications: Jaipur 127
2. 2003 National Household Survey of Alcohol and Drug Abuse. New Delhi, Clinical Epidemiological
Unit, All India Institute of Medical Sciences, 2004.
3. World Drug Report 2011, United Nations Office of Drug and Crime.
4. World Drug Report 2010, United nations Office of Drug and Crime.
5. Extent, Pattern and Trend of Drug Use in India, Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment,
Government of India, 2004.
6. The Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances Act, 1985, (New Delhi: Universal, 2012)
7. Sharma & Bansal (2017),Drug Abuse: Problem, Management & Prevention. R.D. Publication,
Jalandhar.
8. Verma Meenakshi,(2017), Drug Abuse: Problem, Management & Prevention. A.P. Publishers,
Jalandhar.
Pedagogy of the Course Work:
The pedagogy of the course work will consist of the following:

40% lectures.
30% Tutorials(Including Extension lectures and Interactions with Experts dealing with Drug Abuses).
30% assignments, discussion and seminars and class tests.
Note: A visit to drug de-addiction centre could also be undertaken.
ORDINANCES
AND
OUTLINES OF TESTS,
FOR
BACHELOR OF ARTS PART-II
(B.A.-II)
(2021-22)

1
(smYstr-qIjw)

not : pws hox leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW iv`coN Al`g-Al`g 35%AMk
lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. ividAwrQI smkwlI lyKkW duAwrw smwijk, AwriQk, rwjnIiqk, Dwrimk pRsiQqIAW nUM
smJdw hoieAw auhnW nUM auh nwtkI Aqy kwivk AMdwz iv`c pyS krn dy Xog bx jWdw hY[
2. ividAwrQI ies rwhIN pMjwbI BwSw dI ilKq dy hoNd iv`c Awaux dy pVwvW bwry jwxkwrI hwisl
krdw hY ^ws krky pMjwbI BwSw dI ilpI gurmuKI bwry[
3. ies ivSy dy mwiDAm rwhIN ividAwrQI BwSw dy mu`Fly pRbMD nUM smJ ky iksy dUjI BwSw dy pRbMD nUM
smJx dy smr`Q bxdw hY[
ਪਾਠਕਮ ਅਤੇ ਪਸ਼ਨ –ਪੱ ਤਰ ਦੀ ਰੂਪ- ਰੇਖਾ
Gkr^T
ਸਮਕਾਲੀ ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਨਾਟਕ (1960 ਤ ਿਪ`ਛ ਦੇ ਇਕ ਗੀਆਂ ਦਾ ਸੰ ਗਿਹ): ਸੰ ਪਾ. ਡਾ.ਮਨਜੀਤਪਾਲ ਕੌ ਰ ਅਤੇ ਡਾ.
ਜਸਿਵੰ ਦਰ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਸੈਣੀ, ਪਬਲੀਕੇਸ਼ਨ ਿਬਊਰੋ,ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਿਸਟੀ,ਪਿਟਆਲਾ|
ਭਾਗ-ਅ
A-1: lyK rcnw (clMq msilAW nwl sMbMiDq)
A-2: ivAwkrx
(i)mUl ivAwkrnk iekweIAW dI pCwx Aqy sQwpqI
(ii) vwk bxqr Aqy vwk rcnw
(iii) T[gtke pDso L gSkD s/ ekoi
Bwg-e
Bwg a Aqy ivAwkrn dy A-2 vwly BwgW iv~coN sµKyp au~qrW vwly pRSn[
1. Bwg a iv~coN iksy iekWgI dw ivSw vsq¨ / swr / klw p`K Aqy lyKk dw Xogdwn[
(iqµn iv~coN iek) 12 ਅੰ ਕ
2. iekWgIAW ivcly pwqrW dw pwqr- icqrn (cwr iv~coN koeI do) 6+6=12 ਅੰ ਕ
3. lyK rcnw (iqMn iv`coN ie`k) 10 ਅੰ ਕ
4. ivAwkrn vwly Bwg A-2 nwl sbµDq vrxwqmk pRSn[ (do iv~coN iek) 12 ਅੰ ਕ
5. Bwg e iv`c sMKyp au~qrW vwly 12 pRSn, Bwg a Aqy A-2 dIAW pusqkW iv`coN brwbr pu`Cy
jwxgy[
ividAwrQI ny swry pRSnW dy sMKyp iv`c au~qr dyxy hoxgy Aqy hr pRSn dy do AMk hoxgy[
12x2=24 ਅੰ ਕ
(not:pypr iv`c Bwg A dy A.1 iv`coN sµKyp a~uqrW vwly pRSn nhIN pu~Cy jwxgy)[
not: AiDAwpk, klws iv`c ividAwrQIAW dy bOiDk ivkws leI, smwijk vrqwirAW nUM fUMGweI
iv`c smJx dI cyqnw pYdw krn dy nwl-nwl aunHW AMdr swihqk rucIAW nUM pRPuil`q krn leI
klws iv`c ividAwrQIAW dy pwT-kRm nwl sMbMiDq gqIivDIAW dw ivhwrk rUp iv`c AiBAws
2
krvweygw[ies qoN ielwvw ividAwrQI v`K-v`K iviSAW nwl sMbMiDq G`to-G`t do ivigAwpn iqAwr
krngy[pRXogI AiBAws leI AiDAwpk v~loN krvwey gey kwrjW 'qy AwDwirq ividAwrQIAW
duAwrw ie~k Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgy Aqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw
ih`sw hovygI[ ies leI ਇੱ ਕ pIrIAf pRqI h&qw lਗਾਇਆ jwਵੇਗਾ [
shwiek pwT- sm~grI
1. guridAwl isMG Pu`l, pMjwbI nwtk:srUp isDWq qy ivkws, pMjwbI XUnIvristI,pitAwlw,
1988.
2. guridAwl isMG Pu`l, pMjwbI iekWgI:srUp isDWq qy ivkws, pMjwbI XUnIvristI,pitAwlw,
1987.
3. nvinMdrw bihl, nwtkI swihq,pMjwbI XUnIvristI,pitAwlw,1991.
4. sqIS kumwr vrmw, pMjwbI nwt-icMqn, lokgIq pRkwSn, srihMd,1989.
5. jI.bI.isMG, gurmuKI ilpI dw jnm qy ivkws, pMjwb XUnIvristI, cMfIgVH, 1960.
6. ig.lwl isMG qy hrkIrq isMG, kwlj pMjwbI ivAwkrx, pMjwb styt XuUnI.tYkst bu`k
borf,cMfIgVH[
Note:- Those students who have not studied Punjabi up to matriculation can opt for
Punjabi Compulsory (Mudla Gyan/Elementary Punjabi). Other students will study
compulsory Punjabi.
ijMnHW ividAwrQIAW ny myYitRkulySn q~k pMjwbI dw ivSw nhI piVHAw [ auh pMjwbI lwzmI (mùFlw
igAwn/AYlImYNtrI pMjwbI) ivSw pVHngy bwkI ividAwrQIAW ny pMjwbI lwzmI dw ivSw hI pVHnw
hovygw[
3
Bwg dUjw (smYstr-cOQw)

pypr-pµjwbI lwzmI (Punjabi Compulsory)

not : pws hox leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW iv`coN Al`g-Al`g 35% AMk
lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. ividAwrQI smkwlI lyKkW duAwrw smwijk, AwriQk, rwjnIiqk, Dwrimk pRsiQqIAW nUM
smJdw hoieAw auhnW nUM auh nwtkI Aqy kwivk AMdwz iv`c pyS krn dy Xog bx jWdw hY[
2. ividAwrQI ies rwhIN pMjwbI BwSw dI ilKq dy hoNd iv`c Awaux dy pVwvW bwry jwxkwrI hwisl
krdw hY ^ws krky pMjwbI BwSw dI ilpI gurmuKI bwry[
3. ies ivSy dy mwiDAm rwhIN ividAwrQI BwSw dy mu`Fly pRbMD nUM smJ ky iksy dUjI BwSw dy pRbMD nUM
smJx dy smr`Q bxdw hY[
ਭਾਗ- ੳ
ਕਾਿਵ - ਲਿਹਰ (ਲੰਮੀਆਂ ਕਿਵਤਾਵ ਦਾ ਸੰ ਗਿਹ): ਸੰ ਪਾਦਕ ਪੋ. ਜਸਿਵੰ ਦਰ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਅਤੇ ਡਾ.ਇੰ ਦਰਜੀਤ ਿਸੰ ਘ
ਚੀਮਾ),ਪਬਲੀਕੇਸ਼ਨ ਿਬਊਰੋ,ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਿਸਟੀ,ਪਿਟਆਲਾ,2015
ਭਾਗ- ਅ
A-1 pusqk irivaU
A-2 ivAwkrn
(i) pMjwbI BwSw:inkws,ivkws Aqy ivSySqwvW
(ii) gurmuKI ilpI dw inkws qy ivkws
(iii) Sbd joVW dy inXm
Bwg-e
Bwg a qy ivAwkrn dy A-2 vwly BwgW iv~coN sµKyp au~qrW vwly pRSn[
1. Bwg a iv`coN iksy iek kivqw dw ivSw vsqU/ swr/ kwiv klw[ (iqMn iv`coN iek) 12 AMk
2. pRsMg sihq ivAwiKAw[ (cwr iv`coN do) 6+6= 12 AMk
3. pusqk irivaU(smkwlI pMjwbI nwtk, kwiv lihrW, coxvNy pMjwbI inbMD,kQw-vwrqw)(do iv`coN
ie`k) 10 AMk
4. ivAwkrn vwly Bwg A-2 nwl sMbiµDq vrxwqmk pRSn [ (do iv~coN ie`k) 12 AMk
5. Bwg ੲ iv`c sMKyp au~qrW vwly 12 pRSn, Bwg a Aqy A-2 dIAW pusqkW iv`coN brwbr pu`Cy
jwxgy[
ividAwrQI ny swry pRSnW dy sMKyp ivc au~qr dyxy hoxgy Aqy hr pRSn dy do AMk hoxgy[
12x2= 24 AMk
(not:pypr ivc Bwg A dy A.1 iv`coN sMKyp au~qrW vwly pRSn nhIN pu`Cy jwxgy[)
not: AiDAwpk, klws iv`c ividAwrQIAW dy bOiDk ivkws leI, smwijk vrqwirAW nUM fUMGweI
iv`c smJx dI cyqnw pYdw krn dy nwl-nwl aunHW AMdr swihqk rucIAW nUM pRPuil`q krn leI
klws iv`c ividAwrQIAW dy pwT-kRm nwl sMbMiDq gqIivDIAW dw ivhwrk rUp iv`c AiBAws
krvweygw[ies qoN ielwvw ividAwrQI v`K-v`K iviSAW nwl sMbMiDq G`to-G`t do ivigAwpn iqAwr
4
krngy[pRXogI AiBAws leI AiDAwpk v~loN krvwey gey kwrjW 'qy AwDwirq ividAwrQIAW
duAwrw ie~k Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgy Aqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw
ih`sw hovygI[ ies leI ਇੱ ਕ pIrIAf pRqI h&qw lgwਇਆ jwਵੇgw [
shwiek pwT- sm`grI
1. ig.lwl isMG qy hrkIrq isMG, kwlj pMjwbI ivAwkrx, pMjwb styt XuUnI.tYkst bu`k
borf,cMfIgVH[
4. rwijMdrpwl isMG, AwDuink pMjwbI kivqw punr icMqn, lokgIq pRkwSn,cMfIgVH[
5. rwijMdrpwl isMG, AwDuink pMjwbI kivqw dw ieiqhws,pMjwbI AkwdmI,id`lI[
6.jsivMdr isMG, nvIN pMjwbI kivqw pCwx icMnH, cyqnw pRkwSn,luiDAwxw[
Note:- Those students who have not studied Punjabi up to matriculation can opt for
Punjabi Compulsory (Mudla Gyan/Elementary Punjabi). Other students will study
compulsory Punjabi.
ijMnHW ividAwrQIAW ny myYitRkulySn q~k pMjwbI dw ivSw nhI piVHAw [ auh pMjwbI lwzmI (mùFlw
igAwn/AYlImYNtrI pMjwbI) ivSw pVHngy bwkI ividAwrQIAW ny pMjwbI lwzmI dw ivSw hI pVHnw
hovygw[
5
Bwg dUjw (smYstr-qIjw)

pypr – pMjwbI lwzmI (mu`Flw igAwn/AYlImYNtrI pMjwbI)

not : ਪਾਸ ਹੋਣ leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW iv`coN Al`g-Al`g 35%AMk
lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. pMjwbI swihq dIAW v`Ko- v`KrIAW ivDwvW qoN jwxU huMdy hoey pMjwbI swihq nUM smJx dy Xog ho jWdy
hn[
2. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI dUjI BwSw dI Sbd bxqr nUM smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
3. ies rwhIN bwhrly rwjW dy ividAwrQI pMjwbI iv`c muhwrq hwisl krky iksy vI srkwrI jW
pRweIvyt Adwry iv`c sMcwr krn dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn [
ਭਾਗ-ੳ
ਮੁੱ ਢਲਾ ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਿਗਆਨ (Elementry Punjabi) ਭਾਗ ਦੂਜਾ(ਸੋਿਧਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਐਡੀਸ਼ਨ) : ਸੰ ਪਾ. ਪੋ. ਪਰਮਜੀਤ
ਕੌ ਰ,ਡਾ. ਹਰਜੀਤ ਕੌ ਰ ਇਸ ਪੁਸਤਕ ਿਵ`ਚ ਕਿਵਤਾ ਅਤੇ ਿਨਬੰ ਧ ਵਾਲਾ ਭਾਗ (ਸਮੈਸਟਰ ਤੀਜਾ) ਿਵੱ ਚ ਪੜਾਇਆ
ਜਾਵੇਗਾ।(ਡਾ. ਸੁਰਜੀਤ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਪਾਤਰ ਅਤੇ ਡਾ.ਜਗਤਾਰ ਪਾਠਕਮ ਦਾ ਿਹੱ ਸਾ ਨਹ ਹਨ)
ਭਾਗ-ਅ
ਅ-1 muhwvry ( ਮੁੱ ਢਲਾ ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਿਗਆਨ (Elementry Punjabi) ਭਾਗ ਦੂਜਾ (ਸੋਿਧਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਐਡੀਸ਼ਨ): ਸੰ ਪਾ.
ਅ-2 ivroDI Sbd Aqy smwn ArQk Sbd( ਮੁੱ ਢਲਾ ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਿਗਆਨ (Elementry Punjabi) ਭਾਗ
ਭਾਗ-ੲ
ਅੰ ਕ ਵੰ ਡ ਅਤੇ ਪੇਪਰ ਸੈਟਰ ਲਈ ਹਦਾਇਤ

1. ਪਸ਼ਨ ਦਾ ਪੱ ਧਰ ਿਵਿਦਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਦੇ ਬੌਿਧਕ ਪੱ ਧਰ ਅਤੇ ਉਹਨ ਦੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਿਸੱ ਖਣ ਦੀ ਸੀਮਾ ਨੂੰ ਿਧਆਨ ਿਵਚ
4.ਿਕਸੇ ਿਨਬੰ ਧ ਦਾ ਸਾਰ ਜ ਿਵਸ਼w –ਵਸਤੂ (do ਿਵ`ਚ ਇੱ ਕ) 10 ਅੰ ਕ

6
5.ਿਕਸੇ ਕਿਵਤਾ ਦਾ ਸਾਰ ਜ ਿਵਸ਼w –ਵਸਤੂ (do ਿਵ`ਚ ਇੱ ਕ) 10 ਅੰ ਕ

6. ਕੋਈ 12 muhwvirAW ਿਵ`ਚ 10 ਦੇ ਅਰਥ ਦ`ਸ ਕੇ ਵਾਕ ਿਵੱ ਚ ਵਰਤ 10×1= 10 ਅੰ ਕ
7. smwnArQk Sbd Aqy ivroDI Sbd 10-10 pùCy jwxgy ijMnHW iv`cNo 10-10 krny hoxgy [ 10 AMk
8. ਉਪਰੋਕਤ ਿਸਲੇ ਬਸ ਦੇ ਆਧਾਰ 'ਤੇ ਸੰ ਖੇਪ ਤਰ ਵਾਲੇ 15 ਪਸ਼ਨ ਪੁੱ ਛੇ ਜਾਣ। ਹਰੇਕ ਪਸ਼ਨ ਦਾ ਤਰ ਚਾਰ-ਪੰ ਜ
15 ਪਸ਼ਨ ਕੇਵਲ ਭਾਗ-ੳ ਿਵਚ ਹੀ ਪੁੱ ਛੇ ਜਾਣਗੇ। 15 x2=30 ਅੰ ਕ
ਨਟ: ਸਾਰਾ ਪਸ਼ਨ –ਪੱ ਤਰ ਪਾਠ-ਕਮ ਲਈ ਿਨਰਧਾਿਰਤ ਪਾਠ ਪੁਸਤਕ ਿਵ`ਚ ਹੀ ਪੁੱ ਿਛਆ ਜਾਵੇ।
ਇੰਟਰਨਲ ਅਸੈਸਮਟ ਕੁੱ ਲ = 30 ਅੰ ਕ
ਕਲਾਸ ਹਾਜ਼ਰੀ/ਘਰੇਲੂ ਇਮਿਤਹਾਨ/ AMdruUnI pRXogI AiBAws
not: AiDAwpk,klws iv`c ividAwrQIAW dy bOiDk ivkws leI,smwijk vrqwirAW nUM fUMGweI iv`c
smJx dI cyqnw pYdw krn dy nwl-nwl aunHW AMdr swihqk rucIAW nUM pRPuil`q krn leI klws iv`c
ividAwrQIAW dy pwT-kRm nwl sMbMiDq gqIivDIAW dw ivhwrk rUp iv`c AiBAws krvweygw[ies qoN
ielwvw ividAwrQI v`K-v`K iviSAW nwl sMbMiDq G`to-G`t pMj ivigAwpn iqAwr krngy[pRXogI
AiBAws leI AiDAwpk v~loN krvwey gey kwrjW 'qy AwDwirq ividAwrQIAW duAwrw ie~k Pwiel
iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgy Aqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw ih`sw hovygI[ ies leI
ਇਕ pIrIAf pRqI h&qw lਗਾਏ jwਣਗੇ [
7
Bwg dUjw (smYstr-cOQw)

pypr – pMjwbI lwzmI (mu`Flw igAwn/AYlImYNtrI pMjwbI)

not : ਪਾਸ ਹੋਣ leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW iv`coN Al`g-Al`g 35%AMk
lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. pMjwbI swihq dIAW v`Ko- v`KrIAW ivDwvW qoN jwxU huMdy hoey pMjwbI swihq nUM smJx dy Xog ho jWdy
hn[
2. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI dUjI BwSw dI Sbd bxqr nUM smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
3. ies rwhIN bwhrly rwjW dy ividAwrQI pMjwbI iv`c muhwrq hwisl krky iksy vI srkwrI jW
pRweIvyt Adwry iv`c sMcwr krn dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn [

ਭਾਗ-ੳ
ਮੁੱ ਢਲਾ ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਿਗਆਨ (Elementry Punjabi) ਭਾਗ ਦੂਜਾ(ਸੋਿਧਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਐਡੀਸ਼ਨ): ਸੰ ਪਾ. ਪੋ. ਪਰਮਜੀਤ
ਜਾਵੇਗਾ।
ਭਾਗ-ਅ
ਅ-1 AKwx(ਮੁੱ ਢਲਾ ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਿਗਆਨ (Elementry Punjabi) ਭਾਗ ਦੂਜਾ (ਸੋਿਧਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਐਡੀਸ਼ਨ): ਸੰ ਪਾ.
ਅ-2 bhu-ArQk Sbd ,bhuqy Sbdw dI QW ie~k Sbd (ਮੁੱ ਢਲਾ ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਿਗਆਨ (Elementary Punjabi)
ਭਾਗ-ੲ
ਅੰ ਕ ਵੰ ਡ ਅਤੇ ਪੇਪਰ ਸੈਟਰ ਲਈ ਹਦਾਇਤ

1. ਪਸ਼ਨ ਦਾ ਪੱ ਧਰ ਿਵਿਦਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਦੇ ਬੌਿਧਕ ਪੱ ਧਰ ਅਤੇ ਉਹਨ ਦੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਿਸੱ ਖਣ ਦੀ ਸੀਮਾ ਨੂੰ ਿਧਆਨ ਿਵ`ਚ
4.ਇਕ ਗੀ ਦਾ ਸਾਰ ਜ ਿਵਸ਼ੇ –ਵਸਤੂ (ਦੋ ਿਵ`ਚ ਇੱ ਕ) 10 ਅੰ ਕ

8
5.ਿਕਸੇ ਕਹਾਣੀ ਦਾ ਸਾਰ ਜ ਿਵਸ਼ਾ-ਵਸਤੂ (ਦੋ ਿਵ`ਚ ਇੱ ਕ) 10 ਅੰ ਕ

6. ਕੋਈ 12 AKwxW ਿਵ`ਚ 10 ਦੇ ਅਰਥ ਦਸ ਕੇ ਵਾਕ ਿਵੱ ਚ ਵਰਤ 10×1= 10 ਅੰ ਕ
7. bhu-ArQk Sbd Aqy bhuqy SbdW dI QW ie~k Sbd 10-10 ਪੁੱ ਛੇ ਜਾਣਗੇ ਿਜੰ ਨ ਿਵ`ਚ 10-10 ਕਰਨ
8. ਉਪਰੋਕਤ ਿਸਲੇ ਬਸ ਦੇ ਆਧਾਰ 'ਤੇ ਸੰ ਖੇਪ ਤਰ ਵਾਲੇ 15 ਪਸ਼ਨ ਪੁੱ ਛੇ ਜਾਣ। ਹਰੇਕ ਪਸ਼ਨ ਦਾ ਤਰ ਚਾਰ-
ਵਾਲੇ 15 ਪਸ਼ਨ ਕੇਵਲ ਭਾਗ-ੳ ਿਵਚ ਹੀ ਪੁੱ ਛੇ ਜਾਣਗੇ। 15 x2=30 ਅੰ ਕ
ਨਟ: ਸਾਰਾ ਪਸ਼ਨ –ਪੱ ਤਰ ਪਾਠ-ਕਮ ਲਈ ਿਨਰਧਾਿਰਤ ਪਾਠ ਪੁਸਤਕ ਿਵ`ਚ ਹੀ ਪੁੱ ਿਛਆ ਜਾਵੇ।
ਇੰਟਰਨਲ ਅਸੈਸਮਟ ਕੁੱ ਲ =30 ਅੰ ਕ

ਕਲਾਸ ਹਾਜ਼ਰੀ/ਘਰੇਲੂ ਇਮਿਤਹਾਨ/ AMdrUnI pRXogI AiBAws
+not: AiDAwpk, klws iv`c ividAwrQIAW dy bOiDk ivkws leI,smwijk vrqwirAW nUM fUMGweI
iv`c smJx dI cyqnw pYdw krn dy nwl-nwl aunHW AMdr swihqk rucIAW nUM pRPuil`q krn leI klws
iv`c ividAwrQIAW dy pwT-kRm nwl sMbMiDq gqIivDIAW dw ivhwrk rUp iv`c AiBAws
krvweygw[ies qoN ielwvw ividAwrQI v`K-v`K iviSAW nwl sMbMiDq G`to-G`t pMj ivigAwpn iqAwr
krngy[pRXogI AiBAws leI AiDAwpk v~loN krvwey gey kwrjW 'qy AwDwirq ividAwrQIAW duAwrw
ie~k Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgy Aqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw ih`sw
hovygI[ ies leI ਇੱ ਕ pIrIAf pRqI h&qw lਗਾਇਆ jwਵੇਗਾ [
9
(Semester-III)
English Communication Skills
5 Credits
Course Outcome
After the successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:
 Familiarise with the inspirational thoughts of well-known personalities of the world.
 Familiarise with the grammatical structures of the language to use in their daily life.
 Enhance their reading skills through comprehension.
Section A
Text Prescribed: Diverse Voices, Department of English, Khalsa College Patiala, 2017
The speeches of the following speakers are to be studied:
1. Swami Vivekananda
2. Mother Teresa
3. Nelson Mandela
4. Maya Angelou
5. Martin Luther King Jr.
6. A.P.J Abdul Kalam
7. Ratan Tata
8. Oprah Gail Winfrey
9. Steve Jobs
10. Aisha Chaudhary
Q1. (a) One essay-type question with an internal alternative on central idea and summary out of the
given two speeches in about 250-300 words. 12 marks
(b) Five short answer questions to be attempted out of the given eight from the prescribed text in about
30-40 words each. 2x5=10 marks
(c) The candidate is expected to quote any five sentences on any one speech out of the
given four from the text Diverse Voices. 5x1=5 marks
Section-B
Q2. Writing Skills:
Prescribed Text: The Written Word by Vandana R. Singh, OUP, 2004
(a) Transcoding: Prose to Dialogue
Testing: Transcode the given prose passage into 20 dialogues
(10 dialogue exchanges) 10 marks
(b) Comprehension Passage: An Unseen passage will be given and seven questions to be answered
including one question on using underlined words in sentences. 7 marks
3. Grammar and Vocabulary

(a)Grammar:
Prescribed Text: Oxford Practice Grammar by John Eastwood Press, 2004
1. Exercises 40-59
Attempt 10 sentences out of the given 12 10 marks
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
10
2. Exercises 60-75
Attempt 10 sentences out of the given 12 10 marks
(b)Vocabulary:
Prescribed Text: The Students’ Companion by Wilfred D. Best, Harper Collins Publishers, 2010
1. Single Words for Phrases and Sentences
Names by which persons with certain characteristics are known (Pages 11to 13)
Attempt any 6 Single Words for Phrases and Sentences out of the given 8
3 marks
2. Words Frequently Misspelt (Pages 141 to 144)

Attempt any 6 Misspelt words out of the given 8 3 marks
Internal assessment 30 marks

Internal assessment will be given on the basis of attendance , MST’s and overall performance in
The teacher should focus on enhancing the skills of students in writing, speaking and reading. Two
periods per week will be allotted for covering these topics:-
1. Read and explain any one passage from the prescribed book.
2. Know your Speaker (Ten sentences to be spoken about the speaker prescribed in the text
Diverse Voices)
3. Demonstration of Speaking Skills.
4. Characteristics of Effective Non- Verbal Communication.
5. Correct Four Misspelt words
NOTE: A Scrap file has to be made covering all topics.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
11
(Semester-IV)
English Communication Skills
5 Credits
Course Outcome
After the successful completion of this course, the students will be able to
 Familiarise with six plays of various playwrights.

 Learn how to analyse unfamiliar words by understanding the structure of the English
Language.
 Improve writing skills of the students through essay writing, note making and summarizing.
 Enhance their vocabulary.
Section A
Text Prescribed: Ten One – Act Plays, Department of English, Khalsa College Patiala, 2020
The following plays are to be studied:
1. The New Hangman by Laurence Housman
2. The Monkey’s Paw by William Wymark Jacobs
3. The Bishop’s Candlesticks by Norman McKinnel
4. The Exchange by Althea Thurston
5. The Dear Departed by William Stanley Houghton
6. Day of Atonement by Margaret Wood

Q1. (a) One essay-type question with an internal alternative on central idea, character and incident in
(b) Five short answer questions to be attempted out of the given eight from the prescribed text in about
30 words each. 3x5=15 marks
Section-B
Q2. Writing Skills:
Prescribed Text: The Written Word by Vandana R. Singh, OUP, 2003
(a) Essay Writing
Testing: One Essay to be composed out of the given four topics (social, political, current and descriptive)
in about 250-300 words. 10 marks
(b) Note-making and Summarizing
Testing: An unseen passage will be given and the students shall have to prepare notes on it. 7 marks
Q3. Grammar and Vocabulary
(a)Grammar:
Prescribed Text: Oxford Practice Grammar by John Eastwood Press, 2004
Attempt 10 sentences out of the given 12
Attempt 10 sentences out of the given 12
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
12
(b)Vocabulary:
Prescribed Text: The Students’ Companion by Wilfred D. Best, Harper Collins Publishers,
2010
1. Single words for phrases and sentences
Words Denoting Places (Pages 4-7) 3 marks
Attempt any 6 Single words for phrases and sentences out of the given 8
2. Miscellaneous Words (Pages 30-33) 3 marks

Attempt any 6 Miscellaneous Words out of the given 8
Internal assessment 30 marks
Internal assessment will be given on the basis of attendance MST’s and overall performance
in the class. There will also be an internal viva based on the following topics of practical
relevance. The teacher should focus on enhancing the skills of students in writing, speaking
and reading. Two periods per week will be allotted for covering these topics:-
Topics to be covered :
1. Scene Enactment in group based on the given situation from prescribed plays
2. Role Play on the given situation
3. Know your playwright (Ten sentences to be spoken on any one of the playwright
prescribed in the text Ten One – Act Plays)
4. Write about the characteristics of effective communication
NOTE: A Scrap file has to be made covering all topic
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
13
Semester-III
Functional English
Credits -5
Time: 3 hours Max marks: 100
Course Outcome
 Equip with the Listening, Speaking, Writing and Reading skills of English language
 Develop fluency in conversation and efficiency in interactional skills
 Understand the mechanism of speech
Writing Skills Unit-I

1. How to plan paragraph writing
2. Imaginative use of parts of speech
3. How to change the direct into indirect speech and vice-versa
4. Sentence connectors and cohesion
5. Substitution and Ellipsis
6. Sentence variation and the re-writing of sentences
7. Imaginative features
8. Idioms and phrases
Testing: Question No.1 shall pertain to paragraph writing (topic 2 from Unit I). The candidate shall
have to write a paragraph of about 200-250 words on any one of the given two topics. 06 marks
Question No.II shall be objective type and shall pertain to the topic 1, 3 & 4 from
Unit I. The candidate shall attempt any four sentences out of the given six. 4x1=04 marks
Question No.III shall be objective type and shall pertain to topic 5, 6, 7 & 8 from
Unit-I. The candidate shall attempt any eight sentences out of the given ten. 8x1=8 marks
Note: Each sentence of question II and III shall be of 1 mark. The paper-setter may set fill-in-the
blanks, re-forming the given sentences or choosing the right word, etc.
Unit II
9. Letter writing
10. Précis and comprehension
11. Paraphrasing and expansion
12. Descriptive writing
13. Report writing
14. Script writing for announcement, compering etc.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
14
Testing: Question No. IV in this section, with an internal alternative, shall pertain to letter writing
(topic 9 from Unit II).The candidate shall be asked to attempt one letter. 06 marks
Question No. V with an internal alternative shall pertain to précis writing and comprehension of a
given passage or paraphrasing and expansion (topic 10 & 11 from Unit II). The candidate shall be
given a choice between précis and comprehension, or between paraphrasing and expansion. The
passages for précis and comprehension should not be less than 250 words. The
comprehension passage shall be followed by at least 5 questions based on the given passage.
05 marks
Question No. VI with an internal alternative shall pertain to report writing (topic 13 from Unit
II).The candidate shall write any one report in 70-100 words. 06 marks
Question No. VII, with an internal alternative shall pertain to script writing (topic 14 from Unit
II).The candidate shall write any one script of suitable length. 05 marks
Unit III
All questions are compulsory. This Section shall carry a weightage of 30 marks in all and shall
comprise two questions.
Question No.VIII shall be objective type and pertain to all the topics mentioned in Unit I and shall
comprise ten sentence 10 marks
Question No. IX shall pertain to all the areas mentioned in Unit II. The question shall have four
parts. The paper-setter may set an extract for paraphrasing and another one to be expanded by
the candidates. Each of these writing tasks shall be of 5 marks. The paper-setter may set another
form of descriptive writing and a script-writing task for comparing some specific event, each
of 5 marks. The paper-setter shall take care to set a writing task as has not been covered in the
questions set previously.
5+5+5+5=20 marks
BOOK RECOMMENDED
1. Modern English by N. Krishnaswamy (Macmillan - India)
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
15
Semester-IV
Functional English
5 Credits: 4h (L) +2 (P)
Time: 3 hours Max marks: 100
Practical: 20 marks
Course Outcome
 Understand the working pattern of electronic media
 Familiarize with the basic techniques of broadcasting
 Equip with the communication skills in English language
CONVERSATIONAL ENGLISH AND

BROADCASTING UNIT I
1. Language and Society, Style and Registers
2. Language and Communication
3. Fundamentals of Broadcasting
4. Current Affairs (Related to India)
Testing: Question No. I with an internal alternative shall be set from topic 1 & 2 from Unit I
9 marks
Question No. II with an internal alternative shall be set from topic 3 & 4 from Unit I
9 marks
Unit II
5. Radio as Medium of Communication
6. General Knowledge(Related to India)
7. TV as a Medium of Communication
8. TV Network in India and Educational TV
9. Script writing for announcements, Compering etc.
Testing: Question No.III with an internal alternative shall be set from topic 5 & 6 from Unit II
9 marks
Question No. IV with an internal alternative shall be set from topic 7, 8 & 9 from Unit II
9 marks
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
16
UNIT III
The section shall cover the entire syllabus. Question No. V shall consist of short-
answer type questions. Ten short-answer type questions of 2 marks each will be based on Unit I
& II and are to be answered by the students in about 30-40 words each.
10x2=20 marks
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. English in Situations by R.O. Neil, OUP

2. What to say when, Edited by Viola Huggins, BBC, London.
3. Success with English : The Penguin Course by Geoffrey Boughton, Course
Book 1.
4. Success with English : The Penguin Course by Alexander Baird. A First
Reader.
5. The Art of Broadcasting by S.P. Jain.
6. Radio News writing by Carl Warren.
7. Media and Communication Management by Shashi Kant Swami
8. News Reporting and Editing-An Overview by Suhas Chakravarty
9. Writing for Radio and Television in India by Krishnan. K. Kedia
10. India 2017 year book
11. Students Encyclopedia of Genral Knowledge by Azeem Ahmad Khan and
Dr. Ruth Premi
12. The Pearson Concise General Knowledge Manual by Edgar Thrope and
Showick Thrope
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
17
MODEL QUESTION
PAPER UNIT I
1. Define style and registers. Give suitable examples.

Or
Language is the most powerful means of communication.
Discuss
2. Explain some of the basic principles of broadcasting.

Or
Write a short note on the recently-concluded assembly elections
in Uttar Pradesh.
UNIT II
3. How effective is radio as a means of communication ?

Give reasons for your answers.
Or
Give your impressions about any of the classics you have read in
English Fiction.
4. As a medium of communication, which is more popular - radio or

TV ? Provide reasons for your answer.
Or
In what different ways does TV have educational value ?
Explain briefly.
UNIT III
5. Write short notes, in about 30-40 words each, on the following. (i)
Language & Society.
(ii) World Cup Cricket-2007
(iii) Idiolect
(iv) Dowry Laws
(v) Merits of TV watching for children. (vi)
TV network in India.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
18
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION 20 MARKS

COURSE CONTENT
English in Situations :
1. Greetings
2. In the post office
3. At the bank
4. At the travel agency
5. At the customs counter
6. At the International Airport
7. Booking a room at a hotel
8. Making a phone call; asking the time expression
9. Buying a guide book
10. Making an apology
11. Receiving and seeing off a guest
12. On the bus
13. Taking a taxi
14. At the chemist's
15. At the doctor's
16. At a dinner party
17. At the restaurant
18. In a coffee-bar
19. Making an appointment
20. At the hospital
21. Buying a theatre ticket
22. At the police station
23. Asking the way
24. Making enquiries about lost property.
Practical Exercise of conversations in the above listed situations, real or imaginary.

Field work: Visit to the various places offering different situations and practicing
conversation in actual situations. Students must be asked to write dialogue relating to the
situations.
Visit the Radio station and TV studio with a view to observe the functioning of these media.
Voice training is compulsory.
Important Note: On the Job Training: Conversational English for one Month. Each
student should work as tutor to business people, householders or housewives
interested in learning conversational English for a period of four weeks. In addition to this, each
student shall work as receptionist in a well-known hotel, commercial firm or an academy for a
period of four weeks during the vacation, after taking the B.A. Part-II (Semester IV)
examination.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
19
Division of Marks for the Practical Examination:

An external examiner shall assess the students in Conversational English keeping in mind the
various situations mentioned above in the course content of the practical examination.
Maximum Marks : 20 Time : 3 Hours

Pass Marks :3 5%
(i) Assessing each student in a situation for Conversational English. 5 marks

(ii) Group Discussion on a topic suggested by the external examiner. 5 marks
(iii) Pronunciation and stress placement in five words (from each student.) 5 marks
(iv) Evaluation of Practical File of each student. 5 marks
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
20
(smYstr qIjw)
pypr - pMjwbI swihq (coxvW ivSw)

not : pws hox leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW ivcoN Al`g-Al`g 35%AMk
lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI swihq dIAW m`DkwlIn DwrwvW bwry jwxkwrI hwisl krn dy Xog ho jWdy
hn[
2. m`DkwlIn kwiv swihq rwhIN ividAwrQI AiDAwqmk jIvn nwl juVy p`KW dI smJ hwisl krdy
hoey izMdgI pRqI sMjIdw idRStIkox nUM Apxwaux dy Xog ho jWdy hn[
3. m`DkwlIn ik`sw, jMgnwmw Aqy kw&I swihq rwhIN ividAwrQI Awpxy ieiqhwsk ivrsy ivcoN gurUAW,
pIrW, pRIq nwiekW, sUrbIrW Aqy XoiDAW dy AwdrSW qoN jwxU ho ky vrqmwn ivcly smwijk jIvn
nwl smwXojn krn dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
4. siBAwcwr Aqy ivcwr pwTkRm rwhIN ividAwrQI Awpxy siBAwcwr dy pRmwixk mwpdMfW nUM smJx
Aqy jIvn dy v`K-v`K pVwvW qoN syD pRwpq krdw hoieAw iek siBAk jIvn nUM ijaUx dw igAwn
hwisl krn dy Xog ho jWdw hY[
5. Awlocnwqk sMklpW dy AiDAYn rwhIN ividAwrQI swihqk rUpW nUM v`Ko-v`Kry Awlocnwqmk
idRStIkoxW qoN smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
Bwg a
a.1 spiqkw (kwiv-sMgRih): sMpw. jIq isMG sIql, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
(not: spiqkw pusqk ivcoN ik`swkwr AihmdXwr, bulHy Swh dy ATvwry, bwrWmWh Aqy gMFW, &zlSwh
dy lYlw mjnUM, s`sI puMnUM, sI-hrPI qy hIr islybs dw ih`sw nhIN hn)
a.2 kQw sMswr (1960 qoN ipCoN dI pMjwbI khwxI dw sMgRih), sMpw. fw. jsivMdr isMG qy fw. gurmuK
isMG, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
Bwg A
A.1 Awlocnw nwl sMbMiDq sMklp: Anukrn, ivrycn, rumWsvwd, XQwrQvwd, sMrcnwvwd
A.2 Awlocnw nwl sMbMiDq sMklp: im`Q, icMn, ibMb, pRqIk, SYlI[
Bwg e
auprokq islybs qy AwDwirq sMKyp au`qrW vwly pRSn[
AMk vMf pypr sYtr leI hdwieqW
1. islybs dy swry BwgW ivcoN pRSn pu`Cy jwxgy[
2. spiqkw pusqk dy AwDwr qy iksy kivqw dw ivSw vsqU, kvI bwry jwxkwrI Aqy aus dw
Xogdwn[(iqMn ivcoN ie`k) 10 AMk
3. spiqkw pusqk ivcoN pRsMg sihq ivAwiKAw (ਚਾਰ ivcoN ਦੋ) 05+05=10 AMk
4. kQw sMswr pusqk ivcoN iksy khwxI dw ivSw vsqU/pwqr icqrn/khwxIkwr bwry jwxkwrI Aqy
ausdw Xogdwn (iqMn ivcoN ie`k) 10 AMk
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
21
5. Bwg-A.1 ivcoN Awlocnw pRxwlI nwl sMbMDq mUl sMklp (do ivcoN iek) 5×1=5 AMk
6. Bwg-A.2 ivcoN Awlocnw pRxwlI nwl sMbMiDq sMklp (do ivcoN iek ) 5×1=5 AMk
7. Bwg e iv`c swry islybs AwDwrq sMKyp au`qrW vwly 15 pRSn pu`Cy jwxgy[ividAwrQI ny swry pRSn
krny hoxgy[hryk pRSn dw au`qr 4-5 sqrW iv`c dyxw hovygw[hryk pRSn dy 02 AMk hoxgy[
15×2=30 AMk
shwiek pusqk sUcI
1. Koj piqRkw:glp ivSyS AMk, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
2. fw. Drmpwl isMgl Aqy gurlwl isMG (sMpw.), pMjwbI khwxI:nvIn pRivrqIAW, gurU nwnk dyv
XUnIvristI, AMimRqsr[
3. fw. AmrjIq isMG kWg, m`DkwlI swihq icMqn, nwnk isMG pusqkmwlw, AMimRqsr[
4.bRhm jgdIS isMG, p`CmI smIiKAw:isDWq qy sMdrB, pMjwb rweItrz koAwpryitv soswietI,
AMimRqsr[
5. rqn isMG j`gI (sMpw.), swihq AiDAYn ivDIAW, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
6. Koj piqRkw (swihqkvwd AMk), pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
7. gurcrn isMG ArSI, smIiKAw idRStIAW, pMjwbI swihq AkwdmI, luiDAwxw[
8. pRym pRkwS isMG, dIvwn isMG, rOSn lwl AwhUjw (sMpw.), swihq sMkyq, lwhOr bu`k Swp,
luiDAwxw[
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
22
(smYstr cOQw)
pypr-pMjwbI swihq (coxvW ivSw)

not : pws hox leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW ivcoN Al`g-Al`g 35%AMk
lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI swihq dIAW m`DkwlIn DwrwvW bwry jwxkwrI hwisl krn dy Xog ho jWdy
hn[
2. m`DkwlIn kwiv swihq rwhIN ividAwrQI AiDAwqmk jIvn nwl juVy p`KW dI smJ hwisl krdy
hoey izMdgI pRqI sMjIdw idRStIkox nUM Apxwaux dy Xog ho jWdy hn[
3. m`DkwlIn ik`sw, jMgnwmw Aqy kw&I swihq rwhIN ividAwrQI Awpxy ieiqhwsk ivrsy ivcoN gurUAW,
pIrW, pRIq nwiekW, sUrbIrW Aqy XoiDAW dy AwdrSW qoN jwxU ho ky vrqmwn ivcly smwijk jIvn
nwl smwXojn krn dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
Bwg a
pMjwbI swihq dw ieiqhws(1701-1900), rqn isMG j`gI, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
Bwg A
A.1 siBAwcwr qy ivcwr : sMpw. fw. nwhr isMG qy fw. rwijMdrpwl isMG brwV
A.2 swihq dy rUp: vwr, jMgnwmw, ik`sw, kw&I-pirBwSw, pRikrqI Aqy q`q
Bwg e
auprokq islybs qy AwDwrq sMKyp aùqrW vwly pRSn[
AMk vMf pypr sYtr leI hdwieqW
1. islybs dy swry BwgW ivcoN pRSn pu`Cy jwxgy[
2. pMjwbI swihq dw ieiqhws ivcoN swihqk DwrwvW Aqy pRivrqIAW sMbMDI pRSn pu`Cy jwxgy[(iksy
iek`ly swihqkwr sMbMDI pRSn nw puìCAw jwvy) (cwr ivcoN do) 2×10=20 AMk
3. iksy swihq rUp dI pirBwSw, pRikrqI Aqy q`qW sMbMDI pRSn[(do ivcoN ie`k) 10 AMk
4. siBAwcwr qy ivcwr pusqk ivcoN iksy lyK dw ivSw vsqU jW swr [(do ivcoN ie`k) 10 AMk
5. Bwg e iv`c swry islybs qy AwDwrq sMKyp au`qrW vwly 15 pRSn pu`Cy jwx[ividAwrQIAW ny swry
pRSn krny hoxgy[hryk pRSn dw au`qr 4-5 sqrW iv`c dyxw hovygw[hryk pRSn dy 02 AMk hoxgy[
15×2=30 AMk
shwiek pusqk sUcI
1. pRym pRkwS isMG, dIvwn isMG, roSn lwl AwhUjw(sMpw.), swihq sMkyq, lwhOr bu`k Swp, luiDAwxw[
2. primMdr isMG, ikrpwl isMG ksyl, swihq dy rUp, lwhOr bu`k Swp, luiDAwxw[
3. rqn isMG j`gI, swihq dy rUp, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
4. Koj piqRkw (pMjwbI siBAwcwr ivSyS AMk), pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
23
(SEMESTER III)
English Literature
5 Credits: 5(L)
Course Outcome
 Appreciate the literary masterpieces and be enriched with the awareness of the creative
experience
 Recognize and make themselves aware of different genres like drama, poetry, novel etc.
 Develop an understanding of the human condition to convey personal, social and cultural
meanings through drama
 Develop an understanding of the cultural traditions and social contexts of drama and theatre
INTRODUCTION TO DRAMA
Unit I
Prescribed text: A Glossary of Literary Terms by M.H. Abrams, Heinle & Heinle, 2011
(a) Important terms pertaining to Drama.
Tragedy, Comedy, Tragic Flaw, Round and Flat Characters, Catharsis, Hamartia, Pathos, Parody,
Exposition, Allegory, Satire, Irony, Soliloquy, Diction, Hubris, Catastrophe, Climax, Comic -
Relief, Conflict, Denouement, Open-Conflict, Antagonist, Protagonist, Plot, Three Unities.
Prescribed Texts:
 Hudson, William Henry. An Outline History of English Literature. Atlantic Publishers,2008.
 A Very Short Introduction to English Literature, Oxford AVSI series.
Movements and trends

(b) Important Phases related to Drama.
 Origin and Development of Drama
 Classical Drama
 Elizabethan Drama
 Modern Drama
Unit II
1. Euripides: Electra
2. William Shakespeare: The Merchant of Venice
3. G.B. Shaw: Pygmalion
Unit I
Q1. One question with internal choice related to important Phases of Drama to be attempted in
about 250 words 10 marks
Unit II
Q2. A critical question from Electra with an internal choice to be attempted in about 250 words.
10 marks
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
24
Q3. A critical question from The Merchant of Venice with an internal choice to be attempted in
Q4. A critical question from Pygmalion with an internal choice to be attempted in about
250 words. 10 marks
UNIT III
Q5. There shall be no choice in this unit. This unit will cover the entire syllabus. There will be 15
questions in all, each carrying 2 marks to be attempted in about 25to 30 words. Seven questions
will be asked from Unit I and eight questions will be asked from Unit II.
15x2= 30 marks
Suggested Readings:
 William, J Long. English Literature: Its History and Its Significance for the Life of the English s
peaking World. India: Rupa Publications, 2015.
 Albert, Edward. History of English Literature. Oxford University Press, 2017.
 Sanders, Andrew. The Short Oxford History of English Literature. Clarendon Press, 1994.
Euripides
 Slavitt, David R. & Palmer Bovie. ed. Euripides, 2. University of Pennsylvania Press, 1998.
 Buckley, Theodore Alois. trans. The Tragedies of Euripides. Henry G. Bohn, 1850.
 Payne, Nick. Electra. Oberon Books, 2012.
 Murray, Gilbert. The Electra of Euripides. G. Allen & Company, 1906.
William Shakespeare
 Hilliam, David. William Shakespeare: England’s Greatest Playwright and Poet. The Rosen
Publishing Group, 2005.
 Harbage, Alfred. William Shakespeare: A Reader’s Guide. Noonday Press, 1963.
 Pearce, Joseph. The Merchant of Venice: With Contemporary Criticism. Ignatius Press,
2009.
 Brown, John Russell. ed. The Merchant of Venice: Second Series. Cengage Learning
EMEA, 1955.
G.B. Shaw
 Innes, Christopher. ed. The Cambridge Companion to George Bernard Shaw. Cambridge
University Press, 1998.
 Evans, T.F. ed. George Bernard Shaw. Routledge, 2013.
 Wiener, Gary. ed. Readings on Pygmalion. Greenhaven Press,2002.
 Shaw, Bernard. Pygmalion. Prestwick House Inc, 2005.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
25
(SEMESTER IV)
ENGLISH LITERATURE
5 Credits: 5(L)
marks
Course Outcome
 Gain an insight into the philosophy, the creative imagination and techniques of
authors like Alexander Pope, S.T.Coleridge etc.
 Gain a perspective of the literary trends in Neoclassical and Romantic Period
 Appreciate the nuances of poetic language and poetic devices used in the poetry of these
eras
 Develop their critical thinking to analyze the poems
This paper carries 100 marks and will be of 3 hour duration. Candidates can choose any one of
the following options:
1. From Metaphysical To Romantic Period
2. Popular Literature
3. Translation Studies
Option -I : From Metaphysical To Romantic Period
Unit I
Literary terms
Conceit, Paradox, Metaphor, Simile, Satire, Naturalism, Melodrama, Fable, Mock Epic,
Allegory, Blank Verse, Gothic, Supernatural, Symbolism, Suspension of Disbelief, Imagination.
Prescribed Texts:
 Hudson, William Henry. An Outline History of English Literature. Atlantic Publishers,2008.
 Gerald, Hammond. The Metaphysical Poets.Macmillan,1974.
 Johnson, Samuel. The Lives of the English Poets. Jones, 1825
 A Very Short Introduction to English Literature, Oxford AVSI series.
Movements and trends

 Metaphysical Poetry
 Neoclassical period
 Romantic period
Unit II
 John Donne: - Good Morrow
(1573-1631) - Sun Rising
- Death Be Not Proud
- Flea
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
26
 Alexander Pope Essay on Man

(1688-1744)
 William Wordsworth Daffodils

(1770-1850) French Revolution
 S.T.Coleridge A Rime of the Ancient Mariner
(1772-1834)
 Charles Lamb Dream Children: A Reverie
(1775-1834)
 William Hazlitt On Personal Character
(1778-1830)
Unit I
Q1. One question with internal choice related to Literary Terms, Movements and trends
to be attempted in about 250 words. 8 marks
Unit II
Q2. A critical question from John Donne with an internal choice to be attempted in about
250 words. 8 marks
Q3. A critical question from Alexander Pope with an internal choice to be attempted in about
250 words. 8 marks
Q4. A critical questions from S.T. Coleridge or William Wordsworth with an internal choice to
be attempted in about 250 words. 8 marks
Q5.A critical question from Charles Lamb or William Hazlitt with an internal choice to be
attempted in about 250 words 8 marks
UNIT III
Q6. There shall be no choice in this unit.
This unit will cover the entire syllabus. There will be 15 questions in all, each carrying 2 marks
to be attempted in about 25-30 words. Seven questions will be asked from Unit I and
eight questions will be asked from Unit II. 15x2=30 marks
Suggested Readings:
 William, J Long. English Literature: Its History and Its Significance for the Life of the English s
peaking World. India: Rupa Publications, 2015.
 Albert, Edward. History of English Literature. Oxford University Press, 2017.
 Sanders, Andrew. The Short Oxford History of English Literature. Clarendon Press, 1994.
John Donne
 Gardner, Helen. ed. John Donne: A Collection of Critical Essays. Prentice-Hall, 1982.
 Carey, John. John Donne: Life, Mind and Art .Faber & Faber, 2011.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
27
Alexander Pope
 Rogers, Pat. ed. The Cambridge Companion to Alexander Pope. Cambridge University
Press,2007.
 Bowles, William Lisle. The Works of Alexander Pope, Esq. in Verse and Prose. J. Johnson,
1806.
William Wordsworth
 Bloom, Harold. ed. William Wordsworth. InfoBase Publishing, 2009.
 Gravil, Richard, Daniel Robinson. ed. The Oxford Handbook of William Wordsworth Oxford
Samuel Taylor Coleridge
 Bloom, Harold. ed. Samuel Taylor Coleridge. InfoBase Publishing, 2010.
 Beer, John. ed. Coleridge: Everyman’s Poetry. Hachette UK, 2012.
Charles Lamb
 Cornwall, Barry. Charles Lamb: A Memoir. Edw. Moxon, 1866.
 Morpurgo, J.E. ed. Charles Lamb: Selected Writings. Psychology Press, 2003.
William Hazlitt
 Cook, Jon. William Hazlitt: Selected Writings. Oxford University Press, 1991.
 Wu, Duncan. William Hazlitt: The First Modern Man. OUP Oxford, 2010.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
28
(Semester-IV)
ENGLISH LITERATURE
5 Credits: 5 (L)
Course Outcome
 Critically appreciate literary texts intended for the masses and to develop an
understanding of mass culture
 Enhance their understanding regarding why these texts have mass appeal
 Gain knowledge about popular literature as a literary genre evolved after the
development in technology and mass media
Option II: Popular Literature

Literary Terms:
Popular Literature, Modern Drama, Magical Realism, Crime Fiction, Tragicomedy, Political
Satire, Idealism, Gothic Novel, Naturalism, Diaspora, Realism, Materialism, Modernism,
Supernaturalism, Antagonist, Protagonist, Plot.
Unit-I
Sofia Coppola : Lost in Translation
George Orwell : Animal Farm
Unit-II
J.K. Rowling : Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s
Stone
Arthur Hailey : Airport
Unit-III
This unit shall comprise ten short answer questions of about 100 – 120 words each based on
prescribed texts, terms and concepts.
UNIT-I shall have two questions with an internal alternative from the prescribed texts. These
questions shall carry 10+10= 20 marks.
UNIT-II shall have two questions with an internal alternative from the prescribed texts. These
UNIT-III shall cover the entire syllabus and shall be of 30 marks. This unit shall comprise ten
short- answer questions of about 100-120 words each on prescribed texts, terms and concepts.
3X10= 30 marks
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
29
Suggested Readings:
Sofia Coppola
 Handyside, Fiona. Sofia Coppola: A Cinema of Girlhood. I. B. Tauris Limited, 2017.
 Gold, Susan Dudley. Great Filmmakers: Sofia Coppola.Cavendish Square Publishing, 2014.
George Orwell
 Bloom, Harold. ed. George Orwell, Updated Edition.Infobase Publishing, 2009.
 Orwell, Sonia, Ian Angus. ed. George Orwell: In front of your Nose, 1946-1950.D.R.
Godine,2000.
J.K. Rowling
 Kirk, Connie Ann. J. K. Rowling: A Biography. Greenwood Publishing Group, 2003.
 Compson, William. J. K. Rowling. The Rosen Publishing Group, 2003.
Arthur Hailey
 Riper, A. Bowdoin Van. Imagining Flight: Aviation and Popular Culture. Texas A&M
 Sutherland, John. Bestsellers: Popular Fiction of the 1970s. Routledge, 2010.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
30
(Semester-IV)
ENGLISH LITERATURE
5 Credits: 5 (L)
Course Outcome
 Connect themselves with various literary texts written in other languages

 Become tolerant towards other cultures and ethnicities
 Familiarize themselves with worldwide famous writers
Option III: Translation Studies
Unit-I
Important Terms
Translatability, Equivalence, Fidelity, Plurivocal, Transparency, Heteroglossia, Source
Language, Target Language, Double bind, Cross-Cultural Translation, Discursive Presence,
Fluent Strategy.
Translation- An Introduction:
a. Aims and Objectives
b. Qualities of a good translator
Types of Translation
a. Semantic and Literary Translation
b. Functional and Communicative Translation
c. Audio-Visual Translation
d. Scientific and Technical Translation/ Machine Translation
Translation and Culture:
a. Importance of Culture in Translation
b. Equivalence in Translation
c. Fidelity and Transparency
d. Limits to Translatability
Unit-II
Munshi Prem Chand : Godaan, translated by Gordon C. Roadarmel
Bhisham Sahni : Tamas, translated by Jai Ratan
Unit-III
This unit shall comprise ten short answer questions of about 100 – 120 words each based on
prescribed texts, terms and concepts.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
31
UNIT-I shall have two questions with an internal alternative. These questions shall carry
10+10= 20 marks.
UNIT-II shall have two questions with an internal alternative from the prescribed texts. These
UNIT-III shall cover the entire syllabus and shall be of 30 marks. This unit shall comprise ten
short- answer questions of about 100-120 words each on prescribed texts, terms and concepts.
3X10= 30 marks
Suggested Readings:
 Venuti, Lawrence. ed. Rethinking Translation: Discourse, Subjectivity, Ideology,

Routledge, 1992.
 Venuti, Lawrence. ed. The Translation Studies Reader, Routledge, 2000.
 Baker, Mona. Critical Readings in Translation Studies. Routledge, 2010.
 Munday, Jeremy. Introducing Translation Studies: Theories and Applications. Routledge,
2012.
 Premchand, Munshi. The Gift of a Cow trans. Gordon C. Roadarmel, Indiana University
Press, 2002.
 Sharma, Pardeep K. Dalit Politics and Literature, Shipra Publications, 2006.
 Sharma, I.D. Premchand: Godaan, A Critical Study edition IV, 2016.
 Sahni, Bhisham. Tamas, trans. Jai Ratan. Penguin, 1988.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
32
leSLVj & 3
fgUnh lkfgR;
5 ØSfMV ¼4 ySDpj $ 1 V~;wVksfj;y½

le;% rhu ?kaVs
uksV% lIrkg eas N% ihfj;M esa ls nks ihfj;M dEiksft+'ku dks fn, tk,¡xs] ftuesa fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh la[;k
15&20 rd jgsxhA
1- çLrqr ikB~;Øe ls fo|kFkhZ fgUnh lkfgR; ds bfrgkl dk foLr`r Kku çkIr djsaxsA
2- çkphu dfo;ksa dk foLr`r Kku gkfly djds fo|kFkhZ lkfgR; ys[ku dh vksj vkd`"V gksaxs
3- fo|kfFkZ;ksa dks fgUnh Hkk"kk dh mRifÙk] fodkl rFkk fofHkUu :iksa dh foLr`r tkudkjh nh tk,xh
rkfd fo|kfFkZ;ksa dks fgUnh Hkk"kk dk iw.kZ Kku gksA
4- t;'kadj çlkn ds thou rFkk dgkuh&jpuk dk Kku fo|kfFkZ;ksa dks lkFkZd thou ewY;ksa esa tksM+sxkA
ikB~;Øe
¼[k.M&d½
1- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl & dsoy jhfrdky ¼ukedj.k] ifjfLFkfr;k¡] ço`fÙk;k¡½ çeq[k dfo &
jl[kku] ?kukuUn] fcgkjh] Hkw"k.k] xq# xksfcUn flag ds dkO; dh fo'ks"krk,¡A
2- fganh Hkk"kk% mn~Hko vkSj fodkl] fganh Hkk"kk ds fofHkUu :i&jktHkk"kk] jk"VªHkk"kk] lEidZ Hkk"kk]
'kCn Hk.Mkj vkSj ekudhdj.kA
¼[k.M&[k½
1- jhfr lkSjHk ¼laiknd½ MkW- jkeltu ik.Ms;] iatkch fo'ofo|ky; çdk'ku
¼dsoy & jl[kku] lsukifr] fcgkjh] ?kukuan] xq: xksfcUn flag½
2- çfrfuf/k dgkfu;k¡ % t;'kadj çlkn] jktdey çdk'ku] fnYyh
dsoy ik¡p dgkfu;k¡ & ¼xzke] vkdk'knhi] vka/kh] e/kqok] iqjLdkj½
¼[k.M&x½
mijksDr lewps ikB~;Øe esa ls laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys 15 ç'u iwNs tk;saxsA
3- [k.M&d
1- fgUnh lkfgR; dk jhfrdky ¼nks esa ls ,d ç'u½ vad 8
2- fgUnh Hkk"kk fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe ¼nks esa ls ,d ç'u½
vad 8
4- [k.M&[k
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
33
1- jhfr lkSjHk] vkykspukRed ç'u

¼dfo@ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís'; vkfn½ nks esa ls ,d
ç'u
vad 8
lçlax O;k[;k ¼nks esa ls ,d O;k[;k½ vad 4
2- çfrfuf/k dgkfu;k¡ esa ls rhu vkykspukRed ç'u
¼ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís';@pfj=&fp=.k vkfn½ nks esa
ls ,d ç'u
vad 8
4- [k.M&x
bl [k.M ds vUrxZr lewps ikB~;Øe esa ls 15 laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys ç'u fcuk
fodYi ds iwNs tk,¡xsA lHkh dk mÙkj nsuk vfuok;Z gksxkA
15x2=30

mifLFkfr % 06
nks ,e-,l-Vh- % 12
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
34
leSLVj & 4
fgUnh lkfgR;
5 ØSfMV ¼4 ySDpj $ 1 V~;wVksfj;y½

le;% rhu ?kaVs
uksV% lIrkg eas N% ihfj;M esa ls nks ihfj;M dEiksft+'ku dks fn, tk,¡xs] ftuesa fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh la[;k
15&20 rd jgsxhA
ikB~;Øe
¼[k.M&d½
1- vk/kqfud fgUnh dkO; ds fofHkUu vkanksyu ubZ dfork rd & ukedj.k] ifjfLFkfr;k¡] ço`fÙk;k¡]
çeq[k dfo & çlkn] fujkyk] egknsoh oekZ vkSj vKs; ds dkO; dh fo'ks"krk,¡A
2- vyadkj ¼y{k.k vkSj mnkgj.k½ vuqçkl] miek] :id] ;ed] mRçs{kk] vfr';ksfDr] 'ys"k]
foHkkouk] n`"Vkar] vU;ksfDr ¼dsoy 10 vyadkj½
¼[k.M&[k½
3- m"kk fç;oank & ipiu [kaHks yky nhokjsa ¼miU;kl½] jktdey çdk'ku] fnYyh
4- ik¡p ,dk¡dh & lEiknd iwju pan VaMu] jktiky ,.M lUt+] fnYyhA
¼[k.M&x½
3- [k.M&d
3- fgUnh lkfgR; dk vk/kqfud dky ¼nks esa ls ,d ç'u½ vad 8
4- vyadkjk fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe vad 8
4- [k.M&[k
3- ipiu [kHHks yky nhokjsa] vkykspukRed ç'u
¼dfo@ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís'; vkfn½ nks esa ls ,d
ç'u
vad 8
4- ik¡p ,dk¡dh esa ls vkykspukRed ç'u
¼ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís';@pfj=&fp=.k vkfn½ nks esa
ls ,d ç'u
vad 8
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
35

4- [k.M&x
bl [k.M ds vUrxZr lewps ikB~;Øe esa ls 15 laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys ç'u fcuk
fodYi ds iwNs tk,¡xsA lHkh dk mÙkj nsuk vfuok;Z gksxkA
15x2=30

mifLFkfr % 06
nks ,e-,l-Vh- % 12
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
36
(Semester- III)
Pass Marks: 35% Theory: 56 Marks
Internal Assessment: 24 Marks Practical Examination: 20 Marks
 Become familiar in evolution of art of warfare in Western World;

 Learn and understand the Strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of
defeat and victory of various Macedonian, Persian, and Romans Generals.
 Besides, in a position to appreciate and understand evolutionary changes in the art and
science of war in Western World through ages.

from each Section of the syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt at least 2 questions
from each section A & B. Each question will carry 09 marks. Section C will consist of 10 short
answer type questions covering the entire syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt all the
PAPER-I: EVOLUTION OF WARFARE-I
SECTION - A
i. Military organisations and techniques of fighting of Macedonians and Persians with
particular reference to the Battle of Arbella 331 BC:
a. Introduction - Opposing forces and their deployment
b. Description of the battle
c. Analysis (Strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of defeat
and victory).
ii. Military organisations and techniques of fighting of Romans and Carthaginians with
particular reference to the Battle of Cannae 216 B.C.:
c. Analysis(strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of Defeat
and victory).
iii. Military organisations and techniques of fighting of the English and Normans with
particular reference to the Battle of Hastings, 1066 A.D.:
c. Analysis (Strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of defeat
and victory).
iv. The Mongol art of war under Changez Khan.
a. Organisation of Mongol Armies.
b. Mongol Art of War.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
37
SECTION - B
i. Industrial Revolution and its impact:
a. Impact on Society
b. Impact on Weapons of land and naval warfare
c. Impact on means of communications
d. Impact on tactics of land and naval warfare.
ii. Napoleon’s Art of Warfare:
a. Elements of Napoleonic Warfare.
b. Principles of Napoleonic Warfare.
iii. Naval warfare with particular reference to the Battle of Trafalgar 1805 A.D.:
a. Background of the English and Franco-Spanish rivalry for naval supremacy.
b. Introduction - Opposing forces and their deployment
c. Description of the battle.
d. Analysis (Strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of defeat
and Victory)
iv. American Civil War (1861-65).
a. Introduction
b. Causes
c. Events in brief
d. The character of Civil War.
e. Tactical developments.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Das, S.T.(1970) An Introduction to the Art of War , Sagar Publishers, New Delhi
Dupuy, R.Earnest (1970) The Encyclopaedia of Military History, Macdonold, London.
Fuller, J.F.C.(1960) Conduct of War, Army Publishers, New Delhi.
Fuller, J.F.C.(1959) The American Civil War, Natraj Publishers, Dehradun.
Fuller, J.F.C.(1958) The Generalship of Alexander The Great, Natraj Publishers, Dehradun.
Fuller, J.F.C(1971) Armament and History, Sagar Publishers, New Delhi.
Fuller, J.F.C.(1954) The Decisive Battle of the Western World Vol.I & II, Eyre and
Spottiswoode, London.
Montgomery, Viscount (1968) A History of Warfare, William Collins, London.
Ropp, Theodore(2000) War in the Modern World, The John Hopkins University Press Baltimore.
Sarkar, J.N.(1960) Military History of India, M.C. Sarkar, Calcutta.
heppard, E.W(1966) The Study of Military History, Natraj Publishers, New Delhi
Singh, Savita.(2015) Decisive Indian battles and Wars: From Kurukshetra to Kargil, Atlantic
publishers, New Delhi.
38
PAPER-II: PRACTICAL EXAM
Duration: 03Hours Max. Marks:20

Written Test: 01 Hours Written Test: 10 Marks
Hour Viva-voce: 02 Hours Viva-voce: 05 Marks
Note: The practical exam will be conducted by both one External and One Internal Examiner.
1. Relief Feature and their representation on the map.

a. Methods of depicting relief.
b. Contour Interval.
2. Types of slope and their representation on the map by contour lines.
3. Gradient and Slope in Degrees.
4. Navigation in different types of Terrain.
a. Desert terrain.
b. Mountain terrain.
c. Jungle terrain.
d. Arctic terrain.
39
(Semester- IV)
 Become familiar in evolution of art of warfare in India;

 Learn and understand the Strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of
defeat and victory of various Indian, Mughal, Maratha and Sikh Generals.
 Besides, in a position to appreciate and understand evolutionary changes in the art and
science of war in India through ages.

answer type questions covering the entire syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt all the
PAPER-I: EVOLUTION OF WARFARE-II
SECTION-A
i. Macedonian and Indian Military Organisations and techniques of fighting with particular
reference to the Battle of Hydaspes, 326 B.C.:
a. Military Organisations and techniques of fighting of Macedonian and Indians.
b. Battle of Hydaspes - Opposing forces and their deployment.
C. Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of defeat and
victory).
ii. Kautilya’s Philosophy of War:
a. Diplomacy and Strategy.
b. The institution of Spies.
c. Army Organisation.
d. Mode of Warfare.
e. Forts- Types & Role.
iii. Military organisations and techniques of fighting of Rajputs and Turks with particular
reference to the Battle of Terrain, 1192 A.D.:
a. Military organisations and techniques of fighting of Rajputs and Turks
b. Battle of Terrain - Opposing forces and their deployment.
c. Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of defeat and
victory.)
iv. Military organisations and techniques of fighting of Mughals and Afghans with particular
reference to the First Battle of Panipat, 1526 A.D.:
a. Military organisations of Mughals and Afghans.
b. Battle of Panipat - Opposing forces and their deployment
40
c. Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of defeat and
victory).
SECTION – B
i. Fighting Techniques of Southern Muslim Sultans with particular reference to the Battle of
Talikota, 1565 A.D.:
a. Military organisations and techniques of fighting of Rajputs and Turks
b. Battle of Talikota - Opposing forces and their deployment
c. Analysis (Strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of defeat and
victory.)
ii. Military organisations of Marathas under Shivaji and his techniques of fighting:
a. Shivaji as a military leader.
b. Higher defence organisation
c. Military organisation.
d. Techniques of fighting.
iii. Military organisation of Sikh Army and its fighting techniques under Maharaja Ranjit Singh:
a. Maharaja Ranjit Singh as a Military leader.
b. Growth and development of the Sikh Army from 1799-1849
c. Organisation of the Army
d. Fighting techniques of the Sikh Army (Strategy and tactics).
iv. Anglo-Maratha and Anglo-Sikh Warfare with particular reference to: Battle of
Assaye,1803A.D.:
c. Analysis (Strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of
defeat and victory)
Battle of Chillianwala:
c. Analysis (Strategy, tactics, application of principles of war and causes of defeat and
victory.
SUGGESTED READINGS :
Alfred, David(1953) Indian Art of War, Atma Ram , Delhi.
Bajwa F.S.(1964) Military System of the Sikhs, Moti Lal, Banarsi Dass, Delhi.
Bruce, George(1969) Six Battles of India, Rupa & Company, Calcutta.
Das, ST (1969) Indian Military- Its History and Development, Sagar, New Delhi.
Fuller, J.F.C.(1958) Generalship of Alexander The Great, Natraj Publishes, Dehradun
Kangle, R.P.(1963) Kautilya`s Arth Shastra.University of Bombay, Mumbai.
Majumdar, B.K.(1960) Military System in Ancient India, Firma K.L.Mukhopadhyoy,, Calcutta.
Majumdar B.N.(1963) Study of Indian Military History. Army Educational Store, Delhi
Majumdar B.N.(1965) Military System of the Sikhs, Army Educational Store, New Delhi.
Malleson (1969) Decisive, Battles of India, Sagar, New Delhi.
Sarkar, J.N (1960) Military History of India,M.C.Sarkar, Calcutta.
Sen, S.N.(1977) Military System of Marathas, K.P.Bagchi Publishers, Calcutta.
Sharma Gautam (1966) Indian Army through the Ages, Allied Publishers, Bombay.
Singh, Savita.(2015) Decisive Indian battles and Wars: From Kurukshetra to Kargil, Atlantic
publishers, New Delhi.
41
PAPER-II: PRACTICAL EXAM
Duration: 03Hours Max. Marks:20

Written Test: 01 Hour Written Test: 10
Viva-Voce: 02 Hours Marks Viva-voce: 05 Marks
Note: The practical exam will be conducted by both one External and One Internal Examiner.
1. Introduction to Field Engineering.

a. Task preferred by Field Engineers
b. Equipment used in Field Engineering
c.
2. Knots and Lashings.
a. Characteristics and types of Knots
b. Types of Lashings
3. Types of Mines.
4. Types of Obstacles.
a. Characteristics and Classifications
5. Field Defence.
42
(SEMESTER III)
ECONOMICS: MACRO ECONOMICS AND PUBLIC FINANCE
CREDITS: 5
Course objectives: The primary objective of this course is to understand the basic principles
of macro economics with the help of classical and Keynesian schools of thought. More so, It
provide the knowledge and application of tax and non-tax sources of public revenue, expenditure
policy and its uses.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections. A and B will have four
questions each. Each question shall carry 10 marks. Section C will consist of 10 short answer
type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 30 marks in all.
Each short answer type question will carry 3 marks. The candidates are required to give answer
of each short type question in about 100 words.
Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type questions in about 100
words.
SECTION -A
Distinction between Micro and Macro Economics. Determination of Income and

Employment: Classical and Keynesian Models, Say’s Law of Market. Consumption Functions:
Average and Marginal Propensity to consume and Factors affecting consumption function. Static
and Dynamic Multiplier. Investment Functions: Types, Investment demand schedule and factors
affecting investment decisions.
SECTION-B
Introduction to Public Finance: Nature, Scope and its Importance. Public Expenditure:
Principles, Effects of Public Expenditure on Production and Distribution, Causes for the growth
of Public expenditure.
Taxation: Classification, Canons and Characteristics of a good tax system. Incidence and Impact
of Taxation: Demand-Supply Theory and Modern theory. Public Debt: Its Types and Role.
Burden and Methods of Redemption of Public Debt. Deficit Financing: Objectives and
Limitations.
RECOMMENED READINGS
1. T.F. Durnbarg and McDougal: Macro Economics, McGraw Hill, New York, 1976
(full book).
2. O.P.Sharma: Macro Economics (Punjabi Medium), Punjabi University, Patiala.
3. M.C.Vaish, Macro Economic Theory, Oxford University Press.
4. Harvey J and Johnsson M: Introduction to Macro Economics, McMillan and London.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
43
1. Gardner Ackley: Macro Economic Theory, Macmillan, New York, 1985 (Full book).
2. C.W.Baird: Elements of Macro Economics, West Publishing Company, 1977 (Ch.2.11)
3. A.R. Musgrave and P.B.Musgrave: Public Finance in Theory and Practice, McGraw Hill,
International Student's Edition, 1976, Chs. 9, pp.16-20.
4. H.Dalton: Principles of Public Finance, London, Routeledge and Kegan Paul, 4th revised
edition, Adelaide Publications, 1997.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
44
ECONOMICS: PAPER- MACRO ECONOMICS AND INTERNATIONAL TRADE

CREDITS: 5
Course objectives: The primary objective of this course is to provide the knowledge about
evolution and functions of money and to understand various international organizations and
systems.
questions each. Each question shall carry 10 marks. Section C will consist of 10 short answer
Each short answer type question will carry 3 marks. The candidates are required to give answer
of each short type question in about 100 words.

Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type questions in about 100
words.
SECTION A
Liquidity Preference theory of Interest. Money: its functions and role. Money Market and
Capital Market: instruments. Theories of Money: Fisher's and Cambridge's equations.
Banking: Definition, types, functions of Banks and Credit Creation. Inflation: Theories of
Inflation: Meaning and types, Causes, Cost-push and Demand pull and measures to Inflation
control. Trade Cycles: Meaning and Phases. Monetary and Fiscal Policies: Meaning, objectives
and instruments.
SECTION B
Theories of International Trade: Classical and Heckscher-Ohlin Theorem. Terms of

Trade: Meaning and types. W.T.O and its impact on Less Developed Countries. SAARC: origin,
objectives and India's Trade with SAARC.
Balance of Payments: Meaning, Concepts and Components of Balance of Payments, causes and
measures of its disequilibrium. Rate of Exchange: Meaning and its determination, Fixed V's
Flexible Exchange Rate. IMF and IBRD: Objectives, working and achievements.
1. C.P. Kindleberger: International Economics, Richard Irwin Homeswood Ilinios, Indian

Edition, 1977, Part II, III, IV and V.
2. Bo Sodersten: International Economics, Macmillan Press Ltd. 1990, Parts I, III, IV & V.
4. C.W. Baird: Elements of Macro Economics, West Publishing Company, 1977 (Ch.2.11)
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
45
ECONOMICS (HONOURS)
(SEMESTER III & IV)
SCHEME OF STUDIES
The candidates will be required to study one paper in each of the semesters
III and IV of B.A. Part-II from the following list of papers.
SEMESTER-III
Any one of the following papers:

i. Economics of Agriculture
ii. Economics of Industry
iii. Economics of Public Enterprises
SEMESTER -IV
Any one of the following papers
i. Money & Banking
ii. History of Economic Thought
iii. Computer Applications in Economics
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
46
(SEMESTER- III)
ECONOMICS (HONOURS): (i) ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE
CREDITS: 5
(i)- Economics of Agriculture
The students will be able to learn the various instruments of agriculture
development such as agricultural marketing and finance and understand the
theories of agricultural development and supply of labour. Understanding of
agriculture credit institutions will be also helpful to the students to aware weaker
sections and farmers regarding cheap credit policies. The study of the course will
be helpful to the students to evaluate agricultural strategy and green revolution
and current changes. The students will have the benefits to apply for recruitments
in APMCs and other agencies such as PUNSUP, FCI etc.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections. A and B will
have four questions each. Each question shall carry 10 marks. Section C will
consist of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus
uniformly and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry
3 marks. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type question
in about 100 words.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B
and the entire Section C. The use of simple calculator is allowed. The candidates
are required to give answer of each short type questions in about 100 words.
SECTION-A
Economics of Agriculture: Its nature and scope, Inter-dependence between
Agriculture and Industry. Nature and problems of agricultural development in
developing countries.
Transforming Traditional Agriculture: Ranis & Fei, Schultz and Mellor
Models, Lewis model of Unlimited Supply of Labour.
SECTION-B
Land Reforms and System of Farming. Farm size and productivity
relationship. Agricultural price policy. New Agricultural Strategy and Green
Revolution; Problems of small farmers and agricultural labourers.
Agriculture marketing: meaning, classification and functions. Agricultural
credit, Marketable and Marketed surplus, price spread and market margins.
1. R.N.Soni : Leading Issues in Agriculture Economics, Shoban Lal Nagin Chand & Co.,
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
47
Jallandhar, 1992, Chp. 1,2,3,4,8,11,12,16,23,24,26,27,28 & 29.

2. C.Eicher and L. Witt: Agricultrue in Economic Development, Vora & Co., Bombay,
1970, Chp. 1,5,9,11,16 and 17.
3. Charan D.Wadhva : Some Problems of India's Economic Policy, Tata Mc Graw Hill,
Bombay, 1973, Part Two; Articles -B,C,D,F and G.
4. A.M.Khusro: Readings in Agricultural Development, Allied Publishers, Bombay,
1968, Articles by: B.S.Minhas & T.N.Srinivasan, M.L.Dantwala, A.M.Khusro,
T.Bergman, V.K.R.V.Rao.
5. P.C.Joshi: Land Reforms in India, Allied Publishers, Bombay, 1976, Part II, Sections
I & II.
6. T.W.Schultz : Transforming Traditional Agriculture, Lyall Book Depot, Ludhiana,
1970.
7. J.W.Mellor: The Economics of Agricultural Development, Vora & Co. Bombay,
1966.
8. Michael P.Tandon: Economic Development in the Third World, Orient Longman,
New Delhi, 1987.
9. Francis R. Frankel: India's Green Revolution-Economic Gains & Political Costs,
Oxford University Press, Bombay, 1971.
10.Misra & Puri: Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay, 1993,
Chapter 30.
11.Singh & Sadhu : Agricultural Problems in India, Himalaya Publishing House,
Bombay,19
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
48
ECONOMICS (HONOURS): (ii) ECONOMICS OF INDUSTRY

CREDITS: 5
(ii)- Economics of Industry
The students will be able to examine various instruments of market structure and
growth of firms and able to evaluate the working of Industrial policy since
independence. Understanding of growth of state led industrialization in India will
strengthen the student’s knowledge to apply in industrial problems of the nation.
The study of the course will also be helpful to understand the working of public
and private sector industrialization in the economic development of the nation.
The students will also be able to research the challenges faced by industries of the
country.
in about 100 words.
SECTION - A
Scope and methods of Industrial Economics; Basic concepts of firm,
industry and market; organisational forms and alternative motives of the firms;
Industrial structure and economic development.
Market Structure: Sellers concentration, product differentiation, conditions
of entry and economics of scale, market structure and profitability. Growth of
firms: Vertical integration, diversification, mergers and innovation; constraints on
growth - demand, financial and managerial.
SECTION -B
Theory of industrial location: contribution of Weber and Sergeants
Florence. Centralised vs. balanced regional development. Industrial concentration
and dispersal in India.
Industrial policy since independence. Industrial development under plans
and reasons for deceleration of industrial growth. Growth of State led
industrialization in India.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
49
REOCMMENDED READINGS
1. R.R.Banthwal : Industrial Economics: An Introduction. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi. Chs. 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 & 17.
2. S.C.Kuchhal: The Industrial Economy of India, (latest edition). Allahabad.
Chaitanya Publishing House. Chs. 7,15 and 18.
3. P.J.Devine et. al: An Introduction of Industrial Economics.
4. W. Steward Howe: Industrial Economics: An Applied Approach, The Macmillan
Press Ltd. Chs. 3, 5, 6, & 7.
5. Datt & Sundharam : Indian Economy (latest edition). S. Chand and Company, Chs.
10, 27 & 40.
1. David M.Smith: Industrial Location: An Economic Geographic Analysis, John Wiley
& Sons Ins. Chp. 8.
2. E.D.Penrose: The Theory of Growth of Firm, Oxford Basil Blackwell, Chs. 7 & 8.
3. Harry W. Richardson: Elements of Regional Economics, Penquin Education, and
Ch. 3 pp. 70-78.
4. Ishar Judge Aluwalia : Industrial Growth in India: Stagnation since Mid Sixties,
Oxford University Press, Delhi, Ch..2.
5. Sivaya & Das: Indian Industrial Economy, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, Chs. 4 & 7.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
50
ECONOMICS (HONOURS): (iii) ECONOMICS OF PUBLIC ENTERPRISES

CREDITS: 5
(iii)- Economics of Public Enterprises
The students will be able to understand the operations of public sector financial
institutions in the financing of public enterprises and correlate the practical
knowledge of role of public sector enterprises in economic development of the
nation. The students will also be able to evaluate the financial performance of
public sector in India. The study of the course will be helpful to understand the
pricing in public sector and to evaluate the functioning of the Government and
public sector units.
in about 100 words.
SECTION - A
Role of public sector in socio-economic development. Rationale of public
sector. Multiple objectives of public enterprises and clash and complementarities
in objectives. Historical perspective of public sector in India. Organisation of
public enterprises- various forms and role.
Role of public sector financial institutions in the financing of public
enterprises. Problems of Management of Working Capital - Management of
Inventory. Credit and Cash Financing of Working Capital.
SECTION -B
Pricing in public sector- Basis and types of pricing policies, pricing practices,
machinery of price fixation, Role of B.I.C. & P. Accountability and Profitability of
public sector - Causes of poor financial performance of public sector in India.
Sources of funds of public enterprises - Debt and Equity, Industrial
Relations & its importance. Industrial disputes; causes, effects and their
settlements.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
51
1. Laxmi Narain : Principles and Practices of Public Enterprises Management,
S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, 1980.
2. Institute of Public Enterprises: Organisation in Public Enterprises, Tripathi,
Bombay, 1967.
3. Institute of Public Enterprises: Pricing & Investment in Public Enterprises, Oxford
and IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi, Ch.IV, pp.97-200, 205-322.
4. Laxmi Narain: Public Enterprises in India, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, 1982.
1. K.R.Gupta: Issues in Public Enterprises, S.Chand &Co., New Delhi, 1978.
2. G.S.Bhalla: Financial Administration of Nationalised industry in U.K. and India,
Meenakshi, Meerut, 1968.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
52
(SEMESTER-IV)
ECONOMICS (HONOURS): (i) MONEY AND BANKING
CREDITS: 5
(i)- Money and Banking
The study of the course will be helpful to review various banking sector reforms
and to understand and apply the knowledge of commercial banks, central bank,
new developments while doing financial activities in their day to day life.
Understanding of money and banking will strengthen the student’s knowledge
about best investment opportunities. The knowledge of the course will helpful to
qualify banking exams and create the awareness among the students of Modern
Monetary System.
in about 100 words.
SECTION -A
Evolution of Money: classification and functions. Near money, Demand for
money: classical theory of money, and Keynesian theory of demand for money.
Supply of Money: Components and determinants, Money Multiplier, IS and
LM functions, Classical and Neo-classical theories of interest.
SECTION -B
Banking: Commercial banks: their functions and importance. Credit-
creation. Central bank: functions and methods of credit control. Financing
institutions and their role. Role of
Non-banking financial intermediaries. Monetary policy in India, objectives and
instruments.
International Monetary Cooperation: International Monetary Fund,
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, International Finance
Corporation. International Development Association.
SUGGESTED READINGS
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
53
1. Lucken, D.C. : Money and Banking

2. Thorn, R.S. : Introduction to Money and Banking
3. Leidle, B.E.W. : The Demand for Money Theories and Evidence
4. Gupta, S.B. : Monetary Planning in India.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
54
ECONOMICS (HONOURS): (ii) COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN ECONOMICS

CREDITS: 5
(iii)- Computer Applications in Economics
The study of the course will be helpful to understand computer programming
languages. And to use computer applications to type, organize and find out the
results and conclusions in the field of research and report writing. It will also
boost student’s motivation by application of computer knowledge in day to day
life. Understanding of computer packages will be helpful for students to find
statistical results and functioning of operating systems.
in about 100 words.
SECTION - A
Introduction to Computers : Simple Model of a Computer, Steps in problem
solving on a computer, Data representation, Input/output devices, computer
memory, Central Processing Unit (CPU), Computer generations and classifications.
Introductory Programming: Algorithm, Computer Program and
programming languages; Basic data types and declarations. Elementary C
programming.
SECTION -B
Programming: Control structures (Iterative and conditional), Structured
data type (Array only), Introduction to functions and procedures Programming
Applications : Developments of algorithm and programs for simple statistical and
mathematical methods like computation of measures of central tendency,
dispersion, correlation, simple regression, Matrix operations (Addition,
subtraction, multiplication and Inverse).
1. V.Rajaraman: Fundamentals of Computers, PHI, 1991, Chs. I, II, II, IV and XII.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
55
2. V. Rajaraman : Computer Programming in C, PHI, Delhi. 1990 (full book).
1. G.M. Scheider and Others: An introduction to Programming and Problem Solving,
PHI, Delhi, 1984, Chs. I to V.
2. E.Balaguruswami: Computer Oriented Statistical and Numerical Methods,
Macmillan, 1988 (Full book).
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
56
ECONOMICS (HONOURS): (iii) HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT

CREDITS: 5
(ii)- History of Economic Thought
The study of the course will be helpful to review the different economic systems
such as classical and marxian schools of thought and to understand the concept of
mercantilist and physiocrates in means of production. The knowledge of the
course will helpful to understand the concept of surplus value and commodity
fetishism.

in about 100 words.
SECTION -A
Pre-Classical Economic Thought: Mercantilism: Mercantilist ideas,
regulations of economic life, leading theory of mercantilist school, Physiocracy:
ideas with special reference to Quesnay and Turgot.
Classical and Marxian Political Economy: The classical tradition: Adam
Smith, Ricardo, J.S.Mill and Karl Marx on value, distribution and development.
SECTION -B
Reaction against Classicism: Socialist and Nationalist thinkers, Sismondi,
Saint- Simon, Robert Oven and Charles Fourier, Subjective School: Menger,
Weiser and Bohm- Bawerk.
Neo-Classicism and New Economics: Neo- classical School, Value Theory,
Schumpeter on economic development, Keynes.
1. Eric Roll: History of Economic Thought, Oxford University Press, Calcutta, 1974.
2. M. Blaug: Economic Theory in Retrospect, Richard D. Irwin Inc. Illinois, 1968.
3. Gide & Rist: A History of Economic Doctrines, George G. Harrap & Co. Ltd.,
London, 1964
4. P.M.Sweezy: The Theory of Capitalist Development, K.P.Bagchi & Co., Calcutta,
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
57
1991.
SUPLLEMENTARY READINGS
1. B.N. Ghosh & Rama Ghosh: Concise History of Economic Thought, Himalaya
Publishing House, Delhi, 1980.
2. J.A. Schumpeter : History of Economic Analysis (Selected portions), George Allen
& Unwin, London, 1961.
3. R.R.Paul: Classical Political Economy, Kalyani Publishers, Delhi, 1979.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
58
Department of Fine Arts

B.A. (Part-II) Semester-III
Credit: 5(2L+6P)
Name of No. of Time of Marks Internal Total Credits
Paper Paper Hrs. Assessment per week
History of 1 3 42 18 60 2
Indian
Sculpture
Practical 2 4-4 20-20 - 40 3
Total Marks 100 5

(Theory and Practical)
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments/Project Works/ Practical works etc,(40%)
and two mid semester test/Internal examinations(40%).
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
59
Semester-III
OBJECTIVES:
involvement in the art processes by exploration in basic studies, training in observation and in articulation
with emphasis on subjective and analytical study of material and objects.
The range of experience covers two and three dimensional forms both the point of view of specially defined
structural problems and their social and historic significance.
Paper- A (Theory) History of Indian
Sculpture 42 pass marks: 35% (15mks) 3 hours
Paper-B (Practical)
Section-A POSTER/BOOK COVER 20 pass marks: 35 %( 14mks) 4 hours
Section-B HEAD STUDY 20 4 hours
(Int Assmnt) 18 pass marks: 35% (6 mks)
Total 82+18 = 100
Instructions: 42 marks for the theory paper and 18 marks for internal assessment. 40 marks
for the practical papers for each section.
SECTION-A
The examiner will set 4 questions from Unit I of the syllabus uniformly. The candidate will
attempt 2 questions. Each question will carry 6 marks.
SECTION-B
The examiner will set 4 questions from Unit II of the syllabus uniformly. The candidate will
SECTION-C
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
60
Syllabus & courses of Reading

Paper - A Theory
History of Indian Sculpture
UNIT-I
1. Gupta Period: Brief history
Detailed study of following sculptures:
i. Seated Buddha from Sarnath
ii. Standing Buddha from Mathura
iii. Vishnu from Mathura
iv. Copper Buddha from Sultanganj
v. Vishnu Anantsaya from Deogarh temple
2. Rashtrakuta Period (Ellora and Elephanta caves): Brief history and characteristics.
Detailed study of the following sculptures:
i. ‘Ravana Shaking Mount Kailash’ at Ellora

ii. Shiv Mahadeva (Trimurti) at Elephanta
iii. Marriage of Shiva and Parvati at Elephanta
UNIT-II
3. Pallava Period (Mammalapuram): Brief History and characteristics.
Detailed study of the following sculptures:
i. Descent of Ganges’
ii. Durga Mahishasurmardini
4. Chola Period: Brief History and detailed study of
i. Shiva Nataraja
ii. Parvati
5. Six Limbs of Art
Suggested Readings
Sant singh and Agya kaur : Bharti Murti Kala da Itihaas (Punjabi)
Dr. Saroj Chaman : Soundariya Shastra
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
61
Paper-B (Practical)
Instructions for the Paper Setter
Max Marks: Practical – 40 Time allowed - 4 hours
Pass Marks - 40%
The Practical paper will be of 40 marks. There will be two Practicals papers of 20 marks each.
Instruction for Paper Setter
Note: Candidate will appear for two practical exams per semester.
1. The syllabus is self explanatory.

2. Choice of medium should be selected as per paper .
3. While evaluating the examiner should see the competency, artistic composition, technical
aspects of tone, texture and quality.
PAPER I: POSTER/ BOOK COVER
MEDIUM: Poster colors
SIZE: ½ imperial for Poster and 15x20 cm or 20x25 cm for Book Cover
Posters and book covers should convey the theme/subject. Layout and Lettering should be used to endorse
the subject matter.
PAPER II: HEAD STUDY
Study of human head (life/cast) for proportions, balance and study of angles, rhythmic rendering of structure
through light and shade.
Medium: color pencil, pastels, oils
Size: ½ Imperial
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
62
Semester-IV
Session 2021-22, 2022-23
Credit: 5(2L+6P)
Name of No. of Time of Marks Internal Total Credits

Paper Paper Hrs. Assessment per week
History of 1 3 42 18 60 2
Art
Practical 2 4-4 20-20 - 40 3
Total Marks 100 5
(Theory and Practical)
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
63
Semester-IV
OBJECTIVES:
Paper- A (Theory) History of Art 42 pass marks: 35% (15mks) 3 hours
Paper-B (Practical)
Section-A
COMPOSITION/LANDSCAPE 20 pass marks: 35%(14mks) 4 hours
Section-B HEAD STUDY 20 4 hours
(IntAssmnt) 18 pass marks: 35% (6 mks)
Total 82+18 = 100
SECTION-A
SECTION-B
SECTION-C
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
64
Paper - A Theory
History of Art
UNIT-I
1. Early Indian miniatures: Brief History of eastern and western manuscript paintings and their
characteristics.
Detailed study of following paintings:
i. Nativity of Mahavira
ii. Chaurapanchasika
iii. Decorative designs from Kalapsutra
2. Mughal miniature paintings: Brief history of the paintings during period of Akbarand Jahangir
and their characteistics.
Detailed study of the following works of Art:
i. Hunt of Tiger
ii. Portrait of Jahangir
iii. Turkey Cock
UNIT-II
3. Rajasthani Paintings: Brief history of the paintings of Mewar, Bundi and Kishangarh and their
characteristics.
Detailed study of paintings with special references to Mewar, Bundi and Kishangarh
i. Deepak Raga (Mewar)
ii. Ragini Bhairav (Bundi)
iii. Bani Thani (Kishangarh)
4. Pahari Paintings: Brief history and general characteristics of Pahari paintings of Kangra, Basohli
and Guler.
Detailed study of paintings with special references to Basohli, Guler and Kangra.
i. Portrait of Raja Kirpal (basohli)

ii. Love in the Pavilion(Guler)
iii. Krishana dancing on the head of Kaliya (Kangra)
Suggested Readings
Sant singh and Agya kaur : Bharti Murti Kala da Itihaas (Punjabi)
Rowland, b. : The Art and Architecture of India
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
65
PAPER-B (PRACTICAL)
Max Marks: Practical – 40 Time allowed - 4 hours

Pass Marks - 40%
The Practical paper will be of 40 marks . There will be two Practicals papers of 20 marks each.
Instruction for Paper Setter
Note: Candidate will appear for two practical exams per semester.
1. The syllabus is self explanatory.

2. Choice of medium should be selected as per paper .
3. While evaluating the examiner should see the competency, artistic composition, technical aspects
of tone, texture and quality.
PAPER I: COMPOSITION/LANDSCAPE
Landscape: Color study of outdoor landscape.

Composition: arrangement of forms, colors, tones, textures to express the subject
Medium: Oil, water, Pastel, Acrylic colors.
Size: ½ Imperial
Four selected works will be submitted out of work done in class.
PAPER II: HEAD STUDY
Study of human head (life/cast) for proportions, balance and study of angles, rhythmic rendering of
structure through light and shade.
Medium: Oil, water colors, pastels
Size: ½ Imperial
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
66
B.A. II- FOLK ART & CULTURE

SEMESTER III
5 CREDITS: 4H(T) + 2H(P)
Maximum marks: 100 marks Time Allowed: 3 hours

Practical: 30 marks Internal Assessment: 20 marks Course Outcome
 Understand the classification of culture on the basis of the subjective and the objective
 Appreciate how culture reproduces itself through education and other social organizations
Understand how cognition is affected by culture
 Know how culture works as a structure in a society
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Section A & B will have four questions
nine short answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions from each section A & B of the question paper
Section-A
1. b'e ftPtk;L ;zebg, gfoGkPk, tzBrhnk, ;[MkU ns/ bZSD
2. b'e ftPtk; ns/ b'eXkokL fJe;[osk, ;pzX, gfjukD ns/ ;fGnkukoe wjZssk
3. b'e ftPtk; ns/ b'e XowL b'e Xow d/ d/th d/ts/ ns/ d/th PeshnK, b'e wB'oE,G/ANktK
4. b'e Xow ns/ ftfP;N XowL;wkBsktK ns/ fGzBsktK
Section-B
5. b'e ftPtk; ns/ fsZE fsT[jko
6. oj[ ohs ns/ ohsh fotkiL iBw, ftnkj ns/ w"s Bkb ;zpzXs gzikph ;fGnkukoe oj[ ohsK
ns/ ohsh^fotki
7. PrB ns/ ngPrBl otkfJsh gzikph ;fGnkukoe ;wki ftZu w"i{d ftfGzB PrB ns/ ngPrB,
fe;wKL o{g ns/ nt;o
8. b'e ftPtk; ns/ ikd{ N{D/L ikd{ N{D/A, jE"b/ ns/ b'e wB'oE
PRACTICAL
1. gzikph ;fGnkukoe ;wki ftu b'e ftPtk; ns/ b'e Xow Bz{ ftnes eodhnK s;thoK Bz{
fJeZmk eoe/ T[jBK dh ftnkfynk .
2. nb'g j' ojhnK oj[ôhsK dh ;{uh fsnko eoBk.
3. gzikph oj[ôhsK, ohsh fotkiK, o;wK pko/ ikDekoh jk;b eoBk sK fe w"fye gqhfynk ftZu
ftfdnkoEh T[jBK pko/ dZ; ;e/.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
67
B.A. II- FOLK ART & CULTURE

SEMESTER IV
5 CREDITS: 4H(T) + 2H(P)
Maximum marks: 100 marks Time Allowed: 3 hours

Practical: 30 marks Internal Assessment: 20 marks Course Outcome
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Section A & B will have four questions
nine short answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions from each section A & B of the question paper
Section-A
1. w/b/ ns/ fsT[jkoL gfoGkPk, bZSD, fe;wK ns/ ;fGnkukoe wjZssk.
2. w/fbnK dk o{gL 1) ghoK, wksk okDhnK, ;zsK, pkfpnK, ro{nK ns/ ;EkfBe d/th PeshnK
ftZu o[gKsfoe P\;hnsK Bkb ;pzfXs w/b/.
2) fsZE fsT[jkoK Bkb ;pzfXs w/b/
3) w";w, o[ZsK, ns/ ftP/P nt;oK Bkb ;pzfXs w/b/.
3. w/fbnK dk pdbdk gqky/gL
1) ;fGnkukoe w/b/, y/v w/b,/ fe;kB w/b/ ns/ tDi tgko Bkb ;pzfXs
w/b/
2) gozgokfJe w/fbnK gqsh pdbdk o[MkD
Section-B
4. w/b/ ns/ b'e ;kfjsL w/fbnK Bkb ;pzfXs gzikph b'e ;kfjs b'e rhsK ns/ p'bhnK.
5. gzikph fgzvL ;zebg, gqhGkPk, ;o{g, ;wkfie, nkofEe ns/ ;fGnkukoe wjZssk.
6. gzikph fgzv ns/ b'eXkokL b'e feZs/, iiwkBh gqDkbh, gqw[Zy c;bK, ;fGnkukoe ;KM fgzvK d/
BK ns/ ftT[As.
PRACTICAL
1. b'e Xow Bkb ;pzfXs w/fbnK pko/ ikDekoh.
2. fe;/ gzikph fgzv pko/ ikDekoh fJeZmh eoe/ fbysh o{g ftZu g/P eoBh.
3. w/fbnK ns/ otkfJsh gzikph ;wki pko/ ikDekoh jk;b eoBh.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
68
(SEMESTER IIIRD)
SOCIOLOGY: SOCIAL STRUCTURE OF INDIAN SOCIETY (PAPER I)
CREDITS: 5(4L+1T)
COURSE OUTCOME : UPON SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION STUDENTS WILL BE ABLE TO:
 HAVE A DEEPER INSIGHT ABOUT SOCIAL STRATIFICATION AND SOCIAL DIFFERENTIATION.
 KNOW HOW THE TYPES OF SOCIAL STRATIFICATION I.E. CLASS AND CASTE EXISTS IN INDIA
 UNDERSTAND CHANGING PATTERN OF MARRIAGE AND FAMILY IN INDIA. THEY ALSO CAN
IDENTIFY GENDER DISCRIMINATION AND CHANGING SEX RATIO EXISTING IN INDIA
DEVELOP UNDERSTANDING REGARDING SOCIETAL ORGANIZATION IN INDIA I.E. TRIBAL,
RURAL AND URBAN
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A and B will have
four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section
C will consist of 10 short-answer type questions, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly
and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short-answer type question will carry 3 marks each. Thirty
(30) marks will comprise internal assessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B. Section C
is compulsory.
SECTION A
i) Social Stratification in India : bases and forms; social differentiation.
ii) Theories of Social Stratification : Max Weber, Davis and Moore, Karl Marx
iii) Caste in India: Definition, features and changing patterns.
iv) Class in India: Definition and bases; caste and class.
SECTION B
i) Marriage and Family in India: Types and changing patterns.
ii) Gender discrimination: Causes and consequences, Changing Sex Ratio:
Causes and consequences
iii) Features of Societal Organization in India: Tribal, Rural
iv) Urban Organization in India and Rural-Urban Migration.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Bhatnagar, G.S. and Baldev Singh Rehal 1997. Bharati Samaj. Patiala: Punjabi University.
2. Bottomore, T.B. 1972. Sociology: A Guide to Problems and Literature. Bombay: George
Allen and Unwin.
3. Chaudhary, R.K. 1986. Caste and Power Structure in Village India. New Delhi: Inter India
Publishers.
4. Desai, A.R. 1990. Rural Sociology in India. Bombay: Popular Prakashan.
5. Dube, S.C. 1990. Indian Society, New Delhi: National Book Trust. (Punjabi
Translation also available. Translated by G. S. Arshi and published by NBT) .
6. Johnson, Harry M. 1996. Sociology: A Systematic Introduction. Delhi: Allied Publishers.
(Hindi translation also available. Translated by Yogesh Atal and published by Kalyani
Publishers, Ludhiana) .
7. Kapadia, K.M. 1972. Marriage and Family in India. London: Oxford University Press.
8. Kaur, Savinderjit 1987. Samaj Vigyan De Mool Sankalp. Patiala: Punjabi University Press.
9. Kaur, Savinderjit . 1995(2015) smwj ivigAwn nwl jwx pCwx Bwg-2. jlMDr: inaU
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
69
Akwdimk pbilisMg kMpnI

10. Kuppuswamy, B. 1982. Social Change in India. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House.
11. Majumdar, and T.N. Madan 1997. An Introduction to Social Anthropology, NOIDA:
Mayur Paperbacks.
12. Sharma, K.L. 1997. Social Stratification in India: Issues and Themes. New Delhi: Sage
Publishers.
13. Srinivas, M.N. 1995. Social Change in Modern India. New Delhi: Orient Longman.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
70
(SEMESTER 4TH)
SOCIOLOGY: SOCIAL CHANGE IN INDIA (PAPER II)
CREDTIS : 5(4L+1T)
COURSE OUTCOME: UPON SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION STUDENTS WILL BE ABLE TO:
 DEVELOP UNDERSTANDING ABOUT SOCIAL CHANGE ITS TYPES (EVOLUTION, PROGRESS,
DEVELOPMENT AND REVOLUTION), FACTORS (DEMOGRAPHIC AND ECONOMIC,
TECHNOLOGICAL AND CULTURAL) AND PROCESSES (SANSKRITIZATION,WESTERNIZATION,
SECULARIZATION, URBANIZATION, MODERNIZATION AND GLOBALIZATION).
 EXPLAIN PLANNED SOCIAL CHANGE IN INDIA THROUGH COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT,
PANCHAYATI RAJ INSTITUTION, MGNREGA AND SWARN JYANTI GRAM SWAI ROJGAR
YOJNA

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A and B will have
C will consist of 10 short-answer type questions, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly
and will carry 30marks in all. Each short-answer type question will carry 3 marks each. Thirty
(30) marks will comprise internal assessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B. Section C
is compulsory.
SECTION A
i) Social Change: Meaning, Features and types .
ii) Evolution, Progress, Development and Revolution.
iii) Factors of Social Change: Demographic and Economic.
iv) Factors of Social Change: Technological and Cultural.
SECTION B
i) Processes of Social Change: Sanskritization,Westernization, and Secularization .
ii) Urbanization, Modernization and Globalization.
iii) Planned Social Change: Community Development, Panchayati Raj institution.
iv) MGNREGA, Swarn Jyanti Gram Swai Rojgar Yojna.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Bottomore, T.B 1977. Sociology: A Guide to problems and Literature. Bombay: George Allen
and Unwin.
2. Desai, A.R. 1990. Rural Sociology in India. Bombay: Popular Prakashan.
3. Dube, S.C. 1992. Understanding Change. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House.
4. Gupta, Dipanker. 2000. Mistaken Modernity: India between worlds. New Dehli : Harper
Collins Publishers India
5. Judge, P.S. and Gurpreet Bal. 1996. Strategies of Social Change. New Delhi: M.D. Publication.
6. Kaur, Savinderjit. 1987. Samaj Vigyan De Mool Sankalp, Patiala: Punjabi University.
7. Kaur, Savinderjit . 1995(2015) smwj ivigAwn nwl jwx pCwx Bwg-2. jlMDr: inaU Akwdimk
pbilisMg kMpnI
8. Kuppuswamy, B. 1982. Social Change in India. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House.
9. MacIver and Page. 1961. Society: An Introductory Analysis. London: Macmillan and Co.
(Punjabi translation also available. Translated by Savinderjit Kaur and Published by Punjabi
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
71
University) .
10. Pathy, C.R. 1988. Rural Development in Modern India. New Delhi: B.R. Publishing Corp.
11. Singh, Kartar. 1999. Rural Development: Principles, Policies and Management. New
Delhi: Sage publishers.
12. Singh, Sukhdev. 1997. Pendu Samaj Ate Pendu Vikas. Patiala: Punjabi University Press.
13. Srinivas, M.N. 1995 Social Change in Modern India. New Delhi: Orient Longman
14. Weinstein, Jay (2011) Social Change. Jaipur : Rawat Publications.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
72
smYstr III
Drm AiDAYn: swmI Drm
kul AMk : 100 smwN : 3 GMty
Internal Assesment : 30 Credit : 5 (4L+1T)
Course Outcome : This course imparted knowledge of beliefs, practices, scriptures and ritual's of
Western religions. Students will also get the knowledge of prominent religious movements of Punjab and
India.
pRSn p`qr dy iqMn Bwg hoxgy: a, A Aqy e[ a Aqy A sYkSn ivcoN cwr-cwr pRSn puCy jwxgy[
ividAwrQI ny hryk sYkSn ivcoN 2-2 pRSn krny hoxgy Aqy hr iek pRSn dy 10 AMk hoxgy[Bwg e ivcoN
sMKyp auqrW vwly 10 pRSn swry islybs ivcoN hoxgy Aqy aunHW dy 30 AMk hoxgy[ hryk pRSn 3-3 AMkW dw
hovygw[
Gkr (T) :j{dh Xow ns/ Jh;kJh Xow

1H :j{dh Xow: w[Ybh ikD-gSkD .
2H g?rzpo w{;k dk ihtB s/ f;fynktK .
3H g[okDk B/w: ;zy/g ikDekoh .
4H Jh;kJh Xow: w[ZYbh ikD gSkD .
5H Jh;k w;hj dk ihtB s/ f;fynktK .
6H BtK B/w: ;zy/g ikDekoh .
Gkr (n) fJ;bkw Xow ns/ gko;h Xow

1H fJ;bkw Xow: w[Ybh ikD-gSkD
2H g?rzpo w[jzwd dk ihtB s/ f;ZfynktK(pMj QMm)
3H gftZso e[okB: ;zy/g ikDekoh
4H gko;h Xow: w[Ybh ikD gSkD
5H g?rzpo ios[;s dk ihtB s/ f;ZfynktK
6H iazd nt/;sk: ;zy/g ikDekoh
Gkr (J)
;zy/g T[soK tkb/ 10 gq;aB eoB/ iao{oh jB.
English
1. Christianty, Punjabi University, Patiala.
2. David F. Hindson, History of Israel, ISPCK, Kashmiri Gate, Patiala
3. Duncan Greenless, The Gospel of Zorathustra, Adhyar Publication, Madras.
4. Islam, Punjabi University, Patiala.
5. M.M Ali, The Religion of Islam, S, Chand & Co., Delhi.
6. M.N Dhalla, The History of Zoroastrianism, K.R Kama Orient.
7. P.K. Hitti, History of Arabs, Macmillan, New York.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
73
gzikph
1. srbijMdr isMG (sMpw.), ivSv Drm bwnI, gRMQ, sMprdwie Aqy icMqk (Bwg 2), pMjwbI
XUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
2. krqwr isMG B`tI, eIsweIAq: ie`k jwx-pCwx, pMjwbI XuUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
3. gulvMq isMG, ieslwm qy sUPIvwd, pMjwbI XUunIvristI, pitAwlw.
4. gurbcn isMG qwilb, sMswr dy kuJ pRmu`K Drm, pMjwbI XuUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
5. jyms mYsI : msIhIAq: ie`k prIcX, PkIr AYNf sMnz, AMimRqsr.
6. bweIbl (pMjwbI Anuvwd), bweIbl suswietI AwP ieMfIAw, pitAwlw.
7. SmSyr isMG ASok, pMjwb dIAW lihrW (1850-1910), ASok pusqkwlw, pitAwlw.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
74
smYstr IV
Drm AiDAYn: Dwrimk lihrW
kul AMk : 100 smwN : 3 GMty
Internal Assesment : 30 Credit : 5 (4L+1T)
Course Outcome : This course imparted knowledge of beliefs, practices, scriptures and ritual's of
Western religions. Students will also get the knowledge of prominent religious movements of Punjab and
India
pRSn p`qr dy iqMn Bwg hoxgy: a, A Aqy e[ a Aqy A sYkSn ivcoN cwr-cwr pRSn puCy jwxgy[
ividAwrQI ny hryk sYkSn ivcoN 2-2 pRSn krny hoxgy Aqy hr iek pRSn dy 10 AMk hoxgy[Bwg e ivcoN
sMKyp auqrW vwly 10 pRSn swry islybs ivcoN hoxgy Aqy aunHW dy 30 AMk hoxgy[ hryk pRSn 3-3 AMkW dw
hovygw[
Gkr (T)L BgqI lihr Aqy sUPIvwd

1H Grsh bfjoL T[sgsh s/ ftek;
2H Grsh bfjo d/ gqGkt
3H Grsh bfjo d/ gqw[Zy GrsK d/ ihtBL Grs Bkwd/t, Grs epho, Grs oftdk;
4H ;{chtkd dk nkozG ns/ ftek;
5H ;{chtkd dh ftµ/µsk
6H pkpk cohd ihtB s/ f;ZfynktK.
Gkr (n) L aunIvIN sdI dOrwn Bwrq Aqy pMjwb dIAW pRis`D Dwrimk lihrW
1H okw feqµB fwµB

2H pqjw' ;wki
3H nkohnk ;wki
4HH BkwXkoh bfjo
5H f;zx ;Gk bfjo
6H r[od[nkok ;[Xko bfjo
Gkr (J)
;zy/g T[ZsoK tkb/ 10 gqµB eoB/ iao{oh jB.
English
1. Darshan Singh: Indian Bhakti Tradition and Sikh Gurus, Lyall Book Depot, Ludhiana.
2. T.M.P. Mahadevan: Ten Saints of India, Bharati Vidya Bhavan, Bombay.
3. Ganda Singh (ed.), Punjab Past and Present, (Singh Sabha Issue), Punjabi University,
Patiala.
4. J.N. Farquhar, Modern Religious Movement in India, Munshi Ram, Manohar Lal, Oriental
Publishers, Delhi.
5. Harbans Singh (ed.) Encyclopeadia of Sikhism (4 Vol.), Punjabi University, Patiala.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
75
pMjwbI
1. srbijMdr isMG (sMpw.), ivSv Drm bwnI, gRMQ, sMprdwie Aqy icMqk (Bwg 2), pMjwbI XuUnIvristI,
pitAwlw.
2. gMfw isMG, kUikAW dI iviQAw, pMjwbI XuUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
3. gulvMq isMG, ieslwm qy sUPIvwd, pMjwbI XuUnIvristI, pitAwlw.
4. igAwnI pRqwp isMG, gurduAwrw suDwr lihr, SoRmxI gurduAwrw pRbMDk kmytI, AMimRqsr.
5. prsurwm cqurvydI, au `qr Bwrq kI sMq prMprw (ihMdI), BwrqI BMfwr, ielwhwbwd.
6. pRqwp isMG, Bgq drSn, isMG bRdrz, AimRqsr.
7. mnmohn isMG, BgqI AMdoln Aqy gurU nwnk, mndIp pRkwSn, nvIN id`lI.
8. SmSyr isMG ASok, pMjwb dIAW lihrW (1850-1910), ASok pusqkwlw, pitAwlw.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
76
SEMESTER-III
HISTORY: HISTORY OF INDIA, 1757-1966
Total Marks: 100 Time Allowed: 3 hours

Course Objectives:
This course inculcate the knowledge about Indias’s fought for the independence and the roles
of the different sections of the society to the students.The course acquainted the students with
the british policy,stressing on the positive and negative affects.
Course Outcomes:
1. This paper deals with the advent of the Europeans in India and the policies followed by them
to establish themselves in India.
2. Students will be able to analyse the process of rise modern India and its foundation made by
social reformer and freedom fighters.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A and B will
have four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each.
Section C will consist of 10 short-answer type questions, which will cover the entire syllabus
uniformly and will carry 20 marks in all. Each short-answer type question will carry two marks
each. The second part of Section C will contain a question on map, internal choice will be
offered in Map question. The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map question will carry 10
marks out of which 6 marks are for filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory note. Thus the
total marks for the compulsory section C will be 30 out of which 20 marks for short answer
type questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of internal
assessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A, and B. Section C,
which is compulsory will consist of two parts: First part of Section C will consist of 10 short
answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry two marks each.
The candidates are required to give answer of each short answer type question in 20-25 words
i.e. in 3-4 lines. The second part of Section C will consist a question on map. Internal choice
will be offered in Map question. The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map question will
carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory note.
Thus the total marks for the compulsory section C will be 30 out of which 20 marks for short
answer type questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of
internal assessment.
ONLY FOR BLIND CANDIDATES: In lieu of Map question the blind candidates will
attempt the short answer type questions. The short answer type questions will be set from the
entire syllabus. These questions will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and historical
sources within the purview of the syllabus. Out of four, the blind candidates will attempt any
two short answer type questions. Internal choice will be given. The answer to each of these
questions will be 50-60 words and will carry 5 (five) marks each. Thus the total marks of these
question will be 10.
SECTION-A
1. Advent of the Europeans and foundation of British Empire: Battles of Plassey and Buxar.
2. Expansion of British Empire: Administrative and Social Reforms of
Cornwallis and Bentinck and Dalhousie.
3. The Uprising of 1857 : Nature, Causes, Results and Causes of its failure.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
77
4. Socio-Religious Movements : Brahmo Samaj, Arya Samaj, Aligarh Movement, Singh

Sabha Movement. Dr. Ambedkar's efforts for the uplift of the Scheduled Castes.
SECTION-B
5. British Agricultural Policy in India: Land System – Permanent Settlement, Ryotwari
Settlement and Mahalwari Settlement ; Commercialisatoin of Agriculture; Rural
Indebtedness.
6. Rise of Political Consciousness in India: Moderates, Extremists and Revolutionaries; Ghadar
movement.
7. Freedom Struggle (1919-1947): Jallianwala Bagh Massacre; Non-Cooperation Movement;
Civil Disobedience Movement; Quit India Movement.
8. Salient Features of Indian Constitution; Integration of Princely States; Re-organization of
States
SECTION-C
MAPS:
(a) British India in 1805 A.D.
(b) British India in 1818 A.D.
(c) British India in 1856 A.D.
(d) Important Centres of the Revolt of 1857.
BOOK RECOMMENDED
1. P.E. Roberts : History of British India,
2. Ishwari Prasad and others : A History of Modern India
3. P. Spear : History of Modern India.
4. V.A. Smith : The Oxford History of India
5. B.L.Grover and S.Grover: A New Look at Modern Indian History: Up to the First
Phase of Independence
6. R.C. Majumdar Others (eds.) : British Paramountcy and Indian Renaissance,
(Bhartiya Vidya Bhawan Publications).
7. R.C. Majumdar and Others (eds.) : Struggle for Freedom,
8. R.C. Majumdar and Others (eds.) : An Advanced History of India.
9. Thompson and Garret : Rise and Fulfillment of British Rule in India.
10. S.L. Sikri : Constitutional History of India
(English, Punjabi and Hindi).
11. R.C. Aggarwal : Constitutional History of India
(English and Punjabi).
12. S.K. Gupta : The Scheduled Castes in Modern Indian Politics.
13. S.K. Bajaj & J.S. Rekhi : History of India, 1818-1919 (Punjabi).
14. A.C. Arora : History of Modern India (Punjabi and Hindi),
15. C.C. Davies : Historical Atlas of the Indian Peninsula.
16. A.C. Arora : Atlas of Modern Indian History
17. Bipin Chandra : History of Modern India
: India's struggle for Independence
18. K.W.Jones : Socio-Religious Reform movements in
British India
19. Ishita Banerjee –Dube : A History of Modern India
20. Shekhar Bandyopadhyah : From Plassey to Partition and After, A History of Modern
India
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
78
SEMESTER - IV
HISTORY: HISTORY OF PUNJAB (1469-1799)
Total Marks: 100 Time Allowed: 3 hours

Course Outcome: The course will inculcate the knowledge of traditional Punjabi society. Students will
be guided to analyze it with reasons and logic.

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four
questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C
will consist of 10 short-answer type questions, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly
and will carry 20 marks in all. Each short-answer type question will carry two marks each. The
second part of Section C will contain a question on map, internal choice will be offered in Map
question. The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map question will carry 10 marks out of
which 6 marks are for filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory note. Thus the total marks
for the compulsory section C will be 30 out of which 20 marks for short answer type questions
and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of internal assessment.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A, and B. Section C
which is compulsory will consist of two parts: First part of Section C will consist of 10 short
answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry two marks each.
The candidates are required to give answer of each short answer type question in 20-25 words
i.e. in 3-4 lines. The second part of Section C will contain a question on map, internal choice
will be offered in Map question. The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map question will
carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory note.
Thus the total marks for the compulsory section C will be 30 out of which 20 marks for short
answer type questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of
internal assessment.
ONLY FOR BLIND CANDIDATES: In lieu of Map question the blind candidates will
attempt the short answer type questions. The short answer type questions will be set from the
entire syllabus. These questions will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and historical
sources within the purview of the syllabus. Out of four, the blind candidates will attempt any
two short answer type questions. Internal choice will be given. The answer to each of these
questions will be 50-60 words and will carry 5 (five) marks each. Thus the total marks of these
question will be 10.
SECTION-A
1. Main Sources of Punjab History.
2. Age of Guru Nanak Dev : Political, social and religious condition; His teachings.
3. Evolution of Sikhism : From Guru Angad Dev to Guru Arjan Dev.
4. Transformation of Sikhism from Guru Hargobind to Guru Tegh Bahadur.
SECTION-B
1. Guru Gobind Singh : Creation of the Khalsa and its significance; His achievements and
personality.
2. Banda Singh Bahadur and the establishment of independent rule of the Sikhs; Causes of his
failure.
3. Political struggle of the Sikhs against Abdus Samad Khan , Zakariya Khan, Yahiya Khan, Mir
Mannu.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
79
4. Rise of the Sikh Misals; Their polity and administration.

SECTION-C
MAPS:
(a) Battles of Guru Hargobind
(b) Battles of Guru Gobind Singh.
(c) Military exploits of Banda Bahadur.
(d) Important places connected with the Sikh Gurus in the Punjab.
BOOK RECOMMENDED
1. Indu Bhushan Banerjee : Evolution of the Khalsa, Vol.I & II.
(English and Punjabi).
2. Gokal Chand, Narang : Transformation of Sikhism. (English & Punjabi)
3. J.S. Grewal : New Cambridge History of India :
The Sikhs of the Punjab.
4. J.D. Cunningham : A History of the Sikhs (English & Punjabi).
5. Joginder Singh & : Punjab da Itihas (Punjabi).
Prithipal Singh Kapoor
6. Bhagat Singh : Punjab da Itihas (Punjabi)
7. A.C. Arora : Punjab da Itihas (Punjabi & Hindi).
8. Gurcharan Singh & : History of the Punjab (Punjabi & Hindi).
S.S. Gandhi
9. Khushwant Singh : History of the Sikhs, Vol.I.
10. A.C. Arora : Atlas of the Punjab History (English, Punjabi &
Hindi),
11. D.S. Dhillon : Sikhism : Origin and Development.
12. D.S. Dhillon and : The Battles of Guru Gobind Singh.
S.S. Bhullar
13. D.K. Verma : Guru Gobind Singh on the Canvas of
History (English).
14. Narinderpal Singh : Punjab da Itihas 1469-1839 (Punjabi)
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
80
SEMESTER -III
HISTORY (HONOURS): INDIA'S STRUGGLE FOR FREEDOM 1885-1947
CREDITS 5 ( 4L +1T)
Maximum Marks: 100 Pass Marks : 45%
(Theory 70 and Internal Assessment 30)
Time allowed: 3 hours
Course Objectives:
This course is related with the Indian independence movement and a series of historic events
with the ultimate aim of ending British rule in India.It also leads with that movement which
galvanized millions of people of all classes and ideologies into political action and brought to
its knees a mighty colonial empire.
Course Outcomes:
1.This paper describes the events regarding Indias’struggle for freedom in a chronological
method.
2.Students will be able to anaylise the process of rise modern India and its foundation made
by social reformers and freedom fighters.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER-SETTERS

1. The Syllabus prescribed should be strictly adhered to. The paper-setters should
keep in view the topics specified in each paper and not the title of the paper.
2. The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will
have four questions each from the respective sections of the syllabus and will
carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist of 10 short-answer type questions
which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. There being no
internal choice in this section, each short-answer type questions will carry 3
marks. Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the Sections
A and B and the entire Section C is compulsory. The candidates are required to
give answer of each short-type question in 50 words i.e., in 7-10 lines.
3. If there is a question on notes, the choice offered in such question should at least
be fifty percent.
4. The wording of the questions should be simple and easily understandable by an
average student. There should be no vagueness.
5. The number of questions based upon quotations should not exceed two in a
question paper.
6. The general standard of the questions should cater to the different intellectual
levels - average, above average and below average.
7. Each paper is of 70 marks and three hours duration and 30 marks are of internal
assessment.
Instructions for the candidates

Candidates are required to attempt two question each from the Section. A & B.
Section C will consist 10 short type questions from the entire syllabus which is
compulsory. These questions will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and
historical sources within the purview of the syllabus. The candidates are required to give
answer of each short type question in 50 words i.e., in 7-10 lines. Each question will carry
3 marks. The total marks of these questions will be 30.
SECTION-A
1. Rise of National Consciousness, Foundation of the Indian National Congress, its aims
and objectives.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
81
2. The Moderates : Their programmes, methods and achievements.

3. The Extremists : Its rise, programmes and role in National Movement.
4. Early Revolutionary activities ,Ghadar Movement, Home Rule League, Lucknow Pact
and Jallianwala Bagh massacre.
SECTION-B
5. Emergence of Gandhi, Khilafat Movement, Non-Co-operation Movement.
6. Simon Commission and Pooran Swaraj, 1929 and Civil Disobedience Movement.
7. Rise and growth of Socialism and left-wing politics.
8. Cripps Mission, Quit India Movement, Cabinet Mission and Causes of the Partition of
India.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Bipin Chandra, ATripathi&Barun De : Freedom Struggle, National
Book Trust, New Delhi.
2. R.C. Majumdar (ed.) : British Paramountcy and Indian
Renaissance, Vol. X: Struggle for
Freedom,Vol.XI.
3. G.N. Singh : Landmarks in Indian Constitution
National Development.
4. Dr. S.M. Verma : Chamber of Princes (1921-1947).
5. S.L. Sikri : Rise and Fulfilment of Indian
NationalMovement.
6. S.S. Nanda : Indian National Movement
(Punjabi).
7. Sumit Sarkar : Modern India 1885-1947.
8. Bipin Chandra : India Struggle for Independence
9. B.L.Grover : A New look at Modern History
(from 1707to Modern times)
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
82
SEMESTER-IV
ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:
(HISTORY HONOURS)
(OPTION : I) : STUDY OF ANCIENT INDIAN INSTITUTIONS : SOCIAL, CULTURAL & ECONOMIC
UPTO 1000 A.D.
CREDITS 5 ( 4L +1T)
be fifty percent.
question paper.
assessment.
Instructions for the candidates (for all papers)
Candidates are required to attempt two question each from the Section. A & B of
the question paper and the entire section C. The candidates are required to give answer
of each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 7-10 lines.
SECTION-A
1. Study of Harappan Culture.
2. Origin and Growth of Caste System.
3. Teachings of Buddhism and Jainism.
4. Art, Architecture and Sculpture of the Maurya period.
5. Kushans : Growth of Art, Architecture and Literature.
SECTION-B
6. Guptas : Art, Architecture, Painting, Literature and Science.
7. Internal and External Trade under Maurya Empire and Guptas
8. Expansion of Indian Culture in South-East Asia.
9. Land System : Land Tenure; Land Grants and Types of Land.
10. Crafts and Industries in ancient India , Guild System, its nature and importance.
SECTION-C
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
83
Ten short answer questions will be set from the entire syllabus. The candidate will attempt
all the 10 questions. These questions will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and
historical sources within the purview of the syllabus. The answer of these questions will be
of 50 words i.e., 7-10 lines and will carry 3 marks each. Thus, the total marks for these
questions will be 30.
BOOK RECOMMENDED
1. R.C. Majumdar (ed.) : The Age of Imperial Unity (The History and
Culture of the Indian people, Vol.II,
BhartiyaVidyaBhawan).
2. RomilaThapar : Ashoka and the Decline of the Mauryas.
3. R.S. Tripathi : History of Ancient India.
4. S.L. Sikri& A.C. Arora : BhartiyaItihas Da PrachinKal(Punjabi).
5. Wheeler, M. : Indus Valley Civilization.
6. R.K. Mukherjee : Ancient India.
7. R.C. Majumdar, Datta : Advanced History of India, &Vol.I.
Raychoudhary
8. A.L. Basham : The Wonder that was India.
A.L. Basham : Civilization of India.
9. LallanjiGopal : Economic Life in Northern India.
10. Sukhninder Kaur : Religious History of Ancient Punjab.
11. R.S. Sharma : India's Ancient Past
12. M.L. Bose : Social and Cultural History of Ancient India
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
84
(HISTORY HONOURS)
(OPTION : II) : STUDY OF MEDIEVAL INDIAN INSTITUTIONS : SOCIAL, CULTURAL &
ECONOMIC (1000-1707 A.D.)
CREDITS 5 ( 4L +1T)

be fifty percent.
question paper.
assessment.
Instructions for the candidates ( for all papers)

Candidates are required to attempt two question each from the Section. A & B of
the question paper and the entire section C. The candidates are required to give answer
of each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 7-10 lines.
SECTION-A
1. Social Classes and Communities.
2. Sufism : Sufi silsalas, principles of Sufism and its impact on society.
3. Bhakti Movement: principles and impact on society.
4. Land Revenue System.
5. Religious policy of Akbar with special reference to Din-i-Ilahi.
SECTION-B
6. Education and Learning.
7. Art, Architecture and Paintings.
8. Banking System.
9. Trade and Industry.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
85
SECTION-C
Ten short answer questions will be set from the entire syllabus. The candidate will
attempt all the 10 questions. These questions will be based upon terms, concepts,
institutions and historical sources within the purview of the syllabus. The answer of these
questions will be of 50 words i.e. 7-10 lines and will carry 3 marks each. Thus, the total
marks for these questions will be 30.
BOOK RECOMMENDED
1. S.A.A., Rizvi : The Wonder that was India, Vol.II.
2. Sri Ram Sharma : Mughal Government and Administration.
3. R.C. Majumdar (ed.) : The Mughal Empire, The History and Culture of Indian
People, Vol.VII.
4. Irfan Habib : Agrarian System of the Mughals.
5. A.L. Srivastava : History of Delhi Sultanate, History of Mughal Empire.
6. S.L. Sikri : Muslim Yug.
7. K.M. Ashraf : Life and Conditions of the people ofHindustan.
8. Bhagat Singh : Madhkalin Bharat DiyanSansthava(Punjabi).
9. Mohd. Habib & : A Comprehensive History of India, Vol.I.
K.A. Nizami
10 Vipul Singh : Interpreting Medieval India
11 Satish Chandra : Medieval India from Sultanate to Mughals 1526-1748
12 W.H. Moreland : India at the Death of Akbar (English andPunjabi)
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
86
(HISTORY HONOURS)
(OPTION : III) : MODERN INDIAN SOCIETY AND ECONOMY DURING THE BRITISH RULE
CREDITS 5 (4L +1T)
be fifty percent.
question paper.
assessment.
Instructions for the candidates
Candidates are required to attempt two question each from the Section. A & B.
Section C will consist 10 short type questions from the entire syllabus which is
compulsory. These questions will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and
historical sources within the purview of the syllabus. The candidates are required to give
answer of each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 7-10 lines. Each question will carry
3 marks. The total marks of these questions will be 30.
SECTION-A
1. British Agrarian Policies : Permanent Settlement, Ryotwari system and Mahalwari
system; their impact on Indian society.
2. Foreign Trade.
3. Industry: decline of indigenous industry, rise of plantation industry and modern
Industry.
4. Famines and their social and economic impact. Commercialisation of crops,rural
indebtedness.
SECTION-B
5. Introduction and growth of Modern Press.
6 Introduction and growth of Modern Education.
7. Socio-religious reform movements: Namdhari movement, Brahmo Samaj, Arya
Samaj, Singh Sabha movement and Aligarh movement.
8. Labour movement, rise of trade unions in India.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
87
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. A.R. Desai : Social Background to Indian Nationalism.

2. Ramsay Muir : Making of Modern India.
3. R.C. Majumdar (ed.) : British Paramountcy and Indian Renaissance
(2 Vols.)
4. R.C. Majumdar (ed.) : The Mughal Empire, The History and Culture of
Indian People, Vol.VII.
5. S.K. Bajaj & : History of India (1818-1919), (Punjabi).
J.S. Rekhi
6. Dr. Nazer Singh : Essays in History & Historiography.
7. Garret & Thompson : Rise and fulfillment of British Rule in India.
8. K.W.Jones : Socio-Reform Movements in British India
9. B.L. Grover : A New Look at Modern History 1707 to Modern
times.
10. B.B. Misra : The Administrative History of India 1834-1947.
11 S.L.Sikri : Bharat da Rashtri Andolan ate Savidanik Vikas
1858 to 1947 (Punjabi)
12. Ishita Banerjee-Dube : A History of Modern India
13. Shekhar Bandyopadhyah : From Plassey to Partion and After, A History of
Modern India
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
88
(SEMESTER-III)
MATHEMATICS
(PAPER V): INTEGRAL CALCULUS
CREDIT: 3:3H (L)
Course Objectives:
 To analyze and find integral of hyperbolic function, rational function, trigonometric
function and logarithmic function.
 To understand the concept of Improper Integral and multiple integral.
 To understand the concept of partition and fundamental concept of Riemann Integrability.
sections A and B will have four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus of 5 marks
each and section C will consist of one compulsory question having 10 parts of short-answer type
having 5 parts of 1 mark each and 5 parts of 2 marks each covering the entire syllabus uniformly.
Section A
Integration of hyperbolic and inverse hyperbolic functions, Reduction formulae for integrals of
rational, trigonometric, exponential and logarithmic functions and of their combinations,
Applications of definite integral to find quadrature, length of an arc.
Section B
Improper integrals and their convergence, Comparison tests, Absolute and conditional
convergence, Abel’s and Dirichlet’s tests (without proofs)
Double and Triple integrals,Applications to evaluation of areas and Volume, Beta – Gamma
Functions and their properties, duplication formula, convergence of Beta and gamma functions.
Books Recommended
1. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus, 9th Ed., Pearson Education, Delhi, 2005.
2. H. Anton, I. Bivens and S. Davis, Calculus, John Wiley and Sons (Asia) P. Ltd. 2002.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
89
(SEMESTER-III)
MATHEMATICS
(PAPER VI): DIFFERENTIALEQUATIONS-I
CREDIT: 2:2H (L)

 To know about solutions of first and higher order differential equations.

 To exhibit the techniques for obtaining solutions to ordinary differential equations.
 To investigate the qualitative and quantitative behavior of solutions of system of
differential equations.
 To develop interests in solving a number of problems related to model natural
phenomena, engineering systems and many other situations.

and section C will consist of 1 compulsory question having 5 marks of 1 mark each and 5 parts of
of 2 marks each covering the entire syllabus uniformly.
Section A
Exact differential equations: + = 0, Integrating Factor
Equations of first order and higher degree: Solvable for , , . Clairaut’s equations, equations
reducible to Clairaut’s equation, equation not containing , equations not containing .
Equations of the form = ( )
Linear Independence and Wronskian, Differential operator with basic laws, Linear differential
equations with constant and variable coefficients.
Section B
Methods of variation of parameters: Method of variation of parameters for solving
+ = , where and are functions of or constants,
Method of variation of parameters for solving
+ + = , where P, Q and R are functions of or constants
Series solution of differential equation: radius and interval of convergence, Ordinary and
Singular points, Solutions of Differential equation in series with Power Series Method and
Frebonius method.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
90
Books Recommended
1. M.D. Raisinghania, Ordinary and Partial Differential Equations, 19th Edition, S. Chand
and Company Limited, 2016.
2. W.E. Boyce, P.C. Diprima and D.B. Meade, Elementary Differential Equations and
Boundary value problems, 11th Edition, John Wiley, 2017.
3. E.A. Coddington, An Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations, Dover
Publications, 2012. (Chapters I-V).
4. E.L. Ince, Theory of Ordinary Differential Equations, Dover Publications, 2005.
5. E.D. Rainville, P.E. Bedient and R.E. Bedient , Elementary Differential Equations,
Publisher Prentice Hall, 1997.
6. Frank Ayres , Theory & Problems of Differential Equations, Macgraw- Hill Book Co.,
2010.
7. Zafar Ahsan, Differential Equations and their applications, 2nd Edition, PHI Learning
Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
8. Richard Bronson, Theory & Problems of Differential Equations, Macgraw- Hill Book
Company, 2009.
9. S.L. Ross, Differential Equations, 3rd Edition, John Wiley, 2007.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
91
(SEMESTER-IV)
MATHEMATICS
(PAPER VII): REAL ANALYSIS
CREDIT: 3:3 H (L)
Course Objectives:
 This course is designed to provide knowledge about Riemann integrals and convergence.
Their applications are also included to clear the topic to students.
 The aim of this course is to make the students familiar with the use of vectors and vector
calculus so that they may employ the same in an effective manner to various applications in
science subjects and to exhibit the techniques of solving ordinary and partial differential
equations.
 To understand the concept of sequence and series of functions.
sections A and B will have four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus of 5 marks
each and section C will consist of one compulsory question of short answer type having 5 parts of
1 mark each and 5 parts of 2 marks each covering the entire syllabus uniformly.
Section A
Riemann integral: Lower and Upper Reimann Sums, Necessary and sufficient condition of
Integrability, Integrability of continuous and monotonic functions, The fundamental theorem of
integral calculus, Mean value theorems of integral calculus.
Vector Calculus: Product of Two Vectors, Scalar & Vector Product of Three Vectors, Limit and
Continuity of Vector Valued Functions, Vector Differentiation, Gradient, Divergence and Curl,
Vector integration, Gauss, Green and Stokes Theorem(statements only)
Section B
Sequences and series of functions, pointwise and uniform convergence, Cauchy’s criterion for
uniform convergence, Weierstrass M-test, Abel’s and Dirichlet’s tests for uniform convergence
(without proofs) uniform convergence and continuity, uniform convergence and differentiation,
Weierstrass approximation theorem.
Books Recommended
1. T.M. Apostol, Mathematical Analysis, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi,1985.
2. D. Somasundaram and B. Choudhary, A First Course in Mathematical Analysis, Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 1997.
3. P.K. Jain and S.K. Kaushik, An Introduction to Real Analysis, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi,2000.
4. S.C. Malik, Mathematical Analysis,New Age Science, 2009.
5. Shanti Narayan, A Course of Mathematical Analysis, 9th Edition, S. Chand & Co.,New Delhi,
1968.
6. Murray R. Spiegel, Vector Analysis, Schaum publishing Company, New York.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
92
(SEMESTER-IV)
MATHEMATICS
(PAPER VIII): DIFFERENTIALEQUATIONS-II
CREDIT: 2:2H (L)
 To know about solutions of first and higher order partial differential equations.
 To exhibit the techniques for obtaining solutions to ordinary differential equations.
 To investigate the qualitative and quantitative behavior of solutions of system of differential
equations.
 To develop interests in solving a number of problems related to model natural phenomena,
engineering systems and many other situations.
 To understand how to extract information from partial derivative models in order to interpret
reality.
 To identify real phenomena as models of partial derivative equations.
 To apply the concepts of the course in real life problems.

and section C will consist of 1 compulsory question of short-answer type having 5 parts of 1 mark
Section A
Bessel and Legendre equations: Bessel and Legendre functions and their properties,
Convergence, recurrence relations and generating functions, Sturm-Liouville problem,
Orthogonality of eigen-functions, Reality of eigen values, Orthogonality of Bessel functions and
Legendre polynomials.
Section B
Partial Differential Equations: Order and degree of partial differential equations, Concept of
linear partial differential equations, Formation of first order partial differential equations,
Lagrange’s method, Some special types of equations which can be solved easily by methods other
than the general method, Charpit’s method.
Partial Differential equations of second and higher order: Classification of linear partial
differential equations of second order, Homogenous and non homogenous partial differential
equation with constant and variable coefficients, Monge’s method.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
93
Books Recommended
1. M.D. Raisinghania, Ordinary and Partial Differential Equations, 19th Edition, S. Chand
and Company Limited, 2016.
2. S.L. Ross, Differential Equations, 3rd Edition, John Wiley, 2007.
3. W.E. Boyce, P.C. Diprima and D.B. Meade, Elementary Differential Equations and
Boundary value problems, 11th Edition, John Wiley, 2017.
4. I.N. Sneddon, Elements of Partial Differential Equations, Dover Publications, 2013.
5. E.A. Coddington, An Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations, Dover Publications,
2012. (Chapters I-V).
6. E.L. Ince, Theory of Ordinary Differential Equations, Dover Publications, 2005.
7. E.D. Rainville, P.E. Bedient and R.E. Bedient , Elementary Differential Equations,
Publisher Prentice Hall, 1997.
8. Frank Ayres, Theory & Problems of Differential Equations, Macgraw- Hill Book Co.,
2010.
9. Zafar Ahsan, Differential Equations and their applications, 2nd Edition, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2009.
10. Richard Bronson, Theory & Problems of Differential Equations, Macgraw- Hill Book
Company, 2009.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
94
(SEMESTER III)
RETAIL MANAGEMENT: PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Objective
The objective of the course enables the students to understand the fundamentals of marketing concept
and the role marketing plays in retail business
CO 1: Understand the role of marketing mix and marketing environment.
CO 2: Developing communication and marketing skills and generate employability.
CO 3: Know the importance of branding and market segmentation.
The question paper will consist of Three Sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four questions
from the respective portion of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist of 10
short-answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short
answer type question will carry three marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the Sections A and B of the question paper
and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type question in 70
UNIT I
Marketing Management: Definition, Nature and Scope. Evolution of Marketing Concept. Marketing
Environment: Macro and Micro Environment. Marketing Mix: Elements of Marketing Mix.
Market Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning. Strategic Planning: Deference between Strategic and
Tactics and Strategic Marketing Planning Process, Product Planning: Product Characteristics, Product
Classification, Product Line, Product Life-Cycle And New Product Development.
UNIT II
Pricing Decision: Meaning and Methods of Pricing. Channels of Distribution: Types and Factors
Influencing Channel Choice. Marketing of Services: Difference Between Product and Service,
Classification of services.
Branding: Meaning, Role and Significance. Packaging: Packaging Decisions and Strategies and labelling:
Definition and purpose of labelling. Social Responsibility and Ethics in Marketing Management.
Recommended Books:
1. Kotler, Philip : Marketing Management, A South Asian Perspective, Pearson Education.Inc.
2. Stanton, William, J. : Fundamentals of Marketing, Tata Mc-Graw-Hill.
3. Neelamegham, S. : Marketing in India, Vikas Publishing.
4. C.N. Sontaakki : Marketing Management, Himalaya Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
5. J. C. Gandhi : Marketing, Tata McGraw-Hill.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
95
(SEMESTER IV)
RETAIL MANAGEMENT: ADVERTISING AND SALES MANAGEMENT
Course Objective
The objective of this course is to help students to understand the importance of advertising and sales
management in current retail business environment.
CO1: Exhibit in depth knowledge and understanding of advertising in retail industry.
CO2: Develop professional skills required to handle the sales work force.
CO3: Develop communication skills and critical thinking skills.
UNIT I
Advertisement: Nature, Scope and Role in Modern Business World. Advertising Goals and Objectives.
Advertising Planning, its Importance and Advertising Process.
Advertising Budget: Meaning and Methods. Advertising Media: Media Research and Merits and
Demerits of Different types Media. Advertisement Agencies: Functions of Agencies and selection of
Agencies.
UNIT II
Sales Management: Nature and Scope, Objectives, Function and Significance. Sales Planning:
Significance of Sales Planning, Principles and Steps of Sales Planning Process.
Sales Forecasting: Meaning, Roles and Steps of Forecasting. Sales Force Management: Recruitment and
Selection of Sales Force. Training Orientation and Placement of Sales Force.
Recommended Books:
1. Condiff, Still & Govani, : Sales Management, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. Wright, Winter and Zeigler: Advertising, London McGraw-Hill Publishing.
3. Cundiff; Govoni & Still, Sales Management, Prentice Hall India.
4. Mark W. Johnston & Greg W. Marshall, Sales Force Management, Tata McGraw-Hill.
5. S.A. Chunawalla, Foundation of Advertisement Theory and Practices, Himalaya Publishing House.
6. Rajiv Batra, John. G.Myers and David A. Aaker, Advertising Management, Prentice-Hall of India,New
Delhi.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
96
(SEMESTER III)
PSYCHOLOGY: EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY-I

Pass Marks: 35% Marks 5 Credits: 4H(L)+2H(P)
Course Outcome: To examine relationship between behavior (Cognitive, Affective, Connative)
and mind with the help of manipulate research variables in order to discover different
specialized social, clinical, cognitive, neuroscience and developmental issues with respect to
sensation, perception, attention, learning, memory and motivation experiments.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will
Section C will consist of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus
uniformly and will carry 20 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry 2 marks.
The candidates are required to answer each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 5-7 lines.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and
the entire section C. The candidates are required to answer each short type question in 50
words i.e. in 5-7 lines. Each short answer type question will carry 2 marks.
SECTION-A
(i) Experimental Psychology: Nature, Types of Variables and Control of Extraneous
Variables.
(ii) Memory: Information Processing, Levels of Processing (Craik & Lockhart Model &
Tulving’s Model), Measures of Memory; Nature & Causes of Forgetting.
SECTION-B
(i) Learning: Classical Conditioning, Instrumental Conditioning.
(ii) Statistics: Properties of Normal Probability Curve and its applications, Degrees of
Freedom, Levels of Significance. Chi Square -Application to One Way and Two
Way Classification.
REFERENCES
1. Boring,
E.G. (1969). History of Experimental Psychology. New York: Appleton Century
Grafts.
2. Feldman, R.S. (1996). Understanding Psychology. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.
3. Garrett, H.E.L. (1996). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Bombay: Vakils, Feffer and
Simons.
4. Kerlinger, F.N., & Lee, H.B. (2000). Foundations of Behavioural Research. New Delhi:
Surjeet Publications.
5. Postman, L., & Egan, J.P. (1960). Experimental Psychology. New York: Harper & Row.
6. Schiffman, H.R. (1982). Sensation and Perception (2nd Ed.). New York: John Wiley and Sons.
7. Woodworth, R.S., & Schlosberg, H. (1954). Experimental Psychology. New York: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston, Inc.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
97
(SEMESTER III)
Max. Marks: 20 Marks Time allowed: 03 hours
Total no. of Periods: 32
Students will perform all the assigned practicals. Practical examination will be of 3
hours duration. External examiner will conduct the practical examination. The examiner will
evaluate the practical on the basis of write-up of file book, performance and viva-voce relating
to the practical given for performance.
No reappear will be allowed in the practical examination. Fail in the practical will be
considered fail overall in the subject.
For practical examination, one group of students will not comprise of more than 20
students at a time.
Practical examination will be of 20 marks and of three hours duration. Practical

examination will be held by one external examiner.
Evaluation will be based on actual performance & write up, practical file of the
candidate.
Break up of Marks: -
Performance : 5 Marks
Viva voice : 10 Marks
Practical file : 5 Marks
Following practical’s have to be performed.

 Reinforcement/Knowledge of Results
 Paired Associate Learning
 Comparing Recall and Recognition as Measures of Memory
 Retroactive Inhibition
 Zeigarnik Effect.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
98
(SEMESTER IV)
PSYCHOLOGY: EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY-II

Pass Marks: 35% Marks 5 Credits: 4H(L)+2H(P)
Course Outcome: To examine relationship between behavior (Cognitive, Affective,
Connative) and mind with the help of manipulate research variables in order to discover
different specialized social, clinical, cognitive, neuroscience and developmental issues with
respect to sensation, perception, attention, learning, memory and motivation experiments.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will
Section C will consist of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus
uniformly and will carry 20 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry 2 marks.
The candidates are required to answer each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 5-7 lines.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and
the entire section C. The candidates are required to answer each short type question in 50
words i.e. in 5-7 lines. Each short answer type question will carry 2 marks.
SECTION-A
(i) Psychophysics: Absolute and differential limens, Weber's Law; Method of Limits,
Method of Constant Stimuli, Method of Average Error.
(ii) Sensation: Types of Sensation; Visual Sensation: Structure and Function of the Eye.
Auditory Sensation: Structure and Function of Ear. Cutaneous Sensation; Olfactory
Sensation and Gustatory Sensation.
SECTION-B
(i) Attention: Nature, Determinants, Selective Attention and Span of Attention
(ii) Perception: Nature, Laws and Determinants. Perception of Form and Depth.
REFERENCES
3. D' Amato, M.R. (2000). Experimental Psychology. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. Morgan, C.T., King, R.A., Weisz, J.R., & Schopler, J. (1986). Introduction to Psychology.
New York: McGraw Hill Book Co.
5. Postman, L., & Egan, J.P. (1960). Experimental Psychology. New York: Harper and Row.
6. Schiffman, H.R. (1982). Sensation and Perception (2nd Ed.). New York: John Wiley and Sons.
7. Woodworth, R.S., & Schlosberg, H. (1954). Experimental Psychology. New Delhi: Oxford and
IBH.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
99
(SEMESTER IV)
Total no. of Periods: 32
Students will perform all the assigned practicals. Practical examination will be of 3
hours duration. External examiner will conduct the practical examination. The examiner will
evaluate the practical on the basis of write-up of file book, performance and viva-voce relating
to the practical given for performance.
No reappear will be allowed in the practical examination. Fail in the practical will be
considered fail overall in the subject.
For practical examination, one group of students will not comprise of more than 20
students at a time.
Practical examination will be of 20 marks and of three hours duration. Practical

examination will be held by one external examiner.
Evaluation will be based on actual performance & write up, practical file of the
candidate.
Break up of Marks: -
Performance : 5 Marks
Viva voice : 10 Marks
Practical file : 5 Marks
Following Practicals have to be performed:

 Division of Attention
 Two-Point Threshold
 Muller Lyer Illusion
 Differential Limen
 Stroop effect
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
100
B.A. II- HOME SCIENCE

SESSION: 2021-22, 2022-23
SEMESTER III

Clothing 3 periods/week 4 periods/week
Paper Hours Assessment Hour per
Marks week
Theory Clothing 3 42 18 60 3 3
Practical Clothing 3 40 - 40 2 4
Total 100 5 7
SEMESTER IV

Textile 3 periods/week 4 periods/week
Marks week
Theory Textiles 3 42 18 60 3 3
Practical Textiles 3 40 - 40 2 4
Total 100 5 7
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments/ Project-
work etc., (40%) and two mid semester tests/internal examinations* (40%).
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
101
B.A. II - HOME SCIENCE

SEMESTER III
PAPER: CLOTHING (THEORY)
MAX MARKS: 60 TIME ALLOWED:-3 HRS
THEORY: 42 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT: 18
OBJECTIVES:
 DEVELOPING AND POLISHING THE SELF RELIANT SKILLS IN CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION AND MAKING A CAREER
IN IT.
 UNDERSTANDING THE ROLE OF CLOTHING IN ENHANCING THE PERSONALITY OF INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY.

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Sections A & B will have 4
consist of 9 short answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus
uniformly.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Sections A & B of the
question paper and the entire section C.
SECTION-A
1. Sewing equipment and supplies used in clothing construction and their use and care.
2. Sewing machine and its parts, accessories of sewing machine, common defects and
remedies.
3. Anthropometry (body measurements), precaution in taking and recording
measurements.
4. Drafting and its importance.
SECTION-B
5. Elements of design such as colour, line, form and texture.
6. Application of Principles of design such as harmony, balance, rhythm, emphasis and
proportion in clothing.
7. Selection of suitable clothing with reference to income, climate, occasion, occupation
and fashion etc. for Infants and toddlers, Adolescents, adults and elderly persons.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
102

SEMESTER III
PRACTICAL (CLOTHING)
Maximum Marks: 40 Time Allotted: 3 Hours
Pass Marks: 35% of the total
Contents
1. Make Samples of the following:

(a) Tacking, running stitch, hemming, back-stitch, button hole stitch, fasteners.
(b) Seams-Plain seam, counter hem, mantua maker, run and fell, French seam and
seam finishes.
(c) Processes- Continuous Placket, two piece placket, pleats,
gathers into band.
2. Embroidery-Make 10 samples of different embroidery stitches.
3. Anthropometry – Locating landmarks and taking body measurements.
4. Drafting and construction of the following:
1) Child’s Bodice Block – Child's Frock
2) Jangia, Bloomer
3) Adult Bodice Block and Plain sleeve block - Salwar and Kameez/ Kurta- Pyzama
4) Petticoat/Apron
REFERENCES BOOKS
1) Eve Harlew: The Basic Book of sewing, Pub. Octopids Books Ltd., London W-I.
2) Fladys Conringham, 1962: Singer Sewing Book, Pub. Golden Press, New York.
3) Kamakura, 1972 : Pattern Drafting, Publishing Co. Ltd.
4) Mabol D Erwin, 1966: Practical Dress Design, The Macmillan Co., New York.
5) Mary Brooks Pichen, 1953: Singer Sewing Book, Mc-graw Mill Book Co., New York,
London.
6) Maureen Goldworthy, 1952: Simple Dress Making, Pub. Mills and Boon Ltd., London.
7) Savitri Pandit, 1967: A Manual of Children Clothing, Orient Longmans Ltd., Bombay.
8) Sherie Doongaji and Raushni Deshpande: Basic Process and Clothing Construction, Raj
9) Grewal, Neelam: Text Book of Home Science (Clothing and Textiles), A.P. Publishers,
10) Randhawa, Rajwinder K. Clothing and Textiles and their care: Pradeep Publications,
Jalandhar.
11) Gupta Sushma, Garg Neeru, Saini Renu, Kaur, Jaspreet, Clothing, Textile and Laundry,
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
103

SEMESTER IV
PAPER: TEXTILES(THEORY)
MAX MARKS: 60 TIME ALLOWED:-3 HRS
OBJECTIVES :
 DEVELOPING AND POLISHING THE SELF RELIANT SKILLS IN CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION AND MAKING A CAREER
IN IT.
 UNDERSTANDING THE ROLE OF CLOTHING IN ENHANCING THE PERSONALITY OF INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY.

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Sections A & B will have 4
consist of 9 short answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus
uniformly.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Sections A & B of the
question paper and the entire section C.
SECTION-A
1 Classification of textile fibers
2 Manufacture (in brief) and properties of natural fibers-cotton, linen, silk and wool.
3 Manufacture (in brief) and properties of synthetic fibers-nylon, polyester, rayon-
viscose and acetate.
4 Types of yarns-simple, novelty and bulk.
5 Selection and care of linen.
6 Care and storage of clothes.
SECTION-B
1. Bleaches- oxidizing, reducing and their suitability to different fibers.

2. Finishes, Embossing, tentering, calendering, sanforizing, mercerization, crease-resistant,
water proofing and repellency, flame resistant and flame proof.
3. Dyeing-dyeing of cotton and wool with direct and acid dyes. Resist dyeing-tie
and dye, Batik.
4. Printing: Block, screen and roller printing.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
104

SEMESTER III
PRACTICAL (TEXTILES)
Maximum Marks: 40 Time Allotted: 3 Hours
Pass Marks: 35% of the total
Contents
1. Testing of cotton, wool and silk by microscopic and burning methods.

2. Stain removal-Rust, coffee, paan, ball point pen/ ink, dye, nail polish, lipstick, perfume,
blood, medicine, boot polish, turmeric and tea.
3. Spot cleaning of any one woollen garment.
4. Simple household dyeing of a cotton fabric of size 12” X 12” and preparing samples of
various methods of tie and dye.
5. Prepare one article of Tie and Dye.
6. Laundering and finishing of following garments:
a) Cotton-blouse, salwar, kameez/Gents shirt, Trouser, Kurta Pyjama.
b) Synthetic- knicker, gathered frock, pleated skirt.
c) Silk- blouse, sari.
d) Woollen cardigan or pullover.
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. Durga Deulkar, 1973: Household Textiles and Laundry Work, Atma Ram and Sons. New Delhi.
2. Farmer Bedrich, 1982: Batik and Ikat, Cutter Worth London.
3. Gooch Peter M., 1974: Ideas for Fabric Printing and dyeing, Charles fribners, New York.
4. Grayson Marlin, 1984: Encyclopedia of Textiles, Fibres and Non woolen fabrics, John wiley
New York.
5. Irabel S. Wingate, 1970: Textiles Fabric and their Selection, Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs.
6. Susheela Dantyagi, 1968: Fundamentals of Textiles and their Care, Orient Longmans
Bombay, New Delhi.
7. Veronica Marphy and Rosemary, 1964: Textiles of India, Mapi Publishing Pvt., Ltd.,
Ahmedabad.
8. Grewal, Neelam: Text Book of Home Science (Clothing and Textiles), A.P. Publishers, Books
9. Randhawa, Rajwinder K. Clothing and Textiles and their care: Pradeep Publications,
Jalandhar.
10. Gupta Sushma, Garg Neeru, Saini Renu, Kaur, Jaspreet, Clothing, Textile and Laundry,
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
105
SEMESTER – III
Physical Education
THEORY
PART – A Theory 60 MARKS 5 Hrs per
week
(External Theory : 42, Internal Assessment : 18)

( MST= 06 Assignment = 06 Attendance = 06 marks ) Total Credits : 05
1 Credit : 1 HOUR
 Learn about importance of Play ,Yoga and Asana in modern society.
 Learn about types of Yoga as rajyog; astang yog etc.
 Learn about types like cultural asana, meditative asana and relaxative asana.
 Learn about different techniques of asanas
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER-SETTER AND CANDIDATES ( THEORY):
The question Paper will consist of three Sections : A, B and C. Four long answer type
questions will be set frome each Section A and B and Candidates will attempt two
from each Section ( 6x4 = 24 ) section ‘C’ is compulsory and consist of 9 short
\answer type question’s of two marks covering entire syllabus (9 x 2 =18 )
SECTION -A
1. Play: Introduction, Theories and Importance.
2. Childhood & Adolescence: Growth and Development (Physical, Mental, Emotional &
Social.)
3. Age and Sex Differences: - Introduction, Age & Sex differences, Structural differences,
Physiological differences and Gynecological differences.
4. Health Problems in India: - Communicable and Non-Communicable Diseases, Obesity,
Diabetes, Malnutrition, Adulteration in food, Environmental Sanitation, Cause and
Precautions of Covid-19, Personal Environmental Hygiene in School
5. Yoga: Introduction, Aim, Importance and Types of Yoga
6. Pranayam : Meaning, Types, Objectives and its Importance.
7. Shudhi Kriyas: Introduction, Types, Objectives and its Effects.
SECTION - B
1. Physiology of Asanas: Effective on various system of body.
2. Massage Manipulation: Brief History of Massage, Classification of Manipulation used
massage and specific uses in Human Body.
3. Endocrine System: Introduction, Glands, Location & Functions.
4. Excretory System: Introduction, Organs, Structure and Functions.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
106
5. Kabaddi (National style): History, Layout, General Rules and Regulations, Officials,
Major Tournaments and Arjuna Awardees.
6. Shot put: - Rules, Layout and Techniques.
References:
 Aggarwal, J.C. (2006) “Health and Physical Education” Shipra Publications, Shakarpur,
Delhi.
Imperium Publishers, Khanna, Ludhiana.Dutta, A.K. (2004) “Games and Sports for Children”
1st edition - Janvani Prakashan, Shahdra, Delhi.
New Delhi.
 Osho, “144 Meditation” A Rebel Book, (2006) Tao Publishing, Pune, India.
 Osho, “Meditation the First and the Last Freedom” (2006) A Rebel Book, Tao Publishin,
Pune, India.
 Park, J.E. and Park, K. (1985) “Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine” Bnasidar
Bhanot Publisher, Jabalpur.
 Park, J.E. and Park,K, (1982) “Text Book of Community Health for Nurses”, Asrani
 Rose and Wilson, (2001) “Anatomy and Physiology in Health Illness” Harcourt Publisher Ltd.
 Saraswati, S. N. Gheranda samhita, (2012) Yoga Publications Trust, Munger, India.
 Sarawati, Swami. Satyananda., “Asana, Pranayam, Mudra and Bandhas” (2013) Bihar school
of yoga, Munger, India.
 Sarswati, Swami Satyanand, Four chapters of freedom” (2006) Yoga publication trust, Ganga
darshan Munger, Bihar, India.
Delhi.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
107
SEMESTER – III
PRACTICAL
PART – B Skill and Prowess 40 MARKS (External) 6 Hrs per week for
Per Unit
Teaching hrs: 6 Periods per week (2 Period X 3 day) of one unit (one unit contains 30-40
students)
Total Credits : 03
1 Credit : 2 HOUR
KABADDI, YOGA AND SHOT PUT

Evaluation will be based on skill test, performance & viva voce.
1. Measurement of the field and preparation of the field.
2. Equipment and Materials of the game/ Event.
3. Fundamental skill and lead up games.
4. Techniques.
5. Rules and regulation of the game/event
6. Officiating:
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
108
SEMESTER – IV
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
THEORY
PART – A Theory 60 MARKS 5 Hrs per
week

1 Credit : 1 HOUR
 Learn about importance of Play ,Yoga and Asana in modern society.
 Learn about types of Yoga as rajyog; astang yog etc.
 Learn about types like cultural asana, meditative asana and relaxative asana.
 Learn about different techniques of asanas.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER-SETTER AND CANDIDATES ( THEORY):
The question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Four long answer
type questions will be set from each Section A and B and Candidates will attempt two
from each Section ( 6x4 = 24 ) section ‘C’ is compulsory and consist of 9 short answer type
question’s of two marks covering entire syllabus (9 x 2 =18 )
Section A
1. Sports Psychology: Introduction, Importance and its Relationship.
2. Learning: Meaning, Types, Laws of Learning and their Implication in Sports.
3. Transfer of Training: Types and its application in Sports.
4. Motivation: Introduction, Types, Methods of Motivation and its Importance in Physical
Education and Sports.
5. Personality: Introduction, Types and Characteristics of Personality.
6. First Aid: Introduction, Principles, Qualities of First Aider, Process of Providing First Aid
during different Calamity (Burns, Electric Shock, Heat Stroke, Drowning).
7. Asanas: Introduction, Importance, Types and Techniques of (Padamasana, Vajraasana,
Sukhasana, Shavasana, Makarasana, Halasna, Mayurasna and Chakrasna.
Section B
1. Muscles: Structural and Function Classification of Muscles.
2. Circulatory System: Structure and Function of heart.
3. Sports injuries: Introduction, Causes, Symptoms, Treatment and Prevention of (Sprain,
Strain, Contusion, Dislocation and Fracture).
4. High jump: Rules and Regulations, Layout and Techniques.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
109
5. Discus Throw: Rules and Regulations, Layout and Techniques.

6. Kho-Kho: History, Layout, General Rules and Regulation, Officials, Major
Tournaments.
References:
 Aggarwal, J.C. (2006) “Health and Physical Education” Shipra Publications, Shakarpur,
Delhi.
Imperium Publishers, Khanna, Ludhiana.Dutta, A.K. (2004) “Games and Sports for
Children” 1st edition - Janvani Prakashan, Shahdra, Delhi.
 International Association of Athletics Federations Competition Rules (2017-18),
Centenary Edition, Monaco. http://www.iaaf.org
 Jain, Deepak (2002) “Physical Education and Recreational Activities” Khel Sahitya
Kendra, New Delhi.
 Kang G.S. and Deol N.S. (2008) “An Introduction to Health and Physical Education”
Twenty First Century, Patiala.
 Kapri, B.C. et. al. (2014) “Physical and Health Education” N.B. Publications, Meerut,
India.
 Park, J.E. and Park, K. (1985) “Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine” Bnasidar
Bhanot Publisher, Jabalpur.
 Park, J.E. and Park,K, (1982) “Text Book of Community Health for Nurses”, Asrani
 Singh, Ajmer et.al. (2016) “Essential of Physical Education and Olympic movement”
Kalyani Publishers, Ludhina.
 Thour, Mandeep (2006) “Camping Management in Physical Education” Friends
Publication, Delhi.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
110
SEMESTER – IV
PRACTICAL
PART – B Skill and Prowess 40 MARKS (External) 6 Hrs per week

for Per Unit
Teaching hrs: 6 Periods per week (2 Period X 3 day) of one unit (one unit contains 30-40
students)
Total Credits : 03
1 Credit : 2 HOUR
KHO-KHO, HIGH JUMP AND DISCUS THROW

Evaluation will be based on skill test, performance & viva voce.
2. Equipment and Materials of the game/ Event.
4. Techniques.
5. Rules and regulation of the game/event
6. Officiating:
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
111
SEMESTER III
MUSIC (INSTRUMENTAL)
PAPER-A: HISTORICAL AND THEORATICAL STUDY OF MUSIC
INSTRUMENTAL
Max. Marks: 50 Lectures to be delivered: 30

(MST: 06 marks, Assignment = 05 Attendance = 03 marks)
Pass Marks: 35% Time allowed: 3 hours
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit = 1 Hour
Course Outcome :
A.Knowledge and Understanding :
1. To understand Guitar and Mridang instrument.
2. Study of basic components of Guitar and Mridang in Gayan and vadanshellies
3. To Understand the Knowledge of different Context like Gamak, Baaj, Avirbhova-
Tirobhava, Alaptavabaheltava etc.
4. Relation of Guitar &Mridang in Context of Dhrupad Gayan shelly.
5. To understand the knowledge of different Comparative Study of Raags and Taals
B. Intellectual (Cognitive/ Analytical) Skills:
. To analyze the components and Lyakaries of different Taals.
. Comparative study of different Talas.
. Analyze the study of Musicologists.
C. Practical Skills
1) Students learns deeply about different Raagas to Perform on Stage.
2) Students learns to recite Taals with hand and Tabla to Understand the RythemsTaals in
Mathematically way.
D.Transferable skills
. Use of Layakari .
. Techniques of perestation .
Compare the study of Gharanas
Note: (i) Along with Music (Instrumental), the candidate can also take Music (Vocal) or
Tabla as an elective subject.
(ii) The candidate can opt any of the following instruments: Sitar, Sarangi, Violin,
Dilruba, Flute, Santoor, Sarod, Veena and Guitar.
(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A,B& C. Section A& B will have
four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks
each. Section C will consist of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire
syllabus uniformly and will carry 16 marks in all.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B and
the entire Section C is compulsory.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
112
SECTION- A
1. Definition and explanation of the following musical terms:

Kan, Andolan, Chal-AchalThaat, Meend, Ghaseet, Zamzama.
2. Different Vadan Shailies of Sitar.
3. Concept of Jugalbandi in Instrumental Music.
4. The life and contribution towards Music of the following :
(i) Pt. Budhaditya Mukherji (ii) Pt. Hari Prasad Chaurasia
SECTION: B
5. Tradition of String Instruments (Tanti Saaz) in Punjab related to Gurmat Sangeet.

6. Principles of Formation of Taals.
7. Description and Notation of the prescribed Raags and Taals:
Raags : (i) Jaunpuri (ii) Bageshwari
Taals : (i) Deepchandi (ii) Tilwara
8. Elementary knowledge of the following Raags:
(i) Aasawari (ii) Rageshwari
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
113
SEMESTER III
PAPER –B: STAGE CUM VIVA

Total Credits: 02
1 Credit = 2 Hours

(i) The Examination will be conducted by a Board of Examiners consisting of Head of

the Department/Nominee, Internal Teacher and External Expert.
1. One Drut Gat in each of the following Raags with Toras:

Jaunpuri, Bageshri
2. One gat in Chautal with toras in any of the prescribed Raags.
3. Ability to recite, Tilwara & Deepchandi Taal by hand in Ekgun and Dugun layakaries.
4. Ability to play Teentaal on Tabla.
5. Tuning of Instrument.
6. Ability to play Aroh, Avroh, and Pakar on Harmonium of the Elementary Raags.
7.
1. Shri Harish Chander Srivastava :Raag Parichaya , Part III & IV.
2. Sangeet Karyala, Hathras :Hamare Sangeet Ratan.
3. Sangeet Karyalya ,Hathras (U.P): Sangeet Vishard.
4. Mrs.Veena Mankaran : Sangeet Sar (Part I)
5. Prof. Tara Singh, Surjit Kaur : Vadan Kala, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala
6. Dr Ramphan Sharma : TablaVadan Part- II, Punjabi University, Patiala.
7. Dr.Jagmohan Sharma :Tabla Vadan, Part- I published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
8. Dr.Gurnam Singh : Punjabi Sangeetkar, Publication by Punjabi University, Patiala.
9. Dr.Gurnam Singh :Sangeet Nibandhavali, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
10. Principal S.S. Kareer :VadanRachnaSagar, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
11. Sharat chandra Pranjpe : Sangeet Bodh
12. Prof. Tara Singh: Sitar Tarangini.
13. Dr.Devinder Kaur : Sangeet Roop Part II
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
114
SEMESTER IV
PAPER-A: HISTORICAL AND THEORATICAL STUDY OF MUSIC
INSTRUMENTAL
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit = 1 Hour
Course Outcome :
A.Knowledge and Understanding :
1. To understand Guitar and Mridang instrument.
2. Study of basic components of Guitar and Mridang in Gayan and vadanshellies
3. To Understand the Knowledge of different Context like Gamak, Baaj, Avirbhova-
Tirobhava, Alaptavabaheltava etc.
4. Relation of Guitar &Mridang in Context of Dhrupad Gayan shelly.
5. To understand the knowledge of different Comparative Study of Raags and Taals
B. Intellectual (Cognitive/ Analytical) Skills:
. To analyze the components and Lyakaries of different Taals.
. Comparative study of different Talas.
. Analyze the study of Musicologists.
C. Practical Skills
1) Students learns deeply about different Raagas to Perform on Stage.
2) Students learns to recite Taals with hand and Tabla to Understand the RythemsTaals in
Mathematically way.
D.Transferable skills
. Use of Layakari .
. Techniques of perestation .
Compare the study of Gharanas
Note: (i) Along with Music (Instrumental), the candidate can also take Music (Vocal) or
Tabla as an elective subject.
(ii) The candidate can opt any of the following instruments: Sitar, Sarangi, Violin,
Dilruba, Flute, Santoor, Sarod, Veena and Guitar.
(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B & C. Section A& B will have
four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks
each. Section C will consist of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B and
the entire Section C is compulsory.
SECTION- A
1. Historical development of Indian Music with special reference to :
(i) Matang (ii) Sharang Dev
2. Definition and explanation of the following :
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
115
(i) Gamak (ii) Baaj (iii)Avirbhava-Tirobhava (iv) Alapatva-Bahutava

(v) Principles of Alap
3. The life sketch and contribution of the following towards Music:
(i) Dr. Lal Mani Mishra (ii) Ustad Laxman Singh Seen
4. Role of Electronic Devices in the propagation of Music.
SECTION : B
5. Contribution of Bhai Mardana to Gurmat Sangeet.
6. Knowledge of the following instruments: Guitar, Mirdang and Santoor.
7. Description and Notation of the prescribed Raags and Taals.
Raags: (i)Vrindavani Sarang (ii) Bihag
Taals : (i) Tivra (ii) Dhamar
8. Elementary knowledge of the following Raags:
(i) Des (ii) Maru Bihag
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
116
SEMESTER IV

Total Credits: 02
1 Credit = 2 Hours

(i) The Examination will be conducted by a Board of Examiners consisting of Head of

the Department/Nominee, Internal Teacher and External Expert.
1. One drut Gat with short Alaps, Jor, Toras and Jhalas in each of the following Raags :
Vrindavani Sarang, Bihag.
2. One slow Gat with Alaps and Toras in any of the prescribed Raags.
3. Ability to recite Tivra & Dhamar Taal on hand with its Ekgun and Dugun Layakaries.
4. Ability to play Ek taal on Tabla.
5. Use of the two swaras in the form of Meend and Kan.
6. Ability to play Aroh, Avroh, and Pakar on Harmonium of the Elementary Raags.
1. Shri Harish Chander Srivastava :Raag Parichaya , Part III & IV.
2. Sangeet Karyala, Hathras :Hamare Sangeet Ratan.
3. Sangeet Karyalya ,Hathras (U.P): Sangeet Vishard.
4. Mrs.Veena Mankaran : Sangeet Sar (Part I)
5. Prof. Tara Singh, Surjit Kaur : Vadan Kala, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala
6. Dr Ramphan Sharma : TablaVadan Part- II, Punjabi University, Patiala.
7. Dr.Jagmohan Sharma :Tabla Vadan, Part- I published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
8. Dr.Gurnam Singh : Punjabi Sangeetkar, Publication by Punjabi University, Patiala.
9. Dr.Gurnam Singh :Sangeet Nibandhavali, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
10. Principal S.S. Kareer :VadanRachnaSagar, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
11. Sharat chandra Pranjpe : Sangeet Bodh
12. Prof. Tara Singh: Sitar Tarangini.
13. Dr.Devinder Kaur : Sangeet Roop Part II
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
117
Semester - IIIrd
Music (Vocal)
Paper-A
Historical and Theoretical Study of Indian Music
Max Marks: 50
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome: The students will be able to understand the historical development of Indian
Music upto 12th century, origin and development of the khyal gayan shailee, the concept &
importance of alap and taan, biographical sketches and contribution of great maestros. They will
be able to understand the stupendous folk music of Punjab and the contribution of Sri Guru Arjan
Dev ji to Gurmat Sangeet.
will consist of 08 objective/short type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B and the entire Section C is
compulsory.
SECTION –A
(i) Historical development of Indian Music during the period of 15th century to
17th century.
(ii) Origin and development of the Khyal Gayan Shailee .
(iii) Definition of the following: Nyas , Apnyas, Grah, Ansh, Alptva, Bahutva.
(iv) Definition, concept & importance of Alap and Taan.
(v) Biographical sketches and contribution of the following great maestros:
(a) Ustad Faiyaz Khan
(b) Swami Harivallabh
(c) Pandit Jasraj
SECTION –B
(vi) Main characteristics of Folk Music of Punjab
(vii) Contribution of Sri Guru Arjan Dev ji to Gurmat Sangeet
(viii) Description and notation of following Raags (Khayals):
(i) Raags : Bhairav, Bhimplasi.
(ix) Description of following Taals with its Ekgun and Dugun Layakaries:
(i) Taals: Ek Taal, Char Taal.
(x) Elementary Knowledge of the following Raags : Gunkali, Dhanasri.
SECTION –C
This Section will consist of short answer type questions from Section A and Section B as
mentioned in instructions.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
118
SEMESTER – IIIrd
PAPER- B
STAGE CUM VIVA
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome: The students will develop the ability to sing one vilambit khayal with
alaps and tans, ability to sing shabad or bhajan with harmonium, ability to recite the
Taals. They will also learn to sing saraswati vandana.
(i) The Examination will be conducted by a Board of Examiners consisting of
Head of the Department/nominee, internal teacher and external expert.
1. One Vilambit Khayal in any one of the Raags prescribed in the syllabus with Alaps
and Taans. 10
2. One Drut Khayal in each of the following Raags along with singing of their
notations: Bhairav, Bhimplasi 8
3. Singing of one Shabad or Bhajan with Harmonium. 7
4. Ability to demonstrate the following Taals with their Ekgun and Dugun
layakaries:
Ek taal, Char Taal 5
5. Aroh, Avroh , Pakar of the following Raags :
Gunkali , Dhanasri 6
1. Harish Chander Srivastava : Rag Parichya Part I, II & III .
2. V.S Nigam, Sangeet Kaumudi, IV, Punjabi University, Patiala.
3. Laxmi Narayan Garg, Hamare Sangeet Ratan, Sangeet Karyala, Hathras
4. Mrs. Veena Mankaran : Sangeet Sar (Part I)
5. Dr. Manmohan Sharma : Tabla Vadan Part- II, Punjabi University, Patiala.
6. Prof. Tara Singh , Surjit Kaur : Vadan Kala, Punjabi University, Patiala.
7. Gurmat Sangeet (Vishesh Ank), Amrit Kirtan Trust, 422, 15-A, Chandigarh.
8. Gurmat Sangeet (Vishesh Ank) Vismad Nad, G.G.K, Parkashan Javadhi Kalan
Ludhiana:
9. Dr. Gurnam Singh : Punjabi Sangeetkar, Punjabi University, Patiala.
10. Dr. Gurnam Singh, Sangeet Nibandhavli, Punjabi University, Patiala.
11. Dr. Devinder Kaur : Sangeet Roop Part II.
12. Sharatchandra Pranjpe : Sangeet Bodh
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
119
Semester – 4TH
Music (Vocal)
Paper-A
HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL STUDY OF INDIAN MUSIC
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : The students will be able to understand the origin and development of various
gayan shaillies like Dhrupad and Dhamar, role of computer & internet in music, biographical
sketches and contribution of great maestros. They will be able to understand the importance of
Music in Sri Guru Granth Sahib and the instrument knowledge of Tanpura and Sahayak Nad.
will consist of 08 objective/short type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B and the entire Section C
is compulsory.
SECTION –A
(i) Historical development of Indian Music during the period of 13th Century to 15th
Century.
(ii) Origin and development of the following Gayan Shaillies : Dhrupad and Dhamar.
(iii) Definition of the following : Khatka , Kan, Murki , Andolan
(iv) Role of Computer & Internet in Music.
(v) Biographical sketches and contribution of the following great maestros:
(a) Pt. Bhimsen Joshi
(b) Ustad Sohan Singh
(c) Vidushi Kishori Amonkar
SECTION –B
(vi) Tanpura and Sahayak Nad
(vii) Importance of Music in Sri Guru Granth Sahib.
(viii) Description and notation of following Raags (Khayals):
(ii) Raags : Asawari , Vrindavani Sarang.
(ix) Description of following Taals with its Ekgun and Dugun Layakaries:
(i) Taals : Ek Taal, Dhamar Taal..
(x) Elementary Knowledge of the following Raags : Jaunpuri, Madmadh Sarang.
SECTION –C
This Section will consist of short answer type questions from Section A and Section B as
mentioned in instructions.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
120
Semester – 4TH
Music (Vocal)
PAPER- B
STAGE CUM VIVA
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : The students will develop the ability to sing one vilambit khayal with
alaps and tans, ability to sing Dhrupad with dugun Layakari and to sing folk song with
harmonium. They will also learn to recite the Taals.
(i) The Examination will be conducted by a Board of Examiners consisting of
Head of the Department/nominee, internal teacher and external expert.

1. One Vilambit Khayal in any one of the Raags prescribed in the syllabus with
Alaps and Taans. 10
2. One Drut Khayal in each of the following Raags along with singing of their
notations: Asawari, Vrindavani Sarang. 8
3. Ability to demonstrate the following Taals with their Ekgun and Dugun layakaries:
Ek Taal, Dhamar Taal. 7
4. One Folk Song. 5
5. Aroh, Avroh , Pakar of the following Raags :
Jaunpuri, Madmadh Sarang. 6
1. Harish Chander Srivastava : Rag Parichya Part I, II & III .
2. V.S Nigam, Sangeet Kaumudi, IV, Punjabi University, Patiala.
3. Laxmi Narayan Garg, Hamare Sangeet Ratan, Sangeet Karyala, Hathras
4. Mrs. Veena Mankaran : Sangeet Sar (Part I)
5. Dr. Manmohan Sharma : Tabla Vadan Part- II, Punjabi University, Patiala.
6. Prof. Tara Singh , Surjit Kaur : Vadan Kala, Punjabi University, Patiala.
7. Gurmat Sangeet (Vishesh Ank), Amrit Kirtan Trust, 422, 15-A, Chandigarh.
8. Gurmat Sangeet (Vishesh Ank) Vismad Nad, G.G.K, Parkashan Javadhi Kalan
Ludhiana:
9. Dr. Gurnam Singh : Punjabi Sangeetkar, Punjabi University, Patiala.
10. Dr. Gurnam Singh, Sangeet Nibandhavli, Punjabi University, Patiala.
11. Dr. Devinder Kaur : Sangeet Roop Part II.
12. Sharatchandra Pranjpe : Sangeet Bodh.
13. Dr. Devinder Kaur, Gayan Kala Part I & II
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
121
(Semester III)
PAPER-A
HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL STUDY OF TABLA
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO3 (A)- HISTORICAL AND THEORITICAL STUDY OF TABLA
In this course the students are taught theoritical aspects of Tabla in which they are learn about
the ancient Tala system with the help of various texts, Students get knowledge of the Taal ke
Dasa Pranas, they also are taught the knoweledge of Uthaan, Dupalli, Tripalli etc., description of
various elements like Tukras, Kayda, Palta, Rela, Paran and they also understand to compose
small Tehaies of Taals. Students learn to write the various practical compositions according
to the notation system.
(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have
C will consist of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and
will carry 16 marks in all.
Stage Performance Paper should also be sent.

Section - A
1. Definition and explain the following terms:-
Uthaan, Dupalli, Tipalli, Laggi, Tukra.
2. Ten Praans of Taal.
3. Life Sketches of Shri Kanthe Maharaj & Ustad Lachhman Singh Seen.
4. Evolution and development of Delhi Baaz.
Section - B
5. Notation in the following:
(i) Rupak Taal – Peshkar, Kayda with Paltas, Paran and Chakradar Paran.
(ii) Jhap Taal – Peshkar, Tukras, Parans, Bedam Tehai, Damdar Tehai.
6. Notation of Taals Rupak, Tivra, Jhaptaal with their Dugun, Tigun and Chaugun
Layakaries.
7. Recognition of Taals through some bols asked by paper setter.
8. Composition of Kayda and Tihai based on the bols set by the paper setter.
Books Recommended
1. G.C. Shrivastava : Taal Prichiya Part I & II
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
122
2. B.S. Sharma : Taal Martand

3. Arum Kumar Sen : Bhartiya talon ka Shastriya Vivechan.
4. L.M. Mishra : Bhartiya Sangeet Vadya
5. Sangeet Karyala Hathra : Hamare Sangeet Ratan.
6. Dr. Manmohan Sharma : Tabla Vadan, Part II, Punjabi University, Patiala.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
123
SEMESTER- III
PAPER- B
STAGE PERFORMANCE
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO3 (B)- STAGE PERFORMANCE
The students will develop the ability to play Tabla with Kayda,Paltas,Tihai and tukras in
difficult Taals, to play Nagma with harmonium, ability to play Laggis in selective Taals,
ability to demonstrate taals on hand with layakaries through which these causes to perform
well. Students can gain knowledge through class demonstrations about the “Padhant” while doing
the solo recital.

(ii) There should not be more than 8 students in a batch for stage performance examination.
(iii) Harmonium, Sarangi, Dilruba etc. may also be allowed as an accompaniment (Nagma).
1. Taal prescribed: Rupak & Jhap Taal

(a) Rupak Taal – Peshakar, Kayda (with Proper Badhat), Tukras, Parans, Bedam
Tehai, Damdar Tehai.
Jhap Taal - Peshkar, Kayda, Paran and Chakradar Paran.
(b) Two Laggis in Dadra Taal and Kehrwa Taal.
2. Practice of playing the above mentioned taals with Light Vocal.
3. Knowledge of Shudh and Vikrit Swaras.
4. Practice of playing Nagma on Harmonium in Rupak & Jhap Taal.
5. Tuning of Tabla.
6. Ability to play Ek Taal in 1/2 Layakaries.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
124
(Semester IV)
PAPER-A
HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL STUDY OF TABLA
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO4 (A)- HISTORICAL AND THEORITICAL STUDY OF TABLA
In this course the students are taught theoritical aspects of Tabla in which they are learn about the
Punjab and Banaras Gharana, they also are taught the knowledge of Uttari-Dakshini Taal system,
description of various elements like Gat, Nagma, Peshkar and they also understand the
accompaniment knowledge of Tabla through which these causes to perform well.
Note: The candidate can take Music Vocal or Music Instrumental as an elective subject along
with Tabla.
questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each.
Section C will consist of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus
uniformly and will carry 16 marks in all.
Stage Performance Paper should also be sent.

Section - A
1. Definition and explain the following terms:-
Gat, Nagma, Peshkar and Chakradar Paran.
2. Evolution and development of Banaras Baaz.
3. Life Sketches of Pt. Samta Prashad and Baba Malang Khan.
4. Comparison of Uttari and Dakshini Taal System.
Section - B
5. Notation in the following:
(i) Ek Taal: - Peshkar, Kayda, Tukra, Chakradar Paran and Rela.
(ii) Jhaptal: - Peshkar, Kayda Proper Badhat, Paran and Rela.
6. Notation of Jhaptal, Ek Taal, Deepchandi and Tivra Taals with their Dugun, Tigun and
Chaugun Layakaries.
7. Recognition of Taals through bols asked by paper setter.
8. Principles of Tabla Accompaniment.
Books Recommended
1. G.C. Shrivastava : Taal Prichiya Part I & II
2. B.S. Sharma : Taal Martand
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
125
3. Arum Kumar Sen : Bhartiya talon ka Shastriya Vivechan.

4. L.M. Mishra : Bhartiya Sangeet Vadya
5. Sangeet Karyala Hathra : Hamare Sangeet Ratan.
6. Dr. Manmohan Sharma : Tabla Vadan, Part II, Punjabi University, Patiala.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
126
SEMESTER- IV
PAPER- B
STAGE PERFORMANCE
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO4 (B)- STAGE PERFORMANCE
The students will develop the ability to play Tabla with Kayda,Paltas,Tihai and tukras in difficult
Taals, to play Nagma with harmonium, ability to play Laggis in selective Taals, ability to
demonstrate taals on hand with layakaries through which these causes to perform well. Students
can gain knowledge through class demonstrations about the “Padhant” while doing the solo recital.

1. Taal prescribed: Tivra, Jhaptal & Jhumra
(a) Jhaptal - One Kayda with Paltas, One Peshkar, One gat, and Rela.
Ek Taal- One Kayda (with proper Badhat), One Peshkar, One gat, and Rela.
(b) Two Laggis in Roopak Taal.
(c) Playing Theka of Tivra Taal in Ekgun, Dugun & Chaugun Layakaries.
2. Practice of Playing the above mentioned Taals with Vocal and Instrumental
presentations.
3. Practice of playing Nagma on Harmonium in Jhaptala & Tivra.
4. Tuning of Tabla.
5. Ability to play Ek Taal in 1/4 Layakary.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
127
Semester III
Cultural Studies
5 Credits
Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100 marks
Period per Week: 5 Theory: 70 Marks
Course Outcome
Instruction for the Paper –Setter
UNIT I shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These
questions shall carry 10+10 =20 marks
UNIT II shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These
UNIT III shall cover entire syllabus and shall be of 30 marks. This unit shall comprise ten short
answer questions of 100-200 words each. Each question shall carry 3 marks.
Classification of Culture
UNIT I
 Subjective Culture and Objective Culture: Habits, Norms, Values, Attitudes, Rituals,
Communication Patterns, Eating Habits, Clothing, Use of Various Technologies
 Culture and Behavior: Learned Behavior: Shared Behavior Patterns, Artifacts - Concrete
and Abstract
 Cultural Reproduction: Role of Various Agencies: Family, Religion, Education, Legal
Codes /Penal Structures, Repressive Agencies
 Counter Cultural Movements : Civil Rights Movements, LGBT movement
UNIT II
 Culture as Cognitive System: Attention, Perception, Memory, Patterns of Knowledge,
Reasoning
 Culture as Structural System: Myths, Kinship, Cultural Universals, Logic of Binary
 Culture, Language and Identity
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
128
Suggested Readings
 Arce, Patricia Perez. “The Influence of Culture on Cognition.” Archives of Clinical
Neuropsychology. 1999. 581-592.
 Barker, Christ. “Language, Identity and Cultural Politics” Cultural Studies and Discourse
Analysis: A Dialogue on Language and Identity. Sage Publication, 2001.
 Bourdieu, Pierre. “Reproduction in education, Society and Culture.” Theory, Culture and
Society. Sage Publications, 1990.
 Durkheim, Emile. The elementary Forms of the Religious Life. Dover Publications: New
York, 2008
 Edward, John. Language and Identity: An Introduction. Cambridge University Press, 2009.
 Hebdige, Dick. Subculture: The Meaning of Style. New Accents, 1979
 Jenks,Chris. Cultural Reproduction. Rouledge,1993
 Keesing, Roger M. “Theories of Culture.” Annual Review of Anthropology, 1974. Pp 73-97.
 Kramsch, Clair. Language and Culture. Oxford Press, 1998.
 Kronenfeld, David B. Culture as a System: How We Know the Meaning and Significance of
What we Do and Say. Routledge, 2017.
 Marcuse, Herbert. One Dimensional Man. Beacon Press, 1964
 Ogburn, William F. William F.Ogburn on Culture and Social Change: Selected Papers.
Phoenix books, 1964
 Platt, David. Counter –Culture. Tyndale Momentum,2015.
 R.A.Shweder, R.A. Levine (eds). Cultural Theory.Cambridge University Press, 1998. pp8-122.
 Simmels. Simmels on Culture: Selected writings Theory, Culture and Society. Sage
Publication, 1997.
 Sutton, Mark Q. The Introduction to Cultural Ecology. Altamira Press, 2013
 Tanner, Kathryn. Theories of Culture: A New Agenda for Theology. Augsburg Fortess,
1997
 Triantis, Harey C.”Subjective Culture.” Online Readings in Psychology and Culture. Uni.of
Illinois, 2002
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
129
Semester IV
Cultural Studies
5 Credits
Course Outcome
 Critically look at analogous relationship between religion and culture
 Equip themselves with tools to appreciate diverse cultures through the lenses of major
religions
 Better appreciate different ways of living and world views by studying religiocultural basis
of a society
Instruction for the Paper –Setter
UNIT I shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These
UNIT II shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These
UNIT III shall cover entire syllabus and shall be of 30 marks. This unit shall comprise ten short
answer questions of 100-200 words each. Each question shall carry 3 marks.
Religion as a Source of Cultural Value: An Introduction

A Brief Introduction: Hinduism, Jainism, Judaism, Taoism, Zoroastrianism and Shinto
Unit I
1. Culture of Christianity: Doctrine of the Trinity; Mass and Communion; Ten
Commandments; Thanksgiving; Confession
2. Culture of Islam: Five Pillars of Islam- The Shahadah Prayer, Fasting, Charity, Hajj; Role of
Madrasas; Institution of Nikah
Unit II
3. Culture of Buddhism: Four Nobel Truths of Suffering, Middle Path and Impermanence, Non-
Egoic Self, Nirvana, Separation of Self from Reality, Eightfold Path of Righteousness, Belief in
Afterlife, Compassion and Non-Violence, Monastic Way of Life.
4. Culture of Sikhism: Belief in One God – ‘Ek Onkar’; Sikh Maryada: ‘Naam Japo’, ‘Kirat
Karo’,’Vand Shako’, ‘Five Kakars’, Baptism, Panj Pyaras: Social Equality, Institutions of Sangat
and Pangat,Dasvandh
Suggested Readings
 Eliot, T.S. Christainity and Culture. Meriner Books, 1977
 Gaytso, Geshe K. Introduction to Buddhism: An Exploration to Buddhist Way of Life.
Tharpa Publications, 2012
 Gill, Pritam Singh. Heritage of Sikh Culture: Society, Morality, Art. New Academic
Publishing Company,1975
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
130
 Hovannisian, Richard G. and George Sabagh. Religion and Culture in Medieval Islam.
Cambridge University Press, 1999.
 Kee, Howard Clark. Christainty: A Social and Cultural History. Prentice Hall, 1998.
 Keown, Damien. A Very Short Introduction to Buddhism. Oxford University Press, 2013.
 McLeod,W.H. Exploring Sikhism; Aspects of Sikh Identity, Culture and Thought. Oxford
 Singh, Gurbhagat. Sikhism and Post Modern Thought. Ajanta Books,1999
 Singh, Jaswinder “Religious and Historical Paradigms of the Sikh Identity (thesis)”,
Punjabi University, 2011.
 Stott, John. Basic Christianity. IVP Books, 2012
 Tuffley, David. Essence of Buddhism. Altiora Publications, 2013
 William, Julie. Islam: Understanding the History, Beliefs and Culture. Enslow Publishers,
Inc.2008
 Woodhead, Linda. A Very Short Introduction to Christianity. Oxford University Press, 2014
Important Links related to Religion and Culture

Culture of Christianity
https://www.christianity.com/god/trinity/god-in-three-persons-a-doctrine-we-barely-
understand-11634405.html
http://www.stjohnscatholic-
darwin.com/Mass_CommunionService_Whats_the_difference.pdf
https://holycrossdover.org/worshipping-god/sacraments/1060-eucharist-holy-
communion-and-mass-1060-1060-1060
http://biblescripture.net/Commandments.html
Culture of Islam
https://www.khanacademy.org/humanities/ap-art-history/cultures-religions-ap-
arthistory/a/the-five-pillars-of-islam
http://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in/bitstream/10603/52357/9/09_chapter%202.pdf
http://pu.edu.pk/images/journal/ier/PDF-FILES/5_39_1_17.pdf
Culture of Buddhism
https://www.pbs.org/edens/thailand/buddhism.htm
https://owlcation.com/humanities/The-Fundamentals-of-Buddhism
Culture of Sikhism
http://karandeep.tripod.com/funda.htm
http://www.sikhmissionary.net/PEARLWEBSITE/pearlbook/A-BRIEF-OUTLINE-OF.htm
http://www.searchsikhism.com/sangat-and-pangat
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
131
(Semester-III)
Public Administration
Paper: Personnel Administration in India
Credits 5: 5h (L)

The question paper will consist of three Sections I, II and III. Section I & II will consist of
four questions carrying 10 marks each. Section III will consist of 10 short-answer type
questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short
answer type question will carry 3 marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Sections I and II of the question
paper and the entire Section III Candidates are required to answer the short questions in 4 to 5
lines.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Conceptual clarity of Personnel Administration, its issues, career systems and other
terms covering various aspects of personnel administration.
 Detailed understanding of the Personnel system and its related recruiting agencies of
the Indian Republic.
 Critical understanding of issues like Employee associations, Adjudication institutions
and processes and Civil Service Reforms.
 Pedagogical methods such as class room lectures and students-teacher interactions,
group discussion, quiz, seminar and assignment etc will be used.
ASSESSMENT METHODS
 Summative assessment method comprising of assignment, internal/term examination,
regularity in classes and end semester final examination.
Section-A
Personnel Administration: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Significance
Civil Services in India: Meaning, Features & Role
Classification: Meaning, Advantages and Disadvantages
Classification of Civil Services in India
Recruitment: Meaning, Types and Recruitment System of Civil Services in India
Section-B
Union Public Service Commission & State Public Service Commission: Composition
and Functions
Training: Meaning, Types; Training System of Civil Services in India
Promotion: Meaning and Principles
Employer-Employee Relations: Right to Association, Right to Strike,
Whitleyism in India, Conduct and Discipline
Corruption: Causes and remedies
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
132
SUGGESTED READINGS:-
1. Ali Farazmand, Handbook of Comparative and Development Public Administration,

New York, Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2001.
2. B.B. Peters, The Politics of Bureaucracy: A Comparative Perspective, New York,
Longman, 1978.
3. D.N. Brother, Wage and Salary Administration, 2nd Edition, Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey, Prentice Hall, 1962.
4. Daiv E. Klainger, Public Personnel Management, IPMA, Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey, Prentice Hall, 1986.
5. Dr. Geetinder Kaur, Comparative Personnel Administration, Mohindra Publishing
House, Chandigarh, 2011.
6. Pierre (ed.), Bureaucracy in the Modern State, Aldershot, Edward Elgar, 1995.
7. K.R. Hope, "Politics, Bureaucratic Corruption and Mal-Administration in the Third
World, International Review of Administrative Sciences, 51 (I), 1985.
8. K.K. Puri, Personnel Administration and Financial Administration in India, (Punjabi)
Jalandhar, Bharat Publishers, 2005.
9. O.Glenn Stahl, Public Personnel Administration, 7th Ed., Oxford IBH Publication
Compo, New Delhi, 1977.
10. S.L. Goel and Shalini Rajneesh, Public Personnel Administration: Theory and
Practice, New Delhi, Deep and Deep Publications, 2002.
11. Sahib Singh and Swinder Singh, Public Personnel and Financial Administration,
Jalandhar, New Academic Publishers, 2013.
12. S.P. Verma and S.K. Sharma, Comparative Public Administration, New Delhi, IIPA,
1985.
13. Surendra Kataria, Personnel Administration (Hindi), R.B.S.A. Publishers, Jaipur,
2005.
14. V. Subramaniam, Public Administration in the Third World, New York, Greenwood
Press, 1990.
15. B.L.Fadia and Kuldeep Fadia, Indian Administration, New Delhi, Sahitya Bhawan,
Publications, 2012.
16. Ramesh K. Arora & Rajni Goyal , Indian Public Administration Institutions & Issues,
New Delhi, Wishwa Prakashan, 2006.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
133
(SEMESTER-IV)
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
PAPER: FINANCIAL ADMINISTRATION IN INDIA
CREDITS 5: 5H (L)

The question paper will consist of three Sections I, II and III. Section I & II will consist of
four questions carrying 10 marks each. Section III will consist of 10 short-answer type
questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Sections I and II of the question
paper and the entire Section III Candidates are required to answer the short questions in 4 to 5
lines.
COURSE OUTCOME
 Knowledge of various aspects of financial administration in general and in the Indian
context in particular.
 Understanding budgeting, financial institutions and financial resource mobilization
strategies in the Indian context.
 Comprehending the system and dynamics of Indian fiscal federalism.
 Deep understanding of the role of Comptroller and Auditor General in financial
administration.
 Pedagogical methods such as class room lectures and students-teacher interactions,
group discussion, quiz, seminar and assignment etc will be used.
ASSESSMENT METHODS
 Summative assessment method comprising of assignment, internal/term examination,
regularity in classes and end semester final examination.
Section-A
Meaning and Significance of Financial Administration
Budget: Meaning & Principles of Budget Making
Types of Budget: Traditional, Performance and Zero Base Budgeting
Budgeting Process in India: Preparation, Enactment and Execution of the Budget
Section-B
Financial Relations between the Union and the States
GST Council: Composition and Functions
Finance Commission: Composition & Functions
Union Ministry of Finance: Organisation, Role and Functions
Parliamentary Control over Finance
Comptroller and Auditor-General of India: Role and Functions
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
134
SUGGESTED READINGS:-
1. K.N. Basiya, Financial Administration in India, Bombay, Himalaya Publishing

House, 1986.
2. C.P. Bhambri, Public Administration in India, Bombay, Vikas Publications House,
1973.
3. S.L. Goel, Public Financial Administration, New Delhi, Deep and Deep Publication,
Second Edition, 2008.
4. G.S. Lall, Public Finance and Financial Administration in India, New Delhi, Kapoor
Publishers, 1976.
5. Peter, A. Pyhrr, Zero Base Budgeting, New York, John Wiley and Sons, 1973.
6. Ajit Singh, New Economic Policy in India, New Delhi, Deep and Deep Publications,
1994.
7. R.N. Srivastave and Divya Nigam, Management of Indian Financial Institutions, New
Delhi, Himalaya Publishing House, 2019.
8. Rudder Datt & K.P. Sundaram, India Economy, New Delhi, S. Chand and Co., Pvt.
Ltd. 2002.
9. M.J.K. Thavaraj, Financial Administration in India, New Delhi, Sultan Chand and
Sons, 2003.
10. M.M. Sury, Government Budgeting in India, New Delhi, Commonwealth Publishers,
1990.
11. S. Panda, Financial Administration and Personnel Management in Public Enterprises,
New Delhi, Mittal Publications, 1989.
12. B.P.R. Vithal and M.L. Sastry, Fiscal Federalism in India, New Delhi, Oxford
13. Mohit Bhattacharya, New Horizons of Public Administration, Gurgaon, Jawahar
Publishers & Distributers, 2019.
14. B. Chakrabarty and P.C. Kandpal, Public Administration in a Globalizing World,
New Delhi, Sage Publications India Pvt. Ltd., 2020.
15. S. K. Mahajan & A.P.Mahajan, Financial Administration in India, New Delhi, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2014.
16. Sahib Singh and Swinder Singh, Public Personnel and Financial Administration,
Jalandhar, New Academic Publishers, 2013.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
135
(Semester-III)
Political Science: Indian Political System-I

Theory 70 Pass Marks: 35%
Course Outcome: This course acquainted the students with the British governments’ Acts
which influenced the Indian constitution. It makes them aware about the Fundamental rights,
duties and Directive principles of state policy. And also discuss the powers and position of
president, State Legislature, Executive.
Instructions for the Paper Setter/Examiner

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A & B will have four
questions from the respective portion of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B of the
question paper and the entire section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short
type question in 70-80 words i.e. in 7-8 lines.
Section - A
1. Morley-Minto Reforms Act-1909, Government of India Act 1919 and 1935.
2. Constituent Assembly and making of India's Constitution.
3. Preamble and Basic features of India's Constitution.
4. Nature of Indian Federalism: Emerging Trends.
5. Fundamental Rights and Fundamental Duties.
Section-B
6. Directive Principles of State Policy
7. President: Election, Powers, Position and Changing Role
8. Parliament: Composition, Powers and Role
9. Governor - Appointment, Powers and Role
10. State Legislature: Composition, Powers and Role
SUGGESTED READINGS:
1. G. Austin, The Indian Constitution: Corner Stone of a Nation, Oxford, Oxford University
Press, 1966
2. G. Austin, Working of a Democratic Constitution: The Indian Experience, Delhi, Oxford
University Press, 2000
3. D.D. Basu , An Introduction to the Constitution of India, New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 1994
4. C.P. Bhambari, The Indian State fifty years, Sipra publications, New Delhi, 1997
5. P.Brass , Politics of India since Independence, Cambridge University Press, London 2003
6. P. Brass, Language, Religion and Politics in North India, Cambridge University Press,
London, 1974
7. B.L. Fadia , State Politics in India, Vol. II, Radint Publisher, New Delhi, 1984
8. R. Kothari, State against Democracy: In Search of Human Governance, Ajantha, Delhi,
1988
9. R. Kothari, Politics in India, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 1970
10. Iqbal Narain (ed) , State Politics in India, Meenakshi Parkashan, Meerut, 1967
11. M.V. Pylee, Constitutional Government in India, , Asia Publishing House, Bombay, 1977
12. M.V. Pylee ,An Introduction to the Constitution of India, Vikas publications,New Delhi,
1998
13. S.P. Verma and C.P. Bhambari (ed), Election and Political Consciousness in India,
Meenakshi Parkashan,Meerut, 1967
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
136
14. S.S. Nanda, Indian Political System (English, Hindi and Punjabi), Modern Publishers,
Jalandhar, 2017
15. Rajni Kothari (ed.) Caste in Indian Politics, Orient Longman,( Reprint) New Delhi, 2004.
16. J.S. Badyal , Indian Political system,(Eng., Pbi., Hindi) Medium, Raj Publication,
Jalandhar. 2017
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
137
(Semester-IV)
Political Science: Indian Political System-II
Course Objectives: In this course, students will gain knowledge about Institutional and
Political Dynamics. It presents a systematic analysis of all the major dimensions of Indian
Political System. The study of Indian political system is a window to understand politics in
the society.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A & B will have four
questions from the respective portion of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A & B of the
question paper and the entire section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short
type question in 70-80 words i.e. in 7-8 lines.
Section A
1. Union Executive: Prime Minister: Appointment, Powers, Changing Role and Position
2. State Executive: Chief Minister: Appointment, Powers, Role and Position
3. Supreme Court: Composition, Jurisdiction and Powers
4. Judicial Review, Public Interest Litigation and Judicial Activism
Section B
5. Nature of Party System in India: A critical evaluation
6. National Political Parties (Indian National Congress and BJP) and Regional Parties (SAD
and DMK): their organisation, ideology and electoral performance.
7. Role of Religion and Caste in Indian Politics.
8. The Election Commission: Composition, Powers and electoral Reforms in India.
9. Emerging trends in Indian Politics.
Books Recommended:
1. G. Austin, The Indian Constitution: Corner Stone of a Nation, Oxford, Oxford University
Press, 1966
2. G. Austin, Working of a Democratic Constitution: The Indian Experience, Delhi, Oxford
University Press, 2000
3. D.D. Basu , An Introduction to the Constitution of India, New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 1994
4. C.P. Bhambari, The Indian State fifty years, Sipra publications, New Delhi, 1997
5. P.Brass , Politics of India since Independence, Cambridge University Press, London 2003
6. P. Brass, Language, Religion and Politics in North India, Cambridge University Press,
London, 1974
7. B.L. Fadia , State Politics in India, Vol. II, Radint Publisher, New Delhi, 1984
8. R. Kothari, State against Democracy: In Search of Human Governance, Ajantha, Delhi,
1988
9. R. Kothari, Politics in India, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 1970
10. Iqbal Narain (ed) , State Politics in India, Meenakshi Parkashan, Meerut, 1967
11. M.V. Pylee, Constitutional Government in India, Asia Publishing House, Bombay, 1977
12. M.V. Pylee ,An Introduction to the Constitution of India, Vikas publications,New Delhi,
1998
13. S.P. Verma and C.P. Bhambari (ed), Election and Political Consciousness in India,
Meenakshi Parkashan,Meerut, 1967
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
138
14. S.S. Nanda, Indian Political System (English, Hindi and Punjabi), Modern Publishers,
Jalandhar, 2017
15. Rajni Kothari (ed.) Caste in Indian Politics, Orient Longman,( Reprint) New Delhi, 2004.
16. J.S. Badyal , Indian Political system,(Eng., Pbi., Hindi) Medium, Raj Publication,Jalandhar.
2017
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
139
SEMESTER III
COMPUTER SCIENCE: PROGRAMMING USING C
5 CREDIT: 3H (L) + 4H (T)
Time: 3 hours Maximum Marks:100
Theory: 50
Course Objective
The objective of the course is to understand the basics of ‘C’ Programming and to make students
capable enough to do programming with ‘C’.
CO1: Describe basics, various Data types, operators in C.
CO2: Explain, Control Structures, Functions in C.
CO3: Understand the concepts of different user-defined data types such as arrays, structures etc.
CO4: Learn pointers and summarize the different File handling operations.
INSTRUCTION FOR THE PAPER SETTER

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Section A and B will have four questions
each from respective unit of the syllabus carrying 8 marks for each question. Section C will have 6-9
short answer type questions carrying total 18 marks, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
INSTRUCTION FOR THE CANDIDATES
The candidates are required to attempt two questions each from section A, B and the entire Section
C.
UNIT-I
Fundamentals of C: Introduction, Historical Evolution, Problem Solving Process, General
Structure of c program, Preprocessor Directives, Character Set, Keywords, Identifiers, Constants,
Variables, Rules for defining variables, Data types.
Operators and expressions: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical, Assignment, Conditional, Unary,
Bitwise, Comma Operators, Expressions, Type Conversion, Operator Precedence and Associativity,
Library functions, Input/Output Statements: Formatted and Unformatted.
Control Statements: Decision Control statements - if, if-else, nested if else, else-if ladder, switch
Statement, Jumping Statements - break statement, continue statement, goto statement, Loops
Control Statements - while, for, do-while, nested loops.
Functions: Need of Function, Declaration and Prototype, Definition and calling Function,
Methods of Parameter Passing- Call by Value and Call by Reference, Recursion.
Storage Classes - Automatic, Static, Register and External.
UNIT-II
Array: Definition, Declaration, Initialization, Types of Array, One Dimensional Array, Multi-
Dimensional Array, Strings - Input/Output of Strings, String Handling Functions (strlen, strcpy,
strcmp, strcat and strrev), Table ofStrings.
Structure and Union: Definition and Declaration, Using Structure, Array in Structure, Array of
Structure, union, Difference between Structure and Union.
Pointer: Definition, Pointer Declaration, Pointer Arithmetic, Pointer and Array, Pointer and
Function, Pointer and Structure.
File Handling: Opening and Closing of files, Input/ Output operation on files, Text and Binary Files.
Suggested Readings:
1. Y. Kanetkar, "Let Us C ", BPB publications
2. E. Balagurusamy, "Programming in C", Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Kamthane, "Programming with ANSI and Turbo C", Pearson Education
4. Dennis Ritchie, "The C Programming Language", Prentice Hall.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
140
SEMESTER III
SOFTWARE LAB –III (BASED ON PROGRAMMING USING C)
2 CREDITS: 4H (P)
The breakup of marks for the practical will be as under: -

 Lab Record, Program Development and Execution(External Evaluation) 15 Marks
This laboratory course will comprise of exercises to supplement what is learnt under paper
Programming Using C. The candidates are required to write the following programs:
1. To convert temperature from Fahrenheit to Celsius.

2. To find simple interest and compoundinterest.
3. To check whether the given number is even number or odd.
4. To accept three numbers and find the largest among them.
5. To find factorial of a number.
6. To check whether a number is prime ornot.
7. To print all the Armstrong numbers between any 2 given limits.
8. To find largest element in an array.
9. To check whether a string is a Palindrome.
10. To perform matrix addition.
11. To perform matrix multiplication.
12. To swap two numbers using function.
13. To find the factorial of a number using Recursion.
14. To find the nth Fibonacci number usingRecursion.
15. To create an employee structure and display the same.
16. Write a function to swap two numbers using pointers.
17. Create a file and store some records in it. Display the contents of the same. Count numbers of
characters, words and lines in thefile.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
141
SEMESTER IV
COMPUTER SCIENCE: DATA STRUCTURES
5 CREDIT: 3H (L) + 4H (T)
Time: 3 hours Maximum Marks:100

Theory: 50 Practical Examination: 30
Course Objective
The objective of the course is to understand the basics of Data Structures and to make students
capable enough to write algorithms using different Data Structures.
CO1: To access how the choices of data structure & algorithm methods impact the performance
of program.
CO2: To solve problems based on different data structure & also write programs. And know
about the basic concepts of Array and Linked-list.
CO3: Understand how several fundamental algorithms work particularly those concerned with
Stack, Queues, Trees and Graphs.
CO4: Learn various searching and Sorting algorithms.
INSTRUCTION FOR THE PAPER SETTER

The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Section A and B will have four
questions each from respective unit of the syllabus carrying 8 marks for each question. Section C
will have 6-9 short answer type questions carrying total 18 marks, which will cover the entire
syllabus uniformly.
INSTRUCTION FOR THE CANDIDATES
The candidates are required to attempt two questions each from section A, B and the entire
Section C.
UNIT-I
Preliminaries: Definition, Basic terminology, Types of data structure, Operations on data
Structures, Basic Mathematical concepts and notations, algorithm complexity, Big O notation,
time-space trade off.
Arrays: Definition, one-dimensional and two-dimensional array, memory representation, Row
major and Column major order, address calculation, various operations on linear arrays
(Insertion, Deletion, and Traversal), sparse matrices and its representation.
Linked Lists: Definition, Representation of linked lists in memory, types of linked lists (Header,
doubly, circular), various operations on singly linked lists, applications.
Stacks: Definition, Representation of stack in memory using arrays and linked list, Basic stack
operations (PUSH and POP), Applications of stacks-converting arithmetic expression from in fix
notation to postfix, parenthesis matching.
UNIT-II
Queues: Definition, Representation of queue in memory using arrays and linked list, Basic
Queue operations (Insertion, Deletion), Types of Queue (Circular, Priority, Deque),
applications.
Trees: Definition, Binary Tree, Properties, Representation of binary tree in memory using array
and linked lists, Binary Search Tree, Operations on BST (Traversal Insertion, Deletion),
Overview: AVL Tree, B Tree, Threaded Binary Tree.
Graphs: Definition, Basic terminology, Representation of graph in memory using array and
Linked Lists, Traversal operations: BFS, DFS, Applications of Graphs.
Searching and Sorting: Linear Search, Binary search, Bubble Sort, Selection Sort, Insertion
Sort, Merge Sort, Quick Sort, Radix Sort.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
142
Suggested Readings:
1. Seymour Lipschutz: "Theory and Problems of Data Structures", Schaum Outline Series,
McGraw-Hill BookCompany.
2. Jeffery Esakov: "Data Structures- An Advanced Approach Using C", Tom Weiss,
Prentice- Hall International, Inc.
3. Trembley and Sorenson: "An Introduction to Data Structures with Application", Tata
McGraw Hill Company, Delhi.
4. Tanenbaum: "Data Structures Using C", Pearson Education.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
143
SEMESTER IV
SOFTWARE LAB -IV (BASED ON DATA STRUCTURES)
2 CREDITS: 4H (P)
The breakup of marks for the practical will be as under: -

 Lab Record, Program Development and Execution(External Evaluation) 15 Marks
This laboratory course will comprise of exercises to supplement what is learnt under paper Data
Structures using C. The candidates are required to write the following programs:
1. To insert an element into an array.

2. To delete an element from an array.
3. To store an array using sparse representation.
4. To apply various operations on stack.
5. To insert and delete element in a queue.
6. To insert and delete and search a node in a linked list.
7. To insert or delete node in a binary tree.
8. To traverse binary tree.
9. To implement linear search.
10. To implement binary search.
11. To implement Bubble sort.
12. To implement Selection sort.
13. To implement Insertion sort.
14. To implement Merge sort.
15. To implement Quick sort.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
144
Semester-III
Geography: Oceanography
Time Allowed: 3 hours Total Teaching Periods: 60
Maximum Marks: 100 Pass Marks: 35%
Written Paper: 50 Marks Practical: 30 Marks
 Learn about the origin, distribution and structure of world oceans
 Learn about the relation of ocean with celestial bodies
 Learn about the utilization of oceans as a storehouse of resources of Future

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Section A and B will have four
questions each from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 8 marks each. Section
C will consist of 9 short-answer type questions, covering the entire syllabus uniformly and will
carry 18 marks in all. Each short-answer type question carries 2 marks.

(i) Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B of the
question paper and the entire section C is compulsory.
(ii) Candidates are allowed to use outline stencil maps of the world/continents/countries. They
OBJECTIVES
1. To understand importance of Ocean.
2. To know effects of Ocean Currents.
3. To understand Human Impacts on Ocean.
4. To study types of Tides.
5. To prepare the students for Competitive Exams.
SECTION-A
(i) Oceanography : Definition, Nature and Scope
(ii) Topography of Ocean Basins- Continental Shelf, Continental Slope, Continental Ridge and
Abyssal Plains
(iii) Oceanic Deep Features: Trenches, Trough, Ridge, Guyots, Seamounts.
(iv) Sources and Origin of Oceans Salts, Major oceanic salts, Factors effecting the Salinity
(v) Corals and Coral Reefs : Definition, Types(Fringing, Barrier , Atoll & Coral islands), and their
Formation
SECTION-B
(i) Introduction to Oceanic Currents: Types and Effects of the Oceanic Currents
(ii) Tides: Origin, Types ( Spring & Neap) and Effects
(iii) Oceanic Waves: Types, Wave length, Wave height, Wave period & Wave velocity
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
145
(iv) Oceans as store house of Resources for the future.

(v) Marine Pollution: Meaning, Causes, Effects & Controls.
1. Sidhratha, k. (2012): Oceanography: A brief introduction, S.K. Enterprises, New Delhi
2. Denny, M., (2008) : How the Ocean works: An introduction to Oceanography, Princeton
University Press, New Jersey.
3. Garrison, T. (2007) : Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science, Thomson, Brooks/ Cole.
4. Kerhsaw, S. (2004) : Oceanography: An Earth Science Perspective, Routledge, UK.
5. Shanna, RC. and V. Vatal, (2011) : Oceanography for Geographers, Chatanaya Publishing,
Allahabad.
6. Stewart, RH. (2009) : Introduction to Physical Oceanography, Texas A & M University, US.
1. Garrison, T. (1995) : Essentials of Oceanography Wardsworth Pub. Co., London.
2. La], BS. (2003) : Oceanography, Sharda Pustak Bhawan, Allahabad.
3. Sieboldt. E., and Berger, W.H. (1994) : The Sea Floor. 2nd ed., Freeman, New York.
4. Von Arx, W.S., (I962) : An Introduction to Physical Oceanography, Addison. Wesley, New
York.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
146
Semester-IV
Geography: Geography of Disaster Management
Time Allowed: 3 hours Total Teaching Periods: 60

Maximum Marks: 100 Pass Marks: 35%
Written Paper: 50 Marks Practical: 30 Marks
Course Outcome : Student will be able to
 Learn about both types of Disasters, i.e., Natural and Anthropogenic
 Learn about how to reduce and mitigate the impact of disasters
 Learn about managing both situations, i.e., pre and post disaster

C will consist of 9 short-answer type questions, covering the entire syllabus uniformly and will

(i) Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B of the
question paper and the entire section C is compulsory.
(ii) Candidates are allowed to use outline stencil maps of the world/continents/countries. They
OBJECTIVES
1. To aware the students about the Natural and Manmade Disasters.
2. Aim of the study to reduce the occurrence of Disasters and the impact of those that cannot
be prevented.
3. Mitigation is the key factor in Disaster Management that can be deployed to minimize the
effects of hazards in strike areas.
4. To boost up the participation and awareness among the people about Disasters.
5. To prepare the students for Competitive Exams.
SECTION – A
1. Meaning, Definition, Aim, Scope and Importance of Disaster Management in Geography
2. Principles of Disaster Management
3. Components of Disaster Management
4. Natural and Manmade Disasters: Causes, Impacts and Mitigation;
SECTION – B
1. Role of Information, Education and Communication in Disaster Management
2. Rehabilitation, Reconstruction and Recovery in Disaster Management
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
147
3. Disaster Management in India.

4. Role and Function of WHO and Khalsa Aid in Disaster Recovery
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Singh, Jagbir: Disaster Management: Future Challenges and opportunities, I.K.International
Publishing house Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2018
2. R Subramanian: Disaster Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Noida, 2018
3. Gaurang N. Gandhi (Dr.): Disaster Management, Shree Niwas Publications, Jaipur, 2019
4. Singh, Gorakh (Dr.): Geography of Disaster Management, Zora Publications, Patiala, 2019
5. M.K. Hariharan & R. Rajeswari: Managing Disasters, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai,
2014
6. Bhandari, Rajendra Kumar: Disaster Education and Management: A joyride for students,
Teachers and Disaster Managers, Springer New Delhi, 2014
7. Damon P. Coppola: Introduction to International Disaster Management, Butterworth-
Heinemann, Jordan Hill, Oxford, UK, 2007
8. Khanna, Bhagat Kumar: Disasters: Strengthening community Migration and Preparedness,
NIPA Publications, 2011
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
148
SEMESTER-III
THEATRE STUDIES
5 Credits: 2H(L) + 6H(P)
Course Outcome: The student will learn to:
 Theory and Behaviour of play direction and learn about selection of
scripts,interpretation, blocking and stage craft.
 Western theatre tradition.
 Learn about realistic and non -realistic acting theory.
 Learn make up, costume,lighting and back ground music and development of Punjbi
natak.
 Many different plays of famous playwright like Shamu shah, Dhamak nagaare di,king
mirja te shapers,injj hoeya insaff, kal aaj te bhalakand tatti tavi da sach.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PAPER SETTER FOR THEORY
The Question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Eight questions will be set from the
section A & B, four from each section, carrying six marks each. Nine short questions will be set
from section C, covering the entire syllabus, of two marks each.
Candidates are required to attempt four questions from section A and B, two questions from
each sections, carrying six marks each. Section C is compulsory consisting Nine questions, two
marks each. Section C is of 18 marks.
{THEORY}
SECTION - A
1. BkNe dk fBod/PB L f;XKs s/ ftjko
2. ;eofgN dh u'D, fJzNogN/PB, pbkfezr, wzu ftT[As
3. gZSwh BkN gozgok dh gSkD
SECTION - B
1. Pkw{ Pkj ^ nkJhH;hH Bzdk
(P?e;ghno d/ BkNe wou?AN nk| thB; dk gzikph o{gKso)
2H Xwe Brko/ dh ^ r[oPoB f;zx
3H fezr fwoIk s/ ;g/ok ^ ;[oihs f;zx ;/mh
PRACTICALS
1. Enactment of a character from the play's prescribed for study.
2. Mimicry of any character observed in life.
3. Attendance will stand for 10 Marks according to the following percentage of attendance.
There will not be any mark below 75%.
75% = 2 Marks
76% to 80% = 4 Marks
81% to 85% = 6 Marks
86% to 90% = 8 Marks
91% to 100% = 10 Marks
PRESCRIBED BOOKS
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
149
 Aatamjit, Natak Da Nirdeshan (Punjabi), Punjab State University Text Book Board,
Chandigarh, 1989.
 Charlotte Lee & David Grote, Theatre : Preparation and performance, Scott Foresman and
Company, Glenview, Ilinois, 1982.
 Kewal Dhaliwal, Rangkarmi Di Teesrai Akh, Ravi Sahit Parkashan, Amritsar, 2006.
 O.G.Brockett : The Essential Theatre, Holt Rinehart & Winston Inc., Newyork.
 Parkash Syal (Dr.),Navnindra Behl (Dr.), Abhinai Kala (Pbi.), Publication Bureau, Pbi.Uni.
Patiala,1994.
 Surjit Singh Sethi (Dr.) Sirjinatmic Natik Nirdeshan (Punjabi), Publication Bureau, Pbi. Uni.,
Patiala,1985.
 Satish Kumar Verma, Punjabi Natak Da Itihas, Punjabi Academy, Delhi, 2005.
 Sare De Sare Natak-Ishwar Channder Nanda (Punjabi), (Ed) Prof. Harcharan Singh,
Publication Bureau Punjabi University Patiala, 1988.
 Atamjit, Natak Da Nirdeshan (Punjabi), Punjab State University Text Book Board, Chandigarh,
1989.
 ;shP e[wko towk, ozrwzu dh f;oiD^gqfefonk, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh, gfNnkbk, 2017
 nwtk nwbrI qy ieiqhws, fw. prmjIq vrmw, iSlwlyK, id`lI
 rMg-mMc: isrjnw qy sMvwd, sMpwdk fw. prmjIq vrmw, iSlwlyK id`lI
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
150
SEMESTER-IV
THEATRE STUDIES
5 Credits: 2H(L) + 6H(P)

Course Outcome: The student will learn to:
 Theory and Behaviour of play direction and learn about selection of
scripts,interpretation, blocking and stage craft.
 Western theatre tradition.
 Learn about realistic and non -realistic acting theory.
 Learn make up, costume,lighting and back ground music and development of Punjbi
natak.
 Many different plays of famous playwright like Shamu shah, Dhamak nagaare di,king
mirja te shapers,injj hoeya insaff, kal aaj te bhalakand tatti tavi da sach.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PAPER SETTER FOR THEORY

The Question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Eight questions will be set from the
section A & B, four from each section, carrying six marks each. Nine short questions will be set
from section C, covering the entire syllabus, of two marks each.
Candidates are required to attempt four questions from section A and B, two questions from
each sections, carrying six marks each. Section C is compulsory consisting Nine questions, two
marks each. Section C is of 18 marks.
{THEORY}
SECTION - A
1. nfGB? P?bhnK ^ :EkoEtkdh s/ r?o :EkoEtkdh

2. w/enZg, gfjoktk, o'PBh ftT[As, fgS'eV ;zrhs
3. gzikph BkNe dk ftek;ô[\
SECTION - B
1. fJzzi j'fJnk fJB;k| ^ pos'bs po?\s
(gzikph nB[tkd L ;shP e[wko towk)
2H ebQ, nZi s/ Gbe ^ jouoB f;zx
3H sZsh sth dk ;Zu ^ nkswihs
PRACTICALS
1. Improvisations can be given to students to explore their acting capabilities.
2. Enactment of a character from the play proscribed for study.
3. Attendance will stand for 10 Marks according to the following percentage of
attendance. There will not be any mark below 75%.
75% = 2 Marks
76% to 80% = 4 Marks
81% to 85% = 6 Marks
86% to 90% = 8 Marks
91% to 100% = 10 Marks
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
151
PRESCRIBED BOOKS
 Aatamjit, Natak Da Nirdeshan (Punjabi), Punjab State University Text Book Board,
Chandigarh, 1989.
 Charlotte Lee & David Grote, Theatre : Preparation and performance, Scott Foresman and
Company, Glenview, Ilinois, 1982.
 Harcharan Singh, Kal Aaj Te Bhalak, Arsi Publishers, Delhi, 2004.
 Harcharan Singh, Mitti Dhund Jag Chanan Hoya, Singh Brothers, Amritsar, 1987.
 Kewal Dhaliwal, Rangkarmi Di Teesrai Akh, Ravi Sahit Parkashan, Amritsar, 2006.
 O.G.Brockett : The Essential Theatre, Holt Rinehart & Winston Inc., Newyork.
 Parkash Syal (Dr.),Navnindra Behl (Dr.), Abhinai Kala (Pbi.), Publication Bureau, Pbi.Uni.
Patiala,1994.
 Surjit Singh Sethi (Dr.) Sirjinatmic Natik Nirdeshan (Punjabi), Publication Bureau, Pbi.Uni.,
Patiala,1985.
 Satish Kumar Verma, Punjabi Natak Da Itihas, Punjabi Academy, Delhi, 2005.
 Parkash Syal (Dr.)Navnindra Behl (Dr.),Abhinai Kala (Punjabi), Publication Bureau, Punjabi
University, Patiala, 1994.
 Sabinderjit Singh Sagar,Punjabi Natak Da Itihas (Vol-1), Waris Shah Foundation, Amritsar,1998.
 Btdhg e"o, gzikph BkNe dk ftek;ô[\, fPbkb/y, fdZbh, 2015
 AiBnY dy iviBMn rUp, sMpwdk fw. vMdnw kpUr, grISIAs bUks, pitAwlw
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
152
SEMESTER - IIIrd
Gurmat Sangeet
PAPER-A
HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL STUDY OF GURMAT SANGEET
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO3 (A) (Paper-A Historical and Theoretical Study of Gurmat Sangeet)
The students understand the contribution of Guru Ramdas Ji and Guru Arjan Dev ji to Gurmat
Sangeet the concept & importance of Purav Raga, Utar Raga, Ashreya Raga. They will be able to
understand the the importance of Sodar Di Chownki and Sikh way of life.
(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have
four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each.
Section C will consist of 08 objective/short type questions which will cover the entire
SECTION - A
1. Technical Terminology:
Purav-Raag, Uttar-Raag, Ashraya Raag, Janak Raag, Janya Raag, Vakar Sur, Sur Malikaa,
Dhrupad Ang Da Shabad Gayan, Dakhnee Raag Prakaar, Keertaniyaa, Torhha, Tukrhha,
Tihaaee, Paltaa.
2. Contribution of Guru Ram Das Ji and Guru Arjun Dev Ji in the development of Gurmat
Sangeet.
3. Keertan Chaunki tradition in the Sikh way of life.
4. Introduction of Asa Di Vaar and Sodar Di Keertan Chaunki.
SECTION - B
1. Detailed description of the prescribed ragas of the syllabus with notation: Suhee,
Wadhans, Gujree, Todi, Saarang.
2. Detailed description with notation in Ekgun and Dugun of prescribed talas: Soolfaak,
Deepchaṅdı̇ , Punjabi-Theekaa-Teentaal.
3. Introduction of the following in English:
a. Guru Nanak Dev ji
b. Any two Raags and taals of your syllabus.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
153
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
1. Sri Guru Graṅth Sahib Raag Ratnawali by Prof. Tara Singh: Punjabi University, Patiala.
2. Gurmat Sangeet Prabandh te Paasaar by Dr. Gurnam Siṅgh: Puṅjabi University, Patiala.
3. Sangit Gurmat Sangeet Vishesh Ank: Sangeet Karayalaya, Hathras.
4. Amrit Kirtan (Gurmat Sangeet Vishesh Ank): Amrit Kirtan Trust, Chandigarh
5. Gurmat Saṅgīt Vishesh Ank, edited Dr. Jasbīr Kaur, Punjabi University, Patiālā
6. Guru Nanak Saṅgīt Padhti Granth Part I & II, edited by Sukhwant Singh: Gur Gian
Prakash, Jawaddi Kalan, Ludhiaṇa.
7. Sangeet Roop, Part-I,II,III by Dr. Devinder Kaur: Sangitaṅjali Publications, Patiala.
8. Sri Guru Granth Sahib Raag Ratnakar by Dr. Gurnam Singh: S.G.P.C., Amritsar.
9. Raag Naad Shabad Sohane by Dr. Kanwaljit Singh, Singh Brothers, Amritsar.
10. Gurmat Sangeet: Kirtani Aasa Di Var by Dr. Kanwaljit Singh, Gurmat Parkāshan, Patiala.
11. Gurmat Saṅgeet Daa Sangeet Vigyan, by Dr. Varinder Kaur, Amarjit Prakashan, Patiala.
12. Tabla Vadan Part-I,II (Dr. Jagmohan Sharma) Punjabi University, Publication.
13. Gurmat Sangeet terminology, Publication Beuro, Punjabi University, Publication.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
154
SEMESTER – IIIrd
STAGE CUM VIVA
PAPER- B
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO3 (B) ( Paper- Stage cum Viva)
The students will develop the ability to sing Chant, Alhunian in Raga Vadhans, Shukrana
di Kirtan Chownki .They will also learn to sing Anand Karaj Kirtan in Ragas.
(iii) Harmonium is allowed as an accompaniment. Preference will be given to be students
reciting Shabad Kirtan along with string instruments of Gurmat Sangeet.
1. Musical presentation of Shabad composition in each of the following Raags with brief
introduction.
Suhi, Wadhans, Gujri, Todi, Sarang.
2. Keertan of 9th to 12th Chhants of Asa Di Var.
3. Anand Kaaraj Di Keertan Chouki in following Rags: Suhi, Sarang, Raamkali (Anand
Sahib)
 ;kB ns/ wzrbkuoB (okr r[ioh)
 jG/ ;ke e[[Vkt/ fvm/ sT[ gZb/ s?v/ bkrh
 bktK (okr ;{jh)
 nBzd ;kfjp (okr okwebh)
 thnkj[ j'nk w/o/ pkp[bk
 g{oh nk;k ih wB;k w/o/ okw
4. Shukraanee Di Keertan Chouki in following Raags: Gujri, Todi, Raamkali, Anand Sahib
a) Raag Gujri - Shan + Manglacharan + Dhrupad Ang Da Shabad
b) Raag Todi - Shukrane Da Shabad (Khyaal Ang)
c) Raag Ramkali - Anand Sahib
5. Practical performance of Theka of following Taals on Tabla and by Hast-Vidhi with
ekgun, dugun Layakaries - Soolfaak, Deepchaṅdi, Puṅjabi-Theeka Teentaal.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
155
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
1 Sri Guru Granth Sahib Raag Ratnakar, Gurnam singh (Dr.), Shiromani Gurdwara
Prabandhak Committe, Sri Amritsar
2 Gurmat Sangeet: Prabandh te Pasaar Gurnam Singh (Dr.) Punjabi University Patiala.
3 Gurmat Sangeet da Sangeet Vigyan, Varinder Kaur (Dr.), Amarjit Sahit Parkashan Patiala
4 Gurmat Sangeet Terminology, Gurnam Singh (Dr.), Punjabi University Patiala.
5 Gurmat Sangeet (5 Parts), Dharam Parchar Committee, Central Yatimkhana (Chief
Khalsa Diwan), Sri Amritsar.
6 Gurmat Sangeet di Takniki Shabdavli Sroop te paribahsagat vishleshan, Gurdev Singh
(Dr.)Internation Publisher Chandigarh.
7 Tabla Vaadan, Part I, Jagmohan Sharma (Dr.) Punjabi University Patiala
8 Tabla Vaadan, Part II, Manmohan Kumar Sharma, Punjabi University Patiala
9 Gurmat sangeet Aank, Lakshami Narayan Garg (Dr.) (Edi) Sangeet Karyala Hatras
10 Indian Classical Music & Sikh Kirtan, Gobind Singh Mansukhani Oxford IBH
Publishing, New Delhi
11 Gurmat Sangeet di itihasik Vilahanta, Jasbir Kaur (Dr.), Bhai Chatar Singh, Jiwan singh
Amritsar.
12 Gurmat Sangeet: Vishesh Aank Samajik Vigyan Patar, Dhanwant Kaur (Editor in Chief)
Punjabi University Patiala
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
156
SEMESTER - IVth
Gurmat Sangeet
PAPER-A
HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL STUDY OF GURMAT SANGEET
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO4 (A)- (Paper-A Historical and Theoretical Study of Gurmat Sangeet)
The students will be able to understand the contribution of Siri Hargobind Sahib ji and Guru Har
Rai ji and also the difference between Gurmat Sangeet and Hindustani Sangeet, Classification
of ragas and music terminology like Shruti Kan Meend, Andolan, Khtaka Muriki etc.
(iii) The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have
four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each.
Section C will consist of 08 objective/short type questions which will cover the entire
(iv) While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter for theory paper the syllabus prescribed for
SECTION - A
1. Technical Terminology: Shruti, Anuvaadi, Vivaadi, Kan, Meend, Andolan, Khatkaa,
Murki, Sudhang, Thhaa, Doon, Lagi, Shabad Reet, Pade, Vaar.
2. Contribution of Sri Guru Hargobind Sahib ji, Guru Har Rai ji in the development of
Gurmat Sangeet.
3. Difference between Gurmat Sangeet and Hindustani Sangeet.
4. Classification of Ragas of Gurmat Sangeet.
SECTION - B
1 Detailed description of the prescribed ragas with notation:
Gond, Kedara, Siri, Jaitsiri, Bihaagrha.
2 Detailed description with notation in Ekgun and Dugun of prescribed talas:
Aarha Chautaal, Phrodast, Dhamaar.
3 Introduction of the following in English:
a) Bhai Mardana Ji
b) Your Instrument.
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
1. Sri Guru Graṅth Sahib Raag Ratnawali by Prof. Tara Singh: Punjabi University, Patiala.
2. Gurmat Sangeet Prabandh te Paasaar by Dr. Gurnam Siṅgh: Puṅjabi University, Patiala.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
157
3. Sangit Gurmat Sangeet Vishesh Ank: Sangeet Karayalaya, Hathras.

4. Amrit Kirtan (Gurmat Sangeet Vishesh Ank): Amrit Kirtan Trust, Chandigarh
5. Gurmat Saṅgīt Vishesh Ank, edited Dr. Jasbīr Kaur, Punjabi University, Patiālā
6. Guru Nanak Saṅgīt Padhti Granth Part I & II, edited by Sukhwant Singh: Gur Gian
Prakash, Jawaddi Kalan, Ludhiaṇa.
7. Sangeet Roop, Part-I,II,III by Dr. Devinder Kaur: Sangitaṅjali Publications, Patiala.
10. Gurmat Sangeet: Kirtani Aasa Di Var by Dr. Kanwaljit Singh, Gurmat Parkāshan, Patiala.
11. Gurmat Saṅgeet Daa Sangeet Vigyan, by Dr. Varinder Kaur, Amarjit Prakashan, Patiala.
12. Tabla Vadan Part-I,II (Dr. Jagmohan Sharma) Punjabi University, Publication.
13. Gurmat Sangeet terminology, Publication Bureo, Punjabi University, Publication.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
158
SEMESTER – IVth
STAGE CUM VIVA
PAPER- B
Max Marks : 50
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO4 (B)-(Stage cum Viva)
The students will develop the ability to sing in Raga Gond, Kedaaraa, Siri, Jaitsri, Bihaagrhaa,
Kirtan of Alhunia, Tala of Gurmat Sangeet like Arha-Chautaal and Phrodast, Dhamaar.
(iii) Harmonium is allowed as an accompaniment. Preference will be given to be students
reciting Shabad Kirtan along with string instruments of Gurmat Sangeet.
1. Shabad Gayan in each of the following Raags with brief introduction :

Gond, Kedaaraa, Siri, Jaitsiri, Bihaagrhaa.
2. Keertan of 13th to 16th Chhants of Asaa Di Vaar.
3. Keertan of Alhunia
4 Practical performance of Thheka of following talas on Tabla and by Hast Vidhi
with ekgun, dugun Layakaries - Arha-Chautaal, Phrodast, Dhamaar.
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
1. Sri Guru Granth Sahib Rag Ratnawali by Prof. Tara Singh: Punjabi University, Patiala.
2. Gurmat Sangeet Prabandh te Paasaar by Dr. Gurnam Singh: Punjabi University, Patiala.
3. Sangeet Gurmat Sang ̣eet Vishesh Ank: Sangeet Kaaraayaalaya, Hathras.
4. Amrit Keertan (Gurmat Sangeet Vishesh Ank): Amrit Keertan Trust, Chandigarh
5. Punjab Da Sangeet Virsa Te Vikas by Dr. D.S. Narula: Punjabi Writers cooperative
society, New Delhi
6. Gurmat Sangeet Vishesh Ank, edited Dr. Jasbir Kaur, Punjabi University, Patiala
7. Guru Nanak Sangeet Padhti Granth Part I & II, edited by Sukhwant Singh: Gur Gian
Prakash, Jawaddi Kalan, Ludhiana.
8. Sangeet Sidhaant Te Sohaj Shaster by Dr. D.S. Narula: Punjabi University, Patiala.
9. Sangeet Roop, Part-I, II,III by Dr. Devinder Kaur: Sangitaṅjali Publications, Patiala.
12.Gurmat Sangeet: Kirtani Asa Di Vaar by Dr. Kanwaljit Singh, Gurmat Parkashan, Patiala.
APPROVED
Chairperson
Board of Studies
159
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ROAD SAFETY AWARENESS

4 CREDIT: 4H (L)
Time Allowed: 3 hours Total: 100 marks
Total lectures: 50 Pass marks: 35 %
Theory Paper: 70 marks
CO-1: Aware the students about need of conservation and protection of natural resources.
CO-2: Understanding the basics of science of biodiversity in ecological relationship.
CO-3: Students integrate knowledge from multiple disciplines representing physical & life
sciences perspectives, political & economic perspectives on human interaction with their
environment.
CO-4: Analyze traffic characteristics of roadway
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consists of 15
short-answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 30 marks in
all.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR CANDIDATES
Candidates are required to attempt two questions from each section A and B and the entire section C.
Section – A
Unit 1: Introduction to Environmental Studies (2 Lectures)
 Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies.
 Scope and importance; Concept of sustainability and sustainable development.
Unit 2: Eco System (6 Lectures)
 What is an ecosystem? Structure and function of ecosystem; Energy flow in an ecosystem:
food chains, food webs and ecological succession. Case studies of the following ecosystems:
a) Forest ecosystem
b) Grassland ecosystem
c) Desert ecosystem
d) Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries)
Unit 3: Natural Resources: Renewable and Non Renewable Resources (8 Lectures)
 Land resource and land use change; Land degradation, soil erosion and desertification.
 Deforestation: Causes and impacts due to mining, dam building on environment, forests,
biodiversity and tribal populations.
 Water: Use and over-exploitation of surface and ground water, floods, droughts, conflicts over
water (international and inter-state).
 Energy resources: Renewable and non-renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy
sources, growing energy needs, case studies.
Unit 4: Biodiversity and Conservation (8 Lectures)
 Levels of biological diversity: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity; Biogeographic zones
of India; Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots.
 India as mega-biodiversity nation; Endangered and endemic species of India.
 Threats of biodiversity: Habitat Loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts, biological
invasions; Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.
 Ecosystem and biodiversity services, Ecological, Economic, social ethical, aesthetic and
Informational value.
Section B
Unit 5: Environmental Pollution (8 Lectures)
 Environmental Pollution: types, causes, effects and controls; Air, water, soil and noise
pollution.
 Nuclear hazards and human health risks.
160
 Solid waste management: Control measures of urban and industrial waste.

 Pollution case studies.
Unit 6: Environmental Policies and Practices (7 Lectures)
 Climate change, global warming, ozone layer depletion, acid rain and impacts on human
communities and agriculture.
 Environment Laws: Environment Protection Act; Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act;
water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act; Wildlife Protection Act; Forest Conservation
Act, International agreements: Montreal and Kyoto protocols and Convention on Biological
Diversity (CBD)
 Nature reserves, tribal populations and rights, and human wildlife conflicts in Indian Context.
Unit 7: Human Communities and the Environment (6 Lectures)
 Human population growth: Impacts on environment, human health and welfare.
 Resettlement and rehabilitation of project affected persons; case studies.
 Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclones and landslides.
 Environmental movements: Chipko, silent valley, Bishnois of Rajasthan.
 Environmental ethics: Role of Indian and other religions and cultures in environmental
conservation.
 Environmental communication and public awareness, case studies (eg. CNG vehicles in Delhi).
Unit8: Road safety Awareness (6 Lectures)
 Concept and significance of Road safety.
 Traffic signs.
 Traffic rules.
 Traffic Offences and penalties.
 How to obtain license.
 Role of first aid in Road Safety.
Field work (Internal Assessment based on Project file in lieu of assignments)
(Equal to 5 lectures)
 Visit to an area to document environmental assets: river/forest/flora/fauna, etc.
 Visit to local polluted site-urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural.
 Study of common plants, insects, birds and basic principles of identification.
 Study of simple ecosystems-pond, river, Delhi Ridge etc.
Suggested Readings:
1. Carson, R. 2002. Silent Spring. Houghton Mifflin Harcourt.
2. Gadgil, M., & Guha, R. 1993. This Fissured Land: An Ecological History of India. Univ. of
California Press.
3. Gleeson, B. and Low, N. (eds.) 1999. Global Ethics and Environment, London, Routledge.
4. Gleick, P. H. 1993. Water in Crisis. Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment &
Security. Stockholm Env. Institute, Oxford Univ. Press.
5. Groom, Martha J., Gary K. Meffe, and Carl Ronald Carroll. Principles of Conservation
Biology. Sunderland: Sinauer Associates, 2006.
6. Grumbine, R. Edward, and Pandit, M.K. 2013. Threats from India’s Himalaya dams. Science,
339: 36-37.
7. Kumar, N. 2015. Environmental and Road Safety Awareness. R.D. Publications, Jalandhar.
8. McCully, P. 1996. Rivers no more: the environmental effects of dams (pp. 29-‐64). Zed Books.
9. McNeill, John R. 2000. Something New Under the Sun: An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century.
10. Odum, E.P., Odum, H.T. & Andrews, J. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. Philadelphia:
Saunders.
11. Pepper, I.L., Gerba, C.P. & Brusseau, M.L. 2011. Environmental and Pollution Science.
Academic Press.
12. Rao, M.N. & Datta, A.K. 1987. Waste Water Treatment. Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt.
Ltd.
161
13. Raven, P.H., Hassenzahl, D.M. & Berg, L. R. 2012. Environment. 8th edition. John Wiley &
Sons.
14. Rosencranz, A., Divan, S., & Noble, M. L. 2001. Environmental law and policy in India.
Tripathi 1992.
15. Sengupta, R. 2003. Ecology and economics: An approach to sustainable development. Oxford
University Press.
16. Sharma, P.D. 2007. Ecology and Environment. Rastogi Publication.
17. Singh, J.S., Singh, S.P. and Gupta, S.R. 2014. Ecology, Environmental Science and
Conservation. S. Chand Publishing, New Delhi.
18. Sodhi, N.S., Gibson, L. & Raven, P.H. (eds). 2013. Conservation Biology: Voices from the
Tropics. John Wiley & Sons.
19. Thapar, V. 1998. Land of the Tiger: A Natural History of the Indian Subcontinent.
20. Warren, C. E. 1971. Biology and Water Pollution Control. WB Saunders.
21. Wilson, E. O. 2006. The Creation: An appeal to save life on earth. New York: Norton.
22. World Commission on Environment and Development. 1987. Our Common Future. Oxford
University Press.
ORDINANCES
AND
OUTLINES OF TESTS,
FOR
BACHELOR OF ARTS PART-III
(B.A.-III)
(2021-22)

smYstr-pMjvW
pypr - pµjwbI lwzmI 1
kRYift :4 AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRqI h&qw : 05
ku~l Aµk : 100 ivSy iv~coN pws Aµk : 35%
not : ividAwrQIAW v`loN pws hox leI ilKqI pRIiKAw AqyAMdrUnI mulWkxdy AMkW ivcoN Al`g-
Al`g qOr ’qy 35% AMk lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. ies ivSy dy mwiDAm rwhIN ividAwrQI glpI vwqwvrx nUM smJ ky s`c Aqy JUT dw inKyVw krdw hoieAw nYiqk jIvn
jwc nUM Apnwaux dy Xog ho jWdw hY[
2. purwqn prMprwvW, rIqI-irvwj, iq`Q-iqauhwr, irSqw-nwqw pRxwlI dI jwxkwrI hwisl krky AwDuink kwl rwhIN
bdl rhy lokDwrweI pirpyKW nwl qulnw krn dy smr`Q ho jWdw hY[
3. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI Sbd qoN lY ky vwk p`Dr q`k v`K-v`K Sbd SRyxIAW dy AiDAYn qoN Su`D BwSw ilKx qy smJx dy
smr`Q ho jWdw hY[
4. ividAwrQI hornW BwSwvW nUM Anuvwd krky Anuvwdk dy qOr’qy ruzgwr pRwpq krn dy Xog bx skdw hY[
pwT kRm Aqy pwT pusqk
Bwg- a
mVHI dw dIvw(nwvl)– guridAwl isMG
Bwg- A
I. ivAwkrn
(a) nWv vwkMS: pirBwSw, bxqr Aqy pRkwr
(A) ikirAw vwkMS: pirBwSw, bxqr Aqy pRkwr
II. lyK rcnw (ividAk,siBAwcwrk Aqy clMq msilAW nwl sbMiDq)
Bwg- e
Bwg a Aqy A.IivAkrn vwly Bwg ’qy AwDwirq sMKyp auqrW vwly pMdrW pRSn[
1. pypr sYtr, pRSn p`qr nUM auprokq inrDwirq pwT kRm dy Bwg a,A Aqy e Anuswr vMfygw[
2.nwvl dw ivSw vsqU/ swr/ klw p`K/ lyKk dw Xogdwn[ (do ivcoN iek) 12 AMk3.
nwvl dy pwqrW dw pwqr icqrn[(cwr ivcoN do) 4+4=8 AMk
4. ivAwkrn vwly Bwg ivcoN vrxwqmk pRSn[(do ivcoN iek) 12Aµk
5. lyK rcnw (iqMn iv`coN ie`k) 8 AMk
6.nwvl Aqy ivAwkrn A-Ivwly Bwg iv`coN sMKyp au~qrW vwly pMdrW lwzmI pRSn pu~Cy
jwxgy[hryk pRSn 2 AMkW dw hovygw[ 15x2=30 AMk
Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgyAqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw ih`sw hovygI[ ies
leI do pIirAf pRiq h&qw lgwey jwxgy Aqy ividAwrQI hyT ilKy kwrj krngy[
- isrjxwqmk swihq sbMDI irport iqAwr krnw
- pwTkRm nwl sbMiDq AsweImYNt iqAwr krn
shwiek sm`grI
1. ikSn isMG,guridAwl isMG dI nwvl cyqnw,lokgIq pRkwSn, cMfIgVH, 1986.
2. prmjIq kOr, guridAwl isMG dI siBAwcwrk cyqnw, XUunIstwr buks, muhwlI, 2015.
3. nrivMdr isMG, guridAwl isMG dw glp pYrwfweIm, lwhOr bu`k Swp, luiDAwxw,jUn 1985.
4. dunI cMdr, pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrn, pMjwb XUnIvristI, cMfIgV, 1964.
5. fw. hrkIrq isMG, rUpWqrI ivAwkrx, pMjwb styt XUnIvristI tYkst bu`k borf,cMfIgVH[
6. joigMdr isMG puAwr Aqy hor, pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrn (Bwg-3), pMjwbI BwSw AkwdmI,
jlMDr,1994.
7. fw. hrkIrq isMG qy igAwnI lwl isMG, kwlj pMjwbI ivAwkrx qy lyK-mwlw, pMjwb styt
XUnIvristI tYkst bu~k borf, cMfIgVH[
8. bUtw isMG brwV, pMjwbI ivAwkrn: isDWq qy ivhwr, cyqnw pRkwSn, luiDAwxw,2008.
smYstr-CyvW
pypr - pµjwbI lwzmI 2
kRYift : 4 AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRqI h&qw :
05
ilKqI pRIiKAw : 70 Aµk AµdrUnI mulWkx : 30
Aµk
not : ividAwrQIAW v`loN pws hox leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW ivcoN
Al`g-Al`g qOr ’qy 35% AMk lYxy zrUrI hn[
Course Outcome:
1. ies ivSy dy mwiDAm rwhIN ividAwrQI glpI vwqwvrx nUM smJ ky s`c Aqy JUT dw inKyVw krdw
hoieAw nYiqk jIvn jwc nUM Apnwaux dy Xog ho jWdw hY[
2. purwqn prMprwvW, rIqI-irvwj, iq`Q-iqauhwr, irSqw-nwqw pRxwlI dI jwxkwrI hwisl krky
AwDuink kwl rwhIN bdl rhy lokDwrweI pirpyKW nwl qulnw krn dy smr`Q ho jWdw hY[
3. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI Sbd qoN lY ky vwk p`Dr q`k v`K-v`K Sbd SRyxIAW dy AiDAYn qoN Su`D BwSw
ilKx qy smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdw hY[
4. ividAwrQI hornW BwSwvW nUM Anuvwd krky Anuvwdk dy qOr’qy ruzgwr pRwpq krn dy Xog bx
skdw hY[
pwT kRm Aqy pwT pusqk

Bwg-a
lokDwrw dI BUimkw,sMpw. fw. BuipMdr isMG Kihrw, fw. surjIq isMG,pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
Bwg-A
I. ivAwkrn
1. kwrk Aqy kwrkI sbMD
2.vwkwqmk jugqW-myl Aqy AiDkwr
II. srl AMgryzI pYrHy dw pMjwbI ivc Anuvwd
Bwg-e
Bwg a Aqy A.IivAkrn vwly Bwg ’qy AwDwirq sMKyp a~uqrW vwly pMdrW pRSn[
1.pypr sYtr, pRSn p`qr nUM auprokq inrDwirq pwT kRm dy Bwg a,A Aqy e Anuswr vMfygw[
2.iksy iek inbMD dw ivSw vsqU/swr[(do ivcoN iek) 12 AMk3. inbMDW ivcly ivcwrW sbMDI
pRSn[ (cwr ivcoN do) 4+4=08 AMk
4. ivAwkrn vwly BwgivcoN vrxwqmk pRSn[ (do ivcoN iek) 12 AMk
5. srl AMgryzI pYrHy dw pMjwbI ivc Anuvwd[ 08 AMk
6.Bwg-e ivc pwT-pusqk Aqy ivAwkrn vwly BwgivcoN sMKyp au~qrW vwly 15lwzmI pRSn
pùCy jwxgy[hryk pRSn 2 AMkW dw hovygw[ 15x2=30 AMk
AMdrUnI mulWkx 30
AMk
Pwiel iqAwr kIqI jwvygI ijs dy Aµk inSicq hoxgyAqy ieh AMdrUnI mulWkx dw ih`sw hovygI[ ies
leI do pIirAf pRiq h&qw lgwey jwxgy Aqy ividAwrQI hyT ilKy kwrj krngy[
- isrjxwqmk swihq sbMDI irport iqAwr krnw
- pwTkRm nwl sbMiDq AsweImYNt iqAwr krn
shwiek pusqk sUcI
1. dunI cMdr, pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrn, pMjwb XUnIvristI, cMfIgV, 1964. 3
2. fw. hrkIrq isMG, rUpWqrI ivAwkrx, pMjwb styt XUnIvristI tYkst bu`k borf,cMfIgVH[
3. joigMdr isMG puAwr Aqy hor, pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrn-Bwg-3, pMjwbI BwSw AkwdmI,
jlMDr,1994.
4. fw. hrkIrq isMG qy igAwnI lwl isMG, kwlj pMjwbI ivAwkrx qy lyK-mwlw, pMjwb styt
XUnIvristI tYkst bu~k borf, cMfIgVH[
5. fw.bldyv isMG cImw, pMjwbI BwSw ivigAwn: qknIkI SbdwvlI dw koS,pMjwbI
XUnIvristI,pitAwlw.
smYstr-pMjvW
pMjwbI lwzmI (mu`Flw igAwn/Elementary Punjabi) 4
kRYift : 4 AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRqI h&qw : 05
not: ividAwrQIAW v`loN pws hox leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW ivcoN Al`g-
Course Outcome :
1. bwhrly rwjW dy ividAwrQI pMjwbI siBAwcwr dI jwxkwrI hwisl krdy hoey, pMjwb dy ik`qy,
rIqI-irvwj, vihm-Brm, pMjwb dIAW lok–KyfW qoN jwxU hox dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
2. bwhrly rwjW dy ividAwrQI pMjwbI siBAcwr dI jwxkwrI rwhIN pMjwbI smwj nUM smJx qy ivcrn
dy Xog ho jWdy hn[
3. pMjwbI ivAwkrn rwhIN ividAwrQI pMjwbI BwSw dI vwk bxqr nUM smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
pwTkRm Aqy pwT pusqk

pwT-pusqk lwzmI pMjwbI, sMpw. SRI mqI rijMdr cOhwn, pMjwb skUl isiKAw borf,swihbzwdw AjIq
isMG ngr,2015.
Bwg-a pwT-pusqk lwzmI pMjwbI dy pMjwbI siBAwcwr dI jwx-pCwx Bwg dy 1 qoN 4 q`k lyK[
Bwg–A ivAwkrn
(@A.1) ivAwkrink iekweIAW:pCwx Aqy sQwpqI dy AwDwr
(A.2) Axif`Tw pYrHw
Bwg-e pwTkRm dy Bwg a Aqy A.1’qy ADwirq sMKyp au`qrW vwly pRSn[
AMk vMf Aqy pypr sY~tr leI hdwieqW
1.pRSn dw p`Dr ividAwrQIAW dy bOiDk p`Dr Aqy auhnW dI BwSw is`Kx dI sImw nUM iDAwn ivc r`K
ky hI inSicq kIqw[ auhnW nUM srl Aqy sp`St pRSn hI pu`Cy jwx[
2.loV Anuswr ividAwrQIAW nUM Cot jW cox dyxI lwzmI hY[
3.pRSn swry BwgW iv`coN pùCy jwx[
4.lyKW dw sMKyp swr/ ivSw vsqU jW lyKW ivcoN hor koeI srl pRSn[(cwr iv`coN do) 9+9=18 AMk
5. Bwg A.1ivcoN ivAwkrink iekweIAW nwl sMbMiDq srl Aqy sMKyp pRSn( pMj ivcoN iqMn)
3× 4=12
AMk
6 Axif`Tw pYrHy dy ky aus ivcoN 5 pRSn pu`Cy jwx[hryk pRSn 2 AMk dw hovygw[ 10 AMk
7. Bwg a ‘qy AwDwirq sMKyp au`qrW vwly 8 pRSn Aqy A.1 ivcoN ivhwrk ivAwkrxk ivSlySx nwl
sbMDq 7 pRSn pu`Cy jwx[hryk pRSn dy 2 AMk hoxgy[ 15× 2 = 30
AMk
not: pRSn – p`qr pwT-kRm leI inrDwirq pwT pusqk ivcoN hI puìCAw jwvy[
not:-AiDAwpk, klws ivc ividAwrQIAW dI BwSw nUM Su`D rUp ivc bolx, ilKx dI muhwrq pYdw
krn Aqy aunHW dI bhu–p`KI s^SIAq auswrI leI pRYktIkl vjoN kMm krvwauxgy[bOiDk ivkws leI,
smwijk vrqwirAW nUM fUMGweI ivc smJx dI cyqnqw pYdw krn dy nwl-nwl aunHW AMdr swihqk rucI
nUM pRPil`q krn leI klws ivc ividAwrQIAW dy pwT-kRm nwl sMbMiDq gqIivDIAW nUM vI pYRktIkl
dw ih`sw bxwauxgy[AiDAwpk v`loN krvwey gey kwrjW ’qy AwDwirq ividAwrQIAW duAwrw iek Pwiel
iqAwr kIqI jwvygI[ies leI do pIirAf pRiq h&qw lgwey jwxgy[
shwiek pwT sm`grI
1. hrkIrq isMG(fw.) qy igAwnI lwl isMG, kwlj pMjwbI ivAwkrx qy lyK-mwlw, pMjwb styt 5
XUnIvristI tYkst bu~k borf, cMfIgVH ਜੀਤ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਜੋਸ਼ੀ, ਸਿਭਆਚਾਰ ਅਤੇ ਲੋ ਕਧਾਰਾ, ਵਾਿਰਸ ਸ਼ਾਹ ਫ਼ਾ ਡੇਸ਼ਨ,
ਅੰ ਿਮਤਸਰ, 1991
2. ਜਗੀਰ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਨੂਰ (ਡਾ.),ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਲੋ ਕ ਮਨਰੰ ਜਨ, ਸਰੋਤ ਅਤੇ ਪਰੰ ਪਰਾ, ਪਲਾਹਾ ਪਬਿਲਿਸ਼ੰ ਗ ਕੰ ਪਨੀ,ਜਲੰਧਰ, 2005.
3. joigMdr isMG puAwr Aqy hor, pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrn (Bwg-3), pMjwbI BwSw AkwdmI, jlMDr,1994.
4. bldyv isMG(fw.),joigMdr isMG puAwr, dyv AgnIhoqrI,suKivMdr isMG sMGw,pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrx,Bwg
dUjw, swihq AkwdmI id`lI
5. ਬਲਵੀਰ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਪੂਨੀ,ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਲੋ ਕਧਾਰਾ ਅਤੇ ਸਿਭਆਚਾਰ, ਵਾਿਰਸ ਸ਼ਾਹ ਫ਼ਾ ਡੇਸ਼ਨ, ਅੰ ਿਮਤਸਰ, 1992
smYstr-CyvW
pMjwbI lwzmI (mu`Flw igAwn/Elementary Punjabi) 6
kRYift : 4 AiDAwpn dy pIrIAf pRqI h&qw : 05
not : ividAwrQIAW v`loN pws hox leI ilKqI pRIiKAw Aqy AMdrUnI mulWkx dy AMkW ivcoN Al`g-
Course Outcome :
1. bwhrly rwjW dy ividAwrQI pMjwbI siBAwcwr dI jwxkwrI hwisl krdy hoey, pMjwb dy ik`qy,
rIqI-irvwj, vihm-Brm, pMjwb dIAW lok–KyfW qoN jwxU hox dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
2. bwhrly rwjW dy ividAwrQI pMjwbI siBAcwr dI jwxkwrI rwhIN pMjwbI smwj nUM smJx qy ivcrn
dy Xog ho jWdy hn[
3. pMjwbI ivAwkrn rwhIN ividAwrQI pMjwbI BwSw dI vwk bxqr nUM smJx dy smr`Q ho jWdy hn[
pwTkRm Aqy pwT pusqk

pwT-pusqk lwzmI pMjwbI, sMpw. SRI mqI rijMdr cOhwn, pMjwb skUl isiKAw borf,swihbzwdw AjIq
isMG ngr,2015.
Bwg-a pwT-pusqk lwzmI pMjwbI dy pMjwbI siBAwcwr dI jwx-pCwx vwly Bwg dy 5 qoN 8 q`k lyK[
Bwg–A ivAwkrn
(@A.1) vwk: pirBwSw, bxqr Aqy kwrj dy ADwr ’qy iksmW[
(A.2) ic`TI p`qr(in`jI Aqy d&qrI p`qr)
Bwg-e pwTkRm dy Bwg a Aqy A.1’qy ADwirq sMKyp au`qrW vwly pRSn[
AMk vMf Aqy pypr sY~tr leI hdwieqW
1. pRSn dw p`Dr ividAwrQIAW dy bOiDk p`Dr Aqy auhnW dI BwSw is`Kx dI sImw nUM iDAwn ivc
r`K ky hI inSicq kIqw[ auhnW nUM srl Aqy sp`St pRSn hI pu`Cy jwx[
2. loV Anuswr ividAwrQIAW nUM Cot jW cox dyxI lwzmI hY[
3. pRSn swry BwgW iv`coN pùCy jwx[
4. lyKW dw sMKyp swr/ ivSw vsqU jW lyKW ivcoN hor koeI srl pRSn[(cwr iv`coN do) 9+9=18 AMk
5. Bwg A.1 ivcoN vwk nwl sbMDq sMKyp Aqy srl pRSn[(pMjW ivcoN iqMn) 3× 4=12 AMk
6. Bwg A.2 ivcoN iksy ie`k ivSy 'qy ic`TI p`qr ilKxw hY[( do ivcoN ie`k) 10 AMk
7. Bwg a ‘qy AwDwirq sMKyp au`qrW vwly 8 pRSn Aqy A.1 ivcoN ivhwrk ivAwkrxk ivSlySx nwl
sbMDq 7 pRSn pu`Cy jwx[hryk pRSn dy 2 AMk hoxgy[ 15× 2 = 30 AMk
not: pRSn – p`qr pwT-kRm leI inrDwirq pwT pusqk ivcoN hI puìCAw jwvy[
not:-AiDAwpk, klws ivc ividAwrQIAW dI BwSw nUM Su`D rUp ivc bolx, ilKx dI muhwrq pYdw
krn Aqy aunHW dI bhu–p`KI s^SIAq auswrI leI pRYktIkl vjoN kMm krvwauxgy[bOiDk ivkws leI,
smwijk vrqwirAW nUM fUMGweI ivc smJx dI cyqnqw pYdw krn dy nwl-nwl aunHW AMdr swihqk rucI
nUM pRPil`q krn leI klws ivc ividAwrQIAW dy pwT-kRm nwl sMbMiDq gqIivDIAW nUM vI pYRktIkl
dw ih`sw bxwauxgy[AiDAwpk v`loN krvwey gey kwrjW ’qy AwDwirq ividAwrQIAW duAwrw iek Pwiel
iqAwr kIqI jwvygI[ies leI do pIirAf pRiq h&qw lgwey jwxgy[
shwiek pwT sm`grI
1. hrkIrq isMG(fw.) qy igAwnI lwl isMG, kwlj pMjwbI ivAwkrx qy lyK-mwlw, pMjwb styt XUnIvristI
tYkst bu~k borf, cMfIgVH ਜੀਤ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਜੋਸ਼ੀ, ਸਿਭਆਚਾਰ ਅਤੇ ਲੋ ਕਧਾਰਾ, ਵਾਿਰਸ ਸ਼ਾਹ ਫ਼ਾ ਡੇਸ਼ਨ, ਅੰ ਿਮਤਸਰ, 1991
2. ਜਗੀਰ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਨੂਰ (ਡਾ.),ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਲੋ ਕ ਮਨਰੰ ਜਨ, ਸਰੋਤ ਅਤੇ ਪਰੰ ਪਰਾ, ਪਲਾਹਾ ਪਬਿਲਿਸ਼ੰ ਗ ਕੰ ਪਨੀ,ਜਲੰਧਰ, 2005.
3. joigMdr isMG puAwr Aqy hor, pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrn (Bwg-3), pMjwbI BwSw AkwdmI, jlMDr,1994.
4. bldyv isMG(fw.), joigMdr isMG puAwr, dyv AgnIhoqrI,suKivMdr isMG sMGw,pMjwbI BwSw dw ivAwkrx,Bwg
dUjw, swihq AkwdmI id`lI[
5. ਬਲਵੀਰ ਿਸੰ ਘ ਪੂਨੀ,ਪੰ ਜਾਬੀ ਲੋ ਕਧਾਰਾ ਅਤੇ ਸਿਭਆਚਾਰ, ਵਾਿਰਸ ਸ਼ਾਹ ਫ਼ਾ ਡੇਸ਼ਨ, ਅੰ ਿਮਤਸਰ, 1992.
SEMESTER V
4 Credits: 4H (L)
(CO5) English Communication Skills
⚫ Get acquainted with the poetry of various poets
⚫ Familiarise with well-known personalities of the world
⚫ Enhance their writing skills through Resume Writing, Report Writing and Email Writing
Section-A
Prescribed Text: Selected College Poems by Ambika Sen Gupta, Orient Blackswan, 2009.
All twelve poems are prescribed.
Q1. (a) One essay-type question with an internal alternative on summary or central idea
in about 250 words. 12 marks
text in about 30 words each. 2x5=10 marks
(c) Two stanzas out of the given three from the prescribed poems in Selected College Poems to
be explained with reference to the context. 2x4=8 marks
Section –B
Q.2 Writing Skills:
Prescribed Text:
 The Written Word by Vandana R. Singh, OUP, 2003.
 Business Correspondence and Report Writing by R.C Sharma, Krishna Mohan, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2002.
 Personality Development and Soft Skills by Achhru Singh , R.D. Publications, Jalandhar,
2016.
1. Resume Writing with covering letter
Testing: The Student will be asked to write a job application along with a resume including a
brief account of one’s qualifications, previous experience, hobbies and expertise for a particular
job. 10 marks
2. Writing a bio-sketch of a renowned personality from the given hints
Testing: The student will be asked to write a bio-sketch in about 200 words taking help from the
given hints about a famous personality. 5 marks
3. Report Writing: Informative and Analytical
Testing: The student will be asked to write a report on the given topic. 8 marks
4. a) E-mail Writing (Address, Subject, Content, Complimentary Close)
Testing: One E-mail Writing to be attempted out of the given two. 7 marks
5. Proverbs : pages 61-67
Testing : Complete all the given incomplete proverbs. 10 marks
The teacher should focus on enhancing the skills of the students in writing, speaking and
reading.
1. Notice Writing
2. Writing agenda of a meeting
3. Writing minutes of a meeting
4. Speaking a few lines about a famous personality
SEMESTER VI
4 Credits: 4H (L)
(CO6) English Communication Skills
⚫ Broaden their views regarding various religious and social issues prevailing in the
society through the reading of prescribed text
⚫ Enhance their knowledge of language proficiency by translating sentences
⚫ Sharpen their thinking ability by developing story from hints
⚫ Enhance their writing skills through Letter Writing and Precis Writing
Section-A
Prescribed Text: Final Solutions by Mahesh Dattani, Penguin, 2005.
Q1. (a) One essay-type question with an internal alternative on summary, incident or theme
in about 250 words. 12 marks
text in about 30 words each. 2x5=10 marks
(c)Two passages out of the given three from the prescribed text to be explained with
reference to the context. 2x4=8 marks
Section –B
Q.2 Writing Skills:
Prescribed Text:
•The Written Word by Vandana R. Singh, OUP, 2003.
•Business Correspondence and Report Writing by R.C Sharma, Krishna Mohan, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2002.
1.Letter Writing: Business letters
Testing: The student will be asked to write a business letter on the given topic. 8 marks
2. Developing a story
Testing: The student will develop a story from the given hints. The length of the story shall be
of about 200 words. 7 marks
3. Precis Writing
Testing : The student will be asked to write a précis of a given passage comprising about 150
words. 5 marks
4. Translation
Testing: The student will be asked to translate a passage of ten sentences from English to
Punjabi/Hindi.
In lieu of Translation
(For students who do not know Punjabi/Hindi)
Paraphrase of a stanza from a poem about 8 to 10 lines.) 10 marks
5. Proverbs : pages 68-74
Testing : Complete all the given incomplete proverbs. 10
marks
The teacher should focus on enhancing the skills of the students in writing, speaking and
reading.
Topics to be Covered:
1. News to be expanded from the given headline 9
2. Writing a banner
3. News anchoring
4. Hosting an event
(SEMESTER V)
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH: RADIO AND TV BROADCASTING, GENERAL KNOWLEDGE & CURRENT 10
AFFAIRS
5 CREDITS: 4H(L)+2(P)
Max. Marks: 100 Theory: 56 marks
Teaching periods (6 per week) Practical: 20 marks
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Internal Assessment: 24
marks
Pass Marks : 35%
The paper shall consist of Units - I, II and III. The course content and allocation of marks in each
part shall be as shown below:
UNIT-I
I. (a) News reading and writing news script for radio and television
One question with internal alternative shall be set from this area. 5
marks
(b) General Knowledge (English Literature from 15th to 18th Century)
This question, of 3 marks, shall be objective type. One question of three parts – (i), (ii) and (iii) shall
be set from this area. Each part shall carry one (1) mark. The answers to each of these questions
may vary from one word to one sentence. There shall be no internal alternative in this question.
3x1=3 Marks
II. (a) Announcements - for Radio and Television
Marks
(b) General Knowledge (Sports, Cricket, Hockey and Football)
3x1=3 Marks
UNIT-II
III. (a) Compering - for Radio and Television
One question with internal alternative shall be set from this area. 5 Marks
(b) General Knowledge (History related to India)
3x1=3 Marks
IV (a) Making commentaries on Radio and Television
Marks
(b) General Knowledge (Geography related to India)
3 Marks
UNIT-III
This part shall cover the units mentioned above. It shall carry 24 marks in all. There shall be
one question in this unit consisting of two parts. In Part (i) of this question, there shall be five short-
answer questions dealing with aspects of Radio and TV Broadcasting. Each question shall be
answered in about 30-40 words and shall be of 2 marks each (5x2=10). Part (ii) of this question shall
pertain to General Knowledge and Current Affairs and shall carry 14 marks in all. In this part, the
examiner shall set 14 questions, each of one (1) mark, based on all the four areas of General
Knowledge and Current Affairs in the above-mentioned four sections. The examiner may set multiple-
choice questions, fill-in-the-blanks or objective-type questions in which one-word answer is to be
given by the candidate. The examiner may also set questions in which items in column A have to be
matched with their counterparts in column B.
10+14 =24 Marks
(SEMESTER V)
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH: RADIO AND TV BROADCASTING, GENERAL KNOWLEDGE & CURRENT AFFAIRS
11
(PRACTICAL)
Periods Per Week: 2 Practical: 20 marks

Pass Marks : 35 %
COURSE CONTENT
Training in facing the Camera, Gestures and Speech, Facial expressions, Lip movement, Eye
movements, Voice training and training in the technique of broadcasting on Radio and T.V.
Field Work: Visit to the T.V. and Radio Stations. Exposure to the different mechanisms of Radio
and T.V. broadcasting is necessary. Participation in local functions like Tournaments and Cultural
Programmes is also necessary.
Practical Examination shall be held by one external examiner and one internal examiner.
(SEMESTER VI)
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH: PAPER: ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT (THEORY PAPER) 12
5 CREDITS 4H(L)+2(P)
Time Allowed: 2 Hours Internal Assessment: 18 marks
Pass Marks : 35%
(CO5) Functional English
• Acquire the listening skills to comprehend and adequately respond to the English
spoken in different parts of the world
• Learn about the basic aspects of Information Technology and Computers
• Inculcate an awareness of the basic theories and concepts related to communication
This paper shall consist of two components – Theory and Practical. The Theory paper shall carry a
weightage of 60 marks in all. This paper shall consist of units: I, II and III.
The practical component, which accounts for 40 marks in all, shall comprise two parts, i.e. Part I
and Part II.
UNIT-I
1. Need, Scope and Characteristics of Entrepreneurship
2. Identification of Opportunities
3. Exposure to Demand-based, Resource-based, Service-based, Import- Substitute and Export-
Promotion Industries
One question with internal alternative shall be set from these areas. 7 marks.
4. Market Survey of Techniques
5. Structure of Project Report
6. Institutions, Financing Procedures and Financial Incentives
UNIT-II
7. Resource Management - Man, Machine and Material
8. Elements of Marketing and Sales Management
9. Understanding Human Behaviour
10. Conduct of Mini Market Survey
11. Importance of Advertising in Entrepreneurship
12. Social Responsibility & Ethics in Small Enterprises
13. Creativity and Innovation, Problem-Solving Approach, Strengths, Weaknesses,
Opportunities and Threats to an Entrepreneur
UNIT-III 16 marks
This section shall carry a weightage of 16 marks in all. It shall comprise 8 short-answer questions
based on all the areas in the above mentioned two units. The answer to each question shall be
given in 30-40 words and each question shall carry 2 marks. There shall be no choice in this question.
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Practice of Entrepreneurship: Morodith, G.G. & Nelson
2. Developing Entrepreneurship: A Handbook of Learning Systems by Rao, T.V. & Pareek, U.
3. Entrepreneur's Master Planning Guide: How to Launch Successful Business by Walsh, J.A. &
Jerry, F.W.
4. Entrepreneurship Development by C.B. Gupta
5. Entrepreneurship Development by Dr. S.G. Bhanushal, Himalaya Publishing House
(SEMESTER VI) 13
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH: ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT (PRACTICAL)

Pass Marks : 35 %
PART-I
Project and On-the-Job Training Report-I
Objective: To give apprenticeship training in the Teaching of Conversational Skills.

Course Content: English in situations. Each student shall work as a tutor to business people,
householders or housewives interested in learning Conversational Skills in English. Tutorship shall be for
a period of four weeks. 20 Marks
PART-II
Project and On-the-Job Training Report-II
Objective: To work in and be part of a commercial enterprise.

Course Content: Each student shall work as a receptionist at a noted hotel or academy etc. Or he/she
shall work as a receptionist at a well-known firm for a period of four weeks during the summer vacation
after the examination of B.A. Part II (Semester IV). 20 Marks
(SEMESTER VI)
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH: PAPER: ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT (THEORY PAPER) 14
5 CREDITS 4H(L)+2(P)
Time Allowed: 2 Hours Internal Assessment: 18 marks
Pass Marks : 35%
(CO6) Functional English
• Understand the nature of entrepreneurship
• Understand the function of the entrepreneur in the successful, commercial application
of innovations
• Enhance personal attributes that enable best use of entrepreneurial opportunities
• Acquaint with entrepreneurial leadership and management style
This paper shall consist of two components – Theory and Practical. The Theory paper shall carry a
weightage of 60 marks in all. This paper shall consist of units: I, II and III.The practical component,
which accounts for 40 marks in all, shall comprise two parts, i.e. Part I and Part II.
UNIT-I
1. Need, Scope and Characteristics of Entrepreneurship
2. Identification of Opportunities
3. Exposure to Demand-based, Resource-based, Service-based, Import- Substitute and Export-
Promotion
Industries
4. Market Survey of Techniques
5. Structure of Project Report
6. Institutions, Financing Procedures and Financial Incentives
UNIT-II
7. Resource Management - Man, Machine and Material
8. Elements of Marketing and Sales Management
9. Understanding Human Behaviour
10. Conduct of Mini Market Survey
11. Importance of Advertising in Entrepreneurship
12. Social Responsibility & Ethics in Small Enterprises
13. Creativity and Innovation, Problem-Solving Approach, Strengths, Weaknesses,
Opportunities and Threats to an Entrepreneur
UNIT-III 16 marks
This section shall carry a weightage of 16 marks in all. It shall comprise 8 short-answer questions
based on all the areas in the above mentioned two units. The answer to each question shall be
given in 30-40 words and each question shall carry 2 marks. There shall be no choice in this question.
SUGGESTED READINGS
5. Practice of Entrepreneurship: Morodith, G.G. & Nelson
6. Developing Entrepreneurship: A Handbook of Learning Systems by Rao, T.V. & Pareek, U.
7. Entrepreneur's Master Planning Guide: How to Launch Successful Business by Walsh, J.A. &
Jerry, F.W.
8. Entrepreneurship Development by C.B. Gupta
5. Entrepreneurship Development by Dr. S.G. Bhanushal, Himalaya Publishing House
15
(SEMESTER VI)
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH: ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT (PRACTICAL)

Pass Marks : 35 %
PART-I
Project and On-the-Job Training Report-I
Objective: To give apprenticeship training in the Teaching of Conversational Skills.

Course Content: English in situations. Each student shall work as a tutor to business people,
householders or housewives interested in learning Conversational Skills in English. Tutorship shall be for
a period of four weeks. 20 Marks
PART-II
Project and On-the-Job Training Report-II
Objective: To work in and be part of a commercial enterprise.

Course Content: Each student shall work as a receptionist at a noted hotel or academy etc. Or he/she
shall work as a receptionist at a well-known firm for a period of four weeks during the summer vacation
after the examination of B.A. Part II (Semester IV). 20 Marks
(smYstr-pMjvW)
pMjwbI swihq (coxvW ivSw) 16
Course Outcome:
1. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI swihq dIAW AwidkwlIn DwrwvW bwry jwxkwrI hwisl krn dy Xog ho jWdy
hn[
2. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI nwQ-jogI swihq Aqy gurmiq swihq ivclIAW pyS smwijk, AwriQk,
rwjnIiqk pRsiQqIAW dw igAwn hwisl krdw hoieAw iesnUM smJx Aqy qulnwqmk AiDAYn krn dy
Xog ho jWdw hY[
3. ividAwrQI gurmiq kwiv rUpW rwhIN Dwrimk ibrqIAW nUM smJx dy nwl-nwl duinAwvI Aqy
sdwcwrk jIvn-jwc nUM is`Kx dy smr`Q ho jWdw hY[
pwT kRm Aqy pwT pusqkW

Bwg-a
a.1. gurbwxI dy swihq rUp: Sbd, AstpdI, slok, pwauVI, soihlw, bwrhmwh[
a.2.pµjwbI kwiv sµgRih (1700eI.q`k): mu`K sµpwdk fw. jsivMdr isµG,sMpw. mwn isMG
FINfsw,fw. gurSrn kOr j`gI,pµjwbI X¨nIvristI, pitAwlw, 2016.
(not: ies pusqk iv`c drj kvIAW ivcoN Bgq rivdws jI, BweI gurdws jI Aqy gurU goibMd isMG
jI dIAW rcnwvW islybs dw Bwg nhIN hn[)
Bwg-A
A.1. nwtk: pirBwSw, pRikrqI Aqy q`q
A.2. kYmlUps dIAW m`CIAW (nwtk):AwqmjIq, lokgIq pRkwSn,cMfIgVH.
Bwg-e
auprokq swry islybs 'qy AwDwirq sµKyp au~qrW vwly pMdrW pRSn [
1. pRSn p`qr nUM iqMn Bwg a,A Aqy e iv`c vMifAw jwvygw[
2. Bwg-a.1 iv`coN gurbwxI dy swihq rUpW dI pirBwSw Aqy auhnW sbMDI jwxkwrI[(do iv`coN ie`k)5
AMk
3.Bwg-a.2 ivcoNiksy iek rcnw dw ivSw-vsq¨/kvI bwry jwxkwrI Aqy aus dw Xogdwn[
(iqMn iv~coN iek)8 Aµk
4. Bwg-a.2 ivcoN iksy ie`k kwiv tukVI dI pRsMg sihq ivAwiKAw[ (do ivcoN ie`k) 7
AMk
5. Bwg-A.1 nwl sbMDqvrxwqmk pRSn[ (do iv~coN iek)10 Aµk
6. Bwg-A.2 ivcoN nwtk dw ivSw vsqU,pwqr icqrn, rMgmMcI AnUkUlqw Aqy
AwlocnwqmkAiDAYnnwl sbMDq vrxwqmk pRSn[ (do iv~coN iek) 10 Aµk
7. Bwg-e ivc swry islybs qy AwDwirq sµKyp au~qr vwly 15 pRSn pu~Cy jwxgy।
pRIiKAwrQIAW nyswry pRSnW dy au~qr cwr-pMj sqrW ivc dyxy hoxgy। hryk pRSn dy do Aµk hoxgy।
15x2=30 Aµk
AµdrUnI mulWkx 30 Aµk
klws hwzrI, GrylU iemiqhwn, AsweInmYNt/sYmInwr, smu`cw ivvhwr[
shwiek pwT sm~grI
1. rqn isµG j`gI (sMpw.),swihq koS (pirBwiSk SbdwvlI), pµjwbI X¨nI., pitAwlw, 2016.
2.guridAwl isµG Pu~l, pµjwbI nwtk srUp, isDWq Aqy ivkws, pµjwbIX¨nI.,pitAwlw,1988.
3.sqIS kumwr vrmw, pµjwbI nwtk dw ieiqhws, pµjwbI AkwdmI, id~lI, 2005.
4. surjIq isµG syTI, nwtkklw, lokgIq pRkwSn , cµfIgVH, 1988.
5. surjIq isMG syTI, pMjwbI rMgmMc qy nwtk klw, lok swihq pRkwSn, AMimRqsr, 1988.
6. rOSn lwl AhUjw, swihq Swsqr, lwhOr bu`k Swp, luiDAwxw, 1987.
7. primMdr isMG Aqy ikrpwl isMG ksyl, swihq dy rUp, swihq sMgm, luiDAwxw, 1951.
(smYstr-CyvW)
pMjwbI swihq (coxvW ivSw) 17
Course Outcome:
1. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI swihq dIAW AwidkwlIn DwrwvW bwry jwxkwrI hwisl krn dy Xog ho jWdy
hn[
2. ies rwhIN ividAwrQI nwQ-jogI swihq Aqy gurmiq swihq ivclIAW pyS smwijk, AwriQk,
rwjnIiqk pRsiQqIAW dw igAwn hwisl krdw hoieAw iesnUM smJx Aqy qulnwqmk AiDAYn krn dy
Xog ho jWdw hY[
3. ividAwrQI gurmiq kwiv rUpW rwhIN Dwrimk ibrqIAW nUM smJx dy nwl-nwl duinAwvI Aqy
sdwcwrk jIvn-jwc nUM is`Kx dy smr`Q ho jWdw hY[
pwT kRm Aqy pwT pusqkW
Bwg-a
a.1.pµjwbI swihq dw ieiqhws(Awid kwl qoN 1700eI.q`k), primµdr isµG, pµjwbI
X¨nIvristI,pitAwlw, 2014.
a.2. swihq dI pirBwSw, pRXojn Aqy q~q,swihq Aqy hor AnuSwsn : swihq Aqy smwj, swihq Aqy
mnoivigAwn, swihq Aqyieiqhws, swihq Aqy rwjnIqI, swihq Aqy Drm, swihq Aqy ivcwrDwrw,
swihq AqysiBAwcwr।
Bwg-A
A.1. jIvnI, svY-jIvnI, s&rnwmw: pirBwSw, pRikRqI Aqy q~q
A.2.myrI jIvn khwxI(svYjIvnI):pRo. swihb isMG,isMG bRdrz, AMimRqsr.
Bwg-e
auprokq islybs ‘qy AwDwirq sµKyp au~qrW vwly pMdrW pRSn [
1. Bwg a.1 pusqk iv~coN swihqk DwrwvW,swihqk rUp Aqy swihqk pRivrqIAW nwl sbMDq
vrxwqmk pRSn[(iqMn iv~coN iek) 10 Aµk
2. Bwg a.2 nwl sbMDq vrxwqmk pRSn[(do iv~coN iek) 10 Aµk
3. Bwg A.1 nwl sbMDq vrxwqmk pRSn[(do iv~coN iek)10 Aµk
4. Bwg A.2 ivcoN svYjIvnI qy AwDwirq lyKk dy jIvn dy v`Kry-v`Kry pVwvW,smu`cI S^SIAq Aqy
svYjIvnI dy Awlocnwqmk AiDAYnnwl sbMDq vrxwqmk pRSn[
(do iv~coN iek) 10 Aµk
5. pwT kRm dy Bwg-e ivc swry islybs qy AwDwirq sµKyp au~qrW vwly 15 pRSn pu`Cy jwxgy[
pRIiKAwrQIAW ny swry pRSnW dy au~qr cwr-cwr sqrW ivc dyxy hoxgy। hryk pRSn dy do Aµk
hoxgy। 15x2= 30 Aµk
AµdrUnI mulWkx 30 Aµk
klws hwzrI, GrylU iemiqhwn, AsweInmYNt/sYmInwr, smu`cw ivvhwr[
shwiek pwT sm~grI

1. rqn isµG j`gI (sMpw.),swihq koS (pirBwiSk SbdwvlI), pµjwbI X¨nIvristI, pitAwlw।
2. primµdr isµG Aqy ikrpwl isµG ksyl, swihq dy r¨p. lwhOr bu~k Swp, luiDAwxw।
3. ikrpwl isµG ksyl, fw. primµdr isµG, goibµd isµG lWbw,pµjwbI swihq dI auqpqI qy ivkws, lwhOr bu~k
Swp, luiDAwxw, 2011.
4. rOSn lwl AhUjw, swihq Swsqr, lwhOr bu`k Swp, luiDAwxw, 1987.
5. rwijMdrpwl isMG brwV Aqy bldyv isMG cImw, AwDuink pMjwbI swihq rUpwkwr: isDWq qy rUpWqrx,
pµjwbI
X¨nIvristI, pitAwlw ।
6. siqMdr isMG, ivhwrk smIiKAw: kivqw Aqy vwrqk, pµjwbI X¨nIvristI, pitAwlw ।
7. rCpwl kOr, pMjwbI s&rnwmw srUp qy sMBwvnw[
(Semester-V)
5 Credits: 5 (L)
Periods per week: 5 Theory:70
(CO5) English Literature
• Study the literary movements and trends in Victorian and Modern Periods in British
Literature
• Acquaint with literary terms pertaining to this period
• Learn the four genres of prose, poetry, drama and novel through the study of literary
works
Victorian to Modern Age
Unit I
1. Movements and Trends
A. Chief characteristics of Victorian Period.
B. Chief characteristics of Modern Period.
2. Literary terms
Dramatic Monologue, Victorian Skepticism, Scientific Temper, Utilitarianism, Sociological Novel,
Humanism, Realism, Existentialism, Symbolism, Theatre of the Absurd, Stream of Consciousness,
Epic Theatre, Alienation.
Prescribed Texts: A Glossary of Literary Terms11th Edition by M.H. Abrams and Geoffrey Galt
Harpham, Cengage Learning, 2015.
An Outline History of English Literature by William Henry Hudson. Atlantic Publishers & Dist,
1999
3.Robert Browning: Porphyria’s Lover
Last Ride Together
Bishop Orders His Tomb
Lord Alfred Tennyson: Ulysses
Lotus Eaters
W.B. Yeats: The Lake Isle of Innisfree
A Prayer for My Daughter
Never Give All the Heart
The Scholars
Unit II
Charles Dickens: A Tale of Two Cities
Virginia Woolf: A Room of One’s Own
T.S. Eliot: Murder in the Cathedral
Instructions for paper-setter
Unit I
Three essay type questions from each prescribed text will be set from unit I, out of which the
candidate will have to attempt any two.
2x10=20
Unit II
Three essay type questions from each prescribed text will be set from unit II, out of which the
candidate will have to attempt any two.
2x10=20
Unit III
This question will cover the entire syllabus. There will be 15 questions in all, carrying 02 marks each.
The students will have to attempt all the fifteen questions. 3 questions are to be set from Movements
and Trends, 3from Literary Terms (only very brief definitions should be asked); and 09 questions
should be set from the prescribed texts. The nature of the questions pertaining to these texts should be
such that the students should be able to answer each question in about 25 to30 words. There shall be
no choice in this section.
15X2=30 marks
SUGGESTED READINGS:
1. Auger,Peter.TheAnthem Glossary of Literary Terms and Theory.Anthem Press,2010. 19
2. Kennedy, X.J., Dana Gioia, and Mark Bauerlein.Handbook of Literary Terms.PearsonPress,
2007.
3. Drew,Philip.The Poetry of Browning:A Critical Introduction.Methuen,1970
4. Tennyson,Alfred Tennyson Baron. Tennyson's Poetry: Authoritative Texts, Contexts, Criticism
Volume 0 of A Norton critical edition. W.W. Norton, 1999
5. Bloom, Harold. Charles DickensA Tale of Two Cities:Modern CriticalInterpretations. New
York: ChelsaHouse, 1987.
6. Sanders, Andrew.The Champion to A Tale of Two Cities. London: Unwin Hyman,1988.
7. Gissing, George.Charles Dickens a Critical Study. New York: Dod, Mead andCompany, 1898.
8. G.K.Chesterton.Charles Dickensa Critical Study. New York: Dod, Mead andCompany, 1906.
9. Rosenman, Ellen Bayuk. A room of one's own: women writers and the politics of
creativityIssue151 of Twayne's masterwork studies. Twayne Publishers, 1995.
10. Brunner, Larry.Tragic Victory: The Doctrine of Subjective Salvation in the Poetry of W.B.
Yeats.Whitston, 1987
11. 11.Rosenthal, M. L.Running to Paradise: Yeats's Poetic Art.Oxford University Press,1997.
(Semester-VI)
5 Credits: 5 (L)
Periods per week: 5 Theory: 70
(CO6) English Literature
• Understand the literary genre of prose and the major concepts related to prose
• Analyze and interpret thematic concerns of major essayists
• Understand the prominence of the genre of poetry in the essays and the need to
appreciate the structure of poetry
• Make a comparative study of poetry in different periods of English history
This paper carries 100 marks and will be of 3 hours duration. Candidates can choose any one ofthe
following options:
1Critical Essays
2. Travel Writing
3. Women’s Writing
Option-1
Critical Essays
Unit I
1. Samuel Johnson: Metaphysical Poets
2.S.T .Coleridge: Biographia Literaria Ch. XIV
Unit II
3. Matthew Arnold: The Study of Poetry
4. Cleanth Brooks: Irony as a Principle of Structure
Instructions for Paper-Setter
Unit I
Q1.A critical essay type question with internal choice on Samuel Johnson’s Metaphysical Poets.
10 marks
Q2.A critical essay type question with an internal choice on S.T .Coleridge’s Biographia Literaria
Ch. XIV. 10 marks
Unit II
Q3.A critical essay type question with an internal choice on Matthew Arnold’s The Study of Poetry.
10 marks
Q4.A critical question with an internal choice on Cleanth Brooks’Irony as a Principle of Structure.
10 marks
Unit III
Q.5.This question will cover the entire syllabus. There will be 10 questions in all, each carrying3
marks. The students will have to attempt all the questions. The nature of the questions pertaining to
these essays should be such that the students should be able to answer each question in about 40-
50words. There shall be no choice in this section. 10X3=30 marks
Suggested Readings
 Johnson, Samuel.The Lives of the English Poets.Jones, 1825
 Boulton, James T.Samuel Johnson: The Critical Heritage. Routledge, 1995
 Sutton, Walter E.ModernCriticism: Theory and Practice. Ardent Media, 1963
 Wellek, Rene. History of Modern Criticism.Yale University Press,1955.
 Concepts of Criticism, Yale University Press, 1963.
 Lodge, David.Modern Criticism and Theory, Routledge,1977.
 Park, Edd Winfield, andJamesHarry.The Great Critics:An Anthology of Literary Criticism.
Norton, 1939.
 Baum, PaullF.Ten Studies in the Poetry of Matthew Arnold.Duke University Press, 1958
 Brown, E.K.Matthew Arnold: A Study in Conflict.University of Chicago Press, 1948
 Wimsatt, William.K. andCleanthBrooks.Literary Criticism: A Short History. Oxford and
IBHPublishing,1957.
 Winchell, Mark Royden.Cleanth Brooks and the Rise of Modern Criticism Minds of the New South
University of Virginia Press,1996.
Option-II
Travel Writing 21
Unit I
1. Jon Krakauer:Into the Wild
2. Ernesto CheGuevara: The Motorcycle Diaries
Unit II
3. Monisha Rajesh: Around India in 80 Trains
4. Bill Bryson :In a Sunburned Country
Instructions for the Paper Setter
Unit I
Q1. One question with internal choice from Into the Wild to be attempted in about 250 words.
10 marks
Q2. A critical question from The Motorcycle Diaries with an internal choice to be attempted in about
250 words. 10 marks
Unit II
Q3. A critical question from Around India in 80 Trains with an internal choice to be attempted in
Q4. A critical question from In a Sunburned Country with an internal choice to be attempted in about
250 words. 10 marks
UNIT III
these texts should be such that the students should be able to answer each question in about 40-
Suggested Reading
 Merino, Noel .ed.Wilderness Adventure in Jon Krakauer's Into the WildSocial issues in literature.
Greenhaven Press, a part of Gale, Cengage Learning, 2015
 Harms, Malte.The Influence of Henry David Thoreau's Philosophy in JonKrakauer's Novel“Into
the Wild”. Grin Verlag , 2015
 Fontova,Humberto.Exposing the Real Che Guevara: And the Useful Idiots Who Idolize
Him.Penguin, 2007
 Guevara, Ernesto. CheGuevara.Reminiscences of the Cuban Revolutionary War. Ocean
Press,2006
Option–III
Women’s Writing 22
UNIT I
1.Judith Wright All Things Conspire
Five Senses
Draught Year
Woman to Man
2.Maya Angelou Caged Bird
On the Pulse of Morning
Still I Rise
Phenomenal Woman
UNIT II
3.BapsiSidhwa: The Pakistani Bride
4.Chitra B. Divakaruni : The Palace of Illusions
UNIT I
Q1.One question from the prescribed poems of Judith Wright with an internal choice in about250
words. 10 marks
Q2.One question from the prescribed poems of Maya Angelou with an internal choice in about 250
words. 10 marks
UNIT II
Q3.One question from The Pakistani Bride with an internal choice in about 250 words.
10 marks
Q4.One question from The Palace of Illusions with an internal choice in about 250 words.
10 marks
UNIT III
these texts should be such that the students should be able to answer each question in about 40-
Suggested Readings:
 Dhawan, R.K. and NoveyKapadia. The Novels of Bapsi Sidhwa. New Delhi: Prestige, 1996.
 Paranjape, Makarand. “The Early Novels of BapsiSidhwa.”The Novels of BapsiSidhwa.NewDelhi:
Prestige Books, 1996.
 Niruparani, K..“Gender and Imagination in BapsiSidhwa’s Fiction”.Fiction of Nineties.NobleDass,
Veena& R.K. Dhawaneds. New Delhi: Prestige, 1994. 155-161 Fiction.”
 Kohli, Devindra"The Crystal Glance of Love: Judith Wright as a Love Poet," inThe Journal
ofCommonwealth Literature, Vol. VI, No. 1, June, 1971, pp. 42–52.
 Cornwell, Tony.Australian poet Judith Wright (1915-2000): an appreciation.
 Potter, Nancy.SettingHer Signature on the Land: The Poetry of Judith Wright(Vol. 3, No.1)Wayne
State University Press, 1989.
 Lupton, May Jean.Maya Angelou: A Critical Companion (Critical Companions to
PopularContemporary Writers).London: Green wood Press.1998.
 Megna-Wallace, Joanne.Understanding I Know Why the Caged Bird Sings: A Student Casebookto
Issues, Sources, and Historical Documents.Greenwood Press, 1998.
 Newton, Pauline T.Transcultural Women of Later Twentieth Century US American
Literature.AshgatePublishing, 2005.
 Abcarian, Richard and Marvin Klotz. "Chitra Banerjee Divakaruni." InLiterature: The
HumanExperience, 9th edition. New York: Bedford/St. Martin's, 2006: 1544.
ch-,- Hkkx r`rh; fgUnh lkfgR;
23
2020&21 l= ds fy,
leSLVj & 5

le;% rhu ?kaVs
rd jgsxhA

1- çLrqr ikB~;Øe ls fo|kFkhZ fgUnh lkfgR; ds bfrgkl ds fodkl ds iBu ds ek/;e ls iw.kZ :i ls fgUnh
lkfgR; ds fodkl ls ifjfpr gksaxsA
2- NUnksa dk Lo:i] çdkj rFkk ç;ksx dh fof/k dk Kku gkfly djds fo|kFkhZ dfork dks lgh <ax fy[kus
dh dyk lh[ksaxsA
3- HkfDrdky ds dfo;ksa dk foLr`r v/;;u tgk¡ egku~ dfo;ksa ds thou ls ifjfpr djok;sxk lkFk gh
vPNs laaLdjksa dks gkfly djsaxsA
4- dkO; rFkk egkdkO; ds Lo:i] Hksn o ç;kstu dk foLr`r v/;;u Hkkjrh; dkO;&'kkL= dks le>us esa
lgk;d gksxkA
ikB~;Øe
¼[k.M&d½
1- efYydk ¼lEiknd½ MkW- t;ukFk ufyu] ifCyds'ku C;wjks] iatkch ;wfuoflZVh] ifV;kykA dsoy %
¼dchj] xq: ukud] lwjnkl] rqylhnkl½
2- fucU/k ifjos'k ¼lEiknd½ ;ksxsUæ c['kh] iatkch fo'ofo|ky; çdk'kuA dsoy ik¡p fucU/kdkj%
HkkjrsUnw] iwju flag] pUæ/kj 'kekZ xqysjh] /keZohj Hkkjrh] dqcsj ukFk jk;A
¼[k.M&[k½
1- dkO; 'kkL= % dkO; dk Lo:i] ç;kstu] Hksn] egkdkO; ds y{k.k] 'kCn 'kfDr;k¡A
2- NUn ¼y{k.k&mnkgj.k½ pkSikbZ] nksgk] lksjBk] gfjxhfrdk] dq¡Mfy;ka] NIi;] cjoS] mYykyk] rksej]
vghj ¼dsoy nl NUn½
¼[k.M&x½

3- [k.M&d
1- efYydk vkykspukRed ç'u ¼nks esa ls ,d ç'u½
¼dfo@ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís';@fo'ks"krk,¡ vkfn½ nks esa ls ,d ç'u
vad 824
çlax lfgr O;k[;k ¼nks esa ls ,d O;k[;k½
vad 4
fucU/k ifjos'k
¼dfo@ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís';@fo'ks"krk,¡ vkfn½ nks esa ls ,d ç'u
vad 8
çlax lfgr O;k[;k ¼nks esa ls ,d O;k[;k½
vad 4
4- [k.M&[k
1- dkO; 'kkL= ¼nks esa ls ,d ç'u½ vad 8
2- NUn ¼fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe½ vad 8
4- [k.M&x
bl [k.M ds vUrxZr lewps ikB~;Øe esa ls 15 laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys ç'u fcuk fodYi ds
iwNs tk,¡xsA lHkh dk mÙkj nsuk vfuok;Z gksxkA 15x2=30

vkarfjd ewY;kadu % dqy vad 30
mifLFkfr % 06
,lkbueSaV@çkstDS V % 12
nks ,e-,l-Vh- % 12
25
ch-,- Hkkx r`rh; fgUnh lkfgR;
2020&21 l= ds fy,
leSLVj & 6

le;% rhu ?kaVs
rd jgsxhA
ikB~;Øe
¼[k.M&d½
1- egknsoh dk x| lkfgR;] lEiknd MkW- lq/kk ftrsUæ] iatkch ;wfuoflZVh çdk'kuA dsoy çFke ik¡p
ys[k ¼jkek] ?khlk] HkfDru] phuh Qsjh okyk] lqHkæk dqekjh pkSgku½
2- /kzqoLokfeuh ¼ukVd½ t;'kadj çlkn
¼[k.M&[k½
3- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼vk/kqfud dky% uohu fo/kk,¡&thouh] vkRedFkk] laLej.k] js[kkfp=]
vkykspuk dk fodklA½
4- fo/kkxr ifjp;% fucU/k] thouh] laLej.k] js[kkfp=&ifjHkk"k] Lo:i o rRoA
¼[k.M&x½
mijksDr lewps ikB~;Øe esa ls `laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys 15 ç'u iwNs tk;saxsA
3- [k.M&d
2- egknsoh dk x| lkfgR; vkykspukRed ç'u ¼nks esa ls ,d ç'u½
¼ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís';@fo'ks"krk,¡ vkfn½ nks esa ls ,d ç'u
vad 8
çlax lfgr O;k[;k ¼nks esa ls ,d O;k[;k½ vad 4
/kzqoLokfeuh&vkykspukRed ç'u
¼ys[kd ifjp;@jpuk dk lkj@jpuk leh{kk@mís';@fo'ks"krk,¡ vkfn½ nks esa ls ,d ç'u
vad 8
çlax lfgr O;k[;k ¼nks esa ls ,d O;k[;k½ vad 4
4- [k.M&[k
3- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼nks esa ls ,d ç'u½
vad 8
4- fo/kkxr ifjp; ¼nks esa ls ,d ç'u½ vad 8
4- [k.M&x
bl [k.M ds vUrxZr lewps ikB~;Øe esa ls 15 laf{kIr mÙkjksa okys ç'u fcuk fodYi ds
iwNs tk,¡xsA lHkh dk mÙkj nsuk vfuok;Z gksxkA 15x2=3026

vkarfjd ewY;kadu % dqy vad 30
mifLFkfr % 06
,lkbueSaV@çkstDS V % 12
nks ,e-,l-Vh- % 12
Programme Learning Outcomes 27
Defence and Strategic Studies

Upon completion of the Course in Defence and Strategic Studies, a student should
have acquired basic competency in strategic affairs covering a wide spectrum of
interstate security to global security issues including non-kinetic dimensions.
1. Shall develop capability in understanding the implications of use and threat

of use of force in International relations.
2. Shall seek, identify and apply the acquired knowledge in defence and
strategic studies on contemporary issues of strategic relevance.
3. Ability to move from LOTS (Lower Order of Thinking Skills) to HOTS (Higher
Order of Thinking Skills) in Defence and Strategic Studies.
4. The learning of strategic studies shall arm the candidates to independently
choose further course of action in his/her life whether pursuing higher
education by taking specialized course in honours or identifying a career for
himself or herself.
(SEMESTER- V)
28
DEFENCE AND STRATEGIC STUDIES: NATIONAL SECURITY OF INDIA
 Develop core competencies in national security affairs by building his/her capacity on
essentials of National Security through theory and practice.
 Understand the national security challenges both internal and external a country face; and
 Understand the Contemporary security environment in the world.

answer type questions covering the entire syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt all
the questions. Each question will carry 2 marks.
PAPER-I: NATIONAL SECURITY OF INDIA
 Equip the students with specific knowledge of India’s threat perceptions;

 An assessment at both internal and external level besides fair idea of problems the
country faces as a nation state; and
 The Structure, objectives, role and problems of Civil Defence Organization in India.
CONTENTS
SECTION- A
1. NATIONAL SECURITY: CONCEPTUAL ASPECTS.
2. ELEMENTS OF NATIONAL SECURITY:
a) Geography
b) Mineral resources
c) Social, political and economic factors
d) Scientific and technological development
e) Military preparedness
3. INDIA’s SECURITY PROBLEMS SINCE INDEPENDENCE WITH PERTICULAR REFERENCE TO:
a) Security problems related to China
b) Security problems related to Pakistan
c) Security problems related to Bangladesh
4. INDIAN OCEAN AND INDIA’S SECURITY:
a) Geo-strategic importance of the Indian Ocean.
b) India’s economic, political and security stakes in the Indian Ocean.
c) India’s Maritime Security policy.
5. INDIA’S NUCLEAR DOCTRINE.
SECTION- B
1. INTERNAL DIMENSION OF INDIA’S SECURITY: -
a) Militancy in Jammu & Kashmir
b) Insurgency in North eastern states
c) Left Wing Extremism (LWE)
2. CIVIL DEFENCE ORGANIZATION IN INDIA: - 29
a) Structure objectives,
b) role and problems.
3. ECONOMIC MOBILIZATION FOR NATIONAL DEFENCE WITH REFERENCE TO
MOBILIZATION OF PHYSICAL AND FISCAL RESOURCES.
4. PLANNING AND PRODUCTION FOR NATIONAL DEFENCE.
5. MAJOR DEFENCE PRODUCTION INDUSTRIES IN INDIA WITH REFERENCE TO MAKE IN
INDIA PROCUREMENT.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
1. Buzan, Barry (1987) People Fear and State: New Delhi, Transasia Publications.
2. Bajpai, U.S.(1986) India and its Neighborhood: New Delhi, Lancer International.
3. Baranwal, S.P. (1984) Measures of Civil Defence in India: New Delhi, Guide Publications.
4. Chaudhury, Rahul Roy (1995) Sea Power and India’s Security, London, Brassey’s.
5. Dass, S.T. (1987) National Security in Perspective: Delhi, Gian Publishers.
6. Karnard, Bharat (1994) Future Imperiled: New Delhi, Viking.
7. Kavic, Lorne J. (1967) India’s Quest for Security: Defence Policies 1947-1965: Los Angeles,
University of California Press.
8. Khera, S.S. (1968) India’s Defence Problems: New Delhi.
9. Kinger, Kamal (2008) rwStrI su~riKAw.
10. Rao, P.V.R. (1970) Defence Without Drift: Bombay, Popular Prakashan.
11. Singh, Jaswant (1999) Defending India: Bangalore, Macmillan India Ltd.
12. Singh, Nagendra (1974) The Defence Mechanism and the Modern State: New Delhi, Asia
Publishing House.
(SEMESTER- V)
30
DEFENCE AND STRATEGIC STUDIES (PRACTICAL)
CONTENTS
A. FIELD SKETCHING:
i. Purpose
ii. Importance
iii. Military Sketches
B. STUDY OF FIELD CRAFT WITH REFERENCE TO THE FOLLOWING:
i. Ground
ii. Cover
iii. Camouflage and Concealment
iv. Observation
v. Judging Distance
C. STUDY OF BATTLE CRAFT WITH REFERENCE TO THE FOLLOWING.
i. Field Signal
ii. Fire and Movement
iii. Fire control orders
D. TACTICAL FORMATIONS-SECTION AND PLATOON.
E. VERBAL ORDER.
F. RECORD
G. VIVA VOCE
(SEMESTER- VI)
31
DEFENCE AND STRATEGIC STUDIES: REGIONAL SECURITY AND COOPERATION
 Understand the theoretical dimensions of `Region’ in International Relations.
 Conceptual Dimensions of Regional Security; Regional Cooperation and Military
Alliances; and
 Students would get to understand nuances of regional cooperation, its benefits and
drawbacks by learning various existing regional cooperative mechanisms across the globe.

answer type questions covering the entire syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt all
the questions. Each question will carry 2 marks.
PAPER-I: REGIONAL SECURITY AND COOPERATION

 Understand the theoretical dimensions of `Region’ in International Relations
 Conceptual Dimensions of Regional Security; Regional Cooperation and Military Alliances;
and
 Students would get to understand nuances of regional cooperation, its benefits and
drawbacks by learning various existing regional cooperative mechanisms across the globe
CONTENTS
Section A
1. THEORETICAL DIMENSIONS OF `REGION’ IN INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS.
2. REGIONAL SECURITY; REGIONAL COOPERATION; AND MILITARY ALLIANCES:
CONCEPTUAL DIMENSIONS
3. NORTH ATLANTIC TREATY ORGANISATION (NATO):
a) Origin, Aim and objectives
b) Organizational Structure and Working.
4. GULF COOPERATION COUNCIL (G.C.C):
a) Origin, Aim and Features
b) Problems and Achievements
Section B
1. ASSOCIATION FOR SOUTH EAST ASIA NATIONS-(ASEAN):
a) Concept, Objectives and Features
b) Problems and Achievements.
2. SHANGHAI COOPERATION ORGANISATION- (S C O):
a) Origin, Aim and Structure of S.C.O
b) Organization and Working.
3. SOUTH ASIAN ASSOCIATION FOR REGIONAL COOPERATION-(SAARC):
a) Concept, Objectives and Features. 32
b) Problems & Achievements.
4. BAY OF BENGAL INITIATIVE FOR MULTI-SECTORAL TECHNICAL AND ECONOMIC
COOPERATION (BIMSTEC):
a) Objectives and Features
b) Problems and Achievements
SUGGESTED READINGS:
1. Buzan, Barry (1987) People Fear and State: New Delhi, Transasia Publications.
2. Buzan, Barry and Waever, Ole(eds) (2003) Regions and Powers: Cambridge.
3. Das, S.T. (1987) National Security in Perspective: Delhi, Gian Publishing House.
4. Frankal, Joseph (1970) National Interest: London, Macmillian
5. Garnett, John(ed) (1970) Theories of Peace and Security: Macmillan St. Martin’s Press
6. Kinger, Kamal (2008) rwStrI su~riKAw
7. Kinger, Kamal (2011) KyqrI su`riKAw Aqy sihXog
8. Morgenthau, Hans J. (1969) Politics Among Nations: Calcutta, Scientific Book Agency
9. Palmer Perkins, Norman D. and Howard C. (1968) International Relations: Calcutta, Scientific
Book Agency
10. Chaudhury, Subrata Roy (1966) Military Alliances and Neutrality in War and Peace: New
Delhi, Orient Longman.
11. Singh, Nagendra (1974) The Defence Mechanism and the Modern State: New Delhi, Asia
Publishing House.
12. SIPRI Year Book
(SEMESTER- VI)
33
DEFENCE AND STRATEGIC STUDIES (PRACTICAL)
CONTENTS
A. PATROL- TYPES AND STAGES OF PATROLLING
B. BATTLE PROCEDURE:
i. Aim of Battle Procedure
ii. Principles of Battle Procedure
C. APPLICATION OF FIRE:
i. Fire Control
ii. Fire Control Orders and Sequence of Fire Control Orders
D. PLATOON ATTACK
i. Types and Principles of Attack
ii. Stages of Attack
E. MILITARY MESSAGE WRITING.
F. AMBUSH:
i. Organization of ambush Party
ii. Ambush Operation.
G. RECORD
H. VIVA VOCE
(SEMESTER V)
ECONOMICS: INDIAN ECONOMY 34
CREDITS: 5
Course Outcome: The students will be able to identify the nature and characteristics of Indian Economy
from since Independence to till date. The students will gain the ability to examine various agricultural,
industrial and foreign policies which will help them to understand the working of public and private sector
development and organization in the era of globalization.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have fourquestions
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section Cwill consist of 10
short-answer type questions of three marks each, which will cover the entiresyllabus uniformly and
will carry30 marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and theentire Section
C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type questions inabout 100 words.
SECTION -A
Nature and Characteristics of Indian Economy on the eve of independence. New Agricultural
Strategy and Green Revolution. Industrial Policy of India since 1991 with special emphasis on recent
trends of liberalisation. Role and Problems of Small and Large Scale Industries. Role of public and
private sector in industrial development of India.
SECTION - B
Features of Indian Tax Structure, Foreign Trade: Direction and Composition of Exports and
Imports and changes therein since Independence, Balance of Payments: Concept, Trends,causes,
measure of its disequilibrium. Capital Formation: Meaning, importance, reasons of lowcapital
formation in India. Role of NITI AYOG in India. Major Indian Economic Problems:Population
Growth, Poverty, Unemployment and Inflation.
1. K.S. Gill: Evaluation of Indian Economy, NCERT,

6. Tyagi, B.P & Singh, H.P: Public Finance, Jai Parkash Nath & Co.
Society.
(SEMESTER VI)
ECONOMICS: PUBLIC FINANCE AND INTERNATIONAL TRADE 35
CREDITS: 5
Course Outcome : The students will be familiar with the knowledge and application of various plans and
policies role of financial institutions and benefits of trade within and outside the country.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have fourquestions
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section Cwill consist of 10
short-answer type questions of three marks each, which will cover the entiresyllabus uniformly and
will carry30 marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and theentire Section
C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type questions inabout 100 words.
SECTION-A
Introduction to Public Finance: Nature, scope and its importance. Public Taxation: Meaning andTypes
of Taxes. Salient Features of Indian Tax System. Difference between Incidence and Impactof Tax.
Effects of Taxation. Public Expenditure: Meaning and Factors affecting Public
Expenditure. Wagner’s Law of Increasing State Activities, Wiseman and Peacock Hypothesis,Effects
of Public Expenditure on Production and Distribution. Public Debt: Meaning,objectivedifference
between Public Debt and Private Debt, Classification of Public Debt, Effects of PublicDebt,
Redemption of Public Debt. Deficit Financing-objectives and limitations.
SECTION-B
The Pure theory of International Trade: Classical theories of International Trade: Adam Smith’stheory
of Absolute Cost Advantage, Ricardian theory of Comparative Cost Advantage. Terms ofTrade:
Concept, types and effects on nation’s welfare. Balance of Payments: Concepts andcomponents of
balance of payments, Causes of unfavourable balance of payments. Suggestionsto correct
disequilibrium in the Balance of payments. International Organisations: WTO: itsObjectives,
Functions and Agreements. Disadvantages of WTO for Less developed Countries.International
Monetary Fund: objectives, organization and functions.
1. Tyagi, B.P & Singh, H.P: Public Finance, Jai Parkash Nath & Co.
2.Musgrave, R.A. and P.B. Musgrave (1976), Public Finance in Theory and Practice, McGraw, Hill,
Kogakusha, Tokyo.
3. Shoup, C.S .(1970), Public Finance, Aldine, Chicagop.
4. Shome, P (ed.) (1995), Tax Policy: Handbook, Tax Division, Fiscal Affairs Department,
International Monetary Fund, Washington D.C.
5.Gupta J.R. And Harvinder Kaur (SarabjanakArthvigyan) Century, Patiala Latest Edition (Regional
Language)
6. C.P. Kindleberger: International Economics, Richard Irwin Homes woodilinios, Indian
Edition, 1977,Part II, III, IV and V.
7. Bo Soderston: International Economics, Macmillan Press Ltd. 1990, Parts I, III, IV and V.
9.Jadish N. Bhagwati (ed.): International Trade, Penguin, London, 1969.
1.Myles G.D, Public Economics, Cambridge university Press, U.K,2008
2. John Leach, A Course in Public Economics, cambridge University Press, U.K,2004
3. Salanie B, The Economics of Taxation, Mit Press,2011
4.C.W.Baird: Elements of Macro Economics, West Publishing Company,
1977(Ch.2.11)
5. A.E.A (ed.): Readings in Theory of International Trade, George Allen & Unwin, 1970.
6.Bo Sodersten& Geoffrey Reed: International Economics, Macmillian, London. 1994.
7. C.P. Kindleberger: International Economics, Richard Irwin, 1973, IIIinois.
8. I.F.Pearce: International Trade Book I and II. Norton, N.Y. 1970.
9. Sidney J. Wells: International Economics, George Allen & Unwin, London, 1996.
10. R.S.Ghuman: International Economics (Punjabi) Publication Bureau, Punjabi University, Patiala,
1996.
(ECONOMICS) HONOURS
36
(SEMESTER V & VI)
SCHEME OF STUDIES
The candidates will be required to study one paper in each of the Semester V and VI of B.A. Part-
II from the following list of papers but the papers selected in a semester must be different than
those selected in earlier semester(s).
1. Economics of Agriculture
2. Agricultural Marketing
3. Public Finance
4. Money and Banking
5. History of Economic Thought
6. International Economics
7. Industrial Economics
8. Economics of Public Enterprises
9. Computer Applications in Economics
10. Econometrics
B.A. ECONOMICS HONOURS PART-III
PAPER- ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE 37
CREDITS: 5
questions each. Each question shall carry 10 marks. Section C will consist of 10 short answer type
questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short
answer type question will carry 3 marks. The candidates are required to give answer of each short
type question in about 100 words.
Section C. The use of simple calculator is allowed. The candidates are required to give answer of
SECTION-A
Economics of Agriculture: Its nature and scope, Inter-dependence between Agriculture
and Industry. Nature and problems of agricultural development in developing countries.
Transforming Traditional Agriculture: Ranis & Fei, Schultz and Mellor Models, Lewis
model of Unlimited Supply of Labour.
SECTION-B
Land Reforms and System of Farming. Farm size and productivity relationship.
Agricultural price policy. New Agricultural Strategy and Green Revolution; Problems of small
farmers and agricultural labourers.
Agriculture marketing: meaning, classification and functions. Agricultural credit,
Marketable and Marketed surplus, price spread and market margins.
1. R.N.Soni : Leading Issues in Agriculture Economics, Shoban Lal Nagin Chand & Co.,
Jallandhar, 1992, Chp. 1,2,3,4,8,11,12,16,23,24,26,27,28 & 29.
2. C.Eicher and L. Witt: Agricultrue in Economic Development, Vora & Co., Bombay, 1970,
Chp. 1,5,9,11,16 and 17.
3. Charan D.Wadhva : Some Problems of India's Economic Policy, Tata Mc Graw Hill,
Bombay, 1973, Part Two; Articles -B,C,D,F and G.
4. A.M.Khusro: Readings in Agricultural Development, Allied Publishers, Bombay, 1968,
Articles by: B.S.Minhas & T.N.Srinivasan, M.L.Dantwala, A.M.Khusro, T.Bergman,
V.K.R.V.Rao.
5. P.C.Joshi: Land Reforms in India, Allied Publishers, Bombay, 1976, Part II, Sections I & II.
6. T.W.Schultz : Transforming Traditional Agriculture, Lyall Book Depot, Ludhiana, 1970.
7. J.W.Mellor: The Economics of Agricultural Development, Vora & Co. Bombay, 1966.
8. Michael P.Tandon: Economic Development in the Third World, Orient Longman, New
Delhi, 1987.
9. Francis R. Frankel: India's Green Revolution-Economic Gains & Political Costs, Oxford
University Press, Bombay, 1971.
10. Misra & Puri: Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay, 1993, Chapter 30.
11. Singh & Sadhu : Agricultural Problems in India, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay,
38
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING
CREDITS: 5
SECTION -A
Marketing: Definition, Scope, marketed and marketable surplus, factors affecting marketable
surplus, size, distribution of marketable surplus, nature of demand and supply of agricultural
commodities.
Mobilization of agricultural surpluses, terms of trade between agriculture and industry, income
and price elasticity of agricultural commodities, Co-Webb model.
SECTION-B
Structure and functioning of agricultural markets, marketing margin, marketing efficiency,
measures to improve marketing efficiency. Food grain marketing system in India, State
intervention in food grain marketing, role of different agencies (FCI, State Agencies, State
Department).
Marketing of major agricultural commodities in India (Food grains, commercial crops). Price
expectation and price uncertainties, price stabilization measures. Finances of agricultural
marketing.
1. A.S.Kahon & M.V.George: Agricultural Marketing and Price Policies, Allied Publishers, New
Delhi, 1985, pp.336, 173-7.
2. A.S.Kahlon & D.S.Tyagi: Agricultural Price Policy in India Allied Publishers, New Dehli, 1983.
3. Dala.C.Dahl & Jerona W.Hummod: Market and Price Analysis-The Agricultural Industires,Mc.
Graw Hill Book Company, 1977, pp.1-62, 88-138.
1. Richard L. Nols: marketing of Agricultural Production, Macmillan, New York, 1968, pp. 20-36,
109-130, 181-203, 201-252.
2. Rajbans Kaur: Agricultural Pricing Policies in Developing Countries, Kalyani Publishers,
Ludhiana, 1984.
3. Uma J. Lele: Foodgrain Marketing in India, Popular Prakashan, Bombay, 1973.
39
PUBLIC FINANCE
CREDITS: 5


SECTION-A
Public Revenue: Sources of Public Revenue. Tax and non tax revenue, direct & indirect tax,
progressive and non progressive tax; Taxable capacity: meaning and determinants, Effects of
taxation, Public Expenditure: Rationale for the growth of public expenditure, Wagner's law of
increasing state activities: Wiseman-Peacock hypothesis; effects of public expenditure.
SECTION-B
Public Debt: Classical view of public debt; Classification of public debt; effects of public
debt/Borrowings. Methods of debt redemption. Fiscal Policy: Objectives and instruments of fiscal
policy. Fiscal Federalism: Principles of multi-unit finance. Centre-state financial relations in India;
transfer of resources from union to states and local bodies.
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Musgrave, R.A: Theory of Public Finance.
2. Tay Philip: The Economics of Public Finance.
3. Buchanan, J.M.: The Public Finance
4. Gupta J.R. And Harvinder Kaur: Public Economics (Punjabi Medium)
40
MONEY AND BANKING

CREDITS: 5
SECTION -A
Evolution of Money: classification and functions. Near money, Demand for money:
classical theory of money, and Keynesian theory of demand for money.
Supply of Money: Components and determinants, Money Multiplier, IS and LM
functions, Classical and Neo-classical theories of interest.
SECTION -B
Banking: Commercial banks: their functions and importance. Credit-creation. Central
bank: functions and methods of credit control. Financing institutions and their role. Role of
Non-banking financial intermediaries. Monetary policy in India, objectives and instruments.
International Monetary Cooperation: International Monetary Fund, International Bank
for Reconstruction and Development, International Finance Corporation. International
Development Association.
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Lucken, D.C. : Money and Banking
2. Thorn, R.S. : Introduction to Money and Banking
3. Leidle, B.E.W. : The Demand for Money Theories and Evidence
4. Gupta, S.B. : Monetary Planning in India.
41
HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT

CREDITS: 5
SECTION -A
Pre-Classical Economic Thought: Mercantilism: Mercantilist ideas, regulations of
economic life, leading theory of mercantilist school, Physiocracy: ideas with special reference
to Quesnay and Turgot.
Classical and Marxian Political Economy: The classical tradition: Adam Smith,
Ricardo, J.S.Mill and Karl Marx on value, distribution and development.
SECTION -B
Reaction against Classicism: Socialist and Nationalist thinkers, Sismondi, Saint-
Simon, Robert Oven and Charles Fourier, Subjective School: Menger, Weiser and Bohm-
Bawerk.
Neo-Classicism and New Economics: Neo- classical School, Value Theory,
Schumpeter on economic development, Keynes.
1. Eric Roll: History of Economic Thought, Oxford University Press, Calcutta, 1974.
2. M. Blaug: Economic Theory in Retrospect, Richard D. Irwin Inc. Illinois, 1968.
3. Gide & Rist: A History of Economic Doctrines, George G. Harrap & Co. Ltd., London, 1964
4. P.M.Sweezy: The Theory of Capitalist Development, K.P.Bagchi & Co., Calcutta, 1991.
SUPLLEMENTARY READINGS
1. B.N. Ghosh & Rama Ghosh: Concise History of Economic Thought, Himalaya Publishing
House, Delhi, 1980.
2. J.A. Schumpeter : History of Economic Analysis (Selected portions), George Allen & Unwin,
London, 1961.
3. R.R.Paul: Classical Political Economy, Kalyani Publishers, Delhi, 1979.
42
INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS
CREDITS: 5
SECTION -A
Theories of International Trade: Theories of Absolute Advantage, Comparative Advantage
and Opportunity Costs. Heckscher-Ohlin Theory. Factor Price Equalisation. Gains from trade.
Terms of trade: meaning and types.
Commercial Policy: The theory of tariffs, The theory of Customs Union: partial equilibrium
analysis, effects of custom union. Free trade and protection: meaning and arguments in favour
and against, Methods of protection. Economic Intergration: Meaning and types.
SECTION -B
Balance of Payments, Exchange Rate and Trade Structure: Balance of payment: meaning,
components, structure and causes of disequilibrium in balance of payment, Difference between
Balance of payment and Balance of trade. Fixed Vs. flexible exchange rates and their relative
merits and demerits. International Capital movement: Meaning and types (Short term and long
term, public and private , direct and portfolio). Multinational corporations and its effects.
International Monetary System: IMF: meaning, organization, functions and fund facilities. World
Bank: Meaning, functions, organization.
1. Bo Sodersten: International Economics, IInd Edition, Macmillan Press, London, Reprint 1990.
Parts I, II, IV and V.
2. C.P.Kindleberger: International Economics, Richard Irwin, Homeswood, IIinois, Indian,
Edition 1977, Parts I, II, IV and V.
43
PAPER- INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS

CREDITS: 5
SECTION - A
Scope and methods of Industrial Economics; Basic concepts of firm, industry and
market; organisational forms and alternative motives of the firms; Industrial structure and
economic development.
Market Structure: Sellers concentration, product differentiation, conditions of entry and
economics of scale, market structure and profitability. Growth of firms: Vertical integration,
diversification, mergers and innovation; constraints on growth - demand, financial and
managerial.
SECTION -B
Theory of industrial location: contribution of Weber and Sergeants Florence.
Centralised vs. balanced regional development. Industrial concentration and dispersal in India.
Industrial policy since independence. Industrial development under plans and reasons
for deceleration of industrial growth. Growth of State led industrialization in India.
1. R.R.Banthwal : Industrial Economics: An Introduction. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi. Chs.
1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 & 17.
2. S.C.Kuchhal: The Industrial Economy of India, (latest edition). Allahabad. Chaitanya
Publishing House. Chs. 7,15 and 18.
3. P.J.Devine et. al: An Introduction of Industrial Economics.
4. W. Steward Howe: Industrial Economics: An Applied Approach, The Macmillan Press Ltd. Chs.
3, 5, 6, & 7.
5. Datt & Sundharam : Indian Economy (latest edition). S. Chand and Company, Chs. 10, 27 &
40.
1. David M.Smith: Industrial Location: An Economic Geographic Analysis, John Wiley & Sons Ins.
Chp. 8.
2. E.D.Penrose: The Theory of Growth of Firm, Oxford Basil Blackwell, Chs. 7 & 8.
3. Harry W. Richardson: Elements of Regional Economics, Penquin Education, and Ch. 3 pp. 70-
78.
4. Ishar Judge Aluwalia : Industrial Growth in India: Stagnation since Mid Sixties, Oxford
University Press, Delhi, Ch..2.
5. Sivaya & Das: Indian Industrial Economy, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, Chs. 4 & 7.
44
ECONOMICS OF PUBLIC ENTERPRISES

CREDITS: 5
SECTION - A
Role of public sector in socio-economic development. Rationale of public sector.
Multiple objectives of public enterprises and clash and complementarities in objectives.
Historical perspective of public sector in India. Organisation of public enterprises- various
forms and role.
Role of public sector financial institutions in the financing of public enterprises.
Problems of Management of Working Capital - Management of Inventory. Credit and Cash
Financing of Working Capital.
SECTION -B
Pricing in public sector- Basis and types of pricing policies, pricing practices,
machinery of price fixation, Role of B.I.C. & P. Accountability and Profitability of public
sector - Causes of poor financial performance of public sector in India.
Sources of funds of public enterprises - Debt and Equity, Industrial Relations & its
importance. Industrial disputes; causes, effects and their settlements.
1. Laxmi Narain : Principles and Practices of Public Enterprises Management, S.Chand & Co.,
New Delhi, 1980.
2. Institute of Public Enterprises: Organisation in Public Enterprises, Tripathi, Bombay, 1967.
3. Institute of Public Enterprises: Pricing & Investment in Public Enterprises, Oxford and IBH
Publishing Co., New Delhi, Ch.IV, pp.97-200, 205-322.
4. Laxmi Narain: Public Enterprises in India, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, 1982.
1. K.R.Gupta: Issues in Public Enterprises, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, 1978.
2. G.S.Bhalla: Financial Administration of Nationalised industry in U.K. and India, Meenakshi,
Meerut, 1968.
45
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN ECONOMICS

CREDITS: 5


SECTION - A
Introduction to Computers : Simple Model of a Computer, Steps in problem solving on
a computer, Data representation, Input/output devices, computer memory, Central Processing
Unit (CPU), Computer generations and classifications.
Introductory Programming: Algorithm, Computer Program and programming
languages; Basic data types and declarations. Elementary C programming.
SECTION -B
Programming: Control structures (Iterative and conditional), Structured data type
(Array only), Introduction to functions and procedures Programming Applications :
Developments of algorithm and programs for simple statistical and mathematical methods like
computation of measures of central tendency, dispersion, correlation, simple regression, Matrix
operations (Addition, subtraction, multiplication and Inverse).
1. V.Rajaraman: Fundamentals of Computers, PHI, 1991, Chs. I, II, II, IV and XII.
2. V. Rajaraman : Computer Programming in C, PHI, Delhi. 1990 (full book).
1. G.M. Scheider and Others: An introduction to Programming and Problem Solving, PHI,
Delhi, 1984, Chs. I to V.
2. E.Balaguruswami: Computer Oriented Statistical and Numerical Methods, Macmillan,
1988 (Full book).
46
ECONOMETRICS
CREDITS: 5
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and the
entire Section C. The use of simple calculator is allowed. The candidates are required to give
answer of each short type questions in about 100 words.
SECTION - A
Definition and Scope of econometrics. The methodology of economic research.
Specification and estimation of an econometric model. Random variable and probability
distribution. Basic concepts: Unbiasedness, efficiency and consistency. Single Equation Models:
Ordinary Least Squares Estimation.
Testing of Hypothesis: Basic concepts: Type I and Type II errors. Simple and composite
hypothesis. z. t and F tests. Maximum Likelihood estimation.
SECTION -B
The General linear model in Matrix form. Estimation and properties of the
estimators.Multicollinearity : Its detection and solution. Heteroscedasticity: Its detection and
solution.
Dummy Variables: The dummy variable trap. Interpretation of slope and intercept.Lagged
Variables: Uses in economics. Estimation Problem, Koyck's transformation, Partial adjustment
model.Estimation of demand function. Estimation of consumption function.
1. Johnston. J.: Econometric Methods, 20, McGraw Hill, 1984, New York, Chs. 1 to 3 & 9, pp.
225-29, 293-304.
2. Gujarati, Damodar: Basic Econometrics, New Delhi, McGraw Hill, 1978, Chs. 2-10, 12-13.
1. Kendall, M.G. and A.Stuart (eds.): Advanced Theory of Statistics. Vols. I & II, Griffin and Co.,
London.
2. Intrilligator, M.D.: Econometric Models and Applications, Prentice Hall, Chs. 1 & 7.
3. Maddala, G.S.: Econometrics, New Delhi, McGraw Hill, 1977, Chs. 3,4,7,8,9,10 & 12.
4. Wallis, K.F.: Topics in Applied Econometrics, London, Bray Hills.
47
DEPARTMENT OF FINE ARTS

B.A.(Part-III) Semester-V
Credit: 5(2L+6P)
Name of Paper No. of Paper Time of Hrs. Marks Internal Total Credits per
Assessment week
History of Art 1 3 42 18 60 2
Practical 2 4-4 20-20 - 40 3

Total Marks (Theory and Practical) 100 5
Semester-VI
Credit: 5(2L+6P)
No. of Paper Time of Hrs. Marks Internal Total Credits per

Name of Paper Assessment week
History of Art 1 3 42 18 60 2
Practical 2 4-4 20-20 - 40 3

Total Marks (Theory and Practical) 100 5
48
Semester-V
OBJECTIVES:

Paper- B (Practical)
Section-A Landscape/ Studyof Nature20 pass marks: 35% (14mks) 4 hours
Section-B Life Study 20 4 hours
Total 82+18 = 100

Course Outcome : Students will develop
 Behaviour such as curiosity, initiative and persistence that will help them engage with the world
in productive ways.
 They will be able to work independently or collaboratively to achieve stated goals.
 This may deal with direct painting from nature or with alternative approaches to the making of
traditional and, at times, three-dimensional images.
 Progress toward developing personal direction and style.
SECTION-A
SECTION-B
SECTION-C
49
SEMESTER-V
FINE ARTS: HISTORY OF ART
Unit- I
History of Indian painting:
1. Kalighat paintings
2. Company School of Art
3. Bengal School of Art: Abanindranath Tagore, Nand Lal Bose
4. Contribution of Artists: Rabindranath Tagore, Amrita Shergil, Raja Ravi Varma, Sobha Singh,
S.G.Thakur Singh
Unit- II
Aesthetics:
1. Theory of Rasa and Bhava
2. Relationship between Art and Society
3. Relationship between Art and Religion
4. Symbolism in Indian Art
Suggested Readings
50
SEMESTER-V
FINE ARTS: PRACTICAL

3. While evaluation the examiner should see the competency, its technical
artistic,composition, tone, texture and quality.
SECTION A: LANDSCAPE/ STUDY OF NATURE
Time: 4 Hours M Marks: 20

Size: ½ Imperial
SECTION B : LIFE STUDY
Time: 4 Hours M. Marks: 20
Study of human body (life/cast) for proportions, balance and study of angles, rhythmic rendering
Medium: color pencil, pastels, oil, and clay
Size: ½ Imperial
51
Semester- VI
OBJECTIVES:

Paper- B (Practical)
Section-A Landscape/ Composition 20 pass marks: 35% (14mks) 4 hours
Section-B Life Study/Clay modeling 20 4 hours
Total 82+18 = 100

Course Outcome : Students will develop
 Behaviour such as curiosity, initiative and persistence that will help them engage with the world
in productive ways.
 They will be able to work independently or collaboratively to achieve stated goals.
 This may deal with direct painting from nature or with alternative approaches to the making of
traditional and, at times, three-dimensional images.
 Progress toward developing personal direction and style.
d) The question paper will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
e) The paper setter should set the question paper in three sections: Section A,B,C
f) The division of marks for the question paper shall be as under:
SECTION-A
SECTION-B
SECTION-C
52
SEMESTER-VI
FINE ARTS: HISTORY OF ART
Unit- I
History of Modern Movements in Europe
1. IMPRESSIONISM: Brief history and critical analysis of specified paintings in
particular.
(i) Claude Monet
a. Impression Sunrise
(ii) Pierre Auguste Renoir
a. Luncheon of boating Party
2. POST IMPRESSIONISM :Brief history and critical analysis of specified paintings in
particular.
(i) Paul Cezanne
a. Still Life with Apples
(ii) Vincent VanGogh
b. Starry Night
3. EXPRESSIONISM: Brief history and critical analysis of specified paintings in
particular.
(i) Edward munch
a. The Scream
(ii) Emile Nolde
a. Last Supper
Unit- II
4. CUBISM: Brief history and critical analysis of specified paintings in particular.
(i) Pablo Picasso
a. Guernica
(ii) George Braque
a. Man with Guitar
5. SURREALISM: Brief history and critical analysis of specified paintings in particular.
(i) Salvador Dali
a. Persistence of memory
(ii) Max Ernst
a. The Elephant Celebes
6. ABSTRACT ART: Brief history and critical analysis of specified paintings in particular.
(i) Kandinsky
a. Composition VII
(ii) Piet Mondrian
a. Composition in red, blue and yellow
Suggested Readings
Paragon Book : Essential History of Art
53
Pran Nath Mago : Contemporary Art in Indian A Perspective

Charles R. James : Studying Art History
SEMESTER-VI
FINE ARTS: PRACTICAL

3. While evaluation the examiner should see the competency, its technical
artistic,composition, tone, texture and quality.
SECTION A: COMPOSITION/LANDSCAPE

Size: ½ Imperial
SECTION B: LIFE STUDY/CLAY MODELLING
Study of human body (life/cast) for proportions, balance and study of angles, rhythmic rendering
Medium: Oil, water colors, pastels, clay
Size: ½ Imperial
54
(SEMESTER – V)
FOLK ART & CULTURE
Practical: 30 marks
Course Outcome :
 Trace regional identity through the analysis of folklore.
 Understand the importance of folk legacy.
 Address the challenges posed to folk art and culture by the advent of modernization and
globalization.
 Develop cross-cultural understanding through the study of Vedic, Islamic, Christian culture.
 Understand the Punjabi Culture in contemporary times.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Section A & B will have 4 questions
9 short answer type question of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
Section - A
1H b'eXkok d/ gqw[Zy ;o'ekol ihtB^P?bh ns/ ;fGnkukoe gfjukD.
2H gzikph b'eXkokl gzikph b'eK dh ihtB^P?bh, K/soh gfjukD b'e^fto;k.
3H gzikph b'eXkok B{z dog/P u[D"shnK, nkX[BheoB ns/ ftPtheoB.
4H gzikph b'eXkok ns/ ;fGnkukoe nfXn?B, R.C. Temple, Flora Annie Steel
5H gzikph b'eXkok ns/ ;fGnkuko nfXn?B B{z d/D, n?~wHn?~;H ozXktk, dftzdo ;fsnkoEh,
;'fjzdo f;zx tDikok p/dh.
Section - B
1H fwPos ;fGnkukol ;zebg, f;oiDk, g;ko ns/ gzikph ;fGnkuko.
2H t?fde ;fGnkuko ns/ j'o Xkofwe gzyK dk ;zy/g fJfsjk;l t/d ns/ ;?t, ekbh, BkE, i'rh,
f;ZX, t?PBt, ;{|h, Grs ns/ f;Zy gzE.
3H fJ;bkfwe ;fGnkukol w[}b Pk;eK ;w/A gzikph ;wki.
4H fJ;kJh ;fGnkukol nzrq/Ihoki d"okB ;wkfie ns/ ;fGnkukoe go;fEshnK.
5H Gkosh e"wh ;fGnkukol nkIkdh ;zxoP ;w/A gzikph ;fGnkukoe gfo;fEshnK.
55
Practical
1H R.C.Templens/Flora Annie Steel tZb'A fJeZso ehshnK b'e^rkEktK ns/ eEktK pko/
ikDekoh ;pzXh ;{uh fsnko eoBk.
2H otkfJsh ns/ nkX[fBe ;wkfie ivhwrW pko/ ikDekoh, otkfJsh ftjkoK d/ t/ot/ ns/
s;thoK.
3H nkIkdh ;zrqkw d/ BkfJeK pko/ ikDekoh, s;tho ns/ B'N.
4H gzikphnK T[~s/ fJ;ekfwe gqGkt B{z gqNkT[Adh ikDekoh ;pzXh fog'oN ns/ s;thoK.
5H Xkofwe gZyK d/ nkr{nK pko/ ikDekoh ;pzfXs s;thoK ns/ ftnkfynk.
Books Suggested
2H b'e Xow ^ i;ftzdo f;zx
3H b'eXkok ns/ b'eXkok ^ gzikph ftek; ftGkr, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh,
6H gzikp d/ gqf;ZX w/b/ ^ ;ot/n g[;se, GkPk ftGkr
in Tribal Society
11H fJwkfJnb d[oo\kfJw ^ ;wki ftfrnkB gZXo ftP/P nze
56
(SEMESTER – VI)
FOLK ART & CULTURE
Practical: 30 marks
Internal Assessment: 20 marks.
Course Outcome :
 Trace regional identity through the analysis of folklore.
 Understand the importance of folk legacy.
 Address the challenges posed to folk art and culture by the advent of modernization and
globalization.
 Develop cross-cultural understanding through the study of Vedic, Islamic, Christian culture.
 Understand the Punjabi Culture in contemporary times.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B & C. Section A & B will have 4 questions
9 short answer type question of 2 marks each which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
Section - A
1H b'eXkok ftfrnkBl gfoGkPk, ftPk^t;s{, fBek;, ftek; ns/ ;zGktBktK.
2H gzikph b'erkEktKl ftfGzB o{g, b'e^BkfJe dk ;zebg, fJfsjk;e ns/ fwfEjk;e gZy.
3H b'eXkokl b'eXkokJh ftjko, u/sBk, nB[Gt, ;KM fJei[Nsk ns/ gfjukD.
4H noB'nbv tkB r?Bgl oj[ôhsK, ihtB^g/V ns/ oj[ôhsK.
5H phHw?e; rbZewBl ;wkfie sDkT[ ns/ oj[ôhsK.
Section - B
1H b'e^ftPtk; d/ w[ZYb/ o{gl fJwkfJb (fJwkfJb d[o\kfJw).
2H b'e^ftPtk; d/ f;XKsl JhHphH NkfJbo.
3H ikd{ ns/ b'e^ftPtk;l i/wI |o/Io dk f;XKs.
4H wB[Zyh b'VK ns/ b'e^ftPtk;l po'B;bkn ek;go w?bB't;eh.
5H b'eXkok ns/ ftPtheoBl B"w u'w;eh ns/ n?vtov ;/v.
Practical
1H gzikph b'e^ftPtk; d/ tZy^tZy o{gK pko/ ikDekoh.
57
2H iBw, ftnkj ns/ w"s dhnK oj[ôhsK pko/ ikDekoh.

3H gzikph ihtB^P?bh ftu nk ojhnK spdhbh pko/ ;zy/g fog'oN.
4H gzikph b'eXkok Bkb ;pzfXs fuZsoK dh g/Pekoh.
Books Suggested

2H b'e Xow ^ i;ftzdo f;zx
3H b'eXkok ns/ b'eXkok ^ gzikph ftek; ftGkr, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh,
6H gzikp d/ gqf;ZX w/b/ ^ ;ot/n g[;se, GkPk ftGkr
in Tribal Society
11H fJwkfJnb d[oo\kfJw ^ ;wki ftfrnkB gZXo ftP/P nze
58
SEMESTER- V
SOCIOLOGY: SOCIAL THOUGHT
Course Outcome: Upon successful completion students will be able to:
 Demonstrate an understanding of, and the ability to use, several of the major perspectives in
social theory given by August Comte, Herbert Spencer, Karl Marx, Max Weber, Emile Durkheim
and Mahatma Gandhi.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A and Bwill have
four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10marks each. Section
C will consist of 10 short-answer type questions, which will coverthe entire syllabus uniformly
and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short-answer typequestion will carry three marks each. Thirty
(30) marks will comprise of internalassessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B.Section C is
compulsory.
SECTION -A
i) August Comte: Law of Three Stages; Positivism.
ii) Herbert Spencer: Law of Evolution; Organic analogy; Types of society
iii) Karl Marx: Materialist conception of History: Base and Super-structure; Classstruggle.
iv) Max Weber: Interpretative Sociology; Social Action: concept and types;Authority: concept
and types.
SECTION-B
i) Emile Durkheim: Social Facts: Meaning, Nature and Characteristics; CollectiveConsciousness.
ii) Division of Labour; Suicide;
iii) Mahatma Gandhi: Non-violence; Satyagraha.
iv) Swaraj; Sarvodaya.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Abraham, F and Morgan J.H. 1985. Sociological Thought. Delhi: MacMillan India.
2. Abraham, Francis. 1982. Modern Sociological Theory. Delhi: Oxford UniversityPress.
3. Aron, R. 1965. Main Currents in Sociological Thought, Vol- (1 & 2) London: PenguinBooks.
4. Gandhi, M.K. 1946. Hind Swaraj or Indian Home Rule.Ahmedabad: Navajivan
5. Haralambos, M.andHolborn ,M. 2008(paperback-2013,8th edition). Sociology: Themes and
Perspectives.UK: Harper CollinsUniversity Press.
6. Jammu, P.S. and Bhatnagar, G.S. (eds). 1989. SamajVigyanikSidhant(SamajikVigyan Pattar No.
26, 27, 28). Punjabi University, Patiala.
7. Judge, Paramjit .smwijkidRStIkox Aqy isDWq . pitAwlw:pblIkySnibaoro, pMjwbI XUnIvristI[
8. Mann, Michael(ed) 1994. Macmillan Student Encyclopedia of Sociology. London:Macmillan
Press
9. SavinderjitKaur : 1995(2015)smwjivigAwnnwl jwx pCwx Bwg-3, jlMDr : inaU
AkwdimkpbilisMgkMpnI
10. Timasheff, N.S. and Theodorson, G. 1976. Sociology Theory, New York:Random House.
11. Zeitlin, I.M. 1969. Ideology and the Development of Sociological Theory. New Delhi:Prentice
Hall
59
SEMESTER- VI
SOCIOLOGY: SOCIAL SCIENCE RESEARCH METHODS

Course Outcome: Upon successful completion students will be able to:
 Demonstrate an understanding of several of the major processes in social science research
methodology. It includes social research, scientific methods, hypothesis, techniques of data
collection, sampling, analysis of data, statistics and measures of central tendency.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A and Bwill have
four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10marks each. Section
C will consist of 10 short-answer type questions, which will coverthe entire syllabus uniformly
and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short-answer typequestion will carry three marks each. Thirty
(30) marks will comprise of internalassessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B.Section C
is compulsory.
SECTION - A
i) Social Research: Meaning, objectives and steps in Social Research;
ii) Scientific Method: definition and characteristics.
iii) Hypothesis: meaning, function, types and sources.
iv) Techniques of Data Collection: Observation, Interview, Schedule and Questionnaire.
SECTION -B
i) Sampling: Meaning and types (Probability and Non Probability)
ii) Analysis of Data: Editing; Coding; Tabulation and Report Writing.
iii) Statistics: Meaning, Definition and Functions Uses and Abuses.
iv) Measures of Central Tendency: Mean; Median and Mode (only Numerical)
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Ahuja, Ram . 2001. Research Methods .Jaipur : Rawat Publication.
2. Bajpai, S.R. 1991. Methods of Social Survey and Research. Kanpur: Kitab Ghar
3.Firebaugh,Glenn.2008.Seven Rules for Social Research.Princeton : Princeton University
Press
4. Goode, William J. & Paul K Hatt. 1952. Methods in Social Research. New Delhi, McGraw Hill.
5. Mann, Michael(ed) 1994. Macmillan Student Encyclopedia of Sociology. London: Macmillan
Press.
6. Selltiz, C. (et al). 1976. Research Methods in Social Relations. New York: Holt,Rinehart and
Winston.
7. Young, P.V. 1966. Scientific Social Surveys and Research. New Delhi: PrenticeHall India.
8. Randhawa, M.S. 2013. smwjkKojivDIAW. pitAwlw :21 sYNcUrIpblIkySn
9. SavinderjitKaur . 1995(2015) smwjivigAwnnwl jwx pCwx Bwg-3 . jlMDr
:inaUAkwdimkpbiliSMgkMpnI
60
smYstr V
Drm AiDAYn: pRwcIn Drm, Drm sMskwr qy Drm dy audyS
iQaurI :70 pws pR qISq: 35
Internal Assesment :30 Credit: 5 (4L+1T)
Course Outcome : Students will get the knowledge of different methodological approaches to
understand religion. It discusses the origin and impact of religion on individual and society. This course
also discusses Sikh philosophical concepts and important Bani's (text) of Sri Guru Granth Sahib.
pRSn p` qr dy iqMn Bwg hoxgy: a, A Aqy e[a Aqy A sY kSn ivcoN cwr-cwr pR Sn puCy jwxgy[ividAwrQI
ny hryk sYkSn ivcoN 2-2 pR Sn krny hoxgy Aqy hr iek pRSn dy 10 AMk hoxgy[Bwg e ivcoN sMKyp auqrW vwly
10 pRSn swry islybs ivcoN hoxgy Aqy aunHW dy 30 AMk ho xgy[ hry k pRSn 3-3 AMkW dw ho vygw[
Bwg a Aqy A ivcoN 2-2 pR Sn krny hn Aqy Bwg e dy swry pRSn jrUrI hn[
Bwg a (pRwcIn Drm)
1. Drm: AwrM B, pirBwSw qy srUp
2. pRwcIn mn` uK Aqy ausdy Dwrimk ivSvws: AYnIimzm, mwnw, to tm
3. muFly Dwrimk pRgtwvy: jwdU, im~Q, tYbU
4. Drm qy drSn : pirBwSw qy srUp
5. Drm qy nYiqkqw : pirBwSw qy srUp
6. Drm qy drSn : smwnqw Aqy AMqr
Bwg (A) Drm sMskwr Aqy audyS
1. Drm sMskwr : pirBwSw ArQ Aqy srUp
2. Drm dw audyS : pirBwSw ArQ Aqy srUp
3. sMskwr : jnm, Drm pRvyS, imrqk sM skwr
4. Drm dw ivAkqIgq audyS
5. Drm dw pirvwirk audyS
6. Drm dw smwijk audyS
shwiek pusqk sUcI
pMjwbI
1. gurbcn isMG qwilb, Drm dI auqpqI Aqy ivkws, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw[
2. gurmIq isMG is`DU, Drm: AwDuink Aqy auqrAwDuink isDWq, gurigAwn buks, pitAwlw [
3. drSn isMG, Drm AiDAYn Aqy is`K AiDAYn, pMjwbI XU nIvristI, pitAwlw[
English Books
1. E.O James, Beginning of Religion, Arrow Books, Hutchinson, London
2. G.S Talib (ed.) The Origin and Development of Religion, Punjabi University, Patiala
3. J. Streng, Understanding Religious Life, Dickenson Publishing Company, California
4. W.Richards Comstock, The Study of Religion and Primitive Religions, Dover Publications,
New York
5. Stephen Fuchs, Origin of Religion: Introduction into History of Religion, Pontificial
Institute of Theology and Philosophy, Kerala
61
smYstr VI
Drm AiDAYn: is`K Drm:pRmu`K bwxIAW,isDWq qy sMsQwvW
iQaurI :70 pws pR qISq: 35
Internal Assesment :30 Credit: 5 (4L+1T)
Course Outcome : Students will get the knowledge of different methodological approaches to
understand religion. It discusses the origin and impact of religion on individual and society. This course
also discusses Sikh philosophical concepts and important Bani's (text) of Sri Guru Granth Sahib.

pRSn p` qr dy iqMn Bwg hoxgy: a, A Aqy e[a Aqy A sY kSn ivcoN cwr-cwr pR Sn puCy jwxgy[ividAwrQI
ny hryk sYkSn ivcoN 2-2 pR Sn krny hoxgy Aqy hr iek pRSn dy 10 AMk hoxgy[Bwg e ivcoN sMKyp auqrW vwly
10 pRSn swry islybs ivcoN hoxgy Aqy aunHW dy 30 AMk ho xgy[ hry k pRSn 3-3 AMkW dw ho vygw[

Bwg a Aqy A ivcoN 2-2 pR Sn krny hn Aqy Bwg e dy swry pRSn jrUrI hn[
Bwg (a): pRmùK bwxIAW
1. jpujI swihb: pMj KMf
2. AnMd swihb: AnMd dw sMklp
3. lwvW : smwijk Aqy Dwrmk m`hqv
4. Awsw dI vwr: smwijk sMdrB
5. bwrhwmwh mwJ: AiDAwiqmk pirpyK
6. suKmnI swihb: su `K Aqy bRhm igAwn dw sMklp
Bwg (A): is`K isDWq Aqy sMsQwvW
1. Akwl purK
2. isRStI rcnw
3. mnu`K
4. Shwdq
5. Akwl qKq
6. srb`q Kwlsw

shwiek pusqk sUcI
pMjwbI
1. srdUl isMG kvISr, is`K Drm drSn, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw [
2. swihb isMG, bwrhw mwh mwJ Aqy quKwrI, isMG bRdrj, AMimRqsr [
3. swihb isMG,jpu jI swihb stIk, isMG bRdrj, AMimRqsr [
4. gMfw isMG Aqy qyjw isMG, is`K ieiqhws, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw [
5. jsivMdr kOr iFloN, jpujI bhup`KI AiDAYn, gurU nwnk dyv XUnIvristI, AMimRqsr [
6. joD isMG, is`K isDWq: srUp qy smr`Qw, isMG bRdrj, AMimRqsr [
7. qwrn isMG, bwrhw mwhw drpx, inaU bu`k kMpnI, jlMDr [
8. nwnk pRkwS piqRkw, Shwdq ivSyS AMk, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw [
9. prmvIr isMG, is`K AiDAYn, grySIAs buks, pitAwlw [
10. ipAwrw isMG pdm, suKmnI drSn, pMjwbI XUnIvristI, pitAwlw [
62
11. rwm isMG, jpujI swihb dy pMj KMfW dw bhup`KI AiDAYn, gurU nwnk dyv XUnIvristI, AMimRqsr [
12. rwm isMG, suKmnI swihb: ie`k srv p`KI AiDAYn, pMjwbI swihq AkwfmI, luiDAwxw [
13. vjIr isMG, PlsPw Aqy is`K PlsPw, mdwn pbilSrj, pitAwlw [
14. Syr isMG, gurmiq drSn, SomxI gurduAwrw pRbMDk kmytI, gurUu nwnk dyv XUnIvristI, AMimRqsr
[
English Books
1. Dewan Singh, Guru Nanak’s Message in Japji, Singh Brothers, Amritsar.
2. Gopal Singh, Thus Spake the Tenth Master, Punjabi University, Patiala.
3. Gopal Singh, History of Sikh People, World Sikh University Press.
4. Ganda Singh & Teja Singh, A Short History of the Sikhs, Punjabi University, Patiala.
63
(SEMESTER-V)
HISTORY: HISTORY OF THE WORLD (1500-1950)
Total Marks: 100 Theory:70

Time allowed: 3 Hours Internal Assessment: 30
Marks
Pass Marks:35% 05 credits (4L+1T)
Course Outcome: With an emphasis on Europe, the course will impart knowledge to
the students regarding the political transformations of the modern world that took
place from the sixteenth century till the end of the 1950.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A
and B will have four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and
will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist of 10 short-answer type
questions, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 20 marks
in all. Each short-answer type question will carry two marks each. The second
part of Section C will contain a question on map, internal choice will be offered
in Map question. The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map question will
carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for filling the Map and 4 marks for
explanatory note. Thus the total marks for the compulsory section C will be 30
out of which 20 marks for short answer type questions and 10 marks for the
Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of internal assessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A, and
B of the question paper and the entire Section C which is compulsory will consist
of two parts: First part of Section C will consist of 10 short answer type questions
which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry two marks each. The
candidates are required to give answer of each short answer type question in 20-
25 words i.e. in 3-4 lines. The second part of Section C will contain a question
on map, internal choice will be offered in Map question. The Maps are specified
in Section C. The Map question will carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for
filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory note. Thus the total marks for the
compulsory section C will be 30 out of which 20 marks for short answer type
questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise
of internal assessment.
ONLY FOR BLIND CANDIDATES: In lieu of Map question the blind candidates
will attempt the short answer type questions. The short answer type questions
will be set from the entire syllabus. These questions will be based upon terms,
concepts, institutions and historical sources within the purview of the
syllabus. Out of four, the blind candidates will attempt any two short answer
type questions. Internal choice will be given. The answer to each of these
questions will be 50-60 words and will carry 5 (five) marks each. Thus the total
marks of these question will be 10.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections
A, and B of the question paper and the entire Section C. The candidate are
required to give answer of each short answer type question in 25-30 words.
SECTION-A
1. Rise of Modern Age: Renaissance and Reformation.

2. French Revolution of 1789: causes and effects.
64
3. Napoleon: Reforms and Continental system of Napoleon; Causes of his

downfall.
4. Congress of Vienna and its significance.
5. Rise of Nationalism: Unification of Italy (1852 to 1871).Unification of
Germany under Bismarck.
SECTION-B
6. Industrial Revolution: Causes, Growth and its Effects
7. The Russian Revolution of 1917: Causes and consequences.
8. Rise of Fascism:- Rise of Fascist Party under Mussolini and his Domestic
policyand foreign policy; Nazism:-Early Hitler’s Rise to Power’ :-His
Domestic Policy and Foreign Policy.
9. First World War & Second World War: Causes and Effects.
10. Chinese Revolution of 1949; Modernization of Turkey under Kamal
Pasha.
SECTION-C
(Compulsory)
MAPS:
(a) Europe in 1789 A.D.
(b) Vienna Congress.
(c) Unification of Italy.
(d) Europe in 1945.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. C.D. Hazen :Modern Europe upto 1945 (English)
2. C.D.M. Ketelbey:A history of Modern Times (English)
3. F.L. Benns:European History Since 1870 (English & Punjabi).
4. F.L. Benns:Europe Since 1914 in its World Setting (English &Punjabi).
5. E.H. Carr: International Relations between the Two World Wars, 1919-1939.
6. Robert Ergang: Europe in our Times
7. S.B. Fay: The Origins of the World War.
8. Greenwood: The Modern World : A History of our Times.
9. A.C. Arora &R.S. Arora:History of the World (Punjabi & Hindi).
10. Rajinder Singh :Europe Da Itihas(Punjabi).
11. Brown and Coysh:The Map Approach to Modern History.
12. A.C. Arora &R.S. Arora: Atlas of World History.
13. J.E. Swain :History of World civilization (English & Punjabi).
14. H.G. Wells: A Short History of the World (English & Punjabi).
15.J/Hi?vHwkBco/v:ftPtfJfsjk;
16. Jain and Mathur: History of Modern World
17. Meenakshi Phukan : Rise of Modern West
65
(SEMESTER-VI)
HISTORY: HISTORY OF PUNJAB (1799-1966)
Total Marks: 100 Theory:70
Time allowed: 3 hours Internal Assessment: 30 Marks
Pass Marks: 35% 05 credits (4L+1T)
Course Outcome: It will inculcate the greatness of the Ranjit Singh, traditional chiefs
and their relations with the British.
The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C. Sections A
and B will have four questions from the respective sections of the syllabus and
will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist of 10 short-answer type
questions, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 20 marks
in all. Each short-answer type question will carry two marks each. The second
part of Section C will contain a question on map, internal choice will be offered
in Map question. The Maps are specified in Section C. The Map question will
carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for filling the Map and 4 marks for
explanatory note. Thus the total marks for the compulsory section C will be 30
out of which 20 marks for short answer type questions and 10 marks for the
Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise of internal assessment.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A, and
B of the question paper and the entire Section C which is compulsory will consist
of two parts: First part of Section C will consist of 10 short answer type questions
which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry two marks each. The
candidates are required to give answer of each short answer type question in 20-
25 words i.e. in 3-4 lines. The second part of Section C will contain a question
on map, internal choice will be offered in Map question. The Maps are specified
in Section C. The Map question will carry 10 marks out of which 6 marks are for
filling the Map and 4 marks for explanatory note. Thus the total marks for the
compulsory section C will be 30 out of which 20 marks for short answer type
questions and 10 marks for the Map question. Thirty (30) marks will comprise
of internal assessment.
ONLY FOR BLIND CANDIDATES: In lieu of Map question the blind candidates
will attempt the short answer type questions. The short answer type questions
will be set from the entire syllabus. These questions will be based upon terms,
concepts, institutions and historical sources within the purview of the
syllabus. Out of four, the blind candidates will attempt any two short answer
type questions. Internal choice will be given. The answer to each of these
questions will be 50-60 words and will carry 5 (five) marks each. Thus the total
marks of these question will be 10.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections
A, and B of the question paper and the entire Section C. The candidate are
required to give answer of each short answer type question in 25-30 words.
SECTION-A
1. Political condition of the Punjab on the eve of Ranjit Singh's rise to
Power.
2. Establishment of Ranjit Singh's Kingdom : Conquest of Lahore, Amritsar,
Multan, Kashmir and Peshawar.
3. Relations between Ranjit Singh and the British (1800-1839).
66
4. Central and Provincial Administration and Military System of Ranjit

Singh.
SECTION-B
5. Anglo-Sikh Wars and the Annexation of the Punjab.
6. Administration of Punjab 1849-58 : Board of Administration and its
working; John Lawrence as Chief Commissioner.
7. Socio-Religious Reform Movements: Namdhari Movement, Singh Sabha
Movement,Ahmadiyya Movement, Gurdwara Reform Movement.
8. Factors leading to the partition of Punjab 1947 and its effects;
reorganization of the Punjab, 1966.
SECTION-C (Compulsory)
MAPS:
(a) Kingdom of Ranjit Singh (1839 A.D.)
(b) Battles of First Anglo-Sikh War.
(c) Battles of Second Anglo-Sikh War.
(d) Punjab in 1966.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. N.K. Sinha : Ranjit Singh (English & Punjabi).
2. B.J. Hasrat : Life and Times of Ranjit Singh (English).
3. Khushwant Singh : History of the Sikhs, Vol.II.
4. Khushwant Singh : Ranjit Singh - Maharaja of the Punjab.
5. Fauja Singh : Some Aspects of State and Society under
Ranjit Singh
6. G.S. Chhabra : Advanced History of the Punjab, Vol.II.
7. J.D. Cunningham : History of the Sikhs.
8. Kirpal Singh : Partition of the Punjab (English & Punjabi).
9. Ganda Singh (ed.) : Punjab (Bhai Jodh Singh Abhinandan
Granth).
10. A.C. Arora : Punjab Da Itihas(Punjabi & Hindi).
11. K.S. Narang & : History of the Punjab (English, Punjabi &
H.R. Gupta Hindi).
12. Gurcharan Singh : Punjab Da Itihas (Punjabi).
& S.S. Gandhi
13. A.C. Arora : Atlas of Punjab History (English, Punjabi &Hindi).
14. Dr. Bhagat Singh : Ranjit Singh and His Times
15. J/H;hHno''Vk : gzikpdhnKb'ebfjoK 1849^1947
67
(SEMESTER-V)
HISTORY (HONOURS): HISTORY OF U.S.A. (1860-1990).
Total Marks: 100 Time allowed: 3 hours
Internal Assessment: 30 Marks 05 credits (4L+1T)
1. The Syllabus prescribed should be strictly adhered to. The paper-setters should keep in view
the topics specified in each paper and not the title of the paper.
2. The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four
questions each from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each.
Section C will consist of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus
and will carry 30 marks in all. There being no internal choice in this section, each short-
answer type questions will carry 3 marks. Candidates are required to attempt two questions
each from the Sections A and B and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give
answer of each short-type question in 50 words i.e. in 7-10 lines.
3. If there is a question on notes, the choice offered in such question should at least be fifty
percent.
4. The wording of the questions should be simple and easily understandable by an average
student. There should be no vagueness.
5. The number of questions based upon quotations should not exceed two in a question paper.
6. The general standard of the questions should cater to the different intellectual levels-average,
above average and below average.
7. Each paper is of 70 marks and three hours duration and 30 marks are of internal assessment.
SECTION-A
1. Civil War : Causes and effects.
2. Reconstruction Programme.
3. Industrial and Agricultural Revolution.
4. Populist movement; Progressive movement.
5. Woodrow Wilson's New Freedom Policy.
6. The Great Depression; New Deal Policy.
SECTION-B
7. Rise of Imperialism : causes and impact.
8. First World War and Peace Settlements.
9. U.S.A and Second World War.
10. U.S.A. and the Cold War, Disarmament and Politics of the Power Blocks.
11. U.S.A., Vietnam and the Iraq Crisis.
SECTION-C
(Compulsory)
Nine short answer questions will be set from the entire syllabus. The candidate will attempt all
the 10 questions. These questions will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and historical
sources within the purview of the syllabus. The answer of these questions will be of 50 words i.e.
7-10 lines and will carry 3 marks each. Thus, the total marks for these questions will be 30.
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. A.F. Pollard : Factors in American History (Cambridge, 1925).

2. Allen Nevins and Heary : A Short History of United States Steele Commager
(Calcutta, 1973).
3. Charles Beard : The Rise of American Civilization (2 Vols.).
4. S. Giri Dikshit (ed.) : American History by Indian Historians (Hyderabad,
1969).
5. Harold Eugene Davis : The United States in History (New Delhi, 1968).
6. John A. Krout : United States Since 1865 (London, 1971).
7. Ralph W. Steen : The United States - A History (New Jersey,1950).
68
8. Samuel Mckee : American History to 1865 (New Jersey, 1969).

9. Samuel Eliot Morison : The Oxford History of the American People
(New York, 1995).
10. T.A. Bailey : A Diplomatic History of the American People.
11. S. Link Arthur : American Epoch : A History of United States Since the
1890's.
12 J/H;hH no'Vk L ft;at dk fJfjk;
13 J/Hi?vHwkBco/v L ft;at dk fJfsjk;
14 Jain and Mathur : History of Modern World
69
(SEMESTER VI)
HISTORY (HONOURS): HISTORY OF CHINA (1840-1990).
Total Marks: 100 Time allowed: 3 hours
Internal Assessment: 30 Marks 05 credits (4L+1T)
1. The Syllabus prescribed should be strictly adhered to. The paper-setters should keep in view
the topics specified in each paper and not the title of the paper.
2. The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four
questions each from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each.
Section C will consist of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus
and will carry 30 marks in all. There being no internal choice in this section, each short-
answer type questions will carry 3 marks. Candidates are required to attempt two questions
each from the Sections A and B and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give
answer of each short-type question in 50 words i.e. in 7-10 lines.
3. If there is a question on notes, the choice offered in such question should at least be fifty
percent.
4. The wording of the questions should be simple and easily understandable by an average
student. There should be no vagueness.
5. The number of questions based upon quotations should not exceed two in a question paper.
6. The general standard of the questions should cater to the different intellectual levels-average,
above average and below average.
7. Each paper is of 70 marks and three hours duration and 30 marks are of internal assessment.
SECTION-A
1. Opening of China and its impact.
2. Sino-Japanese War : Causes and results.
3. Rise of Nationalist movement and Chiang Kai-Shek. .
4. Revolution of 1911 : causes and effects.
SECTION-B
5. Rise of Communism in China: Role of Sun-Yat-Sen
6. Mao-Tse-Tung Revolution of 1949.
7. Second Sino-Japanese War : Causes and effects.
8. China and the Second World War.
9. The Sino-Indian War and Sino-Indian Relations.
SECTION-C
(Compulsory)
Nine short answer questions will be set from the entire syllabus. The candidate will
attempt all the 9 questions. These questions will be based upon terms, concepts, institutions and
historical sources within the purview of the syllabus. The answer of these questions will be of
50 words i.e. 7-10 lines and will carry 3 marks each. Thus, the total marks for these questions
will be 27.
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. B.R. Chatterji : Modern China - A Short History (Meerut,1969).
2. Chou Hsiang-Kuang : A History of Chinese Culture.
3. Chou Hsiang-Kuang : Modern History of China.
4. Li Chien Nung : The Political History of China (New Delhi,1963).
5. M.G. Aleavy H. : The Modern History of China.
6. R.S. Gupta : History of Modern China (New Delhi, 1974).
7. Sharmunn & Schell : Republic of China.
8. Sharmunn & Schell : Imperialist China.
9. H.M. Vinacke : History of the Far East in Modern Time.
10. Wolfrao Eberhard : A History of China (London, 1977).
11. Wright, M. (ed.) : The Chinese Revolution-The First Phase.
12. Jain and Mathur : History of Modern World
70
(SEMESTER-V)
MATHEMATICS: ABSTRACT ALGEBRA
Credit: 3:3H (L)

 To recognize the mathematical objects that are groups, and classify them as abelian,
cyclic and permutation groups etc.
 To explain the significance of cosets, normal subgroups, and quotient groups.
 To understand the fundamental concepts of rings, fields and integral domains.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PAPER SETTER/EXAMINER
SECTION A
Group Theory: Definition and Examples, Properties of groups, subgroups , cosets, counting
principle, Lagrange's theorem, Order of an element, Cyclic groups, Normal subgroups and
Quotient groups.
Permutation groups, Homomorphism, Cayley's theorem, Fundamental theorems of
homomorphism and isomorphism.
SECTION B
Ring theory: Definition and examples, Elementary properties of rings, Integral domains, Division
rings and fields, Subring and characteristic of ring, Ideals, Maximal and Prime Ideals, the Quotient
ring, Homomorphism, the fundamental theorem and the correspondence theorem.
Books Recommended
1. P. B. Bhattacharya, S. K. Jain and S. R. Nagpaul, Basic Abstract Algebra, 2nd Edition,
Cambridge University Press, 1995.
2. I. N. Herstein, Topics in Algebra, 2nd Edition, Vikas Publishing House, 1976.
3. Surjeet Singh and Qazi Zameeruddin, Modern Algebra, 7th Edition, Vikas Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2006.
4. V. K. Khannna, S. K. Bhambri, A Course in Abstract Algebra, 5th Edition, Vikas
Publishing House, 2016.
71
(SEMESTER-V)
MATHEMATICS: DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
Credit: 2:2H (L)
 To learn about partially ordered sets, lattices and their types.
 To understand Boolean algebra and Boolean functions, logic gates, switching circuits and
their applications.
 To enable students to solve real-life problems using finite-state and Turing machines.
 To assimilate various graph theoretic concepts and familiarize with their applications.
SECTION A
Relations – Definitions, Equivalence relations and Partitions, Partial order relations and Lattices,
Chains, Hasse Diagram.
Graphs – Basic Terminology, Simple and Multigraphs, Weighted Graphs, Paths and Circuits,
Shortest path problem, Dijkstra’s Algorithm, Euler and Hamiltonian paths and circuits, Planar
Graphs, Euler’s Formula.
Trees-Definition, binary tree, properties, spanning trees, Kruskal’s algorithm, Prim’s Algorithm,
binary search trees.
SECTION B
Discrete numeric functions and Generating functions
Recurrence Relations and Recursive Algorithms- Linear Recurrence Relations with Constant
Coefficients, Homogeneous Solutions, Particular Solution,Solution by the Methods of Generating
Functions.
Boolean Algebras – Lattices and Algebraic Structures, Duality, Distributive and Complemented
Lattices, Boolean Lattices and Boolean Algebras, Boolean Functions and Expressions,
Propositional Calculus.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. C.L. Liu, Elements of Discrete mathematics, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, International, 2012.
2. S. Lipschutz and M. Lipson, Discrete Mathematics, 3rd Edition, Schaum‘s Outlines,
McGraw Hill, 2007.
3. K. H. Rosen, Discrete Mathematics and its Applications, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2011.
72
(SEMESTER-VI)
MATHEMATICS: LINEAR ALGEBRA
Credit: 2:2H (L)
 To recognize the algebraic structure vector spaces, subspaces and quotient spaces.
 To understand the fundamental concepts of Linear Transformation
 To enable the identification of square matrix as operator.

SECTION A
Vector spaces, Examples, Linear Dependence, Linear Combinations, Basis and Dimension,
Subspaces, Dimension of a subspace, Existence and Extension theorem, Quotient spaces, Direct
Sum of vector spaces.
SECTION B
Linear transformation, Algebra of linear transformations, Matrices as linear mappings, Kernal and
image, Sylvester’s law of Nullity, Singular and non-singular linear mappings, Isomorphism,
Composition of linear mappings, Square matrices as linear operators, matrix representation of a
linear operator, Change of basis, characteristic and minimal polynomial for linear operators, eigen
values and eigen vectors, Cayley Hamilton Theorem.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. C. Prasad, Text book on Algebra and Theory of equations, Pothishala Pvt. Ltd, 2017.
2. I. N. Herstein, Topics in Algebra, 2nd Edition, Vikas Publishing House,1976..
3. S. Lipschutz and M. Lipson, Schaum’s Outline of Linear algebra, 4th Edition, McGraw
Hill Education, 2009.
4. S.R.K.Iyenger ,R.K Jain, ,Engineering Mathematics, Narosa Publishing House.,2007
(SEMESTER-VI) 73
MATHEMATICS: MECHANICS
Credit: 3:3H (L)

 To learn about friction, centre of gravity, work and potential energy in statics.
 To know about various topics in dynamics such as simple harmonic motion, simple
pendulum and projectile motion.
The question paper covering the entire course shall be divided into three parts: A, B & C. Each of sections
A and B will have 4 questions from the respective sections of the syllabus of 5 marks each and section C
will consist of 1 compulsory question of short answer type having 5 parts of 1 mark each and 5 parts of
2 marks each covering the entire syllabus uniformly.
Candidates are required to attempt five questions in all, selecting two questions from each section A and
B and the compulsory question of section C.
SECTION A
Statics: Basic notation, system of two forces, parallelogram law of forces, resultant of two collinear
forces, resolution of forces, Lami’s theorem, λ - µ theorem, moment of a force, couple, theorem on
moments of a couple, Varignon’s theorem, generalized theorem of moments.
Equilibrium of two concurrent forces, equilibrium condition for any number of coplanar concurrent
forces, Equilibrium conditions for coplanar non-concurrent forces.
SECTION B
Dynamics: Motion of a particle with constant acceleration, acceleration of falling bodies, motion under
gravity, motion of a body projected vertically upward, motion of a two particles connected by a string,
motion along a smooth inclined plane, constrained motion along a smooth inclined plane.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. S.L. Loney, The elements of statics and dynamics, New Age International Private Ltd.
2016.
2. J. L. Synge and B. A. Griffth, Principles of mechanics, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill
Exclusive (CBS) 2017.
Program Specific Objectives 74
1. The students will be able to enhance their theoretical knowledge in important

specialized subjects of management.
2. The students will gain practical knowledge of business processes through
industrial training.
3. They will also sharpen their skills in the specialized fields of their choice.
(SEMESTER V) 75
RETAIL MANAGEMENT: RETAIL LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT
Course Objectives
This course is intended to provide an understanding of the components and processes of supply chain and
logistics management as well as the performance drivers of supply chain. It is also intended to help the
students to learn about logistics, transportation, warehousing and outsourcing decisions.
CO 1: Student will develop an understanding of the importance of logistics in the formulation of the
business strategy and the conduct of supply chain operations.
CO 2: Develop an in-depth understanding of logistics operating areas and their interrelationship.
CO 3: Strengthen integrative management analytical and problem-solving skills.
UNIT I
Logistics: Introduction, Meaning, Scope and Importance, Role of Logistics in Economy. Logistics
Planning and Strategy: Meaning of Logistics Planning, Objectives of Logistics, Changing Logistics
Environment and Logistics Strategies.
Managing Materials Flow: Meaning and Scope of Material Management, Administration and Control
of Material Flow. Transportation: Characteristics and Different Modes Transportation and Their Pros
and Cons, Intermodal Transportation.
UNIT II
Warehousing: Functions and Its Types, Warehousing Decisions. Material Handling: Meaning,
Objectives and Principles of Material Handling, Relevance of Material Handling.
Inventory Management: Meaning, Basic Concepts of Inventory Management, Inventory Models.
Logistics Information System: Introduction, Contemporary Issues in Logistics Information System,
Principles, Logistics Information Technologies.
Recommended Books:
1. Bowersox Donald J., Logistical Management, Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc., New York.
2. Martin Christopher, Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education.
3. Donald J. Bowersox & David J. Closs : Logistical Management, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.
Ltd.
4. Krishnaveni Muthiah: Logistics Management & World Sea borne Trade, Himalaya Publishing House.
5. K. Shridhara Bhat: Logistics Management, Himalaya Publishing House.
(SEMESTER VI) 76
RETAIL MANAGEMENT: RETAIL CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR
Course Objective
The course will help students develop an understanding of consumer behavior theories and apply this
understanding in a marketing decision making context. It will also develop an awareness of consumer
behavior and students will be able to gain firsthand knowledge of consumer behavior and decision
making.
CO 1: Students will develop in depth knowledge of concepts of consumer behavior.
CO 2: Develop application and professional skills to be applied in field of consumer behavior.
CO 3: Display critical thinking and problem-solving skills.

UNIT I
Introduction to Consumer Behaviour: Meaning, Scope, Process of Consumer Behaviour, Difference
Between Consumer Behaviour and Consumption Behaviour. Determinants of Consumer Behaviour.
Consumer Needs and Motivation: Nature and Types of Motivation, Motivational Theories (Maslow’s
Need Hierarchy Theory, Two Factors Theory). Consumer Perception: Meaning and Nature, Factors
Affecting Consumer Perception and Perception Process.
UNIT II
External Influences on Consumer Behaviour: Influences of Culture, Social Class, Life Styles, Group
and Reference Group.
Consumer Decision Making Process: Introduction, Types of Consumer Decisions, Process of Consumer
Decision Making, Personal Influence and Opinion Leadership, Diffusion of Innovations and Adoption
Process. Consumer Behaviour Research: Meaning, Types, Scope of Consumer Research and Different
Techniques of Consumer Research.
Recommended Books:
1. Schiffman and Kanuk : Consumer Behaviour, Pearson Education.
2. Loudon, D and Bitta, D : Consumer behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Assael,h, Consumer Behaviour in Action : Cengage Learning
4.Nair : Consumer Behaviour in Indian perspective, Himalaya publishers
(SEMESTER V) 77
PSYCHOLOGY: ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY –I

Course Outcome: To examine unusual patterns of human behavior, emotions and thoughts understood
from the clinical context. It identifies multiple causes for different conditions, employing diverse theories
from general psychology. Its includes adaptive and maladaptive causes with different biopsychosocial
perspectives in relation to different therapies on basis of different disorders.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four questions
answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 20 marks in all. Each
short answer type question will carry 2 marks. The candidates are required to answer each short type

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and the entire section
C. The candidates are required to answer each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 5-7 lines. Each short
SECTION-A
Abnormal Psychology: Nature, Criteria of Abnormality, Models: Psychodynamic, Cognitive-
Behavioural and Humanistic. Classification System: DSM & ICD
Causes of Abnormal Behaviour: Biological, Psycho-social and Socio-cultural causes.
SECTION-B
Anxiety-Based Disorders, Conversion Disorders, Dissociative Disorders:
symptoms and etiology.
Correlation: Nature and Characteristic, Types (Rank Order and Product Moment).
Note: The use of Non-Programmable Calculators and Statistical Tables are allowed in the
examination.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:
1. Butcher, J.N., Mineka, S. & Hooley, J.M (2017). Abnormal Psychology. 16th Ed. New York: Harper
Collins.
2. Davison, G.C., & Neale, J.M. (1998). Abnormal Psychology. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
3. Garrett, H.E. (1996). Statistics in Psychology and Education. New Delhi: Vakils Feffer and
Simons.
4. Guilford, J.P., & Fruchter, B. (1981). Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education.
Singapore: McGraw Hill.
5. Sarason, I.G., & Sarason, B.R. (2005). Abnormal Psychology. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of
India.
6. Singh, A. (2014). Asadharan Manovigyan. Publication Bureau, Punjabi University.
1.Barlow, D.H. & Durand, V.M. (2005). Abnormal Psychology: An Integrative Approach. 7th Ed. USA:
Cengage Learning
2.Ahuja, N. (2006). A Short book of Psychiatry. 6th Ed. New Delhi: Jaypee Brothers
(SEMESTER-V) 78
PSYCHOLOGY: PRACTICAL
PRACTICALS
Practical examination will be of 20 marks and of three hours duration. Students will perform all the
assigned practicals. External examiner will conduct the practical examination. The examiner will
evaluate the practical on the basis of write-up, practical file, performance and viva voice relating to the
practical given for performance. No reappear will be allowed in the practical examination. Fail in the
practical will be considered fail overall in the subject. For practical examination, one group of students
will not comprise of more than 20 students at a time.
Break up of Marks:-
Semester V:
Following Practicals have to be performed (ANY 5)
1. Locus of control
2. Memory scale
3. Test of Anxiety
4. Word Association Test
5. T.A.T
6. Parenting style
(SEMESTER VI) 79
PSYCHOLOGY: ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY – II

Course Outcome: To examine unusual patterns of human behaviour, emotions and thoughts understood
from the clinical context. It identifies multiple causes for different conditions, employing diverse theories
from general psychology. Its includes adaptive and maladaptive causes with different bio psychosocial
perspectives in relation to different therapies on basis of different disorders.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Sections A and B will have four questions
answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 20 marks in all. Each
short answer type question will carry 2 marks. The candidates are required to answer each short type

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the sections A and B and the entire section
C. The candidates are required to answer each short type question in 50 words i.e. in 5-7 lines. Each short
SECTION-A
Psychosomatic Disorders: Ulcers, Hypertension, Asthma: Etiology and Treatment.
Schizophrenia: Types, Symptoms and Etiology.
Mood Disorders: Types, Symptoms and Etiology.
SECTION-B
Drug Abuse: Causes and Types, Alcohol, Opium, Cocaine and Amphetamine.
Psychotherapies: Psychodynamic, Behavioural, Cognitive-behavioural, Humanistic, Mindfulness
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:
1. Barlow, D.H. & Durand, V.M. (2005). Abnormal Psychology: An Integrative Approach. 7th
Ed. USA: Cengage Learning
2. Butcher, J.N., Mineka, S. & Hooley, J.M. (2017). Abnormal Psychology. 16th Ed. New York: Harper
Collins.
3. Davison, G.C., & Neale, J.M. (1998). Abnormal Psychology. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
4. Sarason, I.G., & Sarason, B.R. (2005). Abnormal Psychology. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of
India.
5. Singh, A. (2014). Asadharan Manovigyan. Publication Bureau: Punjabi University
6. Taylor, S.E (2006). Health Psychology. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill
1. Ahuja, N. (2006). A short book of Psychiatry. 6th Ed. New Delhi: Jaypee Brothers
2. Wolman, B.B.(1996). Handbook of Clinical Psychology. New York: McGraw Hill.
(SEMESTER VI) 80
PSYCHOLOGY: PRACTICAL
PRACTICALS

Practical examination will be of 20 marks and of three hours duration. Students will perform all the
assigned practicals. External examiner will conduct the practical examination. The examiner will
evaluate the practical on the basis of write-up, practical file, performance and viva voice relating to the
practical given for performance. No reappear will be allowed in the practical examination. Fail in the
practical will be considered fail overall in the subject. For practical examination, one group of students
will not comprise of more than 20 students at a time.
Break up of Marks:-
Semester V:
Following Practical’s have to be performed (ANY 5)
1.Adjustment Inventory
2. Stress/Clinical Analysis Questionnaire (CAQ)
3. Depression Inventory
4. Interest Inventory
5. Interview schedule/Case study
6. JPMR (Jacobson Progressive Muscle Relaxation)
HOME SCIENCE 81
SEMESTER V

Food Science & 3 periods/week 4 periods/week
Child Development
Name of Paper Examination Marks Internal Total credits Teaching
Hours Assessment Hours per
Marks week
Theory Food Science & 3 42 18 60 3 3
Child
Development
Practical Food Science & 3 40 - 40 2 4

Nutrition-I
Total 100 5 7
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments / Project-work
etc.,(40%) and two mid semester tests/internal examinations* (40%).
SEMESTER VI

Food Science & 3 periods/week 4 periods/week
Child Development
Marks week
Theory NUTRITION, 3 42 18 60 3 3
DIET THERAPY
& CHILD CARE
Practical Food Science & 3 40 - 40 2 4

Nutrition-II
Total 100 5 7
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments/ Project-work etc.,
(40%) and two mid semester tests/internal examinations* (40%).
SEMESTER V 82
HOME SCIENCE: FOOD SCIENCE & CHILD DEVELOPMENT (THEORY)
Max marks: 60 Time Allowed:-3 hrs

Theory: 42 Internal Assessment: 18
Pass Marks:35% of Theory
SECTION-A
1. Importance and functions of food, Study of Basic food groups.
2. Essential food constituents: Carbohydrate, Proteins and Fats; Functions, Source and Requirements
and deficiency.
3. Source and deficiency, functions, requirements and excess of: Vitamins: A, B complex, C, D, E and K,
Minerals: Ca, P, Na, Fe, K, I
4. Methods of cooking, reasons for cooking food, cooking method: moist heat, dry heat, fat,
microwave, air frying.
SECTION-B
1. Definition, importance and Objectives of child development.

2. The Physical and motor development of the child, factors affecting the physical and motor
development.
3. Language development and factors affecting language development.
4. Emotional development:
(a) Characteristics of childhood emotions
(b) Common Emotions: fear, anger, joy, jealousy, anxiety, curiosity, and factors affecting the
emotional development.
5. Social development-during infancy, babyhood, childhood, and adolescence, the role of family and
school in the process of socialization.
SEMESTER V 83
HOME SCIENCE: FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION-I (PRACTICAL)
Maximum Marks: 40 Time Allotted: 3 Hours Pass Marks: 35%

of the total
Contents
1. Preparation of minimum three dishes by using various methods of cooking (e.g. boiling,
steaming, baking), frying (deep and shallow) and roasting with different food groups. (e.g.
cereals, pulses and vegetable groups)
2. Preparation of salads, sandwiches
3. Converting ready to eat/ packed food into healthy food.
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. Davidson, S. Passomore, R. Brock, J.F. and Trusweld, A.S. 1975 "Human Nutrition and Dietaries".
English Language Book Society and Churchill Livingstone.
2. FAO, 1974: " Handbook of Human Nutritional Requirements" FAO series.
3. Gopalan, C, Balasubramanium, S.C. 1980 " Nutritive Value of Indian Foods", NIN, Indian Council
of Medical Research, Hyderabad.
4. ICMR 1980:" Recommended Dietary Allowances for Indians", ICMR, New Delhi.
5. ICMR 1990: " Recommended Dietary Intake for Indians", ICMR
6. Patvardhan V.N., " Nutrition in India".
7. Rajalakshmi 1969, "Applied Nutritions".
8. Singh B, 169, Indian Cookery, Mills and Book, London.
9. Wilson, Eva. D,1979 Principles of Nutrition
SEMESTER VI 84
HOME SCIENCE: NUTRITION, DIET THERAPY & CHILD CARE
(THEORY)
Max marks: 60 Time Allowed:-3 hrs
Theory: 42 Internal Assessment: 18
Pass Marks:35% of Theory
SECTION-A
1. Balanced Diet: Definition, points to be considered while planning balanced diets.
2. (a) Meal planning: Definition, importance and factors affecting meal planning.
(b) Planning of meals for different age groups i.e. pre-school, adult (male &
female), pregnancy & lactation.
3. (a) Normal diet and its modifications.
(b) Definition of soft, bland and liquid diets with examples.
4. Dietary requirement during Typhoid fever, digestive disorders (constipation, diarrhea and
dysentery), Diabetes, high blood pressure.
SECTION-B
1. Pregnancy
2. Prenatal development and factors affecting it.
3. Feeding of the infant-
(a) Breast feeding
(b) Bottle feeding
(c) Weaning – Different kinds of important weaning foods for infants.
4. Behavioral problems in children-thumb sucking, stealing, nail biting (their causes & remedies).
5. Digestive disturbances-diarrhea, constipation, vomiting and colic.
6. Viral infection-viral fever, flu, their symptoms and preventive measures.
SEMESTER VI 85
HOME SCIENCE: FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION-II (PRACTICAL)
Maximum Marks: 40 Time Allotted: 3 Hours Pass Marks: 35%
of the total
Contents
1. Preparation of diets for the following: -
(a) Pre-school child.
(b) Adolescent
(c) Adults (men and women) moderate worker
2. Germination/ fermentation/ supplementation
3. Salad making/ Decoration
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. Davidson, S. Passomore, R. Brock, J.F. and Trusweld, A.S. 1975 "Human Nutrition and
Dietaries". English Language Book Society and Churchill Livingstone.
2. FAO, 1974: " Handbook of Human Nutritional Requirements" FAO series.
3. Gopalan, C, Balasubramanium, S.C. 1980 " Nutritive Value of Indian Foods", NIN, Indian Council
of Medical Research, Hyderabad.
4. ICMR 1980:" Recommended Dietary Allowances for Indians", ICMR, New Delhi.
5. ICMR 1990: " Recommended Dietary Intake for Indians", ICMR
6. Patvardhan V.N., " Nutrition in India".
7. Rajalakshmi 1969, "Applied Nutritions".
8. Singh B, 169, Indian Cookery, Mills and Book, London.
9. Wilson, Eva. D,1979 Principles of Nutrition
(SEMESTER – V) 86
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
PAPER: THEORY

1 Credit : 1 HOUR
Course Outcome: Student will be able to:
 Learn about Recreation and its different types and principles.
 Learn about Leadership; qualities and responsibilities of a leader.
 Learn about Postural deformities and consequent disabling complications.
 Learn about deformities like kyphosis, lordosis and scoliosis and their causes and corrective measures.
The question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Eight long type question will
be set from the section A and B ( four from each section ) carrying six marks each . Nine
short questions will be set from section C, covering the entire syllabus, of two marks each .
questions each from section A and B (4 x 6 =24 Marks ) each . Section C is compulsory
consisting nine short type questions two marks each. (2x9 =18 marks) marks.
UNIT-I
1. Recreation: Introduction, Aims, Objectives, Types, Principles, Importance and
Agencies providing Recreation.
2. Camping: Introduction, Objectives, Importance, Types, and Layout of Campsite and
Organization of Camps,
Picnic and Athletic meet: Planning, Organization and Importance.
3. Leadership: Introduction, Importance, Types, Qualities and Responsibilities of Leader.
4. Posture: Introduction and Characteristics of Good Posture (Walking, Standing, Reading Sitting
and Lying Postures).
5. Postural Deformities: Introduction, Causes and Corrective Measures for Spinal Deformities
(Kyphosis, Lordosis and Scoliosis), Foot and Leg Deformities (Flat Foot, Knock Knee and Bow Legs).
6. Motion:- Introduction, Types, Laws of Motion and their application in Sports &
Games.
UNIT-II
1. Respiratory System: Introduction, Structure & Functions of Respiratory System.
2. Blood pressure & Pulse Rate: Introduction, and Technique of Measurement.
3. Physical Education as Profession: Qualification, Qualities of Physical Education Teachers and
Admission criteria for Different Courses in Physical Education.
4. Handball: History, Layout, General Rules and Regulation, Officials, Major tournaments.
5. Badminton: History, Layout, General Rules and Regulation, Officials, Major
tournaments.
6. Javelin throw: Rules and Regulations, Layout and Technique.
References:
Imperium Publishers, Khanna, Ludhiana.Dutta, A.K. (2004) “Games and Sports for Children” 1st
edition - Janvani Prakashan, Shahdra, Delhi. 87
st
 Dutta, A.K. “Games and Sports for Children” (2004)1 edition - Janvani Prakashan Vishwas
Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032
 Jain, Deepak (2002) “Physical Education and Recreational Activities” Khel Sahitya Kendra, New
Delhi.
 Jain, Deepak “Physical Education and Recreational Activities” (2002) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New
Delhi.
 Kang G.S. and Deol N.S. (2008) “An Introduction to Health and Physical Education” Twenty First
Century, Patiala.
 Kaur, Manjeet and Sharma, R.C. (1990) “Health and Physical Education” Tandon Publications,
Ludhiana.
Jabalpur.
Delhi.
(SEMESTER – V) 88
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
PAPER:PRACTICAL
PART – Skill and Prowess 40 MARKS 6 Hrs per week for Per Unit
B (External)
Total Credits: 03 1 Credit: 2 HOURS
HANDBALL (10 Marks)

Evaluation will be based on skill test, performance and Viva-voce.
Content to be covered during practical sessions:
2. Equipment and Materials of the games.
4. Techniques.
5. Rules and regulation of the games
6. Officiating:
 Technical equipment for officiating
BADMINTON (10 Marks)
Evaluation will be based on skill test, performance and Viva-voce.

Content to be covered during practical sessions:
1.Measurement of the field and preparation of the field.
2.Equipment and Materials of the games.
3.Fundamental skill and lead up games.
4.Techniques.
5.Rules and regulation of the games
6.Officiating:
 Technical equipment for officiating
ATHLETICS (JAVELIN THROW) (20 Marks)
2.Equipment and Materials of the event.
3.Techniques.
4.Rules and regulation of the event
5.Officiating:
89
(SEMESTER – VI)
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
PAPER:THEORY

1 Credit: 1 HOUR
Course Outcome: Student will be able to:
 Learn about Recreation and its different types and principles.
 Learn about Leadership; qualities and responsibilities of a leader.
 Learn about Postural deformities and consequent disabling complications.
 Learn about deformities like kyphosis, lordosis and scoliosis and their causes and corrective measures.
The question Paper will consist of three Sections: A, B and C. Eight long type question will
be set from the section A and B,( four from each section ) , carrying six marks each . Nine
short questions will be set from section C, covering the entire syllabus , of two marks each .

questions each from section A and B (4 x 6 =24 Marks) each. Section C is compulsory
consisting nine short type questions two marks each. (2x9 =18 marks)
UNIT-I
1. Intramural and Extramural Tournaments: Introduction, Importance and Organization.
2. Tournaments: Elimination (Knock out), Round robin (League Cyclic, Tabular and
Staircase Method).
3. Life Sketch of Sports Personalities: Major Dhyan Chand, S. Milkha Singh, Prof. Ajmer
Singh, P.T. Usha, Leander Paes and Abhinav Bindra
4. Balanced Diet & Nutrition: Components, Sources and Functions of each Component.
5. Obesity and Over Weight Management: Introduction, Causes and Risk Factors.
6. Physiological Terminologies:Haemoglobin, Cardiac output, Stroke volume, Oxygen Debt,
Vital capacity, B.M.I and B.M.R.
UNIT – II
1. Sports Training: Introduction, Aims, Objectives and Principles.
2. Physical Fitness: Introduction, its Components and their Types (Speed, Strength, Endurance,
Agility, Co-ordination and Flexibility).
3. Training Method: Circuit training, Interval training, Fartlek training, Weight training
Plyometric training and Cross country.
4. Sports Performance: Indian Performance at Olympics and World Championship,
Suggestions for improving Indian Sports Performance.
5. Relay Races: Rules & Regulations, Layout and Technique.
6. Cricket: History, Layout, General Rules & Regulation, Officials, Major
Tournaments and Arjuna Awardees.
References:
 Ahluwalia, P. S., Deol, N.S. and Kaushal, S. (2009) “ A Textbook of Physical 90 Education”
Imperium Publishers, Khanna, Ludhiana.Dutta, A.K. (2004) “Games and Sports for Children” 1st
edition - Janvani Prakashan, Shahdra, Delhi.
 Dutta, A.K. “Games and Sports for Children” (2004)1st edition - Janvani Prakashan Vishwas
Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032
 Jain, Deepak (2002) “Physical Education and Recreational Activities” Khel Sahitya Kendra, New
Delhi.
 Jain, Deepak “Physical Education and Recreational Activities” (2002) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New
Delhi.
 Kang G.S. and Deol N.S. (2008) “An Introduction to Health and Physical Education” Twenty First
Century, Patiala.
 Kaur, Manjeet and Sharma, R.C. (1990) “Health and Physical Education” Tandon Publications,
Ludhiana.
Jabalpur.
Delhi.
(SEMESTER – VI) 91
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
PRACTICAL
PART – B Skill and Prowess 40 MARKS 6 Hrs per week for Per Unit
(External)
Total Credits: 03
1 Credit : 2 HOUR
Athletic (RELAY RACES) (10 Marks)
I. Evaluation will be based on skill test, performance, practical file and Viva-voce.
II. Content to be covered during practical sessions:
III. Measurement of the field and preparation of the field.
IV. Equipment and Materials of the game / event.
V. Fundamental skill and lead up games.
VI. Techniques.
VII. Rules and regulation of the game/event
VIII. Officiating:
CRICKET (10 Marks)

1.Evaluation will be based on skill test, performance, practical file and Viva-voce.
2.Content to be covered during practical sessions:
4.Equipment and Materials of the game / event.
5.Fundamental skill and lead up games.
6.Techniques.
7.Rules and regulation of the game/event
8.Officiating:
BLOOD PRESSURE AND PULSE RATE (Practical) (20 Marks)

 Method and Procedure to measure Blood pressure & Pulse rate
 Operational techniques to measure blood pressure & pulse rate with different medical
equipments
(SEMESTER V) 92
MUSIC INSTRUMENTAL
PAPER-A (HISTORICAL AND THEORATICAL STUDY OF MUSIC INSTRUMENTAL)
Total Credits : 03
1 Credit = 1 Hour
Course Outcome :
A. Knowledge and Understanding
1) Historical development of music in Vedic Period.
2) Study of music according to natyaShastar.
3) Knowledge of gharanas of Sitarsaaz.
4) Knowledge of Importants and uses of sound system in music.
5) Knowledge of biographical sketches of Popular Present performance like UstadBismillah Khan Sahib
and Pt. Vishav Mohan Bhat,Ustad Abdul Haleem Jafer Khan Sahib and Dr. N Rajam.
6) Tabla, Rabab and DilRuba.
. To analyze the relation of different Taals.
. Comparative study of different gharanas.
. Knowledge of Importantsof Instruments in music, Importantance of Taal in music and Raag And Ras.
. Detail Study of Sarangi, Veena, Pakhawaj.
C. Practical Skills
1) Solo Stage Performance of Sitar, Dilruba, Sarangi etc. in Indian Classical music.
2) Besides Classical music Students also learns about folk style of Sarangi and tries to perform other folk
instruments also.
3) Ability to play National Anthem on Sitar and other Instruments.
Note: (i) Along with Music (Instrumental), the candidate can also take Music (Vocal) or Tabla as an
elective subject.
(ii) The candidate can opt any of the following instruments: Sitar, Sarangi, Violin, Dilruba, Flute,
Santoor, Sarod, Veena, Guitar.

(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A,B,& C. Section A & B will have four questions
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each. Section C will consist
of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16
marks in all.
SECTION-A
(i) General history of music in the following periods :
(i) Vedic Period (ii) Bharat Period.
ii) Biographical sketches and contribution towards music of the following Musicians :
a) Pt. Vishva Mohan Bhatt
b) UstadBismillah Khan.
iii) Development and Importance of Indian notation system of music, its merits and demerits.
iv) Gharanas of Sitar Vaadan.
v) Importance of Sound System in Music. 93
SECTION-B
vi) Detailed Knowledge of the following instruments:
Rabab, Sarinda,Dilruba
vii) Evolution and development of Indian Musical Scale.
viii) Description and Notation of Raags (Gats) and Taals prescribed in course :
Raags :TodiandMalkauns
Taals :Jhumra andAddaChautaal
ix) Elementary Knowledge of the following Raags :
GurjriTodi andChandarkauns.
(SEMESTER V) 94
MUSIC INSTRUMENTAL
Pass Marks : 35% Time Allowed : 20 minutes
Total Credits : 02
1 Credit = 2 Hours
Course Outcome :
C. Practical Skills
instruments also.
i) One Drut Gat in each of the following Raags with Toras:Todi andMalkauns.
ii) One Slow Gat with simple alaps and toras in any of the prescribed Raags.
iii) One Dhun.
iv) Ability to demonstrateDeepchandi, Jat and JhumraTaal by hand in Ekgun and
DugunLayakaries.
v) Use of the three- four Swaras in the form of Meend and Kan.
vi) Ability to play Aaroh, Avroh, and Pakar of the following Raags on harmonium :
GurjriTodi andChanderkauns.
vii) Tuning of the instrument
viii) Ability to play National Anthem on your instrument.

1. Dr. Yashpal Sharma :Gayan Kala (Published by Punjabi University, Patiala) 95
2. Shri Harish ChanderSrivastava :RaagParichaya, Part I, II & III& IV.
3. SangeetKaryalya ,Hathras : HamareSangeetRatan.
4. SangeetKaryalya ,Hathras (U.P) : SangeetVishard.
5. Mrs. VeenaMankaran :SangeetSar (Part III)
6. Prof. Tara Singh, Surjit Kaur : Vadan Kala, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
7. Dr. Jagmohan Sharma :TablaVadan Part- I, Punjabi University, Patiala.
8. Dr. GurnamSingh :SangeetNibandhavali, Publication by PunjabiUniversity,Patiala.
9. Dr. Devinder Kaur : SangeetRoop Part III
10. Pt. Satish Chander Srivastava : Sitar Vadan, Part II and III
11. Dr. Devinder Kaur : Bharti SangeetSwarlipiPadhatiEtihasikSarvekhan.
12. Dr. Manmohan SharmaTablaVadan Part- II : Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
13. Pt. Satish ChandarSwarVadan Part-III : Published by SangeetshriParkashan, Kanpur.
14. Principal S.S. Kareer: Vadan Rachna Sagar Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
(SEMESTER VI) 96
MUSIC INSTRUMENTAL
PAPER-A (HISTORICAL AND THEORATICAL STUDY OF MUSIC INSTRUMENTAL)
Total Credits : 03
1 Credit = 1 Hour
Course Outcome :
C. Practical Skills
instruments also.
Note: (i) Along with Music (Instrumental), the candidate can also take Music (Vocal) or Tabla as an
elective subject.
(ii) The candidate can opt any of the following instruments: Sitar, Sarangi, Violin, Dilruba, Flute,
Santoor, Sarod, Veena, Guitar.

(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A,B,& C. Section A & B will have four questions
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each. Section C will consist
of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16
marks in all.
SECTION-A
I. Classification of Indian Musical Instruments.
II. Biographical sketches and contribution towards music of the following musicians :
a) Ustad Abdul Halim Zaffar Khan b) Dr. N. Rajam (Violinist)
c) Pt. Harvinder Sharma
(III) Essay on the following :
i) Importance of Instruments in Indian Music.
ii) Importance of Taal in Music. 97
iii) Raag and Ras.
iv) How to popularise Indian Classical Music.
SECTION : B
v) Detailed Knowledge of the following instruments:
Sarangi , Veena , Pakhawaj
vi) Tradition of Percussion Instruments in Punjab.
vii) Description and Notation of Raags (Gat) and Taals prescribed in course :
Raags : Bhairvi , Multani and MianMalhar.
Taals : JatTaal , SoolTaal
viii) Elementary Knowledge of the following Raags :
Madhuwanti and BilaskhaniTodi
(SEMESTER VI) 98
MUSIC INSTRUMENTAL
PAPER –B: (STAGE CUM VIVA)
Pass Marks : 35% Time Allowed : 20 minutes
Total Credits : 02
1 Credit = 2 Hours
Course Outcome :
C. Practical Skills
instruments also.

i) DrutGat with Alaps, Jor, Toras and Jhalas in each of the following Raags :
Bhairavi, Multani, MianMalhar
ii) One Slow Gat with simple Alaps and Toras in any of the prescribed Raags.
iii) To demonstrate the following Taals on Tabla : Jhumra , AddaChautaal, JatTaal, SoolTaal.
iv) One Gat in DrutEktaal with Toras and Jhalas in any prescribed Raags.
v) Use of three-four Swaras in Meend and Kan.
vi) Ability to play Aroh, Avroh, and Pakar of Raags:
Madhuwanti and BilaskhaniTodion harmonium
vii) Tuning of the instrument.

i) Dr. Yashpal Sharma : Gayan Kala (Published by Punjabi University, Patiala)
ii) Shri Harish Chander Srivastava : RaagParichaya , Part I, II & III & IV.
iii) SangeetKaryalya , Hathras : HamareSangeetRatan.
iv) SangeetKaryalya , Hathras (U.P) : SangeetVishard.
v) Mrs. VeenaMankaran : SangeetSar (Part III) 99
vi) Prof. Tara Singh, Surjit Kaur : Vadan Kala, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
vii) Dr. Jagmohan Sharma : TablaVadan Part- I, Punjabi University, Patiala.
viii) Dr. Gurnam Singh : SangeetNibandhavali, Publication by PunjabiUniversity,Patiala.
ix) Dr. Devinder Kaur : SangeetRoop Part III
x) Satish Chander Srivastava : Sitar Vadan, Part II and III
xi) Dr. Bhairvi : Punjab Ki VadanSangeetParampara (Kanishka Publisher, Delhi)
xii) Dr. Devinder Kaur : Bharti SangeetSwailipiPadhatiEtihasikSarvekhan, Published by Punjabi University,
Patiala.
xiii) SwarVadan Part-III : Pt. Satish Chandar Published by SangeetshriParkashan, Kanpur.
xiv) Principal S.S. Kareer: Vadan Rachna Sagar Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
B.A Music Vocal 100
1. Programme Outcome-
Music Vocal is considered as evergreen subject due to its high utility and huge demand
in the job area and as well as in attaining the popularity and fame. Graduation in
Music Vocal paves way to develop critical enquiry into the value and potential and to
prepare students for entry into work of Personality Development, Social Music
Therapies, Cultural Policy, Sound Archives, Sound Recorder, Music Arranger, Stage
Performer etc.
SEMESTER - V 101
MUSIC (VOCAL)
HISTORICAL AND THEORATICAL STUDY OF INDIAN MUSIC
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Note: The candidate can opt Music Instrumental or Tabla as an elective subject along with Music Vocal.
Course Outcome : The students will be able to understand the historical development of
Indian Music from 18th Century to 1947, development of Indian Notation System. The
students will be able to identify the difference between Classical Music and Folk Music.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four questions fro
the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each. Section C will consist of 08 objective ty
questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16 marks in all.
While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter the syllabus prescribed for Stage cum Viva Paper should a
be sent.
compulsory.
SECTION –A
1. Historical development of Indian Music in Hindu Period with special reference to Ramayan And
Mahabharat Period.
2. Origin and development of the following Gayan Shaillies :
Tappa, Thumri, Tarana.
3. Development of Indian Notation System, its merits and demerits.
4. Contribution and life sketch of the following :
a) Pt. Krishna Rao Shankar Pandit
b) Pt. Dalip Chander Bedi.
SECTION –B
5. Study of Folk Music of Punjab.

6. Define the following Musical terms in the context of Gurmat Sangeet:
a) Kirtaniya b) Dhuni c) Chowki
7. Description and notation of the following Raags and Taals :
a) Raags : Bhairvi, Mian ki Todi, Durga
b) Taals : Roopak, Teevra, Ek taal, Teen Taal
8. Elementary knowledge of the following Raags : Khamaj, Gujri Todi.
SEMESTER – V 102
MUSIC (VOCAL)
PAPER- B: STAGE CUM VIVA

Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
(i) Performance/Viva - 26 Marks

Course Outcome: The students will develop the ability to sing One Vilambit Khayal with
alaps and tans, ability to sing tarana with proper style and tuning of tanpura.
 There should not be more than 12 students in a batch for stage cum viva examination.
 Harmonium is not allowed as accompaniment in Music (Vocal) but it can be used while singing Alankars
1) One Drut Khyal with Alaps and Taans in each of the following Raags :
Bhairavi, Miyan Ki Todi, Durga
2) One Vilambit Khayal in any of the prescribed Raags.
3) Ability to recite the following Taals in Ek Gun, Dugun and Chaugun layakaries :
Roopak, Teevra, Ek taal, Teen Taal.
4) Abiltiy to play the following Taals on Tabla : Dadra, Kehrva, Teentaal
5) One Tarana with proper style in any of the Raags prescribed in the syllabus.
6) Ability to play any one Drut Khayal of your course on harmonium.
7) Tuning of Tanpura.
8) Ability to play Aroh, Avroh and Pakar of the following Raags:
Khamaj, Gujri Todi.
1. Dr. Yashpal Sharma : Gayan Kala (Published by Punjabi University,Patiala)
2. Shri Harish Chander Srivastava : Raag Parichya Part II and III.
3. Sangeet Karyala, Hathras : Hamare Sangeet Ratan
4. Vasant : Sangeet Vishard :Sangeet Karyalaya Hathras.
6. Adduti Gurmat Sangeet Sammelan 1992 : Simrati Granth, G.G.N, Parkashan, Jawaddi Kalan,
Ludhiana.
7. Dr. Devinder Kaur :Sangeet Roop Part III.
8. Dr. Alankar Singh : Hindustani Sangeet : Vibhin Paripekh, Gracious Books, Patiala
9. Dr. Gurnam Singh : Gurmat Sangeet Prabandh Te Paasar , Published by Punjabi University,
Patiala.
10. Dr. Gurnam Singh : Punjabi Sangeetkar, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
SEMESTER – VI 103
MUSIC (VOCAL)
PAPER-A: HISTORICAL AND THEORATICAL STUDY OF INDIAN MUSIC
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Note: The candidate can opt Music Instrumental or Tabla as an elective subject along with Music Vocal.
Course Outcome:The students will be familiar with the knowledge of evolution and
development of Indian Musical Scale, Sufi Music of Punjab, different gayan shaillies of
Gurmat Sangeet, description and notation of Raags and Taals. The students will be
able to identify the global perspective of Indian Music.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four questions fro
the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each. Section C will consist of 08 objective ty
questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16 marks in all.
While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter the syllabus prescribed for Stage cum Viva Paper should a
be sent.
compulsory.
SECTION –A
1. Development of Indian Music from Ancient to Vedic Period.
2. Origin and development of the following Gayan Shaillies :
Trivat, Chaturang, Partal
3. Contribution and life sketch of the following:
a) Ustad Bade Ghulam Ali Khan
b) Vidushi Hira Bai Barodkar
4. Role of Media in the promotion of Indian Music.
SECTION –B
5. Study of Indian Music in Global Perspective.
7. Study of different Gayan Shaillies of Gurmat Sangeet.
8. Description and Notation of the following Raags and Taals :
a) Raags : Patdeep , Des , Miyan Malhar.
b) Taals : Jhap Taal, Sool Taal, Deepchandi Taal
9. Elementary knowledge of the following Raags : Bahar, Madhuvanti.
SEMESTER – VI 104
MUSIC (VOCAL)

Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome: The students will develop the ability to sing one vilambit khayal with
alaps and tans, ability to sing ghazal or sufiana kalam with proper gayaki. The
students will develop the ability of tuning the tanpura and to play harmonium.

 There should not be more than twelve students in a batch for stage cum viva examination.
 Harmonium is not allowed as accompaniment in Music (Vocal) but it can be used while singing Alankars

1) One Drut Khyal with Alaps and Taans in each of the following Raags :
Patdeep , Des , Miyan Malhar.
2) One Slow Khayal in any of the prescribed Raags.
3) Ability to recite the following Taals in Ek Gun, Dugun and Chaugun layakaries :
Jhap Taal, Sool Taal, Deepchandi Taal.
4) Abiltiy to play the following Taals on Tabla : Roopak, EkTaal.
5) One Ghazal / Sufiana Kalam in prescribed Raags with proper Gayaki.
6) Ability to play any one Drut Khayal of your course on harmonium.
7) Tuning of Tanpura.
8) Ability to play Aroh, Avroh and Pakar of the following Raags :
Bahar, Madhuvanti.

1. Dr. Yashpal Sharma : Gayan Kala (Published by Punjabi University,Patiala)
2. Shri Harish Chander Srivastava : Raag Parichaya Part II and III.
3. Sangeet Karyala, Hathras : Hamare Sangeet Ratan
4. Vasant : Sangeet Vishard :Sangeet Karyalaya Hathras.
6. Adduti Gurmat Sangeet Sammeian - 1992 : Simrati Granth, G.G.N Parkashan, Jawaddi Kalan,
Ludhiana.
7. Dr. Devinder Kaur : Sangeet Roop Part III.
8. Dr. Gurnam Singh : Gurmat Sangeet Prabandh Te Paasar , Published by Punjabi University,
Patiala.
9. Dr. Gurnam Singh : Punjabi Sangeetkar, Published by Punjabi University, Patiala.
10. Girish Chanra Shrivastava : Taal Prichey
SEMESTER - V 105
TABLA: HISTORICAL AND THEORATICAL STUDY OF TABLA

Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : In this course the students are taught theoritical aspects of Tabla in which
they are learn about the ancient Tala system with the help of various texts, Students get
knowledge of the Taal ke Dasa Pranas, they also are taught the knoweledge of Uthaan,
Dupalli, Tripalli etc., description of various elements like Tukras, Kayda, Palta, Rela,
Paran and they also understand to compose small Tehaies of Taals. Students learn to write
the various practical compositions according to the notation system.
Note: The candidate can opt Music Vocal or Music Instrumental as an elective subject along with Tabla.
will consist of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and
will carry 16 marks in all.
SECTION - A
1. Historical development of Percussion Instruments.
2. Evolution of Taal.
3. The life sketches and contribution towards music of the following Tabla Exponents:
MianQadarBux, Ahmed Jan Thirkava, Baba Malang Khan.
4. Knowledge of RhythmicInstruments of Punjabi Folk.
SECTION - B
5. Notation of the following material:
(a)Swari Taal: - Udhaan, Peshkar, Qaida – Palta, Tukra, Paran and Rela.
(b)Dhamar Taal – Uthaan, Mukhra, Tukda, Paran, ChakardarParan, FarmaishiParan.
6. Notation of Swari and Dhamar Taal with their Dugun, Tigun, Chaugun and ArhLayakaries.
7. Recognition of following Taals through some bols asked by paper setter:
Ek Taal, Jhap Taal, Deepchandi, Swari and Chautaal.
8. Compose Rela, Qaida, Peshkar and Paran based on the bols set by the paper setter.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Tabla Vadan, Part I Published by Pbi.Uni. : Dr. Jagmohan Sharma

2. Tabla Tarang : B S Nigam
3. Taal Prakash : Sangeet KaryalaHathras
4. Taal Parichya - Part-I, II & III : G.C. Shrivastava
5. Taal Prabhakar Parshnotri : G. C. Shrivastava
6. Taal Maartand : B S Sharma
7. Bhartiya Talon ka Shastriyavivechan : Arun Kumar Sen
8. Bhartiya Sangeet Vadyas : L M Mishra 106
9. Taal Rattan : Sujit Singh
10. Tabla Vadan Part II : Dr. Manmohan Sharma
11. Tabla Vadan Parampara mein Punjab
evam Delhi Gharana : Dr. Priyanka Arora
SEMESTER - V 107
TABLA
Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : The students will develop the ability to play Tabla with Kayda,Paltas,Tihai and
tukras in difficult Taals, to play Nagma with harmonium, ability to play Laggis in selective Taals,
ability to demonstrate taals on hand with layakaries through which these causes to perform well.
Students can gain knowledge through class demonstrations about the “Padhant” while doing the solo
recital.

1. Taal prescribed:Swari Taal and Dhamar Taal.

(a)Swari Taal: - Udhaan, Peshkar, Qaida – Palta, Tukra, Paran and Rela.
(b)Dhamar Taal – Uthaan, Mukhra, Tukda, Paran, ChakardarParan, FarmaishiParan.
2. Knowledge of Accompaniment of Tabla.
3. Practice of playing Nagma on Harmonium in prescribed Taals.
4. Ekgun, Dugun and ChaugunLayakaries of prescribed taal through Padhant by showing Tali and
Khali.
5. Tunning of Tabla.
SEMESTER - VI 108
TABLA
PAPER-A: HISTORICAL AND THEORATICAL STUDY OF TABLA
Max Marks: 50 Lectures to be delivered: 30
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : In this course the students are taught theoritical aspects of Tabla in which
they are learn about the Punjab and Banaras Gharana, they also are taught the knowledge
of Uttari-Dakshini Taal system, description of various elements like Gat, Nagma, Peshkar
and they also understand the accompaniment knowledge of Tabla through which these
causes to perform well.
Note: The candidate can opt Music Vocal or Music Instrumental as an elective subject along with Tabla.
(i) The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four questions
08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16 marks
in all.
SECTION – A
1. Place of Laya and Taal in Environment.
2. Place of Tabla in Music.
3. Comparative Study between Uttari and Dakshini Taal Systems.
4. Principles of Tabla Accompaniment.
SECTION – B
5. Notation of the following:
(a) Ada Chautaal and Ek Taal: Udhaan, Peshkar, Qaida – Palta, Tukra, Paran and Rela.
(b) Jhumra Taal: - Vilambit, Theka in ¼ Layakary.

6. Notation of Tilwada and Tappa Taal with their Dugun, Tigun, Chaugun and ArhLayakaries.
7. Recognition of Taals through some bols asked by paper setter.
8. Compose Rela, Qaida, Peshkar and Paran based on the bols set by the paper setter.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Tabla Vadan, Part I Published by Pbi.Uni. : Dr. Jagmohan Sharma
2. Tabla Tarang : B S Nigam
3. Taal Prakash : Sangeet KaryalaHathras
4. Taal Parichya – Part-I, II & III : G.C. Shrivastava
5. Taal Prabhakar Parshnotri : G. C. Shrivastava
6. Taal Maartand : B S Sharma
7. Bhartiya Talon ka Shastriyavivechan : Arun Kumar Sen
8. Bhartiya Sangeet Vadyas : L M Mishra
9. Taal Rattan : Sujit Singh
10. Tabla Vadan Part II : Dr. Manmohan Sharma
11. Tabla Vadan Parampara mein Punjab
evam Delhi Gharana : Dr. Priyanka Arora
SEMESTER – VI 109
TABLA
PAPER- B : STAGE CUM VIVA
Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
Course Outcome : The students will develop the ability to play Tabla with Kayda,Paltas,Tihai
and tukras in difficult Taals, to play Nagma with harmonium, ability to play Laggis in
selective Taals, ability to demonstrate taals on hand with layakaries through which these
causes to perform well. Students can gain knowledge through class demonstrations about
the “Padhant” while doing the solo recital.

1. Taals prescribed: Ada Chautaal, Ek Taal and Jhumra Taal.
(a) Ada Chautaal and Ek Taal: Udhaan, Peshkar, Qaida – Palta, Tukra, Paran and Rela.
(b) Jhumra Taal: - Vilambit, Theka in 1/4 Layakary.

(c) Teevra Taal:- Paran, CharkradarParan, FarmayashiParan, Gat.
2. Tuning of Tabla.
3. Ekgun, Dugun and ChaugunLayakaries of prescribed Taal through Padhant by showing Tali
and Khaali.
4. Practice of playing Nagma on Harmonium in prescribed Taals.

(SEMESTERV) 110
CULTURAL STUDIES
5 Credits

Course Objectives
This course is intended to provide an understanding of the components and processes of supply chain and
logistics management as well as the performance drivers of supply chain. It is also intended to help the
students to learn about logistics, transportation, warehousing and outsourcing decisions.
CO 1: Student will develop an understanding of the importance of logistics in the formulation of the
business strategy and the conduct of supply chain operations.
CO 2: Develop an in-depth understanding of logistics operating areas and their interrelationship.
CO 3: Strengthen integrative management analytical and problem-solving skills.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER –SETTER
UNIT I shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These questions
shall carry 10+10 =20 marks
UNIT II shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These questions
UNIT III shall cover entire syllabus and shall be of 30 marks. This unit shall comprise ten short answer
questions of 100-200 words each. Each question shall carry 3 marks.
KEY THINKERS ON CULTURE
UNIT I
1. Francis Bacon: 1.“Of Customs and Education” 2. “Of Nature in Men” fromEssayes: Religious
Meditations. Places of Perswasion and Disswasion.
2. J.S.Mill:Chapter I “Introductory” from On Liberty
3. Matthew Arnold: “Culture and Anarchy” from Cultural Theory and Popular Culture: A Reader
edited by John Storey. (3rd edition)
UNIT II
4. F.R.Leavis: “Mass civilization and Minority Culture” from Cultural Theory and Popular Culture: A
Reader edited by John Storey. (3rd edition)
5. Theodor Adorno : “On the Fetish-Character in Music and The Regression of Listening” from The
Cultural Industry: Selected Essays on Mass Culture
Suggested Readings
 Adorno, Theodor. The Cultural Industry: Selected Essays on Mass Culture. Psychology Press, 2001
 Anandmurthy, U.R. Rujuvathu: Selected Essays of U.R. Anandmurthy. Prism Books Private
Limited,2014.
 Arnold, Matthew. Culture and Anarchy. Cornhill magazine, 1869.
 Bacon, Francis. Essayes: Religious Meditations. Places of Perswasion and Disswasion. Westminster
press. 1924.
 During, Simon. The Cultural Studies Reader. Taylor and Francis,2007
 Edgar, Andrew and Peter Sedgwick. Cultural Theory: The Key Thinkers. Routledge: New York, 2001.
 Leavis, F.R. Mass Civilization and Minority Culture. Norwood Editions, 1976.
 Ramanujan,A.K. ed. Dharwadker, Vinay.“Is there an Indian Way of Thinking?”Collected Works of
A.K.Ramanujan. Oxford University Press,1999.
 Mill, J.S. On Liberty. Henry Holt and Company, 1882.
 Storey, John. Cultural Theory and Popular Culture: a Reader. London: Pearson. 2007
(SEMESTERVI) 111
CULTURAL STUDIES
5 Credits
Course Objective
The course will help students develop an understanding of consumer behavior theories and apply this
understanding in a marketing decision making context. It will also develop an awareness of consumer
behavior and students will be able to gain firsthand knowledge of consumer behavior and decision
making.
CO 1: Students will develop in depth knowledge of concepts of consumer behavior.
CO 2: Develop application and professional skills to be applied in field of consumer behavior.
CO 3: Display critical thinking and problem-solving skills.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER –SETTER
UNIT I shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These questions
UNIT II shall have two questions with internal alternative from the prescribed topics. These questions
UNIT III shall cover entire syllabus and shall be of 30 marks. This unit shall comprise ten short answer
questions of 100-200 words each. Each question shall carry 3 marks.
CULTURAL MEMORY
UNIT I
Understanding Cultural Memory and Key Concepts:
1. Local and Embodied Memory, Personal and Collective Memory, Memory Citizenship, Oral History
2. Defining and Differentiating Individual , Social, and Cultural Memory
3. Role of Traditions and Historical Monuments in transmitting Cultural Memory
4. Trauma in transmission of Cultural Memory
5. Cultural Memory and Construction of Identity
UNIT II
Cultural Memory and Case Studies on Sikh and Jews
1. Importance of Ardas in the Sikh Memory
2. Significance of Holocaust in shaping Jewish Identity/ memory
3. Significance of Ghalugharas in shaping Sikh Identity/memory.
Suggested Readings:
 Assman, Jan. “Communicative and Cultural Memory”. Cutural Memory Studies. New York, 2008. 109-
118.
 Epstein, Julia. Shaping Losses: Cultural Memory and the Holocaust. University of Illinois Press,2001.
 Friedländer, Saul. History and Memory: Lessons from the Holocaust. Graduate Institute
Publications,2014.
 Harris, Cecily. “German Memory of the Holocaust: Emergence of Counter Memorials” Penn Libraries,
Vol.17, Issue 2, University of Pennsylvania,2010.
 Nayar, Promod K. An Introduction to Cultural Studies.Viva Publishers, 2016 (Third Edition)
 Rajpura, Ali. Wadda Ghallughara 1762 Shahidee Saka. N.p.
 Rodríguez,Jeanette & Ted Fortier. Cultural Memory Resistance, Faith and Identity. University
112of Texas
Press,2007
 Singh, Gurbhagat and Deepinderjeet Randhawa. The Sikh Memory: Its Distinction and Contribution to
Human kind. Singh Brothers, 2009
 Singh, Jaswinder “Religious and Historical Paradigms of the Sikh Identity (thesis)”, Punjabi University,
2011.
(SEMESTER-V) 113
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION: R: LOCAL GOVERNMENT IN INDIA (WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE
TO PUNJAB)
CREDITS: 5
Course Outcome :
 Acquiring the theoretical knowledge and understanding of the evolution and growth of local
government in India with special reference to 73rd and 74th Constitutional Amendment Acts.
 Gaining insights about composition, role, functions and resources of Panchayati Raj Institutions
and Urban Local Bodies with special reference to Punjab.
 Connecting the role and relationships of rural and urban local democratic decentralized institutions
with other related issues, institutions and their personnel.
 Understanding the structure and working of rural and urban development programmes.

questions carrying 10 marks. Section III will consist of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the entire
syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry 3 marks.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Section I and II of the question paper and the
entire Section III. Candidates are required to answer the short questions in 4-5 lines.
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Acquiring the theoretical knowledge and understanding of the evolution and growth of local
government in India with special reference to 73rd and 74th Constitutional Amendment Acts.
 Gaining insights about composition, role, functions and resources of Panchayati Raj Institutions and
Urban Local Bodies with special reference to Punjab.
 Connecting the role and relationships of rural and urban local democratic decentralized institutions
with other related issues, institutions and their personnel.
 Understanding the structure and working of rural and urban development programmes.
 Pedagogical methods such as class room lectures and students-teacher interactions, group
discussion, quiz, seminar and assignment etc will be used.
ASSESSMENT METHODS
 Summative assessment method comprising of assignment, internal/term examination, regularity in classes
and end semester final examination.
SECTION-I
1. Local Government: Meaning and Significance.
2. Evolution of Local Government in India since 1882.
3. Panchayati Raj: Concept and Significance. The 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act, 1992.
4. Gram Sabha, Gram Panchayat, Panchayat Samiti and Zila Parishad: Composition, Functions,
Sources of Finance.
5. Deputy Commissioner: Appointment, Functions and Role in Local Government.
6. Panchayat Secretary and Block Development & Panchayat Officer(B.D.P.O),
SECTION-II
1. Urbanization- Meaning and Concept; Problems of Urbanization in Punjab.
2. The 74th Constitutional Amendment, 1992.
3. Municipal Council: Structure, Functions, Sources of Finance, President and Executive Officer.
4. Municipal Corporation: Structure, Functions, Sources of Finance, Mayor and Commissioner.
5. State Control over local bodies.
6. State Finance Commission: Composition and Functions.
7. District Planning Committee. 114
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. B.S. Khanna: Rural Developments in South Asia: India, New Delhi, Deep & Deep Publications, 1992.
2. S.R. Maheshwari: Local Government in India, Agra, Lakshmi Narain Aggarwal Educational Publishers,
2020.
3. V.P. Dubey: Urban Development & Administration, New Delhi, Deep & Deep Publications, 1990.
4. Iltija H. Khan: Government in Rural India, Calcutta, Asia Publishing Company, 1971.
5. Mohit Bhattacharya: Management of Urban Government in India, New Delhi, Uppal Book Store, 1976.
6. Sahib Singh & Sawinder Singh: Local Government in India, Jalandhar, Bharat Prakashan, latest ed.
7. K.K. Puri and G.S. Brar: Local Government in India, Jalandhar, Bharat Prakashan, latest ed.
8. Sahib Singh & Sawinder Singh: Public Administration: Development and Local Administration,
Jalandhar,
New Academic Publishers, latest ed.
9. Inderjit Singh Sethi: Local Self Govt. in India (Punjabi), New Delhi, Gold Publishers, 2002.
10. Pardeep Sachdeva: Local Government in India, Chandigarh, Pearson Education India, 2011.
(SEMESTER-VI) 115
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION: DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION IN INDIA
(WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO PUNJAB)
CREDITS: 5
Course Outcome:
 Developing a basic intellectual understanding of development and its approaches.
 Understanding features of developing and developed countries and their comparative study.
 Gaining conceptual and theoretical understanding of development administration including the
planning machinery, public enterprises in post-globalization contexts.
 Gaining familiarity with issues/new perspectives and programmes such as welfare and socialist
state, Public Private Partnership, Inclusive development of weaker and under privileged sections
of the society with special reference to the state of Punjab.
The question paper will consist of three Sections I, II and III. Sections I & II each will consist of four questions
carrying 10 marks. Section III will consist of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus
and will carry 30 marks in all. Each short answer type question will carry 3 marks.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from Section I and II of the question paper and the entire
Section III. Candidates are required to answer the short questions in 4-5 lines.
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Developing a basic intellectual understanding of development and its approaches.
 Understanding features of developing and developed countries and their comparative study.
 Gaining conceptual and theoretical understanding of development administration including the planning
machinery, public enterprises in post-globalization contexts.
 Gaining familiarity with issues/new perspectives and programmes such as welfare and socialist state, Public
Private Partnership, Inclusive development of weaker and under privileged sections of the society with
special reference to the state of Punjab.
ASSESSMENT METHODS
 Summative assessment method comprising of assignment, internal/term examination, regularity in classes
and end semester final examination.
SECTION-I
1. Development Administration: Meaning, Nature, Scope & Significance.
2. Features of Developed & Developing Countries.
3. Comparative Public Administration: Meaning, Nature and Scope.
4. Planning in India: Meaning & Objectives.
5. Planning Machinery: Niti Ayog, National Development Council, and State Planning Board.
SECTION-II
1. Public Enterprise: Meaning& Forms (Department, Public Corporation & Government Company).
2. Parliamentary Control over Public Enterprises.
3. India as a Welfare and Socialist State.
4. Welfare of Scheduled Castes & Backward Classes in Punjab.
5. Central Social Advisory Welfare Board and State Social Welfare Advisory Board of Punjab.
6. Punjab State Women Commission: Composition and Functions.
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. S.S. Khera: Government in Business, New Delhi, National Publishing House, 1977.
2. G.F. Gant: Development Administration: Concepts, Goals and Methods, Madison, University of Wisconsin
Press, 1979.
3. Sahib Singh & Swinder Singh: Public Administration: Development and Local Administration, Jalandhar,
116
New Academic Publishers, 1993.
4. Laxmi Narain: Principles and Practice of Public Enterprise Management, New Delhi, S. Chand Publishing,
2003.
5. R.K. Sapru: Development Administration, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers Private Limited, 2015.
6. Hari Mohan Mathur: Administering Development in the Third World: Constraints and Choices, New Delhi,
Sage Publications, 1986.
7. V.A. Pai Panadikar (ed.): Development Administration in India, New Delhi, McMillan, 1974.
8. S.L. Goel and R.K. Jain: Social Welfare Administration, New Delhi, Deep and Deep Publications, 1988.
9. Anirudh Prasad: Reservation Policy and Practice in India, New Delhi, Deep & Deep Publications, 1991.
10. Fred W. Riggs (ed.): Principles of Development Administration, Durhem, Duke University Press, 1970.
11. Edward W. Weidner: Development Administration in Asia, Durhem, Duke University Press, 1970.
12. K.K. Puri and G.S. Brar: Development Administration, Jalandhar, Bharat Prakashan, latest ed.
13. Govt. of India, Research, Reference & Training Division: India 2001 A Reference Annual, New Delhi,
Publication Division, 2001.
14. K.K. Puri and Inderjit Singh Sethi: Management of Public Enterprises, Publication Bureau, Punjabi
University, Patiala, 1985.
15. O.P. Dwevedi: Development Administration: From Underdevelopment to Sustainable Development,
London, Macmillan Press Ltd., 1994.
16. S.A. Palekar: Development Administration, New Delhi, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
17. S.L. Goel: Development Administration, New Delhi, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
SEMESTER V 117
POLITICAL SCIENCE: COMPARATIVE POLITICAL SYSTEMS (UK AND USA)
Course Outcome:
The course seeks to impart an understanding among students about political regime types in a
comparative framework. Students are expected to earn knowledge about the constitutional structure
and design of state structures and institutions, party structures and their actual working overtime.
The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Section A & B will have four
questions from the respective portion of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist
of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each
short answer type question will carry three marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the Section A & B of the question
paper and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type question
in 70-80 words i.e. in 7-8 lines.
SECTION A
1. Theoretical Framework
(a) Comparative Politics: Meaning, Nature and Scope
(b) Comparative Method
2. U.K.
(a) The British Political Tradition
(b) Sources and Salient Features of British Constitution
(c) Monarchy
(d) Parliamentary Government-Cabinet and The Prime Minister
(e) Parliament Structure and Functions
SECTION B
3. U.S.A.
(a) Features of Constitution and American Bill of Rights
(b) President and Congress
(c) Federal System : Nature and Working
4. U.S.A. and U.K.
(a) Party System in U.S.A. and U.K.
(b) Pressure Groups in U.K. and U.S.A.
(c) Supreme Court in U.S.A. and Rule of Law in U.K.
Recommended Books
1. J.C Johri, Major Modern Political System
2. A.C Kapoor, Selected Constitutions
3. V.N. Khanna, Comparative Study of Government and Politics
4. Vishnu Bhagwan and Vidya Bhushan, World Constitutions
5. K.R. Bombwall, Major Contemporary Constitutional Political System
6. H.S. Deol, AdhunikSarkaran (Punjabi)
7. J.C. Johri, Comparative Politics
8. Mackintosh, The Government and Politics of Britain
9. C.O. Johnson, Government in the United States
10. Herman Finer :Theory and Practice of Modern Government
11. U.R. Ghai, Comparative Politics and Government, New Academic publishing co.
Jalandhar
SEMESTER V 118
POLITICAL SCIENCE: INTERNATIONAL POLITICS: THEORY AND PRACTICE.

Course Outcome:
This course will make students able to understand the basic facts about the world politics. It deals with
the current political debates. It develops critical thinking of students.
Instructions for the Paper Setter/Examiner

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Section A & B will have four
questions from the respective portion of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section C will consist
of 10 short-answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 30 marks in all. Each
short answer type question will carry three marks.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from the Section A & B of the question
paper and the entire Section C. The candidates are required to give answer of each short type question
in 70-80 words i.e. in 7-8 lines.
SECTION A
1. International Politics: Meaning, Nature and Scope
2. Realist and Idealist Approaches to International Politics
3. National Power : Meaning and Its Elements
4. Balance of Power and Collective Security.
SECTION B
5. Cold War and Post Cold war era of International Politics
6. Bipolar, Unipolar and Nature of Emerging World Order
7. Regional Organizations : SAARC and EU
8. United Nations and World Peace
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. H. Bull, The Anarchical Society : A Study of Order in World Politics
2. E.H. Carr, The Twenty-Year Crisis
3. E.H. Carr, Conditions of Peace
4. J. Frankel, The Making of Foreign Policy
5. S.H. Hoffman (ed), Contemporary Theory in International Relations
6. A. Hurell, Collective Security and InternationalOrder
7. H.J. Morgenthau, Politics Among Nations
8. N.D. Palmer and H. Perkins, International Relations
9. A Roberts, The UN and International Security
10. S.P.Verma, International System and the Third World
11. Andrew Heywood ,Global Politics
(SEMESTER-V) 119
COMPUTER SCIENCE: OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING C++
Theory: 50marks
Practical Examination 30
Course Objective
The objective of the course is to understand the basics of object oriented programming and to make
students aware of programming using C++.
CO1: Understand the real world problems and develop their solutions.
CO2: Demonstrate and understanding of algorithm in problem solving process.
CO3: Use the incremental program development to create, test and debug the solution of the
problems.
CO4: Foundation for switching to the higher computer languages.
each from respective unit of the syllabus carrying 8 marks for each question. Section C will have 6-9
short answer type questions carrying total 18 marks, which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
The candidates are required to attempt two questions each from section A, B and the entire section C.
UNIT-I
Introduction to OOP:- Procedure Oriented Programming, OOP Paradigm, Difference between Object
Oriented Programming languages and Procedure Oriented Programming Languages, Characteristics of
Object Oriented Programming Language- Class, Object, Date Abstraction, Encapsulation, Data hiding,
Inheritance, Polymorphism, Code Extensibility and Reusability.
Manipulators & Functions: Input and Output streams, managing output with manipulators. Function
Declaration, Definition and calling Function, Methods of Parameter Passing - Call by Value, Call by
Reference and Call by Address, Recursion, Arrays, Strings and Pointers.
Classes and Objects: Class Specification, Data Members, Member Functions, Private and Public
Members, Declaring Objects, making functions inline, Nesting of member functions, this pointer, Object
as function arguments, Array of Objects, Functions Returning Objects, Static data members and Static
member functions.
Constructors: Definition, Types of Constructor- Default, parameterized and copy Constructor, Dynamic
constructor, Constructor Overloading,
UNIT-II
Destructors: Definition, Virtual Destructor, Dynamic memory allocation using new and delete Operators.
Inheritance: Introduction, Defining Derived Class, Types of Inheritance- Single, Multilevel, Hierarchical,
Multiple and Hybrid Inheritance, Access specifiers - public, private, and protected.
Polymorphism: Methods of achieving polymorphic behaviour, Function Overloading, Operator
Overloading, rules for overloading operators, overloading binary operator, overloading unary operators,
operator overloading using friend function.
Files and streams: Classes for file stream operations, opening and closing of files, reading and writing
text files and binary files.
Suggested Readings: 120
1. Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming with C++, Galgotia.
1. J Marget A. Ellis and Bjarne Stroustrup , The Annotated C++ reference manual, Addison
Wesley New York.
2. E. Balagurusamy, Object Oriented Programming with C++, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Yashavant Kanetkar, Let Us C++, BPB Publications.
(SEMESTER-V)
COMPUTER SCIENCE: SOFTWARE LAB –V
(BASED ON OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING C++)
2 Credits: 4H (P)
Maximum Marks: 30 Maximum Time: 3 hours
Minimum Pass Marks: 35%

i. Viva Voce (External Evaluation) 15 Marks
ii. Lab Record, Program Development and Execution (External Evaluation) 15 Marks
Students are required to develop the following programs

1. To perform arithmetic operations.
2. To convert temperature from Fahrenheit to Celsius.
3. To find simple interest and compound interest.
4. To check whether the given number is even number or odd.
5. To accept three numbers and find the largest among them.
6. To find factorial of a number.
7. To check whether a number is prime or not.
8. To print all the Armstrong numbers between any 2 given limits.
9. To find largest element in an array.
10. To check whether a string is Palindrome or not.
11. To perform matrix addition.
12. To perform matrix multiplication.
13. To swap two numbers using call by value and call by reference method.
14. To find the factorial of a number using Recursion.
15. To create an employee structure and display the same.
16. Using classes and objects write a program to calculate area of rectangle.
17. Create a class student and display record of 5 students using array of objects.
18. Using classes and objects write a program to calculate area of rectangle and triangle using
function overloading.
19. Write a program to calculate the average of n numbers using friend function.
20. Write a program to calculate the area and perimeter of rectangle using constructor
overloading and destructor.
21. Create the Person class. Inherit the class Person to create two classes Teacher and Student
class. Maintain the respective information in the classes and create and display objects of
these two classes.
22. To write and read an object in/from a binary file.
Course Objective 121
The objective of the course is to understand the basics of Computer Networks and Internet Technologies and to
make students aware of the networking and creating websites.
CO1: Describe how communication works in computer networks and to understand the basic terminology of
computer networks, reference models and transmission media.
CO2: Learn basic concepts of internet technologies, browsers and e-mails.
CO3: Understand the basics of HTML, its structuring and creating websites with style sheets.
CO4: Design a media-rich dynamic websites using text, fonts, colors, images, tables, hyperlinks and client side
scripting.
(SEMESTER-VI) 122
COMPUTER SCIENCE: COMPUTER NETWORKS AND INTERNET TECHNOLOGIES
5Credits: 3H (L) + 4H (T)
Time: 3 hours Pass Marks: 35%
Theory: 50 marks Practical Examination 30
Maximum Marks: 100 Internal Assessment: 20 marks
Instructions for the Paper Setter: The question paper will consist of three sections A, B and C.
Section A and B will have four questions each from respective unit of the syllabus carrying 8 marks
for each question. Section C will have 6-9 short answer type questions carrying total 18 marks,
which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly.
Instructions for the candidates: The candidates are required to attempt two questions each from
section A, B and the entire section C.
UNIT-I
Computer Networks: Communication, Mode of communication (simplex, half duplex and full
duplex), Network (definition ,components ,features and its applications),Classification of
networks(LAN,WAN,MAN),Network topologies.
Transmission media: Twisted pair, coaxial cables, fibre optics, radio transmission, microwave
transmission, infrared waves and Line of sight transmission, Cellular radio and communication
Satellites.
Reference Models: Layering Approach, Brief description of OSI & TCP/IP reference Model,
Compare and Contrast OSI and TCP/IP Reference Model.
Internet: Definition, its advantages and disadvantages, Hardware (repeaters, hub, switch, routers,
gateway) & software, internet facilities through WWW, Web Browser/Server, Client/server
architecture.
UNIT-II
Uniform Resource Locator(URL): Types of URL: Absolutes and relative, Domain name system, FTP,
HTTP, SMTP, Telnet, E- Mail: architecture, various aspects, the user agent, message format,
message transfer.
HTML: Introduction to HTML, SGML, Web structure of HTML document, Text formatting, using
lists to organize information, Organizing Data with Tables: Table tag, layout and presentation
Hyper Links and Anchors: Hyper Links, Internal linking and external linking. Images: Adding
Images to web page, using images as links, creating menus with image maps, image formats-GIF,
JPEG etc.
HTML Forms: Forms, Elements: INPUT, BUTTON, SELECT, TEXT AREA, LABEL, FIELDSET and
LEGEND. Form security.
Suggested Readings:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Third Edition, PHI Publications.
2. Corner, Internetworking with TCP-IP: Principles, Protocols and Architecture, Prentice Hall
3. Stephan Mack, Janan Platt, HTML 4.0 No Experience Required, BPB Publication.
4. Rick Darnell et al, HTML 4 Unleashed, Tech media Publications.
(SEMESTER-VI) 123
COMPUTER SCIENCE: SOFTWARE LAB –VI
(BASED ON COMPUTER NETWORKS AND INTERNET TECHNOLOGIES)
2 Credits: 4H (P)
Maximum Marks: 30 Maximum Time: 3 hours
Minimum Pass Marks: 35%
i. Viva Voce (External Evaluation) 15 Marks

ii. Lab Record, Program Development and Execution (External Evaluation) 15 Marks
Students are required to perform the following activities

1. Create a web page to show the structure of HTML using following tags:
a) Text
b) Marquee
c) Character formatting tags such as B, I, U.
2. Create a web page using font Color, font face, font size, background color.
3. Show the use of formatting tags in HTML such as strike, sup, sub etc.
4. Create a web page using lists.
5. Write HTML code to show the use of absolute and relative URL with anchor tag.
6. Create a web page using Image tag
7. Create a web page using Table tag:
a) Rows and Columns
b) Having border, border size, border color
c) Image in a particular cell.
d) Using row span and column span
e) Background Image in a table.
8. Create Admission Form for your college.
9. Create Time table for your department.
(SEMESTER-V) 124
GEOGRAPHY: GEOGRAPHY OF PUNJAB
Maximum Marks: 100 Time Allowed: 3 Hours
Theory: 50 Marks Min. Pass Marks: 35%
Practical :30 Marks
Course Outcome:
I. To introduce students to the basic concepts Geography of Punjab.
II. To make the students aware of the need of protection and conservation of different resources.
III. To crack the competition exams is one motto of teaching.

C will consist of 6 short-answer type questions covering the entire syllabus uniformly and will

(i) Candidates are required to attempt two questions from each section of A and B of the
Question paper and the entire section C is compulsory.
(ii) Candidates are allowed to use their own outline stencil map of Punjab.They are also
allowed to use simple calculators.
SECTION-A
I. Introduction; Location, Evolution of the State and Administrative Divisions (Executive and Police).
II. Physiographic divisions; The Shiwalik Hills, The Kandi Region / Piedmont Plains, The Alluvial upland
Plains and Alluvial upland Plains with Sand dunes.
III. Drainage system; Perennial Rivers and Seasonal rivers.
IV. Climate; Factors effecting climate, Seasons and climatic regions.
V. NaturalVegetation; Factors, types and Distribution
VI. Soil; Types and Distribution.
SECTION-B
I. Population; Distribution and density of Punjab and urbanization.
II. Agriculture; Distribution and Production of Wheat, Rice, Cotton and sugarcane; Green revolution,
Sources of irrigation and Problems of Agriculture
III. Industry; Distribution and problems of major industries: Cotton Textile, Sugar and Hosiery.
IV. Power Resources; Major Hydro and Thermal Energy Resources of Punjab.
V. Means of Transportation; Road (National, State and District Highways), Rail and Air.
VI.Chief characteristics of Majha, Malwa and Doaba Regions.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED 125
1. Census of India (1996) : Punjab Census Atlas, Vol. XIII, No. IX.
2. Deshpande, C.D. (1992) : India: A Regional Interpretation, Northern Book Centre, New
Delhi.
3. Gosal, G.S. and Krishan : Regional Disparities in Levels of Socio-conomic Development in
Gopal (1984) Punjab, Vishal Publishers, Kurukshetra, 1984.
4. Mankoo, Darshan Singh : Geography of Punjab, Kalyani Publication, Ludhiana.(2002)
5. Mavi, H.S. &Tiwana, D.S. : Geography of Punjab, National Book Trust, Delhi(1993)
6. Singh, Pritam (1995) : Punjab Economy: The Emerging Pattern, Enkay Publishers, New
Delhi.
7. Singh, R.L. Ed., (1990) : India: A Regional Geography, National Geographical Society
of India, Reprint
(SEMESTER-V) 126
PRACTICAL GEOGRAPHY: MAP PROJECTIONS
Max. Marks: 30
Min. Pass Marks: 35%
Session-I Morning-Written Paper Time 1½ Hours Marks:15
Session-II Evening- Practical and Viva –Voce Marks:15
Four exercises should be given, out of these; candidate is required to attempt anythree. Each
exercise will carry 5 marks. The paper will be set by the examiner at the centre onthe spot.
SECTION-A
1. General introduction and classification of projections, construction, properties,
limitations and use of projections, general principles of identification and choice of
projections. (3Lectures)
Construction; properties, limitations and uses of following projections:-
2. Cylindricals: Equal Area and Mercators. (3Lectures)
3. Conicals: One Standard Conic, Two Standard Conic, Bonne's Polyconic and
International. (8 Lectures)
SECTION-B
Construction, properties, limitations and Uses of following projections:-
1. Zenithals: Gnomonic, Stereographic, Orthographic, Equidistant and Equal Area (Polar
cases only) (8Lectures)
2. Conventionals : Sinusodial and Molleweide's (normal cases only) (5Lectures)
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Archer, J.E. & Dalton, T.H.: Fieldwork in Geography, E.T. Bastford Ltd., London, 1968.
2. Hudson,F.S. :A Geography of Settlements, MacDonald, London, 1970.
3. Jones, P.A.: Fieldwork in Geography, Longman, London, 1968.
4. Kellaway, George P.: Map Projections, Methuen and Co., London.
5. Singh, Gopal: Map work and Practical Geography, Surjeet Book Depot, Delhi, 1993.
6. Singh, L.R. and Singh, Raghunandan: Map work and Practical Geography, Central Book
Depot, Allahabad, 1993, Reprint.
7. Steers, J.A.: Map Projections, University of London Press, London.
8. Singh, R.L: Elements of Practical Geography, Kalyani Publishers, 2005.
(SEMESTER-VI) 127
GEOGRAPHY: GEOGRAPHY OF INDIA
Time Allowed: 3 hours Maximum Marks: 100
Written Paper: 50 Marks Pass Marks: 35%
Practical: 30 Marks
Course Objectives
1. Knowledge about basic geographical Personality of India.
2. Understand the variability of Physiographic, climate in India.
3. Study of problems of soil erosion and their conservation methods.
4. Acquire knowledge of forests in India.
5. Get knowledge about problem and prospect about agriculture and trade.
6. Aware the student about need of conservation and Protection of natural resources.
7. To prepare the students for competitive exams.

The question paper will consist of three sections: A, B and C. Section A and B will have four questions
each from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 8 marks each. Section C will consist of 6
short-answer type questions covering the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 18 marks in all. Each
short-answer type question carries 3 marks.

(i) Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from sections A and B of the question paper
and the entire section C is compulsory.
(ii) Candidates are allowed to use their own outline stencil maps of the world/continents/countries.
They are also allowed to use simple calculators.
SECTION -A
1. Introduction: Location, Boundaries of India, Land of diversity,. Unity in diversity and
Political Division.
2. Physiography: Physical divisions of India, Origin and importance of Himalayas,
3. Drainage: Himalayan and Peninsular Rivers
4. Climate: Factors influencing climate of India, Seasons , Mechanism of Monsoon
5. Soils: Types and Distribution
6. Natural Vegetation: Types and Distribution
SECTION-B
1. Population: Distribution and density of India and urbanization.
2. Agriculture: Distribution and Production of Wheat, Rice, Cotton and sugarcane; Green
revolution, Sources of irrigation and Problems of Agriculture
3. Industry: Distribution and problems of major industries: Iron & Steel, Cotton Textile and
Sugar.
4. Minerals: Types, Distribution and production of Iron Ore, Copper and Gold.
5. Power Resources: Types, Distribution and production of Coal and Petroleum.
6. Means of Transportation; Road (National, State and District), Rail and Air
Suggested Readings
1. Chawla, I.N. : Bhautik Bhoogol (in Punjabi), Bharat Prakashan Jalandhar, 2015.
2. Singh, Malkit : Bhautik Bhoogol (in Punjabi) Rasmeet Prakashan Jalandhar,2015. 128
3. Dyal, P. : A Text Book of Geomorphology,Shukla Book Depot, Patna,.1995.
4. Kaur, Dhian : The Earth, Edited by R.C. Chandna, Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana, Delhi, 2000.
5. Khan, Nizamuddin : An Introduction to Physical Geography, Concept, New Delhi, 2001.
6. Mamoria, C.P. : Bhautic Bhoogol Ke Tatw (In Hindi), Agra 1976.Niati, J.L.
7. Monkhouse, F.J. : Principles of Physical Geography, Longman, New Delhi, Latest Edition.
8. R.N. Tikha : Physical Geography, New Academic Publishing Co., Jalandhar.
9. Singh, Savindera : Physical Geography, Gynodya Prakashan, Gorakhpur, 1994.
10. Sparks, B.W. : Geomorphology, Longman, London, 1986.
11. Thornbury, W.D. : Principles of Geomorphology, Second Edition, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi, 1993
(SEMESTER-VI) 129
PRACTICAL GEOGRAPHY: FIELD METHODS IN GEOGRAPHY
Max. Marks: 30 (Theory Paper 15 Marks, Practical and viva-voce 15 Marks)

Min. Pass Marks: 35%
Session-I Morning-Written Paper Time 1½ Hours Marks: 15
Session-II Evening- Practical and Viva –Voce Marks: 15
Four exercises should be given, out of these; candidate is required to attempt any three. Each exercise
will carry 5 marks. The paper will be set by the examiner at the centre on the spot.
SECTION-A
Field Work:
(Theory)
1. Nature, Scope, Objectives and Significance of Field methods in Geography.
2. Role of Field Work in Geography.
3. Scale of study and Field work Methodology.
4. Field study of a: Farm, Village and Market.
SECTION-B
5. Type of Data in Geography: Primary and Secondary.
6. Methods of Collecting Primary Data:Mailed Questionnaire, Observation and interview.
Field Work:
(Practical) A Field Report or Project Report of 10 to 15 written pages will be prepared
based on Primary data : Socio-economic Characteristics of a: Farm,Village and Market.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Archer, J.E. & Dalton, T.H.: Fieldwork in Geography, E.T. Bastford Ltd., London, 1968.
2. Hudson,F.S. :A Geography of Settlements, MacDonald, London, 1970.
3. Jones, P.A.: Fieldwork in Geography, Longman, London, 1968.
4. Kellaway, George P.: Map Projections, Methuen and Co., London.
5. Singh, Gopal: Map work and Practical Geography, Surjeet Book Depot, Delhi, 1993.
6. Singh, L.R. and Singh, Raghunandan: Map work and Practical Geography, Central Book
Depot, Allahabad, 1993, Reprint.
7. Steers, J.A.: Map Projections, University of London Press, London.
8. Singh, R.L: Elements of Practical Geography, Kalyani Publishers, 2005.
SEMESTER V 130
THEATRE STUDIES
Maximum Marks: 100 Theory : 42 Marks
Pass Marks : 35% Internal Assessment : 18 Marks
Lectures to be delivered : 55 Practical : 40 Marks
Time Allowed : 3 Hours
 Proscenium theatre, open air theatre, street theatre.
 Learn opera,balley, kaav natak and development of punjabi rangmanch.
 Tere mere lekh, Jeevan manch,chakerview te piramid, nrit natak.
 Learn radio and tv natak. Feature film,lagu film,docomentery,doco drama.
 Rangmanch, radio,tv and cinema inter relationships.
 Plays like actress,Lok mana da raja ,Loon di guddi.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PAPER-SETTER

The question paper will consist of three Sections A, B & C. The paper setter is required to set nine
questions in all. Section A & B will have four questions out of which candidate will attempt two questions
from each section. Section A and B carry 24 Marks and each question will have 6 marks. Section C will
consist of 9 short questions which are compulsory to attempt and Section C will carry 18 marks. Each
short question will carry 2 marks.
Candidates are required to attempt total five questions. Selecting two questions each from
Section A & B. Section C is compulsory which will contain short answers.
THEORY
SECTION – A
1. wzu dhnK fe;wK
(gq';hBhnw EhJ/No, n?ohBk, EoZ;N)
2. BkNe dh fe;wK
(T[g/ok, p?b/, ekft BkNe, B[ZeV BkNe, pj[ftXkJh BkNe)
3. gzikph ozrwzu dk ftek;ô[\
SECTION – B
1. s/o/ w/o/ b/y (T[g/ok) Phbk GkNhnk
2. ihtB wzu (B[ZeV BkNe) ^ ;HBH ;/te
3. uZeoftT{ s/ fgokfwv (ekft^gqrhs^fBqs^BkNe) ^ oftzdo oth
PRACTICAL
1. Enactment of Characters from the plays prescribed for study.
2. Making of Sets and Properties with drawings and different raw materials.
3. Enactment of a Scene from a play
4. Expressing various emotions
5. Using a hand property as different objects
6. Attendance will stand for 10 Marks and marks will be given according to the rules of the
University.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Essential Theatre,Oscar G. Brockett, Holt Rinehart and Winston, New York, 1988
2. John Willett (Edited & Translated), Brecht on Theatre, Methuen, London, 1964
3. Punjabi Natak Da Itihas, Satish Kumar Verma, Punjabi Academy, Delhi, 2005
4. Natak Kala, Surjit Singh Sethi, Lokgeet Parkashan, Chandigarh, 2005
5. Rangkarmi Di TeesariAkh, KewalDhaliwal, Ravi Sahit Parkashan, Amritsar, 2006 131
6. SirjnatmikNatik – Nirdeshan, Dr.Surjit Singh Sethi, Publication Bureau, Punjabi University, Patiala, 1985
7. The Anatomy of Drama, Marjorie Boulton, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi, 1985
8. ;shP e[wko towk, gzikph ozrwzu dh G{fwek, fPbkb/y, fdZbh
9. feogkb eIke, ozrwzu fuzsB, ro/Phn; p[e;, gfNnkbk, 2016
10. pbihs e"o ihs, gzikph ozrwzu L gozgok s/ ;wekb (b'e ebktK d/ ;zdoG ftu) u/sBk gqekPB, b[fXnkDk, 2013
11. ;shP e[wko towk s/ Btdhg e"o, gzikph BkNe s/ Bkoh BkNeeko, fPbkb/y, fdZbh, 2015
12. ;shP e[wko towk (;zgkH), Phbk GkNhnk d/ T[g/o/, gzikph nekdwh, fdZbh, 2016
13. e/tb Xkbhtkb (;zgkH) PhjDhnK dk ozrwzu, gzikp ;zrhs BkNe nekdwh, uzvhrVQ, 2017
14. e/tb Xkbhtkb (;zgkH) fJgNk bfjo dh gzikp ftu d;se, gzikp ;zrhs BkNe nekdwh, uzvhrVQ, 2015
15. SIlw BwtIAw dy aupyry, sMpwdk fw. sqIS kumwr vrmw, iSLwlyK id`lI
SEMESTER VI 132
THEATRE STUDIES
Maximum Marks: 100 Theory : 42 Marks
Pass Marks : 35% Internal Assessment : 18 Marks
Lectures to be delivered : 55 Practical : 40 Marks
Time Allowed : 3 Hours
 Proscenium theatre, open air theatre, street theatre.
 Learn opera,balley, kaav natak and development of punjabi rangmanch.
 Tere mere lekh, Jeevan manch,chakerview te piramid, nrit natak.
 Learn radio and tv natak. Feature film,lagu film,docomentery,doco drama.
 Rangmanch, radio,tv and cinema inter relationships.
 Plays like actress,Lok mana da raja ,Loon di guddi.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PAPER-SETTER

The question paper will consist of three Sections A, B & C. The paper setter is required to set nine
questions in all. Section A & B will have four questions out of which candidate will attempt two questions
from each section. Section A and B carry 24 Marks and each question will have 6 marks. Section C will
consist of 9 short questions which are compulsory to attempt and Section C will carry 18 marks. Each
short question will carry 2 marks.
Candidates are required to attempt total five questions. Selecting two questions each from
Section A & B. Section C is compulsory which will contain short answers.
THEORY
SECTION – A
1. ozrwzu, o/vhU BkNe, Nhth BkNe ns/ f;B/wk dh gSkD

2H f;B/wk dh ftXk
(chuo f|bw, bx{ f|bw, vke{w?ANoh, v"e{ vokwk nkfd d/ gq;zr ftu)
3H ozrwzu, o/vhU, Nhth s/ f;B/wk L nzso^;zpzX
SECTION – B
1. n?eNo; (Nhth BkN^;zrqfj ) pbtzs rkorh
2H b'e wBK dk okik (pj[ftXkJh BkNe) ;shP e[wko towk
3H b{D dh r[Zvh (BkN^;zrqfj) e/tb Xkbhtkb
PRACTICAL
1. Practical Understanding of Composition, Grand Rehearsal and Stage Performance through a
Scene Work Exercise.
2. Creating a Scene through Improvisation.
3. Enactment of Characters
4. Writing projects on given topics.
5. Attendance will stand for 10 Marks and marks will be given according to the rules of the
University.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Essential Theatre, Oscar G. Brockett, Holt Rinehart and Winston, New York, 1988
2. Natak Kala, Surjit Singh Sethi, Lokgeet Parkashan, Chandigarh, 2005
3. Punjabi Natak Da Itihas, Satish Kumar Verma, Punjabi Academy, Delhi, 2005
4. Rangkarmi Di TeesariAkh, Kewal Dhaliwal, Ravi SahitParkashan, Amritsar, 2006
5. Rishtian Da Ki RakhiyeNaam, Atamjit, Jaideep Parkashan, Amritsar, 1991 133
6. Sirjnatmik Natik –Nirdeshan, Dr.Surjit Singh Sethi, Publication Bureau, Punjabi University,
Patiala, 1985
7. The Anatomy of Drama, Marjorie Boulton, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi, 1985
8. d/ftzdo e[wko, ozrwzu, o/vhU ns/ Nhth L f;XKs s/ ftjko, fPbkb/y, fdZbh, 2015
9. ;shP e[wko towk s/ T[wk ;/mh (;zgkH), BkN^f;XKs, gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh, gfNnkbk, 2017
10. ot/b f;zx, pbtzs rkorh (w'B'rqk|) ;kfjs nekd/wh, 2015
11. ot/b f;zx, pbtzs rkorh dhnK BkNî[rsK, u/sBk gqekPB, b[fXnkDk, 2011
12. ;shP e[wko towk, pbtzs rkorh (w'B'rqk|) gzikph :{Bhtof;Nh, gfNnkbk, 2017
SEMESTER - V 134
GURMAT SANGEET
PAPER-A: HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL STUDY OF GURMAT SANGEET

Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO5 (Paper-A Historical and Theoretical Study Of Gurmat Sangeet)
The Students will have a complete knowledge of the technical terminology like Sur Lagav, Grah, Ansh,
Nyas-Apneyas, Rag Ang, Nibadh-Anibadh gayan, Gaurhi Raga Prakar, Ashtpadee,Relaa etc, The
contribution of Guru Harkrishan ji and Guru Teg Bahadur ji in the development of Gurmat Sangeet
Tradition.
The question paper will consist of three sections : A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four
consist of 08 objective type questions which will cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 16
marks in all.
While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter the syllabus prescribed for Stage Performance Paper
should also be sent.
is compulsory.
SECTION - A
1. Technical Terminology: Sur Lagaav, Grah, Ansh, Nyaas-Apneyaas, Raag Ang, Nibadh-
Anibadh Gayan, Gaurhi Raag Prakaar, Rabaabi, Ashatpadee, Relaa, Uthaan,
Mukhraa,Chakardaar.
2. Contribution of Guru Harkrishan ji, Guru Teg Bahadur ji in the development of Gurmat
Sangeet tradition.
3. Rut-Kaleen Keertan Chauki of Gurmat Sangeet.
4. Keertan Kendras of Guru Period.
SECTION - B
5. Detailed description of the prescribed Raags with notation:
Basant, Malhaar, Maajh, Devgandhari, Kanrhaa.
6. Detailed description with notation in Ekgun and Dugun of prescribed talas:
Panjtaal Di Swaree, Birtaal.
(a) Sri Guru Granth Sahib (b) Raags of Sri Guru Granth Sahib
135
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
1. Dr. Gurnam Singh, Sri Guru Granth Sahib Raag Ratnakar, Shiromani Gurdwara Prabandhak
6. Dr. Gurnam Singh (Editor-in-Chief), Gurmat Sangeet Terminology, Punjabi University,
Patiala.
SEMESTER – V 136
GURMAT SANGEET
PAPER- B: (STAGE CUM VIVA)

Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO5 (Paper-B Stage Performance)
Students learn one Shabad in Gurbani ragas Ragas like Basant, Malhar, Maajh, Devgandhari, Kanrhaa etc.
The Channts of Asa Di Vaar starting from 17th to 20th and Ruk Kaleen Kirtan Chownki in Raga Basant,
Theka of various Talas like Panjtaal Di swaree, Birtal etc.


 Harmonium may also be allowed as an accompaniment. Weightage will be given to the students
 It is mandatory to have knowledge of Raags of previous semesters
1. One Shabad composition in each of the following Raags: Basant, Malhaar, Maajh,
Devgandhari, Kanrhaa.
2. Keertan of 17th to 20th Chhants of Asaa Di Vaar.
3. Rut-Kaleen Keertan Chouki in Raag Basant.
4. One Parhtaal in Raag Malhaar.
5. Performance of Thheka of following talas on Tabla and by Hast Vidhi with ekgun, dugun
Layakaries - Panjtaal Di Swaree, Birtaal.
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
Patiala.
SEMESTER - VI 137
GURMAT SANGEET
PAPER-A: HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL STUDY OF GURMAT SANGEET
Total Credits: 02
1 Credit= 1 Hour.
CO6 (Paper-A Historical and Theoretical Study Of Gurmat Sangeet)
The Students will have a complete knowledge of the technical terminology like Bol Alap- Bol-Taan,
Shudha Raga, Chhayalag Raga, Sankeeran Raga, Graam, Moorchhana, Gat, Paran, Jorhi-Vadan, Peshkar,
Partal, Kirtan Chouki etc. The role of Taksaal tradition for the promotion of Gurmat Sangeet Tradition.

The question paper will consist of three sections : A, B, & C. Section A & B will have four questio
from the respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 05 marks each. Section C will consist of 08 object
While sending the syllabus to Paper Setter the syllabus prescribed for Stage Performance Paper shoul
also be sent.
compulsory.
SECTION - A
1. Technical Terminology: Gammak, Bol-Aalap, Bol-Taan, Shudh Raag, Chhayalag Raag,
Sankeeran Raag, Graam, Moorchhana. Gat (Taal Saaz Vadan), Paran, Jorhi-Vadan, Peshkaar,
Parhtaal, Keertan Chouki.
2. Contribution of Guru Gobind Singh ji in the development of Gurmat Sangeet tradition.
3. Role of Taksaal Tradition for the promotion of Gurmat Sangeet.
4. Keertankars of Guru's Period.
SECTION - B
5. Detailed description of the prescribed Raags with notation:
Maaru, Jaijawanti, Bairaarii, Maligaura, Natnarayan, Tilang.
6. Detailed description with notation in Ekgun and Dugun of prescribed talas:
Amartaal, Kharragtaal, Tilwara, Jhoomra.
a) Concept of Rahaao in Gurmat Sangeet
b) Singing styles of Gurmat Sangeet
138
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
6. Dr. Gurnam Singh (Editor-in-Chief), Gurmat Sangeet Terminology, Punjabi University, Patiala.
SEMESTER - VI 139
GURMAT SANGEET
PAPER- B: (STAGE CUM VIVA)
Total Credits:03
1 Credit= 1 Hour
CO5 (Paper-B Stage Performance)
Students learn one Shabad in Gurbani ragas Ragas like Maaru, Jai Jawanti, Bairaari , Mali Gaudri, Nat
Narayan, Tilang, Akal Chalana di Kirtan Chownki Asa Di Vaar di Chownki from 21th to 24th Theka of
various Talas Amar Tala, Tilwara, Jhoomra etc.
Harmonium is allowed as an accompaniment. Preference will be given to be students reciting
Shabad Keertan along with string instruments of Gurmat Sangeet.
(i) Harmonium may also be allowed as an accompaniment. Weightage will be given to the students
(ii) It is mandatory to have knowledge of Raags of previous semesters.
1. Introduction of Raags prescribed in the syllabus:
Maaru, Jaijawanti, Bairaari, Maligaura, Natnarayan, Tilang.
2. Keertan of 21st to 24th Chhants of Asaa Di Vaar.
3. Akaal Chalane Di Keertan Chouki
4. Performance of Thheka of following talas on Tabla and by Hast Vidhi with ekgun, dugun
Layakaries - Amartaal, Kharragtaal, Tilwara, Jhoomra.
BOOKS PRESCRIBED
Patiala.
FASHION DESIGNING 140
SEMESTER V
Marks week
Theory Fundamentals 3 42 18 60 3 3
of Pattern
Making
Sketching &
Surface
Ornamentation
Total 100 5 7
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments / Project-work etc.,(40%)
and two mid semester tests/internal examinations* (40%).
SEMESTER VI
Marks week
Theory Introduction 3 42 18 60 3 3
to Fashion
Industry
Practical Garment 3 40 - 40 2 4
Construction
Total 100 5 7
Note: Internal Assessment will be based on attendance (20%), Written Assignments/ Project-work etc., (40%)
and two mid semester tests/internal examinations* (40%).
SEMESTER V 141
FASHION DESIGNING: FUNDAMENTALS OF PATTERN MAKING
MAX MARKS: 60 TIME ALLOWED: 3 HRS


The question paper will consist of 3 sections: A, B and C. Sections A & B will have 4 questions from the
perspective sections of the syllabus and will carry 6 marks each. Section C will consist of 9 short
answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire section C.
Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from section A & B of the question paper and
the entire section C.
SECTION: A
1. Basic Terminology: Bias, Centre front, Fray, Grain, Layout, Miter, Nap, Notch, Princess line,
Pucker, Seam Allowance, Seam line, Sizing, Staystitch, Trim.
2. Introduction to Paper pattern making
3. Tools of pattern making
4. Methods of pattern making
SECTION-B
5. Principles of Patterns Making
6. Advantages & disadvantages of Pattern making
7. Precautions while making patterns
8. Pattern layout, marking and cutting
Suggested Readings
1. Basic Process and Clothing Construction” By Shree Doongaji and Roshani Desh Pande, Publisher
Unique Education Books, Raj Parkashan, New Delhi.
2. “Garment Construction Skills” By Mullick Premlata.
3. Cream, Penelope., The Complete Book of Sewing - A Practical Step by Step Guide to Sewing
Techniques, ADK Publishing Book, New York 1996.
4. Thomas, Anna. Jacob., The Art of Sewing, UBSPD Publishers Distributors Ltd., New Delhi
5. A Readers Digest., Step by Step guide to Sewing & Knitting, Readers Digest, 1993
6. Kallal, Mary Jo., Clothing Construction, Mc Millan Publishing Company, New York
7. “Text book of clothing and textile” by Sushma Gupta and Neeru Garg, publisher Kalyani
SEMESTER V 142
FASHION DESIGNING: FASHION SKETCHING & SURFACE ORNAMENTATION
(PRACTICAL PAPER)
PASS MARKS: 35%
1. Designing and Sketching -

Evening gowns
Beach wear
2. Sketching of facial features: Eyes, Ear, Nose and Hairstyles
3. Samples of Tie & Dye , Block Printing & Stencil Printing
Suggested Readings
1. Fashion Drawing–the Basic Principles by Anne Allen & Julian Seaman-B.T. Batsford,London 1994.
2. Fashion Design Drawing & Presentation by Patrick John Ireland, 4th Edition, New Delhi, Om,
2005.
3. Fashion Design Illustration Children by Patrick John Ireland- London, B.T. Batsford,1995.
4. Bride M Whelan, “Color Harmony”, Rockfort Publishers, 1992.
5. Elizabeth Drudi, T Pack, “Figure Drawing for Fashion”, The Pepin Press.
6. Drake and Nicholas, “Fashion Illustration”, Thames and Hudson, London, 1994.
7. Abling Bina, Fashion Sketch Book.
SEMESTER VI 143
FASHION DESIGNING: INTRODUCTION TO FASHION INDUSTRY


The question paper will consist of 3 sections: A, B and C. Sections A & B will have 4 questions from the
perspective sections of the syllabus and will carry 6 marks each. Section C will consist of 9 short
answer type questions of 2 marks each which will cover the entire section C.

Candidates are required to attempt two questions each from section A & B of the question paper and
the entire section C.
SECTION-A
1. Terminologies of Fashion: Fad, Style, Change, Acceptance, Taste, Classic, Design, Trend, Mass
fashion, Houte couture, Pret-a-porter, Silhouette, Knockoffs
2. Introduction to fashion: Definition and Characteristics
3. Fashion Cycle
4. Principles of Fashion
SECTION-B
1. Factors affecting Fashion

2. Promotion of Fashion: Advertising, Publicity, Fashion Shows
3. Fashion leaders- fashion innovators and fashion role models
4. National and International Fashion Designers
References:
 Frings, Gini Stephens, Fashion Concept to consumer, Prentice Hall career & Technology
 Heike Jenss, Fashion Studies
 Calaribetta, E.M., Dictionary of Fashion
SEMESTER VI 144
FASHION DESIGNING: GARMENT CONSTRUCTION (PRACTICAL)

PASS MARKS: 35%
1.Designing and construction work -

Children's garments:
Gathered and party wear frock,
2. Teenager's garments:
Nighty / Night suit,
Any Designer Suit
Suggested Readings
1. Basic Process and Clothing Construction” By Shree Doongaji and Roshani Desh Pande, Publisher
Unique Education Books, Raj Parkashan, New Delhi.
2. “Garment Construction Skills” By Mullick Premlata.
3. Cream, Penelope., The Complete Book of Sewing - A Practical Step by Step Guide to Sewing
Techniques, ADK Publishing Book, New York 1996
4. Thomas, Anna. Jacob., The Art of Sewing, UBSPD Publishers Distributors Ltd., New Delhi
5. A Readers Digest., Step by Step guide to Sewing & Knitting, Readers Digest, 1993
6. Kallal, Mary Jo., Clothing Construction, Mc Millan Publishing Company, New York

B.A. Part I, II and III 49663-2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.A. Part I, II and III 49663-2021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.A. Part I, II and III 49663-2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ORDINANCES

General Shivdev Singh Diwan Gurbachan Singh

KHALSA COLLEGE PATIALA

ORDINANCES FOR BACHELOR OF ARTS

5.10 Grading System:

Grade Assignment Table

Range of Marks Description Grade Grade Point

5.11 Computation of SGPA and CGPA

i. Computation of SGPA and CGPA

Course Credits Grade Grade Credit Point

5.13 Grade Card:

7. Attendance Regulations & Condonation:

Nov./Dec. (Odd) Sept. 30 Oct.15 Oct. 21 Oct. 31 Nov. 10*

April/May(Even) Feb. 28 March 15 March 21 March 31 April 15*

2. PUNJABI COMPULSORY (MUDLA GYAN/ELEMENTARY PUNJABI) 5-8

3. ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS 9-12

4. FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH 13-15

5. PUNJABI ELECTIVE/LITERATURE 16-18

6. ENGLISH ELECTIVE/LITERATURE 19-22

8. DEFENCE AND STRATEGIC STUDIES 27-33

10. FINE ARTS 36-42

11. FOLK ART AND CULTURE 43-46

12. SOCIOLOGY 47-48

13. RELIGIOUS STUDIES 49-50

14. HISTORY 51-54

15. MATHEMATICS 55-58

16. RETAIL MANAGEMENT 59-61

17. PSYCHOLOGY 62-65

18. HOME SCIENCE 66-71

19. PHYSICAL EDUCATION 72-76

20. MUSIC (INSTRUMENTAL) 77-84

21. MUSIC (VOCAL) 85-89

22. TABLA 90-93

23. CULTURAL STUDIES 94-95

24. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 96-99

25. POLITICAL SCIENCE 100-101

26. COMPUTER SCIENCE 102-107

27. GEOGRAPHY 108-112

28. THEATRE STUDIES 113-115

29. GURMAT SANGEET 116-120

30. FASHION DESIGNING 121-125

31. DRUG ABUSE: PROBLEM, MANAGEMENT AND PREVENTION 126-127

islybs Aqy pwT pusqk

islybs Aqy pwT pusqk

AMdrUnI mulWkx 30 AMk

shwiek pusqk sUcI

INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 30 marks

Note: A Scrap Book to be made by the student on the given topics.

dkslZ vkÅVde ¼ikB~;Øe miyfC/k½

fo|kfFkZ;ksa vkSj ijh{kdksa ds fy, vko';d funsZ'k

vkarfjd ewY;kadu ds dqy 30 vadksa dk foHkktu fuEu çdkj ls gS&

Defence and Strategic Studies

acquired basic competency in strategic affairs covering a wide spectrum of interstate

security to global security issues including non-kinetic dimensions.

contemporary issues of strategic relevance.

Thinking Skills) in Defence and Strategic Studies.

course in honours or identifying a career for himself or herself.

PAPER-II: INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS- DEFENCE ASPECTS

IV. COLD WAR